Iec 62368-1-2018 [PDF]

Citation preview

I EC



■EC 62368-1 Edition 3.0



2018-10



INTERNATIONAL STANDARD NORME INTERNATIONALE



Audio/video, information and communication technology equipmentPart 1: Safety requirements 白quipements



des technologies de I’audio/video, de ^information et de la communication Partie 1: Exigences de securite



)ov 5 ( ue



co



H-89 s o



CNI



IE C 6 0 5 2 9 ,



Degrees o f protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)



Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 ,



Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 3: Use of coating, potting or moulding for protection against pollution IE C 6 0 6 6 4 -3 ,



Thermal-links - Requirements and application guide



IE C 6 0 6 9 1 :2 0 1 5 ,



Fire hazard testing - Part 2-11: Glowing/hot-wire based test methods Glow-wire flammability test method for end-products (GWEPT)



IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 2 - 1 1 ,



IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 0 - 2 ,



Fire hazard testing - Part 10-2: Abnormal heat - Ball pressure test method



IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 0 - 3 ,



Fire hazard testing -



Part 10-3: Abnormal heat -



Mould stress relief



distortion test Fire hazard testing - Part 11-5: Test flames - Needle-flame test method - Apparatus, confirmatory test arrangement and guidance IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 :2 0 1 6 ,



Fire hazard testing - Part 11-10: Test flames - 50 W horizontal and vertical flame test methods IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 1 0 ,



IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 2 0 :2 0 1 5 ,



Fire hazard testing - Part 11-20: Test flames - 500 W flame test



methods Fire hazard testing - Part 11-21: Test flames - 500 W vertical flame test method for tubular polymeric materials IE C T S 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 2 1 ,



Cable networks for television signals, sound signals and interactive services - Part 11: Safety IE C 6 0 7 2 8 - 1 1 :2 0 1 6 ,



IE C 6 0 7 3 0 (a ll p a r t s ) ,



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



Automatic electrical controls for household and similar use



旧C IE C 6 0 7 3 0 - 1 :2 0 1 3 ,



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Automatic electrical controls - Part 1: General requirements



Thermistors - Directly heated positive temperature coefficient - Part 1: Generic specification



IE C 6 0 7 3 8 -1 :2 0 0 6 ,



Semiconductor devices - Discrete devices - Part devices - Photocouplers IE C 6 0 7 4 7 -5 -5 :2 0 0 7 ,



5 -5 ;



Optoelectronic



IE C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 :2 0 0 7 /A M D 1 :2 0 1 5



IE C 6 0 8 2 5 -1 ,



Safety of laser products - Part 1: Equipment classification and requirements



IE C 6 0 8 2 5 -2 ,



Safety of laser products - Part 2: Safety of optical fibre communication systems



(OFCS) Safety of laser products - Part 12: Safety of free space optical communication systems used for transmission of information IE C 6 0 8 2 5 -1 2 ,



IE C 6 0 8 3 6 ,



Specifications for unused silicone insulating liquids for electrotechnical purposes



IE C 6 0 8 5 1 - 3 :2 0 0 9 ,



Winding wires - Test methods - Part 3: Mechanical properties



IE C 6 0 8 5 1 - 3 :2 0 0 9 /A M D 1 :2 0 1 3



IE C 6 0 8 5 1 - 5 :2 0 0 8 ,



Winding wires - Test methods - Part 5: Electrical properties



IE C 6 0 8 5 1 - 5 :2 0 0 8 /A M D 1 :2 0 1 1



Plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes - Part 1: General



IE C 6 0 8 8 4 -1 ,



requirements Stationary lead-acid batteries - Part 11: Vented types - General requirements and methods of tests IE C 6 0 8 9 6 - 1 1 ,



IE C 6 0 8 9 6 - 2 1 :2 0 0 4 ,



Stationary lead-acid batteries - Part 21: Valve regulated types - Methods



of test IE C 6 0 8 9 6 -2 2 ,



Stationary lead-acid batteries - Part 22: Valve regulated types - Requirements



IEC system of plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes Part 1: Plugs and socket-outlets 16 A 250 V AC IE C 6 0 9 0 6 -1 ,



IEC system of plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes Part 2: Plugs and socket-outlets 15 A 125 V AC IE C 6 0 9 0 6 -2 ,



IE C 6 0 9 4 7 -1 ,



Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 1: General rules



Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 5 - 5 : Control circuit devices and switching elements - Electrical emergency stop device with mechanical latching function IE C 6 0 9 4 7 -5 -5 ,



IE C 6 0 9 5 0 -1 ,



Information technology equipment - Safety - Part 1: General requirements



IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6 ,



Methods of measurement of touch current and protective conductor current



Connecting devices for low-voltage circuits for household and similar purposes - Part 1: General requirements IE C 6 0 9 9 8 -1 ,



Copyright Inlernational Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Connecting devices - Electrical copper conductors - Safety requirements for screw-type and screwless-type clamping units - Part 1: General requirements and particular requirements for clamping units for conductors from 0,2 mm2 up to 35 mm2 (included) IE C 6 0 9 9 9 -1 ,



Connecting devices - Electrical copper conductors - Safety requirements for screw-type and screwless-type clamping units - Part 2: Particular requirements for clamping units for conductors above 35 mm2 up to 300 mm2 (included) IE C 6 0 9 9 9 -2 ,



IE C 6 1 0 3 9 ,



Classification of insulating liquids



IE C 6 1 0 5 1 -1 ,



Varistors for use in electronic equipment - Part 1: Generic specification



Varistors for use in electronic equipment - Part 2: Sectional specification for surge suppression varistors IE C 6 1 0 5 1 -2 :1 9 9 1 ,



IE C 6 1 0 5 1 - 2 :1 9 9 1 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 9



General purpose lead-acid batteries (valve-regulated types) - Part 1: General requirements, functional characteristics - Methods of test IE C 6 1 0 5 6 -1 ,



General purpose lead-acid batteries Dimensions, terminals and marking IE C 6 1 0 5 6 -2 ,



IE C 6 1 0 5 8 -1 :2 0 1 6 ,



IE C 6 1 0 9 9 ,



(valve-regulated



types) -



Part 2:



Switches for appliances - Part 1: General requirements



Insulating liquids - Specifications for unused synthetic organic esters for electrical



purposes IE C 6 1 2 0 4 -7 ,



Low-voltage power supplies - Part 7: Safety requirements



Marking of electrical equipment with ratings related to electrical supply - Safety requirements IE C 6 1 2 9 3 ,



Secondary cells and batteries for renewable energy storage - General requirements and methods of test IE C 6 1 4 2 7 (a ll p a r t s ) ,



Secondary cells and batteries - Test methods for checking the performance of devices designed for reducing explosion hazards - Lead-acid starter batteries IE C T S 6 1 4 3 0 ,



Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes Guide to designation of current in alkaline secondary cell and battery standards IE C 6 1 4 3 4 ,



Safety of power transformers, power supplies， reactors and similar products - Part 1: General requirements and tests IE C 6 1 5 5 8 - 1 :2 0 1 7 ,



\EC 6A55&-2-A6, Safety of transformers, reactors， power supply units and similar products for voltages up to 1 100 V - Part 2-16: Particular requirements and tests for switch mode power supply units and transformers for switch mode power supply units Low-voltage surge protective devices - Part 11: Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage power systems - Requirements and test methods IE C 6 1 6 4 3 -1 1 :2 0 1 1 ,



Components for low-voltage surge protective devices Performance requirements and test methods for metal oxide varistors (MOV) IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 3 1 :2 0 1 7 ,



IE C 6 1 8 1 0 - 1 :2 0 1 5 ,



requirements Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



Electromechanical elementary relays -



Part 331:



Part 1: General and safety



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



\EC 61959， Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes Mechanical tests for sealed portable secondary cells and batteries IE C 6 1 9 6 5 ,



Mechanical safety of cathode ray tubes



IE C 6 1 9 8 4 ,



Connectors - Safety requirements and tests



Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes - Safety requirements for portable sealed secondary cells, and for batteries made from them, for use in portable applications IE C 6 2 1 3 3



(a ll



p a rts ),



Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes - Safety requirements for portable sealed secondary cells, and for batteries made from them, for use in portable applications - Part 1: Nickel systems IE C 6 2 1 3 3 -1 ,



Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes - Safety requirements for portable sealed secondary lithium cells, and for batteries made from them， for use in portable applications - Part 2: Lithium systems IE C 6 2 1 3 3 -2 ,



Safety of primary and secondary lithium cells and batteries during transport



IE C 6 2 2 8 1 ,



Electrical insulation systems (EIS) - Thermal evaluation of combined liquid and solid components - Part 1: General requirements IE C T S 6 2 3 3 2 -1 ,



IE C 6 2 4 4 0 :2 0 0 8 ,



Electric cables with a rated voltage not exceeding 450/750 V - Guide to use



IE C 6 2 4 7 1 :2 0 0 6 ,



Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems



IE C 6 2 4 7 1 - 5 :2 0 1 5 ,



Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems - Part 5: Image



projectors Safety requirements for secondary batteries and battery installations - Part 2: Stationary batteries IE C 6 2 4 8 5 -2 ,



Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or other non-acid electrolytes Safety requirements for secondary lithium cells and batteries, for use in industrial applications IE C 6 2 6 1 9 ,



Rubber， vulcanized or thermoplastic properties IS O 3 7 ，



IS O 1 7 8 ,



Determination o f tensile stress-strain



Plastics - Determination of flexural properties



IS O 1 7 9 -1 ,



Plastics - Determination o f Charpy impact properties - Part 1: Non-instrumented



impact test IS O 1 8 0 ,



Plastics - Determination of Izod impact strength



IS O 3 0 6 ,



Plastics - Thermoplastic materials - Determination of Vicat softening temperature



(VST) IS O 5 2 7 (a ll p a r ts ) ,



IS O 8 7 1 ,



Plastics - Determination o f tensile properties



Plastics - Determination of ignition temperature using a hot-air furnace



Flexible cellular polymeric materials elongation at break IS O 1 7 9 8 ,



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



Determination o f tensile strength and



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



IS O 1 8 1 7 :2 0 1 5 ,



Rubber, vulcanized or thermoplastic - Determination of the effect of liquids



Determination of flash point - Pensky-Martens closed cup method



IS O 2 7 1 9 ,



IS O 3 2 3 1 ,



Paints and varnishes containing sulfur dioxide



Determination of resistance to humid atmospheres



IS O 3 6 7 9 ,



Determination o f flash no-flash and flash point - Rapid equilibrium closed cup



method IS O 3 8 6 4 (a ll p a r t s ) ,



Graphical symbols - Safety colours and safety signs



Graphical symbols - Safety colours and safety signs - Part 2: Design principles for product safety labels IS O 3 8 6 4 -2 ,



IS O 4 8 9 2 -1 ,



Plastics - Methods of exposure to laboratory light sources - Part 1: General



guidance IS O 4 8 9 2 -2 ,



Plastics - Methods of exposure to laboratory light sources - Part 2: Xenon-arc



lamps Plastics - Methods of exposure to laboratory light sources - Part 4: Open-flame carbon-arc lamps IS O 4 8 9 2 -4 ,



Graphical symbols for use on equipment - Registered symbols,



IS O 7 0 0 0 ，



a v a ila b le



fro m :



< h ttp ://w w w .g ra p h ic a l-s y m b o ls .in fo /e q u ip m e n t>



Graphical symbols - Safety colours and safety signs - Safety signs used in workplaces and public areas IS O 7 0 1 0 ,



IS O 8 2 5 6 ,



Plastics - Determination of tensile-impact strength



Cellular plastics - Determination o f horizontal burning characteristics of small specimens subjected to a small flame IS O 9 7 7 2 ,



Plastics - Determination o f burning behaviour of thin flexible vertical specimens in contact with a small-flame ignition source IS O 9 7 7 3 ,



Corrosion of metals and alloys - Accelerated testing involving cyclic exposure to salt mist， “dry” and “wet” conditions IS O 1 4 9 9 3 ,



Corrosion tests in artificial atmospheres - Accelerated corrosion tests involving alternate exposure to corrosion-promoting gases, neutral salt-spray and drying IS O 2 1 2 0 7 ,



ASTM



D412,



Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers -



Tension ASTM



D 4 7 1 -9 8 ,



Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Effect o f Liquids



Standard Test Methods for Flexible Cellular Materials - Slab, Bonded, and Molded Urethane Foams



ASTM



D3574,



Sound system equipment: Headphones and earphones associated with portable audio equipment - Maximum sound pressure level measurement methodology and limit considerations - Part 1: General method for “one package equipment” E N 5 0 3 3 2 - 1 :2 0 1 3,



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Sound system equipment: Headphones and earphones associated with portable audio equipment - Maximum sound pressure level measurement methodology and limit considerations - Part 2: Matching of sets with headphones if either or both are offered separately EN 5 0 3 3 2 -2 ,



Sound system equipment: Headphones and earphones associated with personal music players - maximum sound pressure level measurement methodology - Part 3: Measurement method for sound dose management EN 5 0 3 3 2 -3 ,



3



Terms, definitions and abbreviated terms



3.1



Energy source abbreviations Abbreviation



Description



ES



Electrical energy source



ES1



Electrical energy source class 1



ES2



Electrical energy source class 2



ES3



Electrical energy source class 3



MS



Mechanical energy source



MS1



Mechanical energy source class 1



MS2



Mechanical energy source class 2



MS3



Mechanical energy source class 3



PS



Power source



PS1



Power source class 1



PS2



Power source class 2



PS3



Power source class 3



RS



Radiation energy source



RS1



Radiation energy source class 1



RS2



Radiation energy source class 2



RS3



Radiation energy source class 3



TS



Thermal energy source



TS1



Thermal energy source class 1



TS2



Thermal energy source class 2



TS3



Thermal energy source class 3



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



see 5.2



see 8.2



see 6.2



see 10.2



see 9.2



旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 -1 :2 0 1 8 ©



3.2



IE C 2 0 1 8



Other abbreviations Abbreviation



Description



CD



compact disc



CD ROM



compact disc read-only memory



CRT



cathode ray tube



CSD



calculated sound dose



CTI



comparative tracking index



DVD



digital versatile disc



E



sound exposure



EIS



electrical insulation system



EUT



equipment under test



FIW



fully insulated winding wire



GDT



gas discharge tube



IC



integrated circuit



ICX



integrated circuit with X-capacitor function



IR



infrared



LED



light emitting diode



LEL



lower explosion limit



LFC



liquid filled component



LPS



limited power source



MEL



momentary exposure level



MOV



metal oxide varistor



NEMA



National Electrical Manufacturers Association



NiCd



nickel cadmium



PIS



potential ignition source



PMP



personal music player



PoE



power over Ethernet



PPE



personal protective equipment



PTC



positive temperature coefficient



PTI



proof tracking index



RC



resistor-capacitor



RG



risk group



Sb



antimony



SEL



sound exposure level



SPD



surge protective device



SRME



slide rail mounted equipment



TSS



thyristor surge suppressor



UPS



uninterruptible power supply



USB



universal serial bus



UV



ultraviolet



VDR



voltage dependent resistor



VRLA



valve regulated lead acid



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



3.3



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Terms and definitions



F o r th e p u r p o s e s o f th is d o c u m e n t th e fo llo w in g te r m s a n d d e fin itio n s a p p ly .



IS O a n d



IE C



m a in ta in



te rm in o lo g ic a l



d a ta b a s e s



fo r



use



in



s ta n d a rd iz a tio n



a t th e



fo llo w in g



a d d re s s e s : •



IE C E le c tro p e d ia : a v a ila b le a t h ttp ://w w w .e le c tr o p e d ia .o r g /



•



IS O O n lin e b ro w s in g p la tfo rm : a v a ila b le a t h ttp ://w w w .is o .o r g /o b p



For



th e



c o n v e n ie n c e



o f th e



u se r,



th e



d e fin e d



te rm s



a re



lis te d



b e lo w



in



a lp h a b e tic a l



o rd e r



in d ic a tin g th e n u m b e r o f th e d e fin e d te rm .



W h e re th e w o rd s “ v o lta g e ” a n d “ c u r r e n t” o r th e ir a b b re v ia tio n s a re u s e d , th e y a re R M S v a lu e s u n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d .



5 V A c la s s m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .2 .1



5 V B c la s s m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .2 .2



a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n



3 .3 .7 .1



a c c e s s ib le



3 .3 .6 .1



a rc in g P IS



3 .3 .9 .2



b a c k fe e d



3 .3 .6 .2



b a c k fe e d s a fe g u a rd



3 .3 .1 1 .1



b a s ic in s u la tio n



3 .3 .5 .1



b a s ic s a fe g u a r d



3 .3 .1 1 .2



b a tte ry



3 .3 .1 7 .1



c a lc u la te d s o u n d d o s e , C S D



3 .3 .1 9 .1



c e ll



3 .3 .1 7 .2



c h e e s e c lo th



3 .3 .6 .3



c la s s I e q u ip m e n t



3 .3 .1 5 .1



c l a s s II c o n s t r u c t i o n



3 .3 .1 5 .2



c l a s s II e q u i p m e n t



3 .3 .1 5 .3



c l a s s III e q u i p m e n t



3 .3 .1 5 .4



c le a ra n c e



3 .3 .1 2 .1



c o in / b u tto n c e ll b a tte r y



3 .3 .1 7 .3



c o m b u s tib le m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .1



c o n s u m a b le m a te ria l



3 .3 .1 6 .1



c r e e p a g e d is ta n c e



3 .3 .1 2 .2



D C v o lta g e



3 .3 .1 4 .1



d ig ita l s ig n a l le v e l r e la t iv e to fu ll s c a le , d B F S



3 .3 .1 9 .5



d ir e c t p lu g -in e q u ip m e n t



3 .3 .3 .1



d is c o n n e c t d e v ic e



3 .3 .6 .4



d o u b le in s u la tio n



3 .3 .5 .2



d o u b le s a fe g u a rd



3 .3 .1 1 .3



e le c tric a l e n c lo s u re



3 .3 .2 .1



e n c lo s u re



3 .3 .2 .2



e q u ip m e n t s a fe g u a rd



3 .3 .1 1 .4



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



e x p lo s io n



3 .3 .1 6 .2



e x p lo s iv e



3 .3 .1 6 .3



e x te rn a l c irc u it



3 .3 .1 .1



fire e n c lo s u r e



3 .3 .2 .3



fix e d e q u ip m e n t



3 .3 .3 .2



fu lly in s u la te d w in d in g w ire , F IW



3 .3 .1 8 .1



fu n c tio n a l e a rth in g



3 .3 .6 .5



fu n c tio n a l in s u la tio n



3 .3 .5 .3



g ra d e o f F IW



3 .3 .1 8 .2



h a n d -h e ld e q u ip m e n t



3 .3 .3 .3



h a z a rd o u s s u b s ta n c e



3 .3 .1 6 .4



H B 4 0 c la s s m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .2 .3



H B 7 5 c la s s m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .2 .4



H B F c la s s fo a m e d m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .2 .5



H F -1 c la s s fo a m e d m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .2 .6



H F -2 c la s s fo a m e d m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .2 .7



h ig h e s t s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g te m p e r a tu r e



3 .3 .1 7 .4



in s ta lla tio n s a fe g u a rd



3 .3 .1 1 .5



in s tru c te d p e rs o n



3 .3 .8 .1



in s tru c tio n a l s a fe g u a rd



3 .3 .1 1 .6



in s u la tin g liq u id



3 .3 .5 .4



in te rm itte n t o p e ra tio n



3 .3 .7 .2



lo w e s t s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g te m p e r a tu r e



3 .3 .1 7 .5



m a in s



3 .3 .1 .2



m a in s tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e



3 .3 .1 4 .2



m a te ria l fla m m a b ility c la s s



3 .3 .4 .2



m a x im u m



s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g c u rre n t



3 .3 .1 7 .6



m a x im u m



s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g v o lta g e



3 .3 .1 7 .7



m e c h a n ic a l e n c lo s u re



3 .3 .2 .4



m o m e n t a r y e x p o s u r e le v e l, M E L



3 .3 .1 9 .2



m o v a b le e q u ip m e n t



3 .3 .3 .4



n o n -c lip p e d o u tp u t p o w e r



3 .3 .7 .3



n o n -d e ta c h a b le p o w e r s u p p ly c o rd



3 .3 .6 .6



n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n



3 .3 .7 .4



o rd in a ry p e rs o n



3 .3 .8 .2



o u td o o r e n c lo s u re



3 .3 .2 .5



o u td o o r e q u ip m e n t



3 .3 .3 .5



o u td o o r lo c a tio n



3 .3 .6 .7



p e a k re s p o n s e fre q u e n c y



3 .3 .7 .5



p e rm a n e n tly c o n n e c te d e q u ip m e n t



3 .3 .3 .6



p e rs o n a l s a fe g u a rd



3 .3 .1 1 .7



p lu g g a b le , ty p e A e q u ip m e n t



3 .3 .3 .7



p lu g g a b le , ty p e B e q u ip m e n t



3 .3 .3 .8



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



：



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



p o llu tio n d e g re e



3 .3 .6 .8



p o te n tia l ig n itio n s o u r c e , P IS



3 .3 .9 .1



p re c a u tio n a ry s a fe g u a rd



3 .3 .1 1 .8



p ro fe s s io n a l e q u ip m e n t



3 .3 .3 .9



p ro s p e c tiv e to u c h v o lta g e



3 .3 .1 4 .3



p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r



3 .3 .1 1 .9



p ro te c tiv e c o n d u c to r c u rre n t



3 .3 .1 4 .4



p ro te c tiv e c o n d u c to r



3 .3 .1 1 .1 0



p r o te c tiv e c u r r e n t ra tin g



3 .3 .1 0 .6



p r o te c tiv e e a rth in g



3 .3 .1 1 .1 1



p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g c o n d u c to r



3 .3 .1 1 .1 2



ra te d c u rre n t



3 .3 .1 0 .1



ra te d fre q u e n c y



3 .3 .1 0 .2



ra te d lo a d im p e d a n c e



3 .3 .7 .6



ra te d p o w e r



3 .3 .1 0 .3



ra te d v o lta g e ra n g e



3 .3 .1 0 .5



ra te d v o lta g e



3 .3 .1 0 .4



re a s o n a b ly fo re s e e a b le m is u s e



3 .3 .7 .7



re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n



3 .3 .5 .5



re in fo rc e d s a fe g u a rd



3 .3 .1 1 .1 3



re q u ire d w ith s ta n d v o lta g e



3 .3 .1 4 .5



r e s is tiv e P IS



3 .3 .9 .3



re s tric te d a c c e s s a re a



3 .3 .6 .9



R M S w o rk in g v o lta g e



3 .3 .1 4 .6



ro u tin e te s t



3 .3 .6 .1 0



s a fe g u a rd



3 .3 .1 1 .1 4



s a fe ty in te rlo c k



3 .3 .1 1 .1 5



s a m p lin g te s t



3 .3 .6 .1 1



s e c o n d a r y lith iu m



b a tte ry



3 .3 .1 7 .8



s h o rt-tim e o p e ra tio n



3 .3 .7 .8



s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n



3 .3 .7 .9



s k ill s a fe g u a r d



3 .3 .1 1 .1 6



s k ille d p e rs o n



3 .3 .8 .3



s o lid in s u la tio n



3 .3 .5 .6



so u n d e xp o su re , £



3 .3 .1 9 .3



s o u n d e x p o s u r e le v e l, S E L



3 .3 .1 9 .4



s ta tio n a ry e q u ip m e n t



3 .3 .3 .1 0



s to re d e n e rg y m o d e



3 .3 .6 .1 2



s u p p le m e n ta r y in s u la tio n



3 .3 .5 .7



s u p p le m e n ta ry s a fe g u a rd



3 .3 .1 1 .1 7



te m p e r a tu r e lim ite r



3 .3 .1 3 .1



te m p o ra ry o v e rv o lta g e



3 .3 .1 4 .7



th e rm a l c u t-o ff



3 .3 .1 3 .2



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



th e rm o s ta t



3 .3 .1 3 .3



to o l



3 .3 .6 .1 3



to u c h c u rre n t



3 .3 .6 .1 4



tra n s p o rta b le e q u ip m e n t



3 .3 .3 .1 1



ty p e te s t



3 .3 .6 .1 5



V -0 c la s s m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .2 .8



V -1 c la s s m a te r ia l



3 .3 .4 .2 .9



V -2 c la s s m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .2 .1 0



V T M - 0 c la s s m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .2 .1 1



V T M -1



c la s s m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .2 .1 2



V T M - 2 c la s s m a te ria l



3 .3 .4 .2 .1 3



w ire le s s p o w e r tra n s m itte r



3 .3 .3 .1 2



w o r k c e ll



3 .3 .6 .1 6



w o rk in g v o lta g e



3 .3 .1 4 .8



w ra p p in g tis s u e



3 .3 .6 .1 7



3.3.1



C irc u it te rm s



3.3.1.1 e x te rn a l c irc u it e l e c t r i c a l c i r c u i t t h a t is e x t e r n a l t o t h e e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t m a i n s



Note 1 to entry:



An external circuit is classified as ES1 ， ES2 or ES3, and PS1, PS2, or PS3.



3.3.1.2 m a in s A C o r D C p o w e r d is trib u tio n s y s te m



( e x te r n a l to th e e q u ip m e n t ) th a t s u p p lie s o p e r a t in g p o w e r



t o t h e e q u i p m e n t a n d is P S 3



Note 1 to entry: Mains include public or private utilities and， unless otherwise specified in this document， equivalent sources such as motor-driven generators and uninterruptible power supplies.



3.3.2



E n c lo s u re te rm s



3.3.2.1 e le c tric a l e n c lo s u re e n c lo s u r e in te n d e d a s a s a f e g u a r d a g a in s t e le c tric a lly -c a u s e d in ju ry



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 6 -1 3 , m o d ifie d -



th e te rm s a fe g u a r d



has been used]



3.3.2.2 e n c lo s u re h o u s in g a ffo rd in g th e ty p e a n d d e g re e o f p ro te c tio n s u ita b le fo r th e in te n d e d a p p lic a tio n



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 2 -3 5 ]



3.3.2.3 fire e n c lo s u re e n c lo s u re



in te n d e d



as a s a fe g u a rd



o u ts id e th e e n c lo s u r e



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



a g a in s t th e



sp re a d



o f fire fro m



w ith in



th e e n c lo s u r e



to



旧C



3.3.2.4 mocha门 ical enclosure enclosure i n t e n d e d a s a safeguard 3.3.2.5 outdoor enclosure enclosure t h a t i s i n t e n d e d location



to



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



a g a in s t m e c h a n ic a lly - c a u s e d p a in a n d in ju ry



p ro v id e



p ro te c tio n



fro m



s p e c ific



c o n d itio n s



in



outdoor



an



Note 1 to entry: An outdoor enclosure can also perform the functions of another enclosure, for example: a fire enclosure; an electrical enclosure; a mechanical enclosure. Note 2 to entry: A separate cabinet or housing into which the equipment is placed can provide the function of an outdoor enclosure.



3.3.3



Equipment terms



3.3.3.1 direct plug-in equipment e q u i p m e n t in w h i c h t h e mains



p lu g fo r m s a n in te g r a l p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t



enclosure



3.3.3.2 fixed equipment e q u i p m e n t t h a t is s p e c i f i e d



in t h e



in s ta lla tio n



in s tru c tio n s



to



o n ly



be



se cu re d



in



p la c e



by a



m e a n s d e fin e d b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r



Note 1 to entry: Equipment that has a screw hole or other means to secure the equipment by an ordinary person, such as for securement to a table or for earthquake protection, is not considered to be fixed equipment. Note 2 to entry:



Typically, fixed equipment will be wall, ceiling or floor mounted.



3.3.3.3 hand-held equipment movable equipment, o r



a p a rt o f a n y



k in d



o f e q u i p m e n t , t h a t is i n t e n d e d



to



b e h e ld



in t h e



h a n d d u rin g n o rm a l u s e



3.3.3.4 movable equipment e q u i p m e n t t h a t is e i t h e r : - 1 8 -



k g o r l e s s in m a s s a n d i s n o t



provided



person



w ith



w h e e ls ,



c a s te rs ,



fixed equipment; or



o th e r



m eans



or to



fa c ilita te



m ovem ent



by



an



ordinary



a s r e q u ir e d to p e r f o r m its in t e n d e d u s e



3.3.3.5 outdoor equipment e q u i p m e n t t h a t is i n s t a l l e d o r e x p o s e d



in a n



outdoor location,



s p e c ifie d



b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r



t o c o m p l y w h o l l y o r in p a r t u n d e r s p e c i f i c c o n d i t i o n s



Note 1 to entry: Transportable equipment, for example, a laptop or notebook computer, or a telephone, is not outdoor equipment unless specified by the manufacturer for continuous use in an outdoor location.



3.3.3.6 permanently connected equipment e q u ip m e n t th a t c a n use o f a



o n ly b e e le c tric a lly c o n n e c te d



to o r d is c o n n e c te d fr o m



th e



mains



b y th e



tool



3.3.3.7 pluggable equipment type A e q u i p m e n t t h a t is i n t e n d e d f o r c o n n e c t i o n t o t h e



mains



o u tle t o r v ia a n o n - in d u s tr ia l a p p lia n c e c o u p le r , o r b o th



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



v ia a n o n - in d u s tr ia l p lu g a n d



s o c k e t-



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Note 1 to entry: IEC 60320-1.



Examples are plugs and socket-outlets covered by standards such as IEC TR 60083 and



3.3.3.8 pluggable equipment type B e q u i p m e n t t h a t is i n t e n d e d f o r c o n n e c t i o n t o t h e



mains



v ia a n in d u s tria l p lu g a n d s o c k e t- o u tle t



o r v ia a n in d u s tr ia l a p p lia n c e c o u p le r , o r b o th



Note 1 to entry:



Examples are plugs and socket-outlets covered by standards such as IEC 60309-1.



3.3.3.9 professional equipment e q u i p m e n t f o r u s e in t r a d e s , p r o f e s s i o n s o r i n d u s t r i e s a n d w h i c h is n o t i n t e n d e d f o r s a l e t o t h e g e n e ra l p u b lic



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 6 1 :1 9 9 0 , 1 6 1 -0 5 -0 5 ]



3.3.3.10 stationary equipment -



fixed equipment,



-



permanently connected equipment,



-



e q u i p m e n t t h a t , d u e t o its p h y s i c a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , is n o r m a l l y n o t m o v e d



Note 1 to entry:



or or



Stationary equipment is neither movable equipment nor transportable equipment.



3.3.3.11 transportable equipment e q u i p m e n t t h a t is i n t e n d e d t o b e r o u t i n e l y c a r r i e d



Note 1 to entry: Examples include notebook computers, CD players and portable accessories, including their external power supplies.



3.3.3.12 wireless power transmitter e q u ip m e n t th a t u s e s



e le c t r o m a g n e t ic fie ld s to tr a n s f e r e le c tr ic a l



p o w e r fo r c h a rg in g



battery



o p e ra te d h a n d -h e ld d e v ic e s



3.3.4



Flammability terms



3.3.4.1 combustible material m a t e r ia l t h a t is c a p a b l e o f b e in g ig n i t e d o r b u r n e d



Note 1 to entry: All thermoplastic materials are considered capable of being ignited or burned regardless of the material flammability class.



3.3.4.2 material flammability class r e c o g n i t i o n o f t h e b u r n in g b e h a v i o u r o f m a t e r ia ls a n d t h e i r a b ilit y to e x t i n g u i s h if ig n it e d



Note 1 to entry: Materials are classified when tested in accordance with IEC 60695-11-10, IEC 60695-11-20, ISO 9772 or ISO 9773.



3.3.4.2.1 5VA class material m a te ria l



te s te d



IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -2 0



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



in



th e



th in n e s t



s ig n ific a n t



th ic k n e s s



used



and



c la s s ifie d



5VA



a c c o rd in g



to



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



3.3.4.2.2 5VB class material m a te ria l



te s te d



in



th e



th in n e s t



s ig n ific a n t



th ic k n e s s



used



and



c la s s ifie d



5VB



a c c o rd in g



to



IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -2 0



3.3.4.2.3 HB40 class material m a te ria l



te s te d



in



th e



th in n e s t s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s



used



and



c la s s ifie d



HB40



a c c o rd in g



to



th in n e s t



used



and



c la s s ifie d



HB75



a c c o rd in g



to



IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -1 0



3.3.4.2.4 HB75 class material m a te ria l



te s te d



in



th e



s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s



IE C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -1 0



3.3.4.2.5 HBF class foamed material f o a m e d m a t e r i a l t e s t e d in t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s u s e d a n d c l a s s i f i e d H B F a c c o r d i n g to IS O 9 7 7 2



3.3.4.2.6 HF-1 class foamed material fo a m e d



m a te ria l



te s te d



in



th e



th in n e s t



s ig n ific a n t



th ic k n e s s



used



and



c la s s ifie d



H F -1



th e



th in n e s t



s ig n ific a n t



th ic k n e s s



used



and



c la s s ifie d



H F -2



a c c o rd in g to IS O 9 7 7 2



3.3.4.2.7 HF-2 class foamed material fo a m e d



m a te ria l



te s te d



in



a c c o rd in g to IS O 9 7 7 2



3.3.4.2.8 V-0 class material m a te ria l



te s te d



in



th e



th in n e s t



s ig n ific a n t



th ic k n e s s



used



and



c la s s ifie d



V -0



a c c o rd in g



to



th e



th in n e s t



s ig n ific a n t



th ic k n e s s



used



and



c la s s ifie d



V -1



a c c o rd in g



to



th e



th in n e s t



s ig n ific a n t



th ic k n e s s



used



and



c la s s ifie d



V -2



a c c o rd in g



to



旧 C 6 0 6 9 5 -1 1 -1 0



3.3.4.2.9 V-1 class material m a te ria l



te s te d



in



IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 1 0



3.3.4.2.10 V-2 class material m a te ria l



te s te d



in



IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 1 0



3.3.4.2.11 VTM-0 class material m a te ria l te s te d



in t h e



th in n e s t s ig n ific a n t th ic k n e s s



used



and



c la s s ifie d



V T M -0



a c c o rd in g



to



in t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s



used



and



c la s s ifie d



V T M -1



a c c o rd in g



to



IS O 9 7 7 3



3.3.4.2.12 VTM-1 class material m a te ria l te s te d IS O 9 7 7 3



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



3.3.4.2.13 VTM-2 class material m a te ria l te s te d



in t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s



used



and



c la s s ifie d



V T M -2



a c c o rd in g



to



IS O 9 7 7 3



3.3.5



Electrical insulation



3.3.5.1 basic insulation in s u la tio n to p r o v id e a



Note 1 to entry:



basic safeguard



a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k



This concept does not apply to insulation used exclusively for functional purposes.



3.3.5.2 double insulation in s u la tio n c o m p ris in g b o th



basic insulation



and



supplementary insulation



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 6 -0 8 ]



3.3.5.3 functional insulation in s u la tio n



b e tw e e n c o n d u c tiv e p a rts w h ic h



is n e c e s s a r y o n l y f o r t h e p r o p e r f u n c t i o n i n g o f t h e



e q u ip m e n t



3.3.5.4 insulating liquid in s u la tin g m a te r ia l c o n s is t in g e n tir e ly o f a liq u id



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 2 1 2 :2 0 1 0 , 2 1 2 -1 1 - 0 4 ]



3.3.5.5 reinforced insulation s in g le in s u la tio n s y s te m th a t p ro v id e s a d e g re e o f p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k e q u iv a le n t to



double insulation



3.3.5.6 solid insulation in s u la tio n c o n s is tin g e n tir e ly o f s o lid m a te ria l



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 2 1 2 :2 0 1 0 , 2 1 2 -1 1 -0 2 ]



3.3.5.7 supplementary insulation in d e p e n d e n t in s u la tio n



safeguard 3.3.6



a p p lie d



in a d d i t i o n



to



basic insulation



to



p ro v id e



a



supplementary



fo r fa u lt p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k



Miscellaneous



3.3.6.1 accessible to u c h a b le b y a b o d y p a rt



Note 1 to entry:



A body part is represented by one or more of the probes specified in Annex V, as applicable.



3.3.6.2 backfeed c o n d i t i o n in w h i c h a v o l t a g e o r e n e r g y a v a i l a b l e w i t h i n a



battery



b a c k e d u p s u p p l y is f e d b a c k



t o a n y o f t h e i n p u t t e r m i n a l s , e i t h e r d i r e c t l y o r b y a l e a k a g e p a t h w h i l e o p e r a t i n g in t h e



energy mode Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



a n d w ith



mains



p o w e r n o t a v a ila b le



stored



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



3.3.6.3 cheesecloth b le a c h e d c o tto n c lo th o f a p p r o x im a te ly 4 0 g / m 2



Note 1 to entry:



Cheesecloth is a coarse, loosely woven cotton gauze, originally used for wrapping cheese.



3.3.6.4 disconnect device m eans



to



e le c tric a lly



d is c o n n e c t



e q u ip m e n t



fro m



th e



mains



th a t,



in



th e



open



p o s itio n ,



c o m p lie s w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s s p e c ifie d fo r is o la tio n



3.3.6.5 functional earthing e a r t h i n g a p o i n t o r p o i n t s in a s y s t e m



o r in a n i n s t a l l a t i o n o r i n e q u i p m e n t , f o r p u r p o s e s o t h e r



th a n e le c tric a l s a fe ty



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 1 , 1 9 5 -0 1 -1 3 ]



3.3.6.6 non-detachable power supply cord fle x ib le



s u p p ly



co rd



a ffix e d



to



o r a s s e m b le d



fro m th e e q u ip m e n t w ith o u t th e u s e o f



to



th e



fro m



th e



e q u ip m e n t a n d



th a t c a n n o t



be



re m o ve d



tools



3.3.6.7 outdoor location lo c a tio n



fo r



e q u ip m e n t



w h e re



p ro te c tio n



w e a th e r



and



o th e r



o u td o o r



in flu e n c e s



p r o v i d e d b y a b u i l d i n g o r o t h e r s t r u c t u r e is l i m i t e d o r n o n - e x i s t e n t



3.3.6.8 pollution degree n u m e ra l c h a r a c te r iz in g th e e x p e c te d p o llu tio n o f th e m ic r o - e n v ir o n m e n t



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 5 8 1 :2 0 0 8 , 5 8 1 -2 1 -0 7 ]



3.3.6.9 restricted access area a r e a accessible o n l y



to



skilled persons



and



to



instructed persons



w ith



th e



p ro p e r



a u th o riz a tio n



3.3.6.10 routine test te s t to



w h ic h



each



in d iv id u a l



d e v ic e



is



s u b je c te d



d u rin g



o r a fte r



m a n u fa c tu re



to



a s c e rta in



w h e t h e r it c o m p l i e s w i t h c e r t a i n c r i t e r i a



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .1 9 .2 ]



3.3.6.11 sampling test te s t o n a n u m b e r o f d e v ic e s ta k e n a t ra n d o m fro m a b a tc h



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .1 9 .3 ]



3.3.6.12 stored energy mode s ta b le m o d e o f o p e ra tio n th a t a



Note 1 to entry: 一



battery



b a c k e d up s u p p ly a tta in s u n d e r s p e c ifie d c o n d itio n s



In accordance with IEC 62040-1:2017, the specified conditions are as follows:



AC input power, is disconnected or is out of required tolerance;



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



-



operating and output power is supplied by the energy storage device;



一



the load is within the specified rating of the battery backed up supply.



3.3.6.13 tool o b je c t th a t c a n b e u s e d to o p e r a te a s c r e w , la tc h o r s im ila r fix in g m e a n s



Note 1 to entry:



Examples of tools include coins, tableware, screwdrivers, pliers, etc.



3.3.6.14 touch current e le c tric c u rre n t th ro u g h or one



accessible



a hum an



body when



b o d y p a rts to u c h tw o o r m o re



accessible



p a rts



p a rt a n d e a rth



3.3.6.15 type test te s t



on



a



re p re s e n ta tiv e



s a m p le



w ith



th e



o b je c tiv e



of



d e te rm in in g



if,



as



d e s ig n e d



and



m a n u f a c t u r e d , it c a n m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h is d o c u m e n t



3.3.6.16 work cell s p a c e w ith in



th e e q u ip m e n t o f s u c h



s iz e th a t a p e rs o n



can



e n te r c o m p le te ly o r p a rtia lly (fo r



e x a m p le , e n tir e lim b o r h e a d ) fo r s e r v ic in g o r o p e r a tin g th e e q u ip m e n t a n d w h e r e m e c h a n ic a l h a za rd s m a y be p re s e n t



Note 1 to entry: A work cell can contain more than one compartment. A compartment can be used for either operational or service purposes. Note 2 to entry:



The equipment containing the work cell is typically installed within a restricted access area.



3.3.6.17 wrapping tissue tis s u e b e tw e e n 12 g /m 2 a n d 3 0 g /m 2



Note 1 to entry:



3.3.7



The wrapping tissue is soft, thin, usually translucent paper used for wrapping delicate articles.



Operating and fault conditions



3.3.7.1 abnormal operating condition te m p o r a ry o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n



fault condition



t h a t is n o t a



normal operating condition



and



is n o t a



o f th e e q u ip m e n t its e lf



Note 1 to entry:



Abnormal operating conditions are specified in Clause B.3.



Note 2 to entry:



An abnormal operating condition may be introduced by the equipment or by a person.



Note 3 to entry: safeguard.



single



An abnormal operating condition may result in a failure of a component, a device or a



3.3.7.2 intermittent operation o p e ra tio n



in a s e r i e s o f c y c l e s , e a c h c o m p o s e d o f a p e r i o d o f o p e r a t i o n f o l l o w e d



b y a p e rio d



w ith th e e q u ip m e n t s w it c h e d o ff o r r u n n in g id le



3.3.7.3 non-clipped output power s i n e w a v e p o w e r d i s s i p a t e d in t h e



rated load impedance,



o f c lip p in g on e ith e r o n e o r b o th p e a k s



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



m e a s u re d a t 1 0 0 0 H z a t th e o n s e t



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



3.3.7.4 normal operating condition m ode



o f o p e ra tio n



th a t re p re s e n ts



a s c lo s e ly



as



p o s s ib le



th e



ra n g e



o f n o rm a l



use



th a t can



re a s o n a b ly be e x p e c te d



Note 1 to entry: Unless otherwise specified, the most severe conditions of normal use are the most unfavourable default values as specified in Clause B.2. Note 2 to entry: Reasonably foreseeable misuse is not covered by normal operating conditions. Instead, it is covered by abnormal operating conditions.



3.3.7.5 peak response frequency te s t



fre q u e n c y



th a t



p ro d u ce s



th e



m a x im u m



o u tp u t



power



m e a su re d



at



th e



rated load



impedance Note 1 to entry:



The frequency applied should be within the amplifier/transducer's intended operating range.



3.3.7.6 rated load impedance im p e d a n c e o r re s is ta n c e , a s d e c la re d



b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r, b y w h ic h a n o u tp u t c irc u it s h o u ld



b e te rm in a te d



3.3.7.7 reasonably foreseeable misuse use



of a



p ro d u c t,



p ro ce ss



o r s e rv ic e



in



a way



n o t in te n d e d



by th e



s u p p lie r,



b u t w h ic h



can



re s u lt fro m re a d ily p re d ic ta b le h u m a n b e h a v io u r



Note 1 to entry:



Reasonably foreseeable misuse is considered to be a form of abnormal operating conditions.



[S O U R C E : IS O /IE C



G u i d e 5 1 : 2 0 1 4 , 3 . 7 ，m o d i f i e d — I n t h e d e f i n i t i o n , " p r o d u c t o r s y s t e m " h a s



b e e n r e p l a c e d b y " p r o d u c t ，p r o c e s s o r s e r v i c e " . T h e N o t e s t o e n t r y h a v e b e e n r e p l a c e d . ]



3.3.7.8 short-time operation o p e r a t i o n u n d e r normal operating conditions e q u ip m e n t



is c o l d , t h e



in te rv a ls



a fte r e a ch



fo r



p e rio d



a



s p e c ifie d



o f o p e ra tio n



p e rio d , b e in g



s ta rtin g



s u ffic ie n t to



when



th e



a llo w



th e



e q u ip m e n t to c o o l d o w n to r o o m te m p e r a tu r e



3.3.7.9 single fault condition c o n d itio n o f e q u ip m e n t w ith a fa u lt u n d e r (b u t not a



reinforced safeguard)



Note 1 to entry:



3.3.8



normal operating condition



o f a s in g le



safeguard



o r o f a s in g le c o m p o n e n t o r a d e v ic e



Single fault conditions are specified in Clause B.4.



Persons



3.3.8.1 instructed person p e rso n



skilled person a s t o e n e r g y s o u r c e s a n d w h o c a n equipment safeguards a n d precautionary safeguards w i t h r e s p e c t t o t h o s e



in s tru c te d



re s p o n s ib ly u s e



or



s u p e rv is e d



by



a



e n e rg y so u rce s



Note 1 to entry: Supervised, as used in the definition, means having the direction and oversight of the performance of others. Note 2 to entry: In Germany, in many cases, a person may only be regarded as an instructed person if certain legal requirements are fulfilled.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



3.3.8.2 ordinary person p e r s o n w h o is n e i t h e r a



skilled person



nor an



instructed person



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 8 2 6 :2 0 0 4 , 8 2 6 -1 8 -0 3 ]



3.3.8.3 skilled person p e rs o n w ith r e le v a n t e d u c a tio n



o r e x p e rie n c e to e n a b le



h im



o r h e r to id e n t if y h a z a r d s a n d to



ta k e a p p r o p r ia te a c tio n s to r e d u c e th e r is k s o f in ju r y to t h e m s e lv e s a n d o th e r s



Note 1 to entry: In Germany, in many cases, a person may only be regarded as an skilled person if certain legal requirements are fulfilled. [S O U R C E :



IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 8 2 6 :2 0 0 4 ,



8 2 6 -1 8 -0 1 ,



m o d ifie d



-



The



d e fin itio n



has



been



m ade



a p p l i c a b l e to a ll t y p e s o f h a z a r d s . ]



3.3.9



Potential ignition sources



3.3.9.1 potential ignition source PIS lo c a tio n w h e r e e le c tr ic a l e n e r g y c a n c a u s e ig n itio n



3.3.9.2 arcing PIS PIS w h e r e a n



a rc m a y o c c u r d u e to th e o p e n in g o f a c o n d u c to r o r a c o n ta c t



Note 1 to entry: An electronic protection circuit or additional constructional measures may be used to prevent a location from becoming an arcing PIS. Note 2 to entry: A faulty contact or interruption in an electric connection that may occur in conductive patterns on printed boards is considered to be within the scope of this definition.



3.3.9.3 resistive PIS PIS w h e r e a c o m p o n e n t



m a y ig n ite d u e to e x c e s s iv e p o w e r d is s ip a tio n



Note 1 to entry: An electronic protection circuit or additional constructional measures may be used to prevent a location from becoming a resistive PIS.



3.3.10



Ratings



3.3.10.1 rated current in p u t



cu rre n t



of



th e



e q u ip m e n t,



as



d e c la re d



by



th e



at



normal operating



at



normal operating



m a n u fa c tu re r,



conditions 3.3.10.2 rated frequency s u p p ly fr e q u e n c y o r fr e q u e n c y ra n g e a s d e c la re d b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r



3.3.10.3 rated power in p u t



power



of



th e



e q u ip m e n t,



as



d e c la re d



by



th e



m a n u fa c tu re r,



conditions 3.3.10.4 rated voltage v a lu e



o f v o lta g e



a s s ig n e d



by th e



m a n u f a c t u r e r to a c o m p o n e n t, d e v ic e



w h ic h o p e ra tio n a n d p e rfo rm a n c e c h a ra c te ris tic s a re re fe rre d



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



o r e q u ip m e n t a n d



to



旧C Note 1 to entry:



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Equipment may have more than one rated voltage value or may have a rated voltage range.



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .9 ]



3.3.10.5 rated voltage range s u p p ly



v o lta g e



ra n g e ,



as



d e c la re d



by



th e



m a n u fa c tu re r,



e xp re sse d



by



its



lo w e r a n d



upper



rated voltages 3.3.10.6 protective current rating c u r r e n t r a t i n g o f a n o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e t h a t is in t h e



b u ild in g



in s ta lla tio n



o r in t h e



e q u ip m e n t to p r o te c t a c ir c u it



3.3.11



Safeguards



3.3.11.1 backfeed safeguard c o n tr o l s c h e m e th a t r e d u c e s th e ris k o f e le c tr ic s h o c k d u e to b a c k fe e d



3.3.11.2 basic safeguard safeguard t h a t p r o v i d e s p r o t e c t i o n operating conditions w h e n e v e r



under an



normal operating conditions



e n e rg y



so u rce



c a p a b le



of



and under



c a u s in g



p a in



or



abnormal in ju ry



is



p r e s e n t in t h e e q u i p m e n t



3.3.11.3 double safeguard safeguard c o m p r i s i n g



basic safeguard



b o th a



and a



supplementary safeguard



3.3.11.4 equipment safeguard safeguard t h a t i s a p h y s i c a l



p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t



3.3.11.5 installation safeguard safeguard t h a t i s a p h y s i c a l



p a rt o f a m a n -m a d e in s ta lla tio n



3.3.11.6 instructional safeguard in s tru c tio n in v o k in g s p e c ifie d b e h a v io u r



3.3.11.7 personal safeguard p e rso n a l



p ro te c tiv e



e q u ip m e n t



th a t



is



w o rn



on



th e



body



and



th a t



re d u c e s



e xp o su re



to



an



e n e rg y so u rce



Note 1 to entry:



Examples are shields, goggles, gloves, aprons, face masks or breathing apparatus.



3.3.11.8 precautionary safeguard instructed person b e h a v i o u r



to



a v o id



c o n ta c t w ith



b a s e d o n s u p e rv is io n o r in s tru c tio n s g iv e n b y a



3.3.11.9 protective bonding conductor protective conductor i n t h e e q u i p m e n t



to



a c la s s 2 e n e rg y



so u rce



skilled person



p r o v i d e d f o r p r o t e c t i v e e q u i p o t e n t i a 卜b o n d i n g o f p a r t s



re q u ire d to b e e a rth e d fo r s a fe ty p u rp o s e s



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



or e xp o su re



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Note 1 to entry:



A protective bonding conductor is internal in the equipment.



3.3.11.10 protective conductor c o n d u c to r p ro v id e d fo r th e p u rp o s e s o f s a fe ty (fo r e x a m p le , p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k )



Note 1 to entry: conductor.



A protective conductor is either a protective earthing conductor or a protective bonding



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 2 -0 9 ]



3.3.11.11 protective earthing e a rth in g



a p o in t o r



p o in ts



in



a s y s te m



or



in a n



in s ta lla tio n



o r in e q u i p m e n t f o r p u r p o s e s



of



e le c tric a l s a fe ty



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 /A M D 1 :2 0 0 1 , 1 9 5 -0 1 -1 1 ]



3.3.11.12 protective earthing conductor protective conductor c o n n e c t i n g



a m a in



e a r t h p o i n t in t h e b u i l d i n g i n s t a l l a t i o n f o r



3.3.11.13 reinforced safeguard s i n g l e safeguard t h a t i s



protective earthing protective earthing



t e r m i n a l in t h e e q u i p m e n t t o a n



e ffe c tiv e u n d e r:



-



normal operating conditions;



-



abnormal operating conditions;



-



single fault conditions



and



3.3.11.14 safeguard p h y s ic a l p a rt o r s y s te m



o r in s tru c tio n s p e c ific a lly p ro v id e d to re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d



o f p a in o r



in ju ry , o r, fo r fire , to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n o r s p r e a d o f fire



Note 1 to entry:



See 0.5 for further explanation of a safeguard.



3.3.11.15 safety interlock m e a n s to a u to m a tic a lly c h a n g e a n e n e rg y s o u rc e to a lo w e r c la s s e n e rg y s o u rc e



p r io r to th e



p o te n tia l fo r tr a n s fe r o f th e h ig h e r e n e rg y to a b o d y p a rt



Note 1 to entry: A safety interlock encompasses the system of components and circuits that are directly involved in the safeguard function, including electro-mechanical devices, conductors on printed boards, wiring and their terminations, etc., as applicable.



3.3.11.16 skill safeguard skilled person



b e h a v io u r to



a v o id



c o n ta c t w ith



or e xp o su re



to



a



c la s s 2 o r c la s s 3 e n e rg y



s o u rc e b a s e d o n e d u c a tio n a n d e x p e rie n c e



3.3.11.17 supplementary safeguard safeguard a p p l i e d in a d d i t i o n t o t h e basic safeguard e v e n t o f f a i l u r e o f t h e basic safeguard



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



t h a t is o r b e c o m e s



o p e r a t i o n a l in t h e



旧C



3.3.12



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Spacings



3.3.12.1 clearance s h o r t e s t d i s t a n c e in a i r b e t w e e n t w o c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .2 ]



3.3.12.2 creepage distance s h o r te s t d is ta n c e a lo n g th e s u r fa c e o f a n in s u la tin g m a te ria l b e tw e e n tw o c o n d u c tiv e p a rts



[S O U R C E : IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 :2 0 0 7 , 3 .3 , m o d ifie d -



3.3.13



I n t h e d e f i n i t i o n , us o l i d w h a s b e e n d e l e t e d . ]



Temperature controls



3.3.13.1 temperature limiter d e v ic e fo r lim itin g th e te m p e r a tu r e o f a s y s te m , e ith e r b e lo w o r a b o v e



a p a rtic u la r v a lu e , b y



c o n tr o llin g , e ith e r d ir e c tly o r in d ir e c tly , th e flo w o f th e r m a l e n e r g y in to o r o u t o f th e s y s te m



Note 1 to entry:



A temperature limiter may be of the automatic reset or of the manual reset type.



3.3.13.2 thermal cut-off d e v ic e fo r lim itin g th e te m p e r a tu r e o f a s y s te m , u n d e r



single fault conditions,



b y c o n tro llin g ,



e it h e r d ir e c tly o r in d ir e c tly , th e flo w o f th e r m a l e n e r g y in to o r o u t o f th e s y s te m



3.3.13.3 thermostat d e v ic e



fo r



m a in ta in in g



th e



te m p e ra tu re



of



a



s y s te m



w ith in



a



ra n g e



by



c o n tro llin g ,



e ith e r



d ir e c tly o r in d ir e c tly , th e flo w o f th e r m a l e n e r g y in to o r o u t o f th e s y s te m



3.3.14



Voltages and currents



3.3.14.1 DC voltage v o lta g e h a v in g a p e a k - to - p e a k rip p le n o t e x c e e d in g 10 % o f th e a v e r a g e v a lu e



Note 1 to entry: Where peak-to-peak ripple exceeds 10 % of the average value, the requirements related to peak voltage are applicable.



3.3.14.2 mains transient voltage h ig h e s t



peak



v o lta g e



e x p e c te d



a t th e



mains



in p u t to



th e



e q u ip m e n t



a ris in g



fro m



e x te rn a l



tra n s ie n ts



3.3.14.3 prospective touch voltage v o lta g e



b e tw e e n



s im u lta n e o u s ly



accessible



c o n d u c tiv e



p a rts



or



b e tw e e n



one



accessible



c o n d u c tiv e p a rt a n d e a rth w h e n th o s e c o n d u c tiv e p a rts a re n o t b e in g to u c h e d



[S O U R C E :



IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 1 9 5 :1 9 9 8 , 1 9 5 -0 5 -0 9 ,



m o d ifie d



-



accessible



c o n d u c tiv e p a rt a n d e a rth " h a s b e e n a d d e d .]



In



th e



d e fin itio n ,



"o r



b e tw e e n



one



3.3.14.4 protective conductor current cu rre n t



flo w in g



conditions Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



th ro u g h



th e



protective earthing conductor



under



normal operating



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Note 1 to entry:



Protective conductor current was previously included in the term “leakage current”.



3.3.14.5 required withstand voltage p e a k v o l t a g e t h a t t h e i n s u l a t i o n u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n is r e q u i r e d t o w i t h s t a n d



3.3.14.6 RMS working voltage working voltage



tru e R M S v a lu e o f th e



Note 1 to entry:



True RMS value of the working voltage includes any DC component of the waveform.



Note 2 to entry: The resultant RMS value of a waveform having an AC RMS voltage /( and a DC component voltage B is given by the following formula: RMS value =



3.3.14.7 temporary overvoltage o v e r v o l t a g e a t mains p o w e r



(A2



+



B 2 ) 1/2



fr e q u e n c y o f re la tiv e ly lo n g d u r a tio n



3.3.14.8 working voltage v o lta g e



a cro ss



a n y p a rtic u la r in s u la tio n



a n y v o l t a g e in t h e



rated voltage range



w h i l e t h e e q u i p m e n t is s u p p l i e d



External transients are disregarded.



Note 2 to entry:



Recurring peak voltages are disregarded.



or



Classes of equipment with respect to protection from electric shock



3.3.15.1 class I equipment e q u i p m e n t w i t h basic insulation u s e d a s a basic safeguard, protective earthing u s e d a s a supplementary safeguard Note 1 to entry: [S O U R C E : th e



rated voltage



normal operating conditions



under



Note 1 to entry:



3.3.15



at



a n d w ith p r o te c tiv e b o n d in g a n d



Class I equipment may be provided with class II construction.



IE C 6 0 0 5 0 - 8 5 1 :2 0 0 8 , 8 5 1 -1 5 - 1 0 ,



safeguard



m o d ifie d



— The



d e fin itio n



has



been



a d a p te d



to



p rin c ip le .]



3.3.15.2 class II construction p a rt



of



an



insulation



e q u ip m e n t or



fo r



w h ic h



p ro te c tio n



a g a in s t



e le c tric



shock



re lie s



upon



double



reinforced insulation



3.3.15.3 class II equipment e q u i p m e n t in w h i c h b u t in w h i c h a



earthing



p r o te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tr ic s h o c k d o e s n o t re ly o n



supplementary safeguard



is p r o v i d e d , t h e r e b e i n g n o



basic insulation o n l y , p r o v i s i o n f o r protective



o r re lia n c e u p o n in s ta lla tio n c o n d itio n s



3.3.15.4 class III equipment e q u ip m e n t



in



w h ic h



p ro te c tio n



w h i c h E S 3 is n o t g e n e r a t e d



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



a g a in s t



e le c tric



shock



re lie s



upon



s u p p ly



fro m



ES1



and



in



旧C



3.3.16



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Chemical terms



3.3.16.1 consumable material m a t e r i a l t h a t i s u s e d b y t h e e q u i p m e n t in p e r f o r m i n g i t s i n t e n d e d f u n c t i o n , a n d i n t e n d e d t o b e p e rio d ic a lly



or



o c c a s io n a lly



re p la c e d



or



re p le n is h e d ,



in c lu d in g



any



m a te ria l



th a t



has



a



life



e x p e c ta n c y le s s th a n th a t o f th e e q u ip m e n t



Note 1 to entry:



Air filters are not considered to be consumable materials.



3.3.16.2 explosion c h e m ic a l



re a c tio n



u n d e rg o e s



a



of



ve ry



any



ra p id



c h e m ic a l



com pound



c o m b u s tio n



or



or



m e c h a n ic a l



d e c o m p o s itio n ,



m ix tu re



re le a s in g



th a t,



la rg e



when



v o lu m e s



in itia te d , of



h ig h ly



h e a te d g a s e s th a t e x e rt p re s s u re o n th e s u r r o u n d in g m e d iu m



Note 1 to entry: Explosion can also be a mechanical reaction in which failure of the container causes sudden release of pressure, and the contents, from within a pressure vessel. Depending on the rate of energy release, an explosion can be categorized as a deflagration, a detonation or pressure rupture.



3.3.16.3 explosive s u b s ta n c e o r m ix tu r e o f s u b s t a n c e s th a t c a n u n d e r g o a ra p id c h e m ic a l c h a n g e w ith o r w it h o u t a n o u ts id e s o u r c e o f o x y g e n , g e n e r a tin g la rg e q u a n titie s o f e n e r g y g e n e r a lly a c c o m p a n ie d



by



hot gases



3.3.16.4 hazardous substance s u b s ta n c e th a t h a s th e p o te n tia l fo r a d v e r s e ly im p a c tin g h u m a n h e a lth



Note 1 to entry: The criteria for determining whether a substance is classified as hazardous are usually defined by law or regulation.



3.3.17



Batteries



3.3.17.1 battery a s s e m b ly o f o n e o r m o re



cells



re a d y fo r u s e a s a s o u r c e o f e le c tric a l e n e r g y c h a r a c te r iz e d b y



its v o l t a g e , s i z e , t e r m i n a l a r r a n g e m e n t , c a p a c i t y a n d r a t e c a p a b i l i t y



Note 1 to entry:



The term battery pack is considered to be a battery,



3.3.17.2 cell b a s ic



m a n u fa c tu re d



u n it



p ro v id in g



a



so u rce



of



e le c tric a l



e n e rg y



by



d ire c t



c o n v e rs io n



of



c h e m ic a l e n e rg y , th a t c o n s is ts o f e le c tro d e s , s e p a ra to rs , e le c tro ly te , c o n ta in e r a n d te rm in a ls



3.3.17.3 coin / button cell battery s m a l l , s i n g l e cell battery h a v i n g



a d i a m e t e r g r e a t e r t h a n its h e ig h t



3.3.17.4 highest specified charging temperature h ig h e s t te m p e r a tu r e s p e c ifie d b y th e m a n u f a c tu r e r a t a s ite o n e a c h in d iv id u a l th e



battery



d u rin g c h a rg in g o f a s e c o n d a r y



cell



c o m p ris in g



battery



Note 1 to entry: It is usually assumed that the end-product manufacturer is responsible to specify the safetysensitive temperature, voltage or current of the battery, based on the specifications provided by battery supplier.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎



旧C



2018



3.3.17.5 lowest specified charging temperature lo w e s t te m p e r a tu r e s p e c ifie d th e



battery



b y th e m a n u f a c tu r e r a t a s ite o n e a c h in d iv id u a l



d u rin g c h a rg in g o f a s e c o n d a r y



cell



c o m p ris in g



battery



Note 1 to entry: It is usually assumed that the end-product manufacturer is responsible to specify the safety sensitive temperature, voltage or current of the battery, based on the specifications provided by battery supplier.



3.3.17.6 maximum specified charging current h ig h e s t



c h a rg in g



cu rre n t



s p e c ifie d



by



th e



m a n u fa c tu re r



d u rin g



c h a rg in g



of



a



se co n d a ry



th e



m a n u fa c tu re r



d u rin g



c h a rg in g



of



a



se co n d a ry



battery 3.3.17.7 maximum specified charging voltage h ig h e s t



c h a rg in g



v o lta g e



s p e c ifie d



by



battery 3.3.17.8 secondary lithium battery battery t h a t cells,



-



i n c o r p o r a t e s o n e o r m o re s e c o n d a r y lith iu m



-



h a s a h o u s in g a n d a te rm in a l a rra n g e m e n t, a n d



-



m a y h a v e e le c tro n ic c o n tro l d e v ic e s , a n d



-



is r e a d y f o r u s e



and



Note 1 to entry: Examples of a secondary lithium battery include a rechargeable lithium-ion battery, a rechargeable lithium-polymer battery and a rechargeable lithium manganese battery.



3.3.18



FIW terms



3.3.18.1 fully insulated winding wire FIW p o ly u r e th a n e e n a m e lle d ro u n d c o p p e r w ire , c la s s 1 8 0



Note 1 to entry: The insulating properties are in accordance with IEC 60317-0-7， IEC 60317-56 and IEC 60851-5:2008. These standards also refer to this type of wire as “zero-defect wire” ， which they define as “winding wire that exhibits no electrical discontinuities when tested under specific co n d itio n s' Note 2 to entry:



The term “zero-defect wire” is commonly used to refer to FIW.



3.3.18.2 grade of FIW ra n g e o f o v e ra ll d ia m e te r o f a w ire (F IW 3 to F IW 9 )



3.3.19



Sound exposure



3.3.19.1 calculated sound dose CSD one



week



ro llin g



e s tim a te



of



sound exposure



e xp re sse d



re g a rd e d a s s a fe



Note 1 to entry:



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



See B.4 of EN 50332-3:2017 for additional information.



as



a p e rc e n ta g e



o f th e



m a x im u m



旧C



3.3.19.2 momentary exposure level MEL m e t r i c f o r e s t i m a t i n g 1 s sound exposure



le v e l fr o m



a s p e c ific



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



te s t s ig n a l



a p p lie d



to



b o th



c h a n n e ls , b a s e d o n E N 5 0 3 3 2 -1 :2 0 1 3 , 4 .2



Note 1 to entry:



MEL is measured in dB(A).



Note 2 to entry:



See B.3 of EN 50332-3:2017 for additional information.



3.3.19.3 sound exposure E A -w e ig h te d s o u n d p re s s u re



(p)



s q u a re d a n d in te g ra te d o v e r a s ta te d p e rio d o f tim e ,



T



T



E = \p { t) 26t 0



Note 1 to entry:



The SI unit is Pa2 s.



3.3.19.4 sound exposure level SEL lo g a rith m ic m e a s u re o f



/ S E L = 1 0 l o g 10



sound exposure



re la tiv e to a re fe re n c e v a lu e ,



E0



\ ^



VE



〇



J



Note 1 to entry:



SEL is measured in dB(A).



Note 2 to entry:



The reference value



Note 3 to entry:



See B.4 of EN 50332-3:2017 for additional information.



E 〇is



typically the 1 kHz threshold of hearing in humans.



3.3.19.5 digital signal level relative to full scale dBFS le v e l o f a D C - fr e e 9 9 7



H z s in e w a v e w h o s e



u n d ith e re d



p o s itiv e



p e a k v a lu e



is p o s i t i v e d i g i t a l



fu ll s c a le , le a v in g th e c o d e c o r r e s p o n d in g to n e g a tiv e d ig ita l fu ll s c a le u n u s e d



Note 1 to entry:



Levels reported in dBFS are always RMS.



Note 2 to entry: It is invalid to use dBFS for non-RMS levels. Because the definition of full scale is based on a sine wave, the level of signals with a crest factor lower than that of a sine wave may exceed 0 dBFS. In particular, square-wave signals may reach +3,01 dBFS.



4



General requirements



4.1 4.1.1



General Application of requirements and acceptance of materials, components and subassemblies



R e q u i r e m e n t s a r e s p e c i f i e d i n t h e r e l e v a n t c l a u s e s a n d , w h e r e r e f e r e n c e d in t h o s e c l a u s e s , in



the relevant annexes. W h e r e c o m p l i a n c e o f m a t e r i a l s , c o m p o n e n t s o r s u b a s s e m b l i e s is d e m o n s t r a t e d b y i n s p e c t i o n , s u c h c o m p lia n c e m a y b e b y r e v ie w o f p u b lis h e d d a ta o r p r e v io u s te s t re s u lts .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



In te rn a l



and



e x te rn a l



IE C 6 0 0 6 5



a re



e v a lu a tio n



o th e r



c o m p o n e n ts



a c c e p ta b le th a n



to



as



and



p a rt



g iv e



s u b a s s e m b lie s



o f e q u ip m e n t



c o n s id e ra tio n



to



th a t



co ve re d th e



c o m p ly



by



th is



a p p ro p ria te



w ith



IE C 6 0 9 5 0 -1



d o c u m e n t w ith o u t use



of



th e



or



fu rth e r



com ponent



or



s u b a s s e m b l y in t h e e n d - p r o d u c t .



NOTE The paragraph above will be deleted in the next revision of this document, subject to a vote of National Committees at the time. It is added here to provide a smooth transition from the latest editions of IEC 60950-1 and IEC 60065 to this document.



4.1.2



Use of components



W h e re



th e



c o m p o n e n t,



safeguard， s p e c ifie d



or



c o m p o n e n ts



in a



a



c h a ra c te ris tic



s h a ll



re q u ire m e n ts



c o m p ly



of a



w ith



c la u s e , w ith



c o m p o n e n t,



th e



th e



is



re q u ire m e n ts



s a fe ty



a s p e c ts



safeguard



a of



th is



o f th e



or a



docum ent



re le v a n t



IE C



p a rt o r,



of a



w h e re



com ponent



s ta n d a rd s .



NOTE 1 An IEC component standard is considered relevant only if the component in question clearly falls within its scope. NOTE 2



The applicable test for compliance with a component standard is, in general, conducted separately.



W h e re



use



of



an



IE C



com ponent



s ta n d a rd



is



p e rm itte d



above,



e v a lu a tio n



and



te s tin g



of



c o m p o n e n ts s h a ll b e c o n d u c te d a s fo llo w s : 一



a



com ponent



s h a ll



be



checked



fo r



co rre ct



a p p lic a tio n



and



use



in



a cco rd a n ce



w ith



its



ra tin g ; -



a c o m p o n e n t th a t h a s b e e n d e m o n s tr a te d to c o m p ly w ith a s ta n d a r d re le v a n t



IE C



com ponent



s ta n d a rd



s h a ll



be



s u b je c te d



to



th e



h a r m o n iz e d w ith th e



a p p lic a b le



te s ts



of



th is



d o c u m e n t, a s p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t, w ith th e e x c e p tio n o f th o s e te s ts th a t a re p a rt o f th e re le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd ; -



a c o m p o n e n t th a t h a s n o t b e e n d e m o n s t r a t e d to c o m p ly w ith a r e le v a n t s ta n d a r d a s a b o v e s h a ll b e s u b je c t e d to th e a p p lic a b le te s ts o f th is d o c u m e n t, a s p a rt o f th e e q u ip m e n t, a n d to th e



a p p lic a b le



te s ts o f th e



c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd ,



u n d e r th e



c o n d itio n s



o c c u rrin g



in t h e



e q u ip m e n t; a n d -



w h e r e c o m p o n e n ts



a r e u s e d in c i r c u i t s n o t in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e i r s p e c i f i e d



c o m p o n e n t s s h a ll b e te s te d of



s a m p le s



re q u ire d



fo r



u n d e r th e c o n d itio n s o c c u rrin g



te s t



is ,



in



g e n e ra l,



th e



sam e



ra tin g s , th e



in t h e e q u i p m e n t . T h e n u m b e r as



re q u ire d



by



an



e q u iv a le n t



s ta n d a rd .



Compliance is checked by inspection and by the relevant data or tests.



4.1.3



Equipment design and construction



normal operating conditions a s s p e c i f i e d i n C l a u s e B.2, abnormal operating conditions a s s p e c i f i e d i n C l a u s e B.3, a n d single fault conditions a s s p e c i f i e d i n C l a u s e B.4, safeguards a r e p r o v i d e d t o r e d u c e t h e E q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e s o d e s ig n e d a n d c o n s tr u c te d th a t, u n d e r



l i k e l i h o o d o f i n j u r y o r , in t h e c a s e o f f i r e , p r o p e r t y d a m a g e .



P a rts



o f e q u ip m e n t th a t c o u ld



cause



in ju ry



s h a ll



not



be



accessible,



and



accessible



p a rts



s h a ll n o t c a u s e a n in ju ry .



Compliance is checked by inspection and by the relevant tests.



4.1.4



Equipment installation



E xcept as account



g iv e n



in 4 . 1 . 6 ,



m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s



o p e ra tio n , a s a p p lic a b le .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



e q u ip m e n t



in s tru c tio n s



e v a lu a tio n w ith



re g a rd



a c c o rd in g to



to



th is



in s ta lla tio n ,



docum ent re lo c a tio n ,



s h a ll



ta k e



s e rv ic in g



in to and



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Outdoor enclosures p r o v i d i n g a safeguard f u n c t i o n s h a l l c o m p l y equipment a n d outdoor enclosures s h a l l b e s u i t a b l e f o r u s e a t a n y s p e c ifie d



by th e m a n u fa c tu re r.



If n o t s p e c i f i e d



w ith



Outdoor



A n n e x Y.



t e m p e r a t u r e in t h e r a n g e



b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r , th e r a n g e s h a ll b e ta k e n



as: -



m i n i m u m a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re : - 3 3



°C ;



-



m a x i m u m a m b ie n t te m p e ra tu re : + 4 0 °C .



Compliance is checked by inspection and by evaluation of the data provided by the manufacturer. NOTE 1 The temperature values are based on IEC 60721-3-4, Class 4K2. These temperatures do not take into account severe environments (for example, extremely cold or extremely warm), nor do they include provision for heating by radiation from the sun (solar loading). NOTE 2



Attention is drawn to IEC 61587-1 for additional information on performance levels C1, C2 and C3,



4.1.5



Constructions and components not specifically covered



W h e re



th e



e q u ip m e n t



c o n s tru c tio n



safeguards



not



in v o lv e s



s p e c ific a lly



te c h n o lo g ie s ,



co ve re d



in



c o m p o n e n ts



and



m a te ria ls



d o c u m e n t,



th e



e q u ip m e n t



th is



or



m e th o d s



s h a ll



of



p ro v id e



n o t le s s th a n th a t g e n e r a lly a ffo r d e d b y th is d o c u m e n t a n d th e p rin c ip le s o f s a fe ty



c o n ta in e d h e re in .



T h e n e e d fo r a d d itio n a l d e ta ile d



r e q u ir e m e n t s to c o p e w ith a n e w s itu a tio n s h o u ld



be b ro u g h t



p r o m p t ly to th e a tte n tio n o f th e a p p r o p r ia te c o m m it te e .



4.1.6 W h e re



Orientation during transport and use it is c l e a r t h a t t h e o r i e n t a t i o n o f u s e o f e q u i p m e n t is l i k e l y t o h a v e a s i g n i f i c a n t e f f e c t



o n t h e a p p lic a t io n o f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o r th e r e s u lt s o f t e s t s , a ll o r ie n t a t io n s o f u s e s p e c if ie d in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n o r u s e r i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l b e t a k e n m e a n s fo r fix in g



in p l a c e



d ire c t a tta c h m e n t to p ro v id e d



w ith



th e



a



ordinary person,



by an



m o u n tin g



e q u ip m e n t



or



s u rfa c e



in t o a c c o u n t . H o w e v e r , if e q u i p m e n t h a s such



o r th ro u g h



re a d ily



a s th e



th e



a v a ila b le



in



use th e



p ro v is io n



of



b ra c k e ts



m a rk e t,



a ll



o f scre w o r th e lik e ly



h o le s fo r



lik e ,



e ith e r



p o s itio n s



of



o r ie n ta t io n o f th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e ta k e n in to a c c o u n t, in c lu d in g th e p o s s ib ility o f m o u n tin g to a n o n - v e r tic a l s u r fa c e r e g a r d le s s o f th e in s ta lla tio n o r u s e r in s tr u c tio n s th a t a re p r o v id e d b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r.



In



a d d itio n ,



fo r



transportable equipment,



a ll



o rie n ta tio n s



o f tra n s p o rt



s h a ll



be



ta k e n



in to



a c c o u n t.



4.1.7



Choice of criteria



W h e r e th is d o c u m e n t in d ic a te s a c h o ic e b e tw e e n d iffe r e n t c rite ria fo r c o m p lia n c e , o r b e tw e e n d i f f e r e n t m e t h o d s o r c o n d i t i o n s o f t e s t , t h e c h o i c e is s p e c i f i e d b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r .



4.1.8 U n le s s



Liquids and liquid filled components (LFC) s p e c ifie d



as



an



insulating liquid,



liq u id s



s h a ll



be tre a te d



as



e le c tric a lly



c o n d u c tiv e



m a te ria ls .



C o n s tru c tio n s



and



te s t re q u ire m e n ts fo r p re s s u riz e d



LFCs



used



in s id e th e e q u ip m e n t w h e re



a n i n j u r y c a n o c c u r w i t h i n t h e m e a n i n g o f t h i s d o c u m e n t d u e t o l e a k s o f t h e l i q u i d in t h e L F C s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e G .1 5 . H o w e v e r , C la u s e G .1 5 d o e s n o t a p p ly to th e fo llo w in g : -



a n L F C t h a t i s s e a l e d b u t o p e n t o t h e a t m o s p h e r e in t h e e q u i p m e n t ; o r



-



components



c o n ta in in g



s m a ll



a m o u n ts



of



liq u id s



not



lik e ly



to



cause



any



in ju ry



(fo r



e x a m p le , liq u id c r y s ta l d is p la y s , e le c t r o ly tic c a p a c it o r s , liq u id c o o lin g h e a t p ip e s , e tc .); o r -



wet



cell batteries



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



(fo r w e t



cell batteries,



s e e A n n e x M ); o r



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



-



a n L F C a n d its a s s o c ia t e d p a r t s t h a t c o m p ly w it h P .3 .3 ; o r



-



e q u i p m e n t w ith m o r e th a n 1 I o f liq u id .



4.1.9



Electrical measuring instruments



E le c tr ic a l m e a s u r in g in s tr u m e n ts s h a ll h a v e s u ffic ie n t b a n d w id th to p r o v id e a c c u r a te r e a d in g s , ta k in g



in to



account



a ll



c o m p o n e n ts



mains



(D C ,



fre q u e n c y ,



h ig h



fre q u e n c y



and



h a rm o n ic



c o n te n t) o f th e p a r a m e te r b e in g m e a s u re d .



If a n R M S v a l u e is m e a s u r e d , c a r e s h a ll b e t a k e n t h a t t h e m e a s u r i n g i n s t r u m e n t g iv e s a t r u e R M S re a d in g o f n o n -s in u s o id a l w a v e fo r m s a s w e ll a s s in u s o id a l w a v e fo rm s .



M e a s u r e m e n ts s h a ll b e m a d e w ith a m e te r w h o s e in p u t im p e d a n c e h a s a n e g lig ib le in flu e n c e on th e m e a s u re m e n t.



4.1.10 U n le s s



Temperature measurements o th e rw is e



s p e c ifie d , w h e re



th e



r e s u l t o f a t e s t is l i k e l y t o



depend



upon



th e



a m b ie n t



t e m p e r a t u r e ，t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s s p e c i f i e d a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e r a n g e o f t h e e q u i p m e n t ( T m a ) s h a ll



be



ta k e n



in to



a c c o u n t.



t e m p e r a t u r e ( T a m b ) ，e x t r a p o l a t i o n



W hen (a b o v e



p e rfo rm in g and



th e



b e lo w ) th e



te s t



re s u lts



at



a



o f th e



s p e c ific



te s t m a y



a m b ie n t



be



used



to



c o n s i d e r t h e i m p a c t o f r ma o n t h e r e s u l t . C o m p o n e n t s a n d s u b a s s e m b l i e s m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d s e p a ra te ly w h o le be



fro m



th e



e q u ip m e n t



e q u ip m e n t b e in g



e x a m in e d



in



if th e



so te s te d .



o r d e r to



te s t re s u lts



and



e x tra p o la tio n



R e le v a n t te s t d a ta a n d



d e te rm in e



th e



is



re p re s e n ta tiv e



o f th e



m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s s p e c if ic a t io n s



e ffe c t o f te m p e ra tu re



v a ria b ility



on



m ay



a com ponent or



s u b a s s e m b ly (s e e B .1 .5 ).



4.1.11



Steady state conditions



S t e a d y s t a t e c o n d i t i o n s a r e c o n d i t i o n s w h e n t e m p e r a t u r e s t a b i l i t y is c o n s i d e r e d t o e x i s t ( s e e B .1 .5 ).



4.1.12



Hierarchy of safeguards



Safeguards t h a t a r e r e q u i r e d f o r ordinary persons a r e a c c e p t a b l e , b u t m a y n o t b e r e q u i r e d , f o r instructed persons a n d skilled persons. L i k e w i s e , safeguards t h a t a r e r e q u i r e d f o r instructed persons a r e a c c e p t a b l e , b u t m a y n o t b e r e q u i r e d , f o r skilled persons. A reinforced safeguard m a y b e u s e d i n p l a c e o f a basic safeguard safeguard o r a double safeguard. A double safeguard m a y b e reinforced safeguard. Safeguards， o t h e r 4.1.13



th a n



equipment safeguards,



or a used



supplementary in



p la c e



of



a



a r e s p e c i f i e d in s p e c i f i c c l a u s e s .



Examples mentioned in this document



W h e r e e x a m p l e s a r e g i v e n in t h i s d o c u m e n t ，o t h e r e x a m p l e s ， s i t u a t i o n s ，a n d s o l u t i o n s a r e n o t e x c lu d e d .



4.1.14



Tests on parts or samples separate from the end-product



If a t e s t is c o n d u c t e d



on



a p a rt o r s a m p le



s e p a ra te



fro m



c o n d u c t e d a s i f t h e p a r t o r s a m p l e w a s in t h e e n d - p r o d u c t .



4.1.15



Markings and instructions



E q u i p m e n t t h a t is r e q u i r e d b y t h i s d o c u m e n t t o : -



b e a r m a rk in g s ; o r



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



th e



e n d - p r o d u c t, th e te s t s h a ll



be



旧C -



b e p r o v id e d w ith in s tr u c tio n s ; o r



-



b e p r o v id e d w ith



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



instructional safeguards



s h a ll m e e t t h e r e le v a n t r e q u i r e m e n t s o f A n n e x F.



Compliance is checked by inspection. NOTE In Finland, Norway and Sweden, class I pluggable equipment type A intended for connection to other equipment or a network shall, if safety relies on connection to reliable earthing or if surge suppressors are connected between the network terminals and accessible parts, have a marking stating that the equipment must be connected to an earthed mains socket-outlet.



4.2



Energy source classifications



4.2.1



Class 1 energy source



U n le s s o th e rw is e



s p e c ifie d , a c la s s 1 s o u rc e



is a n e n e r g y



so u rce



w ith



le v e ls



n o t e x c e e d in g



c la s s 1 lim its u n d e r:



-



normal operating conditions;



-



abnormal operating conditions



-



single fault conditions



A



protective conductor



4.2.2



and th a t d o n o t le a d to a



single fault condition;



and



t h a t d o n o t r e s u l t in c l a s s 2 l im i t s b e in g e x c e e d e d .



is a c l a s s 1 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e .



Class 2 energy source



U n le s s



o th e rw is e



c la s s 1



lim its



s p e c ifie d ,



and



not



a



c la s s 2



e x c e e d in g



so u rce



c la s s 2



is



an



lim its



e n e rg y under



so u rce



w ith



le v e ls



e x c e e d in g



normal operating conditions,



abnormal operating conditions, or single fault conditions. 4.2.3 A



Class 3 energy source



c la s s 3



so u rce



is



an



e n e rg y



so u rce



w ith



le v e ls



e x c e e d in g



operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions,



or



c la s s 2



lim its



under



single fault conditions,



normal or any



e n e r g y s o u r c e d e c l a r e d t o b e a c l a s s 3 s o u r c e , a s g i v e n in 4 . 2 . 4 .



A n e u t r a l c o n d u c t o r is a c l a s s 3 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e .



4.2.4



Energy source classification by declaration



T h e m a n u fa c tu r e r m a y d e c la re : -



a c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e to b e e ith e r a c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e o r a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e ;



-



a c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e to b e a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e .



4.3



Protection against energy sources



4.3.1



General



T h e t e r m s “ p e r s o n s ” ，“ b o d y ” ，a n d “ b o d y p a r t s ” a r e r e p r e s e n t e d b y t h e p r o b e s o f A n n e x V .



4.3.2 4.3.2.1 No



Safeguards for protection of an ordinary person Safeguards between a class 1 energy source and an ordinary person



safeguards



a re re q u ire d



b e tw e e n



F ig u re 9). C o n s e q u e n tly , a c la s s 1 e n e r g y s o u rc e m a y b e



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



ordinary person ( s e e accessible t o a n ordinary person.



a c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e a n d a n



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Ordinary person IEC



Figure 9 - Model for protection of an ordinary person against a class 1 energy source 4.3.2.2



Safeguards between a class 2 energy source and an ordinary person basic safeguard



A t le a s t o n e



person



is r e q u i r e d



b e tw e e n



a c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e a n d an



ordinary



(s e e F ig u re 10 ).



Class 2 energy source



o



Ordinary person



Basic safeguard



Figure 10 - Model for protection of an ordinary person against a class 2 energy source 4.3.2.3



Safeguards between a class 2 energy source and an ordinary person during ordinary person servicing conditions



ordinary person s e r v i c i n g c o n d i t i o n s r e q u i r e a basic safeguard t o b e r e m o v e d o r d e f e a t e d , a n instructional safeguard a s d e s c r i b e d i n C l a u s e F . 5 s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d a n d l o c a t e d in s u c h a w a y t h a t a n ordinary person w i l l s e e t h e i n s t r u c t i o n p r i o r t o r e m o v i n g o r d e f e a t i n g t h e basic safeguard ( s e e F i g u r e 1 1 ) . If



The



instructional safeguard



(s e e C la u s e



F.5)



s h a ll in c lu d e a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g :



-



i dent i f y p a rts a n d lo c a tio n s o f th e c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e ;



-



s p e c i f y a c tio n s th a t w ill p r o te c t p e r s o n s fr o m th a t e n e r g y s o u r c e ; a n d



-



s p e c i f y a c tio n s to r e in s ta te o r r e s to r e th e



If



ordinary person



d e fe a te d ,



and



safeguard



w h e re



th e



c o n d itio n s



e q u ip m e n t



is



re q u ire in te n d e d



F.5), d i r e c t e d t o w a r d s basic safeguard b y c h i l d r e n .



(se e



d e fe a tin g th e



s e rv ic in g



basic safeguard.



C la u s e



Class 2 energy source



[



Removed or defeated basic safeguard



O



a fo r



basic safeguard use



a d u lts ,



Instructional safeguard



in s h a ll



〇



th e



to



hom e,



w a rn



be



re m o ve d



or



instructional



an



a g a in s t



re m o v in g



or



Ordinary person



V IEC



Figure 11 - Model for protection of an ordinary person against a class 2 energy source during ordinary person servicing conditions 4.3.2.4



Safeguards between a class 3 energy source and an ordinary person



U n le s s o th e r w is e s p e c ifie d , -



equipment basic safeguard f o r m i n g a double safeguard); o r an



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



and an



equipment supplementary safeguard



(to g e th e r



旧C



-



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



a reinforced safeguard



is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n a c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a n



o



ordinary person



Supplementary



(s e e F ig u re 12).



Ordinary person



safeguard



IEC



Figure 12 - Model for protection of an ordinary person against a class 3 energy source 4.3.3 4.3.3.1



Safeguards for protection of an instructed person Safeguards between a class 1 energy source and an instructed person



safeguards F i g u r e 13). No



a re re q u ire d b e tw e e n a c la s s



1 energy source



C la s s



1 e n e rg y



so u rce and an



instructed person



(se e



Instructed person __________________



IEC



Figure 13 - Model for protection of an instructed person against a class 1 energy source 4.3.3.2



Safeguards between a class 2 energy source and an instructed person



instructed person u s e s a precautionary safeguard ( s e e F i g u r e 14). N o a d d i t i o n a l safeguards a r e r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n a c l a s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a n instructed person. C o n s e q u e n t l y , a c l a s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e m a y b e accessible t o a n instructed person.



An



)



f



厂



C lass 2



Precautionary safeguard



Instructed person



___________ /



〇



^



J



safeguards



C o n s e q u e n tly ,



a



a re



c la s s 2



a



r



O



Skill safeguard



V



a d d itio n a l



a



f



Class 2 energy source



No



skilled person. skilled person.



so u rce



to a



(se e



Skilled person



v____________ / IEC



Figure 17 - Model for protection of a skilled person against a class 2 energy source 4.3.4.3



Safeguards between a class 3 energy source and a skilled person



A skilled person u s e s a skill safeguard ( s e e F i g u r e 18). U n l e s s o t h e r w i s e s p e c i f i e d ( f o r e x a m p l e , s e e 8.5.4), n o a d d i t i o n a l safeguards a r e r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n a c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e a n d a skilled person. C o n s e q u e n t l y , a c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e m a y b e accessible t o a skilled person.



Class 3 energy source



o



O



Skill safeguard L



N



f



f



J



Skilled person



^____________ y IEC



Figure 18 - Model for protection of a skilled person against a class 3 energy source D u rin g e q u ip m e n t s e rv ic in g



c o n d itio n s



o n a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e , a



safeguard



r e d u c e t h e l i k e l i h o o d o f i n j u r y d u e t o a n i n v o l u n t a r y r e a c t i o n is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n : Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



in te n d e d



to



旧C -



another



c la s s 3



e n e rg y



so u rce ,



not



u n d e rg o in g



s e rv ic e



and



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



in



th e



sam e



v ic in ity



as



th e



c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e b e in g s e r v ic e d ; a n d



-



a



skilled person



(s e e 0 .5 .7 a n d F ig u re 19). f



Class 3 energy source



O



Skilled person



Skill safeguard



O



Safeguard



V



j



、



C



J



Another class 3 energy source



J



l



j IEC



Figure 19 - Model for protection of a skilled person against class 3 energy sources during equipment servicing conditions 4.3.5



Safeguards in a restricted access area



C e rta in



e q u i p m e n t is i n t e n d e d



e q u ip m e n t s h a ll h a v e



fo r in s ta lla tio n



safeguards



a s re q u ire d



e x c lu s iv e ly in 4 . 3 . 3 f o r



restricted access areas. S u c h instructed persons a n d 4 . 3 . 4 f o r



in



skilled persons. 4.4



Safeguards



4.4.1



Equivalent materials or components



W h e re



th is



d o c u m e n t s p e c ifie s



in s u la tio n o r



NOTE



p a rtic u la r



material flammability class,



a



safeguard p a r a m e t e r , s u c h a s t h e r m a l c l a s s o f safeguard w i t h a b e t t e r p a r a m e t e r m a y b e u s e d .



For a hierarchy of the m aterial fla m m a b ility classes see Table S.1, Table S.2 and Table S.3.



4.4.2



Composition of a safeguard



A safeguard 4.4.3



m a y b e c o m p ris e d o f o n e o r m o re e le m e n ts .



Safeguard robustness



4.4.3.1 W h e re



General a



m e ta l,



safeguard ( f o r e x a m p l e , a n enclosure, b a r r i e r , solid insulation, e a r t h e d e t c . ) i s accessible t o a n ordinary person o r t o a n instructed person, t h e



s o lid



g la s s ,



safeguard For a



a



s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e l e v a n t r o b u s t n e s s t e s t s a s s p e c i f i e d in 4 . 4 . 3 . 2 t o 4 . 4 . 3 . 1 0 .



safeguard



t h a t is



accessible



a fte r o p e n in g an e x te rn a l



enclosure,



see



4.4.3 . 5.



R e q u ir e m e n ts fo r: -



a d h e s i o n o f m e ta lliz e d c o a tin g s ; a n d



-



a d h e s i v e s s e c u rin g p a rts s e rv in g a s



-



parts th a t m a y d e fe a t a



safeguard



safeguards;



and



if a n a d h e s iv e fa ils



a r e s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e P . 4 .



4.4.3.2



Steady force tests



An



enclosure



-



transportable equipment;



-



hand-held equipment;



-



direct plug-in equipment



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



o r b a r r i e r t h a t is



and



accessible and



a n d t h a t is u s e d a s a



safeguard



o f:



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e s te a d y fo r c e te s t o f C la u s e T .4 .



A safeguard



t h a t is



accessible



a n d th a t o n ly a c ts a s a



fire enclosure



o r fire b a r r ie r s h a ll b e



s u b je c te d to th e s te a d y fo rc e te s t o f C la u s e T .3 .



A ll o th e r



enclosures



o r b a rrie rs th a t a re



accessible



and th a t a re u s e d as a



safeguard



s h a ll



be s u b je c te d to th e s te a d y fo rc e te s t o f C la u s e T .5 . T h e re a re n o re q u ire m e n ts fo r th e b o tto m of



e q u ip m e n t



h a v in g



a



m ass



of



m o re



o r i e n t a t i o n in w h i c h t h e b o t t o m o f t h e



th a n



18



enclosure



kg



u n le s s



th e



user



in s tru c tio n s



p e rm it



an



b e c o m e s th e to p o r a s id e o f th e e q u ip m e n t.



T h i s s u b c l a u s e d o e s n o t a p p l y t o g l a s s . R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r g l a s s a r e g i v e n in 4 . 4 . 3 . 6 .



4.4.3.3



Drop tests



T h e fo llo w in g e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e d ro p te s t o f C la u s e T .7 :



-



hand-held equipment;



-



direct plug-in equipment;



-



transportable equipment;



-



movable equipment



re q u irin g



liftin g



or



h a n d lin g



by



an



ordinary person



as



p a rt o f



its



in te n d e d u s e , in c lu d in g ro u tin e re lo c a tio n ;



NOTE An example of such equipment is a paper shredder that rests on a waste container that requires removal of the paper shredder to empty the container. -



d e s k - t o p e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g a m a s s o f 7 k g o r l e s s t h a t is i n t e n d e d f o r u s e w i t h a n y o n e o f th e fo llo w in g : •



a c o rd -c o n n e c te d te le p h o n e h a n d s e t; o r



•



a n o th e r c o r d - c o n n e c te d h a n d - h e ld a c c e s s o r y w ith a n a c o u s tic fu n c tio n ; o r



•



a h e a d s e t.



4.4.3.4



Impact tests



A ll e q u ip m e n t,



o th e r th a n



th a t s p e c ifie d



in 4 . 4 . 3 . 3 ,



s h a ll



be



s u b je c te d



to



th e



im p a c t te s t o f



C la u s e T . 6.



T h e i m p a c t t e s t o f C l a u s e T . 6 is n o t a p p l i e d t o t h e f o l l o w i n g : -



t he b o tto m



of an



th e b o tto m o f th e -



u s e r in s tru c tio n s p e rm it a n o rie n ta tio n



in w h i c h



to p o r a s id e o f th e e q u ip m e n t;



glass;



NOTE -



enclosure, e x c e p t i f t h e enclosure b e c o m e s t h e



Impact tests for glass are in 4.4.3.6.



t he s u rfa c e o f th e



enclosure



of



stationary equipment,



in c lu d in g



e q u ip m e n t fo r b u ild in g -



i n , t h a t is



accessible;



•



not



•



p ro te c te d a fte r in s ta lla tio n .



4.4.3.5



or



Internal accessible safeguard tests



safeguard t h a t i s accessible t o a n ordinary person a f t e r o p e n i n g e x t e r n a l enclosure a n d w h o s e f a i l u r e w o u l d a l l o w c l a s s 2 o r c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s t o accessible s h a l l b e s u b j e c t e d t o t h e s t e a d y f o r c e t e s t o f C l a u s e T . 3 .



An



in te rn a l



4.4.3.6



s o lid



Glass impact tests



T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s b e lo w a r e a p p l i c a b le to a ll p a r t s m a d e o f g la s s , w it h th e e x c e p t i o n o f:



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



an be



旧C -



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



p l a t e n g la s s u s e d o n c o p ie r s , s c a n n e r s a n d t h e lik e , w h e r e th e g la s s h a s b e e n s u b je c t e d t o t h e s t e a d y f o r c e t e s t o f C l a u s e T . 3 a n d is p r o v i d e d w i t h a c o v e r o r d e v i c e t o p r o t e c t th e p la te n g la s s ; a n d



-



C R T s : R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r C R T s a r e g i v e n in A n n e x U ; a n d



-



g l a s s t h a t is l a m i n a t e d o r h a s a c o n s t r u c t i o n s u c h t h a t g l a s s p a r t i c l e s d o n o t s e p a r a t e f r o m e a c h o t h e r i f t h e g l a s s is b r o k e n .



NOTE



Laminated glass includes constructions such as plastic film affixed to a single side of a glass.



G l a s s t h a t is



accessible



ordinary person



to a n



instructed person:



o r to a n



-



h a v i n g a s u r f a c e a r e a e x c e e d i n g 0 ,1 m 2 ; o r



-



h a v i n g a m a jo r d im e n s io n e x c e e d in g 4 5 0 m m ; o r



-



t hat p r e v e n ts a c c e s s to c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s o th e r th a n P S 3



s h a ll b e s u b je c t e d to th e g la s s im p a c t te s t o f C la u s e T .9 .



4.4.3.7



Glass fixation test



L a m in a te d



g la s s u s e d a s a



safeguard



th a t p re v e n ts a c c e s s to c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s



o th e r



th a n P S 3 s h a ll b e s u b je c t e d to th e fo llo w in g fix a tio n te s ts : -



a g l a s s i m p a c t t e s t a s g i v e n in C l a u s e T . 9 w i t h a n i m p a c t o f 1 J a p p l i e d t h r e e t i m e s ; a n d



-



a



p u s h /p u ll



te s t



w ith



10



N



a p p lie d



in



th e



c e n tre



of



th e



g la s s



in



th e



le a s t



fa v o u ra b le



d ire c tio n .



NOTE To perform the test, any suitable method can be used, such as using suction handles or gluing a support to the glass.



4.4.3.8



Thermoplastic material tests



safeguard



If a



is o f m o u l d e d



o r fo rm e d



th e rm o p la s tic



m a te ria l,



th e



safeguard



s h a ll



be



so



c o n s tr u c te d t h a t a n y s h r in k a g e o r d is to r tio n o f th e m a te r ia l d u e to r e le a s e o f in te r n a l s tr e s s e s s h a ll n o t d e f e a t its



safeguard



fu n c tio n . T h e th e rm o p la s tic



m a te r ia l s h a ll b e s u b je c te d



to th e



s tre s s re lie f te s t o f C la u s e T .8 .



4.4.3.9 W h e re s h a ll



Air comprising a safeguard a



safeguard



p re ve n t



is c o m p r i s e d



d is p la c e m e n t



o f th e



o f a ir (fo r e x a m p le , a ir



by



a



body



p a rt



a or



clearance), a



a b a rrie r o r



c o n d u c tiv e



p a rt.



The



enclosure b a rrie r



or



enclosure



s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e m e c h a n i c a l s t r e n g t h t e s t s p e c i f i e d in A n n e x T , a s a p p l i c a b l e .



4.4.3.10



Compliance criteria



During and after the tests: -



except for PS3, class 3 energy sources shall not become a c c e s s ib le to an o rd in a ry p e rs o n or to an in s tru c te d p e rs o n ; and



-



glass shall:



-



•



not break or crack; or



•



not expel pieces of glass greater than 30 g in mass or greater than 50 mm in any dimension; or



•



pass the fragmentation test of Clause T.10 on a separate test sample; and



all other s a fe g u a rd s shall remain effective.



4.4.4 If a n



Displacement of a safeguard by an insulating liquid insulating liquid



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



d is p la c e s a ir c o m p ris in g a



safeguard:



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



-



t he re q u ire m e n ts o f 5 .4 .1 2 a n d 6 .4 .9 a p p ly to th e



-



t he



re q u ire m e n ts



o f 5 .4 .2



insulating liquid



p re s e n t.



P a rtia l



or



condition If t h e



to ta l



lo s s



5 .4 .3



a p p ly



insulating liquid



o f th e



to



th e



s h a ll



be



e q u ip m e n t



and



b o th



c o n s id e re d



w ith



and



w ith o u t



th e



abnormal operating



an



o f th e e q u ip m e n t.



p o w e r s u p p lie d



to p a r ts im m e r s e d



p a rtia l o r to ta l lo s s o f th e th e



and



insulating liquid;



im m e rs e d



p a rts .



An



in



insulating liquid, e x a m p le



of



such



insulating liquid



is d i s c o n n e c t e d



in t h e e v e n t o f



th e re q u ire m e n ts o f 6 .4 .2 to 6 .4 .8 d o n o t a p p ly fo r a



d is c o n n e c t



s y s te m



is



a



flo a t



s w itc h



s y s te m



c o m p ly in g w ith A n n e x K.



NOTE The use of insulating liquids to replace a basic insulation, a supplementary insulation or a reinforced insulation is not covered by the requirements of this document.



4.4.5



Safety interlocks



U n le s s



o th e rw is e



s p e c ifie d ,



if



a



safety interlock



is



used



as



a



ordinary person;



or



safeguard



fo r



p ro te c tio n



a g a in s t: -



a c la s s 2 o r a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r a n



-



a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r a n



th e



safety interlock



4.5



Explosion



4.5.1



instructed person,



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith A n n e x K.



General



Explosion



c a n be c a u s e d by:



-



c h e m i c a l re a c tio n ;



-



m e c h a n i c a l d e fo rm a tio n o f a s e a le d c o n ta in e r;



-



r api d c o m b u s tio n o r d e c o m p o s itio n , p ro d u c in g a la rg e v o lu m e o f h o t g a s ;



-



hi gh p re s s u re ; or



-



hi gh te m p e ra tu re .



NOTE 1 rupture.



Depending on the energy rate, explosion can be categorized as a deflagration, a detonation, or pressure



NOTE 2 An ultracapacitor (for example, a double layer capacitor) is a high energy source and can explode following overcharging and high temperature. F o r re q u ire m e n ts re g a rd in g



4.5.2 D u rin g



explosion



of



batteries,



see A nnex



M.



Requirements normal operating conditions



and



abnormal operating conditions,



an



explosion



s h a ll n o t o c c u r.



If a n



explosion



o ccu rs



d u rin g



single fault conditions,



it



s h a ll



not



cause



in ju ry



and



th e



e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t p a rts o f th is d o c u m e n t.



Compliance is checked by inspection and tests as specified in Clause B.2, Clause B.3 and Clause BA.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



4.6



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Fixing of conductors



4.6.1



Requirements



C o n d u c to rs



s h a ll



clearances



or



be



such



th a t d is p la c e m e n t c a n n o t d e fe a t



creepage distances



a



safeguard,



such



as



re d u c in g



b e l o w t h e v a l u e s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 2 a n d 5 . 4 . 3 .



T h e f ix in g o f t h e c o n d u c t o r s s h a ll b e s u c h t h a t , if a c o n d u c t o r b e c o m e s lo o s e o r d e t a c h e d , th e c o n d u c to r c a n n o t d e fe a t a



safeguard,



s u c h a s re d u c in g



clearances



or



creepage distances



b e l o w t h e v a l u e s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 4 . 2 a n d 5 . 4 . 3 .



F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s , it i s a s s u m e d t h a t : -



t w o in d e p e n d e n t f ix in g s w ill n o t b e c o m e lo o s e o r d e t a c h e d a t th e s a m e tim e ; a n d



-



p a r t s fix e d b y m e a n s o f s c r e w s o r n u ts p ro v id e d w ith s e lf- lo c k in g w a s h e r s o r o th e r m e a n s o f lo c k in g a re n o t lia b le to b e c o m e lo o s e o r d e ta c h e d .



NOTE



4.6.2



Spring washers and the like can provide satisfactory locking.



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection， by measurement or， in case o f doubt， by the test of Clause T.2 applied in the most unfavourable direction. EXAMPLE



Constructions regarded as meeting the requirements include:



-



close-fitting tubing (for example, a heat shrink or rubber sleeve), applied over the wire and its termination;



-



conductors connected by soldering and held in place near to the termination, independently of the soldered connection;



-



conductors connected by soldering and securely hooked in before soldering, provided that the hole through which the conductor is passed is not unduly large;



一



conductors connected to screw terminals, with an additional fixing near to the terminal that clamps, in the case of stranded conductors, the insulation and not only the conductors;



-



conductors connected to screw terminals and provided with terminators that are unlikely to become free (for example, ring lugs crimped onto the conductors),however, the pivoting of such terminators is considered; or



-



short rigid conductors that remain in position when the terminal screw is loosened.



4.7



Equipment for direct insertion into mains socket-outlets



4.7.1



General



E q u ip m e n t in c o r p o r a tin g in te g r a l p in s fo r in s e r tio n



in to



mains



s o c k e t- o u tle ts s h a ll n o t im p o s e



u n d u e to r q u e o n th e s o c k e t- o u tle t. T h e m e a n s fo r re ta in in g th e p in s s h a ll w ith s ta n d th e fo r c e s t o w h i c h t h e p i n s a r e l i k e l y t o b e s u b j e c t e d in n o r m a l u s e .



4.7.2



Requirements



The



mains



The



e q u i p m e n t i s i n s e r t e d , a s in n o r m a l u s e , i n t o a f i x e d



p lu g p a rt s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t s ta n d a r d fo r th e



mains



p lu g .



s o c k e t-o u tle t o f a c o n fig u ra tio n



as



i n t e n d e d b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , w h i c h is p i v o t e d a b o u t a h o r i z o n t a l a x i s i n t e r s e c t i n g t h e c e n t r e lin e s o f th e c o n ta c ts a t a d is ta n c e o f 8 m m



b e h in d th e e n g a g e m e n t fa c e o f th e s o c k e t o u tle t



p a ra lle l to th e e n g a g e m e n t fa c e .



4.7.3



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection and, the additional torque that has to be applied to the socket-outlet to maintain the engagement face in the vertical plane shall not exceed 0,25 Nm. The torque to keep the socket-outlet itself in the vertical plane is not included in this value. NOTE 1



In Australia and New Zealand, compliance is checked in accordance with AS/NZS 3112.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



NOTE 2 In the United Kingdom, the torque test is performed using a socket-outlet complying with BS 1363， and the plug part shall be assessed to the relevant clauses of BS 1363.



4.8



Equipment containing coin / button cell batteries



4.8.1



General



T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s a p p ly to e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g r e m o te c o n tr o ls , th a t: -



a r e lik e ly to b e



-



include



accessible



to c h ild r e n ; a n d



coin / button cell batteries



w ith a d ia m e t e r o f 3 2 m m o r le s s .



T h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :



-



professional equipment;



-



e q u i p m e n t f o r u s e in l o c a t i o n s w h e r e i t i s u n l i k e l y t h a t c h i l d r e n w i l l b e p r e s e n t ; o r



-



e q u i p m e n t c o n ta in in g



4.8.2



coin



/



button cell batteries



t h a t a r e s o l d e r e d in p l a c e .



Instructional safeguard



E q u ip m e n t c o n ta in in g



safeguard



one



o r m o re



coin



/



button cell batteries



s h a ll h a v e a n



instructional



in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 .



instructional safeguard i s n o t r e p l a c e d o r a r e o n l y accessible a f t e r



The



re q u ire d



w h e re



batteries



a re



n o t in te n d e d



to



be



d a m a g in g th e e q u ip m e n t.



instructional safeguard



T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



th e s e



s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



-



e l e m e n t 1a:



n o t a v a ila b le



-



e l e m e n t 2:



“ D o n o t in g e s t b a tte ry , C h e m ic a l B u m



-



e l e m e n t 3:



th e fo llo w in g o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



H a z a rd ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd in g



[T h e r e m o t e c o n t r o l s u p p lie d w it h ] T h is p r o d u c t c o n t a in s a c o in / b u t t o n c e ll b a tte ry .



If t h e



c o in



/ b u tto n



c e ll



b a tte ry



is s w a l l o w e d ,



it c a n



cause



se ve re



i n t e r n a l b u r n s in j u s t 2 h o u r s a n d c a n l e a d t o d e a t h . -



e l e m e n t 4:



th e fo llo w in g o r e q u iv a le n t te x t K e e p n e w a n d u s e d b a tte rie s a w a y fro m c h ild re n . If t h e



b a tte ry c o m p a rtm e n t d o e s



n o t c lo s e s e c u re ly , s to p



u s in g th e



p ro d u ct



a n d k e e p it a w a y f r o m c h i l d r e n . If y o u t h i n k b a t t e r i e s



m ig h t h a v e



b e e n s w a llo w e d



o r p la c e d



in s id e a n y p a rt



o f th e b o d y , s e e k im m e d ia te m e d ic a l a tte n tio n .



4.8.3



Construction



E q u ip m e n t



h a v in g



battery



a



c o m p a rtm e n t



p o s s ib ility o f c h ild re n re m o v in g th e



-



a



tool,



w h ic h



such



as



a



battery



t he



battery



to rq u e o f 0 ,5 N m



c o m p a rtm e n t



door



/



cover



is r e q u i r e d and



s h a ll b e r e q u ir e d to o p e n th e c o m p a r t m e n t ; -



/



s h a ll



be



d e s ig n e d



to



re d u c e



th e



b y o n e o f th e fo llo w in g m e th o d s :



s c r e w d r iv e r o r c o in ,



c a s e a m in im u m



door



cover



to



open



a m in im u m



th e



battery



c o m p a rtm e n t,



in



a n g le o f 9 0 d e g r e e s o f ro ta tio n



or



re q u ire s



th e



a p p lic a tio n



of



a



m in im u m



of



tw o



in d e p e n d e n t a n d s im u lta n e o u s m o v e m e n ts to o p e n b y h a n d .



4.8.4 4.8.4.1



Tests Test sequence



One sample shall be subjected to the applicable tests of 4.8.4.2 to 4.8.4.6. If applicable, the test in 4.8.4.2 shall be conducted first.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



4.8.4.2



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Stress relief test



If the b a tte ry compartment utilizes moulded or formed thermoplastic materials, the sample consisting of the complete equipment， or of the complete e n c lo s u re together with any supporting framework, is tested according to the stress relief test of Clause T.8. During the test, the b a tte ry may be removed.



4.8.4.3



Battery replacement test



For equipment with a b a tte ry compartment door / cover, the b a tte ry compartment shall be opened and closed and the b a tte ry removed and replaced ten times to simulate normal replacement according to the manufacturer's instructions. If the b a tte ry compartment door / cover is secured by one or more screws, the screws are loosened and then tightened applying a continuous linear torque according to Table 37, using a suitable screwdriver， spanner or key. The screws are to be completely removed and reinserted each time.



4.8.4.4



Drop test



Portable equipment having a mass of 7 kg or less are subjected to three drops from a height of 1 m onto a horizontal surface in positions likely to produce the maximum force on the b a tte ry compartment in accordance with Clause T.7. If the equipment is a remote control, it shall be subjected to ten drops.



4.8.4.5



Impact test



The b a tte ry compartment door / cover shall be subjected to three impacts in a direction perpendicular to the b a tte ry compartment door / cover according to the test method of Clause T.6 with a force of: - 0 , 5 J (102 mm television; or - 2



土



10 mm height) for glasses for watching， for example， 3 dimensional



J (408 mm ± 1 0 mm height) for all other doors / covers.



4.8.4.6



Crush test



Hand held remote control devices are to be supported by a fixed rigid supporting surface in a position likely to produce the most adverse results as long as the position can be selfsupported. A crushing force of 330 N ± 5 N is applied to the exposed top and back surfaces of remote control devices placed in a stable condition by a flat surface measuring approximately 100 mm by 250 mm for a period o f 10 s.



4.8.5



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by applying a force of 30 N ± 1 N for 10 s to the b a tte ry compartment door / cover by the straight unjointed version of the test probe of Figure V.1 at the most unfavourable place and in the most unfavourable direction. The force shall be applied in one direction at a time. The b a tte ry compartment door / cover shall remain functional, and: -



the b a tte ry shall not become a c c e s s ib le ; or



-



it shall not be possible remove the b a tte ry from the product with the test hook of Figure 20 using a force of approximately 20 N.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 D im ensions in m illim etres



1 ± 0,1



§



IEC



Material: steel



Figure 20 - Test hook 4.9



Likelihood of fire or shock due to entry of conductive objects



W h e r e th e e n try o f a c o n d u c tiv e o b je c t fro m o u ts id e th e e q u ip m e n t o r fro m a n o th e r p a rt o f th e e q u i p m e n t c a n r e s u l t in : -



b r i d g i n g w ith in P S 3 a n d E S 3



-



b r i d g i n g a n E S 3 c ir c u it to



c irc u its ; o r



accessible,



u n e a rth e d c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ,



to p a n d s id e o p e n in g s a b o v e P S 3 a n d E S 3 c irc u its s h a ll: -



b e lo c a te d m o r e th a n 1 ,8 m a b o v e th e flo o r; o r



-



c o m p l y w ith A n n e x P.



Compliance is checked by inspection or according to Annex P.



4.10 4.10.1



Components requirements Disconnect device



E q u ip m e n t



c o n n e c te d



to



th e



mains



s h a ll



be



p ro v id e d



w ith



a



disconnect device



in



a c c o r d a n c e w i t h A n n e x L.



4.10.2



Switches and relays



S w i t c h e s a n d r e l a y s l o c a t e d in a P S 3 c i r c u i t o r u s e d a s a



safeguard



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e



G .1 o r C la u s e G .2 r e s p e c t iv e ly .



5 5.1



Electrically-caused injury General



T o re d u ce



th e



lik e lih o o d



o f p a in fu l e ffe c ts a n d



in ju r y d u e to e le c tr ic c u r r e n t p a s s in g th r o u g h



th e h u m a n b o d y , e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p ro v id e d w ith th e



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



safeguards



s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 5.



旧C



5.2



Classification and limits of electrical energy sources



5.2.1



Electrical energy source classifications



5.2.1.1 ES1 -



-



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



ES1



is a c l a s s 1 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w it h c u r r e n t o r v o l t a g e le v e ls : not e x c e e d in g ES1



lim its u n d e r



•



normal operating conditions,



•



abnormal operating conditions， a n d



•



single fault conditions safeguard; a n d



of



a



and



c o m p o n e n t， d e v ic e



or



ES2 l i m i t s u n d e r single fault conditions supplementary safeguard. not



NOTE



e x c e e d in g



in s u la tio n



of a



not



s e rv in g



basic safeguard



as



a



or of a



For accessibility requirements， see 5.3.1 •



5.2.1.2



ES2



E S 2 is a c l a s s 2 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w h e r e : -



b o t h th e v o lta g e a n d th e c u r r e n t e x c e e d th e lim its fo r E S 1 ; a n d



-



under •



normal operating conditions,



•



abnormal operating conditions,



•



single fault conditions，



and and



e ith e r th e v o lta g e o r th e c u r r e n t d o e s n o t e x c e e d th e lim it fo r E S 2 .



NOTE



For accessibility requirements, see 5.3.1.



5.2.1.3



ES3



E S 3 is a c l a s s 3 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w h e r e b o t h t h e v o l t a g e a n d c u r r e n t e x c e e d t h e l i m i t fo r E S 2 .



5.2.2 5.2.2.1



Electrical energy source ES1 and ES2 limits General



T h e l i m i t s s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 2 . 2 a r e w i t h r e s p e c t t o e a r t h o r w i t h r e s p e c t t o a n



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



accessible



p a rt.



IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018



L 1 J



l i j



lo



s



cn



A



ioa s



I S



0)



f



蒼



6 e —



d )



lco I L I J



E



•g



E



O



CO LU



ES3 Current ES2 Current



2



ES1 Current ES1



ES2



ES3 Potential, volts ie c



Figure 21 - Illustration showing ES limits for voltage and current For



any



v o lta g e



up



to



th e



v o lta g e



lim it,



th e re



is



no



lim it fo r th e



c u rre n t.



L ik e w is e



fo r a n y



c u r r e n t u p t o t h e c u r r e n t l i m i t , t h e r e is n o l i m i t f o r t h e v o l t a g e , s e e F i g u r e 2 1 .



5.2.2.2



Steady state voltage and current limits



A n e le c tric a l e n e rg y s o u rc e



c l a s s is d e t e r m i n e d f r o m



b o th th e v o lta g e a n d th e c u rre n t u n d e r



normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions,



and



single fault conditions



(s e e T a b le 4 ).



T h e v a lu e s a re th e m a x im u m



th a t c a n b e d e liv e re d



b y t h e s o u r c e . S t e a d y s t a t e is c o n s i d e r e d



e s ta b lis h e d w h e n th e v o lta g e o r c u r r e n t v a lu e s p e r s is t fo r 2 s o r lo n g e r, o th e r w is e th e lim its o f 5 .2 .2 .3 , 5 .2 .2 .4 o r 5 .2 .2 .5 a p p ly , a s a p p ro p ria te .



NOTE In Denmark, a warning (marking safeguard) for high touch current is required if the touch current exceeds the limits of 3,5 mA AC or 10 mA DC.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Table 4 - Electrical energy source limits for steady state ES1 and ES2 ES1 limits



Energy source



ES2 limits CCQ COO



Voltage



Current a. c. d



Voltage



Current b* c- e



DC c



60 V



2 mA



120 V



25 mA



AC up to 1 kHz



30 V RMS



50 V RMS



42,4 V peak



70,7 V peak



AC > 1 kHz up to 100 kHz



30 V RMS + 0 , 4 /



0,5 mA RMS



42,4 V peak. + 0,4 \ 2 /



0,707 mA peak



AC above 100 kHz



AC and DC



70,7 V peak + 0,9



70 V RMS



140 V RMS



99 V peak



198 V peak



^D c(V ) ( LrACRMs(V ) ^ 1 Combined



50 V RMS + 0 , 9 /



60



ES2



/DC(mA) ^ /ACRMs(mA) ^ 1 2 0,5 '



^RMS limit



See Figure 23 ^rDc(V )



5 mA RMS



(； ACpeak(V )



/DC(mA)



Gpeak limit



2



/ACpeak(mA) T



0,707



See Figure 22



-2： 1



As an alternative to the requirements above, the values below can be used for purely sinusoidal waveforms



Energy source



AC up to 1 kHz



ES1 limits



ES2 limits



Current c



Current c



RMS



RMS



0,5 mA



5 mA



0,5 mA x / d



5 mA + 0f9 5 / e



50 m A d



100 m A e



ES3



AC > 1 kHz up to 100 kHz AC above 100 kHz



> ES2



/ i s in kHz. Peak values shall be used for non-sinusoidal voltage and current. RMS values may be used only for sinusoidal voltage and current. See 5.7 for measurement of prospective touch voltage and touch current. a



Current is measured using the measuring network specified in Figure 4 of IEC 60990:2016.



b



Current is measured using the measuring network specified in Figure 5 of IEC 60990:2016.



c



For sinusoidal waveforms and DC, the current may be measured using a 2 000 Q resistor.



d



Above 22 kHz the accessible area is limited to 1 cm2.



e



Above 36 kHz the accessible area is limited to 1 cm2.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Figure 22 - Maximum values for combined AC current and DC current



Figure 23 - Maximum values for combined AC voltage and DC voltage 5.2.2.3 W h e re



Capacitance limits th e e le c tric a l e n e rg y



so u rce



is a c a p a c i t o r , t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e



is c l a s s i f i e d



th e c h a rg e v o lta g e a n d th e c a p a c ita n c e .



T h e c a p a c i t a n c e is t h e r a t e d v a l u e o f t h e c a p a c i t o r p l u s t h e s p e c i f i e d t o l e r a n c e . Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



fro m



b o th



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



T h e E S 1 a n d E S 2 l i m i t s f o r v a r i o u s c a p a c i t a n c e v a l u e s a r e l i s t e d in T a b l e 5 .



NOTE 1 The capacitance values for ES2 are derived from Table A.2 of IEC TS 61201:2007. NOTE 2 two (2).



The values for ES1 are calculated by dividing the values from Table A.2 of IEC TS 61201:2007, by



Table 5 - Electrical energy source limits for a charged capacitor c



ES1



ES2



ES3



nF



^ peak



^peak



Cpeak



V



V



V



300 or greater



60



120



170



75



150



91



100



200



61



125



250



41



150



300



28



200



400



18



250



500



12



350



700



8,0



500



1 000



4,0



1 000



2 000



1,6



2 500



5 000



0,8



5 000



10 000



0,4



10 000



20 000



0,2



20 000



40 000



0,133 or less



30 000



60 000



> ES2



Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points.



5.2.2.4



Single pulse limits



W h e r e t h e e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e is a s i n g l e p u l s e , t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e is c l a s s i f i e d f r o m th e v o lta g e T a b le 6 a n d lim it.



If t h e



and



th e



d u ra tio n



T a b le 7 . If t h e cu rre n t



exceeds



o r fro m v o lta g e th e



b o th th e



exceeds



lim it,



th e



c u rre n t a n d th e



th e



lim it, th e n



v o lta g e



s h a ll



th e



not



d u ra tio n . V a lu e s



a re



g iv e n



c u r r e n t s h a ll n o t e x c e e d



exceed



th e



lim it.



b o th



C u rre n ts



in th e a re



m e a s u r e d a c c o r d in g to 5 .7 . F o r r e p e titiv e p u ls e s , s e e 5 .2 .2 .5 .



F o r p u ls e d u r a tio n s u p to 10 m s , th e v o lta g e o r c u r r e n t lim it fo r 10 m s a p p lie s .



If m o r e t h a n o n e p u l s e is d e t e c t e d w i t h i n a p e r i o d o f 3 s , t h e n t h e e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e tre a te d a s a re p e titiv e p u ls e a n d th e lim its o f 5 .2 .2 .5 a p p ly .



NOTE 1 The pulse limits are calculated from Figure 22 and Table 10 of IEC TS 60479-1:2005. NOTE 2



These single pulses do not include transients.



NOTE 3



Pulse duration is considered to be the time duration when the voltage or current exceeds ES1 limits.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



is



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 Table 6 - Voltage limits for single pulses



Pulse duration up to and including



ES1



ES2



ES3



^ peak



^ peak



U peaku



ms



V



V



V



10



196



20



178



50



150 60



> ES2



80



135



100



129



200 and longer



120



If the time duration lies between the values in any two rows， either the lower ES2 value of C/peak shall be used or a linear interpolation may be used between any two adjacent rows with the calculated peak voltage value rounded down to the nearest volt. If the peak voltage for ES2 lies between the values in any two rows, either the shortest time duration may be used or a linear interpolation may be used between any two adjacent rows with the calculated time duration rounded down to the nearest millisecond.



Table 7 - Current limits for single pulses



5.2.2.5



Limits for repetitive pulses



E x c e p t fo r



p u ls e s



d e te rm in e d



fro m



th e



lim it,



th e n



co ve re d



e ith e r th e



th e



cu rre n t



in



A n n e x H,



a



re p e titiv e



p u ls e



e le c tric a l



e n e rg y



so u rce



a v a ila b le v o lta g e



o r th e a v a ila b le



c u rre n t.



If th e v o lt a g e



s h a ll



th e



cu rre n t



exceeds



not



exceed



lim it.



If t h e



th e



c la s s



is



exceeds lim it,



th e



v o lt a g e s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e lim it. C u r r e n ts a re m e a s u r e d a c c o r d in g to 5 .7 .



F o r p u ls e o ff tim e s le s s th a n



3 s, th e p e a k v a lu e s o f 5 .2 .2 .2 a p p ly . F o r lo n g e r d u r a tio n s , th e



v a lu e s o f 5 .2 .2 .4 a p p ly .



5.2.2.6 W h e re



Ringing signals th e



e le c tric a l



e n e rg y



so u rce



is



an



a n a lo g u e



te le p h o n e



n e tw o rk



d e f i n e d in A n n e x H , t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e c l a s s is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e E S 2 .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



rin g in g



s ig n a l



as



旧C



5.2.2.7



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Audio signals



F o r e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e s t h a t a r e a u d i o s i g n a l s , t h e l i m i t s a r e s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e E . 1 .



5.3



Protection against electrical energy sources



5.3.1



General



E x c e p t a s g iv e n



b e lo w ,



instructed persons, ES2



ES3



or



s e p a ra te d



p ro te c tio n



skilled persons



and



c irc u its ,



fro m



ES3 mains



fro m



re q u ire m e n ts



to



ordinary persons,



a r e g i v e n in 4 . 3 .



accessible ES1 double safeguard



w h ic h by a



accessible



fo r p a rts



or or



ES2 c i r c u i t s a r e d e r i v e d , a reinforced safeguard. In



s h a ll



be



a d d itio n ,



th e fo llo w in g a p p lie s : -



under



single fault conditions



in t h e c i r c u i t b e t w e e n



th e c u r r e n t o r v o lta g e le v e ls s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e E S 1 -



under



single fault conditions



in t h e c i r c u i t b e t w e e n



E S 2 /E S 3



a n d th e



accessible



ES1,



lim its ; a n d E S 2 /E S 3



and



accessible



E S 2 , th e



c u r r e n t o r v o lt a g e le v e ls s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e E S 2 lim its .



NOTE An example for this construction is a rectifier in the insulated (secondary) circuit in a switch mode power supply in which multiple components are present. B a re c o n d u c to rs



at ES3



s h a ll



be



lo c a te d



c o n d u c to rs d u rin g s e rv ic e o p e ra tio n s b y a



For a



battery



5.3.2



-



p a rts



at



ES2,



under



e x c e p t fo r th e



p in s



o f c o n n e c to rs .



normal operating conditions



b a r e p a rts a t E S 3 ; a n d



-



an ES3



in te n d e d



accessible:



th e fo llo w in g s h a ll n o t b e



-



b a re



is u n l i k e l y ( s e e F i g u r e 1 9 ) .



Requirements



accessible



For



skilled person



such



b a c k e d u p s u p p ly c a p a b le o f b a c k fe e d in g to th e in p u t A C te r m in a ls , s e e 5 .8 .



ordinary persons, bare



s o th a t u n in te n tio n a l c o n ta c t w ith



Accessibility to electrical energy sources and safeguards



5.3.2.1 For



or g u a rd e d



H o w e ve r,



such



p in s



s h a ll



not be



b y th e b lu n t p ro b e o f F ig u re V .3 ; a n d



basic safeguard.



outdoor equipment t h a t a r e accessible t o a n ordinary person outdoor location, t h e f o l l o w i n g s h a l l n o t b e accessible: p a rts



of



in



th e ir



-



bare



p a rts



ES1 v o l t a g e l i m i t s u n d e r normal operating conditions a n d abnormal operating conditions a n d single fault conditions o f a c o m p o n e n t , d e v i c e o r i n s u l a t i o n n o t s e r v i n g a s a safeguard; a n d



-



bare



p a rts



safeguard For



e x c e e d in g



e x c e e d in g or of a



tim e s



ES1



v o lta g e



lim its



under



supplementary safeguard



instructed persons,



-



b a r e p a rts a t E S 3 ; a n d



-



an ES3



5.3.2.2



0 ,5



single fault conditions



of



a



basic



(s e e 5 .2 .1 .1 ).



th e fo llo w in g s h a ll n o t b e



accessible:



basic safeguard. Contact requirements



F o r E S 3 v o lta g e s u p to 4 2 0 V p e a k , th e a p p r o p r ia te te s t p r o b e fr o m A n n e x V s h a ll n o t c o n ta c t a b a re in te rn a l c o n d u c tiv e p a rt.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



For



ES3



c o n ta c t



v o lta g e s a



b a re



above



420 V peak,



th e



c o n d u c tiv e



p a rt



in te rn a l



a p p ro p ria te and



s h a ll



te s t have



p ro b e an



fro m a ir



Annex V



gap



fro m



s h a ll th a t



not p a rt



(s e e F ig u re 2 4 ).



T h e a ir g a p s h a ll e ith e r: a)



p a s s a n e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h t e s t in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 9 . 1 t h a t is e q u a l t o t h e t e s t v o l t a g e f o r o f th e



b)



working voltage;



basic insulation



a t a te s t v o lta g e (D C o r p e a k A C )



in T a b l e 2 6 c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e p e a k



or



h a v e a m in im u m d is t a n c e a c c o r d in g to T a b le 8.



Bare internal conductive part



Figure 24 - Contact requirements to bare internal conductive parts



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Table 8 - Minimum air gap distance Voltage



Air gap distance mm



V peak or DC up to and including



Pollution degree 2



> 420 and < 1 000



0,2



1 200



0,25



1 500



0,5



3



0,8



2 000



1,0



2 500



1,5



3 000



2,0



4 000



3,0



5 000



4,0



6 000



5,5



8 000



8,0



10 000



11



12 000



14



15 000



18



20 000



25



25 000



33



30 000



40



40 000



60



50 000



75



60 000



90



80 000



130



100 000



170



Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum air gap distance being rounded up to the next higher 0,1 mm increment or the value in the next row below whichever is lower. For equipment intended to be used more than 2 000 m above sea level, the values in this table are multiplied by the multiplication factor for the desired altitude according to Table 16.



5.3.2.3



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by the test of Clause T.3. In addition, for bare ES3 parts at a voltage above 420 V peak, compliance is checked by distance measurement or by an electric strength test. Components and subassemblies that comply with their respective IEC standards do not have to be tested when such components and subassemblies are used in the final product.



5.3.2.4 The



use



Terminals for connecting stripped wire o f a s trip p e d



w ire



to



m ake



c o n n e c tio n



w ith



its



a s s o c ia te d



te rm in a l



in te n d e d



to



be



used: -



by an



ordinary person



-



by an



instructed person



s h a l l n o t r e s u l t in c o n t a c t w i t h E S 2 o r E S 3 ; a n d s h a l l n o t r e s u l t in c o n t a c t w i t h E S 3 .



E.1 f o r t h e v a l u e s o f ES2 safeguards i n T a b l e E.1 a r e



ES3.



F o r a u d io s ig n a l v o lta g e s , s e e T a b le



and



te r m in a ls p r o v id e d w ith o n e o f th e



n o t te s te d .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



P a rts o f a u d io s ig n a l



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Compliance is checked by the test o f V.1.6 for each wire term inal opening as well as any other openings within 25 mm from the terminal. During the test，no portion o f the probe inserted into the term inal or opening shall contact ES2 or ES3.



5.4



Insulation materials and requirements



5.4.1



General



5.4.1.1



Insulation



clearances, creepage distances a n d solid insulation， a n d t h a t i s p r o v i d i n g a safeguard f u n c t i o n i s d e s i g n a t e d basic insulation， supplementary insulation， double insulation， o r reinforced insulation. In s u la tio n



5.4.1.2 The



c o n s is tin g



of



in s u la tin g



m a te ria ls ，



Properties of insulating material



c h o ic e



e le c tric a l



and



a p p lic a tio n



s tre n g th ,



of



m e c h a n ic a l



o th e r p ro p e rtie s fo r th e w o rk in g



in s u la tin g s tre n g th ,



m a te ria l



d im e n s io n ,



s h a ll



ta k e



fre q u e n c y



e n v iro n m e n t (te m p e ra tu re ,



in to



account



o f th e



th e



needs



fo r



working voltage



and



p re s s u re , h u m id ity a n d



p o llu tio n )



a s s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 5 a n d A n n e x T .



In s u la tin g m a te ria l s h a ll n o t b e h y g r o s c o p ic a s d e te r m in e d b y 5 .4 .1 .3 .



5.4.1.3



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection and，where necessary，by evaluation o f the data for the material. Where necessary，if the data does not confirm that the m aterial is non-hygroscopic，the hygroscopic nature o f the m aterial is determ ined by subjecting the com ponent or subassem bly using the insulation in question to the hum idity treatm ent o f 5.4.8. The insulation is then subjected to the relevant electric strength test o f 5.4.9.1 while still in the hum idity chamber, or in the room in which the samples were brought to the prescribed temperature.



5.4.1.4



Maximum operating temperatures for materials， components and systems



5.4.1.4.1 Under



Requirements



normal operating conditions,



te m p e ra tu re



lim it o f th e



E IS f in c lu d in g



in s u la tin g in s u la tin g



m a te ria l te m p e r a tu r e s m a te ria ls



s h a ll



o f c o m p o n e n ts ,



not exceed o r th e



th e



m a x im u m



t e m p e r a t u r e l i m i t o f t h e i n s u l a t i o n s y s t e m a s g i v e n in T a b l e 9 .



For



m a x im u m



te m p e ra tu re s



b e lo w



or



equal



to



100 °C ,



no



d e c la re d



in s u la tio n



s y s te m



is



r e q u i r e d . A n u n d e c l a r e d E I S is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e C l a s s 1 0 5 ( A ) .



5.4.1.4.2



Test method



Insulating m aterial tem peratures are m easured in accordance with B.1.5. The equipm ent or parts o f the equipm ent are operated under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s (see Clause B.2) as follows: 一



for continuous operation，until steady state conditions are established; and



-



f or in te rm itte n t o p e ra tio n , until steady state conditions are established, using the rated “O N” and “O FF” periods; and



-



f or s h o rt-tim e o p e ra tio n , for the operating time specified by the manufacturer.



Components and other parts may be tested independently o f the end product provided that the test conditions applicable to the end product are applied to the com ponent or part. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Equipm ent intended for building-in or rack-m ounting，or for incorporation in larger equipment, is tested under the m ost adverse actual or sim ulated conditions specified in the installation instructions.



5.4.1.4.3



Compliance criteria



The tem perature o f the electrical insulation m aterial or EIS shall not exceed the lim its in Table 9. For a single insulating material, the declared relative temperature index inform ation from the m aterial m anufacturer can be used if it is suitable for the applicable class o f insulation. For an EIS, the available therm al class data o f the EIS as indicated by the m anufacturer can be used if it is suitable for the applicable class o f insulation. For therm al classifications above Class 105 (A), the EIS shall com ply with IEC 60085.



Table 9 - Temperature limits for materials， components and systems Part



Maximum temperature r max oc



Insulation, including winding insulation: of Class 105 (A) material or EIS



100 a



of Class 120 (E) material or EIS



115 a



of Class 130 (B) material or EIS



120 a



of Class 155 (F) material or EIS



140 a



of Class 180 (H) material or EIS



165 a



of Class 200 (N) material or EIS



180 a



of Class 220 (R) material or EIS



200 a



of Class 250 material or EIS



225 a



Insulation of internal and external wiring, including power supply cords: 一



without temperature marking



-



with temperature marking



Other thermoplastic insulation



70 Temperature marked on the wire or spool, or rating assigned by the manufacturer See 5.4.1.10 See also Annex G and 4.1.2



Components



The classes are related to the temperature classes of electrical insulating materials and EIS in accordance with IEC 60085. The assigned letter designations are given in parentheses. For each material, account shall be taken of the data for that material to determine the appropriate maximum temperature. a



If the temperature of a winding is determined by thermocouples, these values are reduced by 10 K, except in the case of: -



a motor, or



一



a winding with embedded thermocouples.



5.4.1.5



Pollution degrees



5.4.1.5.1



General



T h e d iffe re n t d e g re e s o f p o llu tio n o f th e o p e ra tin g o r m ic r o - e n v ir o n m e n t fo r p ro d u c ts c o v e re d b y th is d o c u m e n t a re g iv e n b e lo w .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Pollution degree 1 N o p o llu tio n o r o n ly d ry , n o n - c o n d u c tiv e p o llu tio n o c c u rs . T h e p o llu tio n h a s n o in flu e n c e .



NOTE 1 Within the equipment, components or subassemblies that are sealed to exclude dust and moisture are examples of pollution degree 1.



Pollution degree 2 O n ly



n o n -c o n d u c tiv e



p o llu tio n



o ccu rs



except



th a t



o c c a s io n a lly



a



te m p o ra ry



c o n d u c tiv ity



c a u s e d b y c o n d e n s a t i o n is to b e e x p e c t e d .



NOTE 2



Pollution degree 2 is generally appropriate for equipment covered by the scope of this document.



Pollution degree 3 C o n d u c tiv e



p o llu tio n



o c c u rs o r d ry n o n -c o n d u c tiv e



p o llu tio n



o c c u rs th a t b e c o m e s



c o n d u c tiv e



d u e t o c o n d e n s a t i o n , w h i c h is to b e e x p e c t e d .



5.4.1.5.2



Test for pollution degree 1 environment and for an insulating compound



A sample is subjected to the therm al cycling sequence o f 5.4.1.5.3. It is allow ed to cool to room temperature and is then subjected to the hum idity conditioning o f 5.4.8. If the test is conducted for verification o f the insulating com pound form ing s o lid in s u la tio n as required by 5.4.4.3f the conditioning is im m ediately follow ed by the electric strength test o f 5.4.9.1. For printed boards, compliance is checked by external visual inspection. There shall be no delam ination which affects the creepage d is ta n c e s required to fulfil the requirem ents o f p o llu tio n degree 1. For other than printed boards，compliance is checked by inspection o f the cross-sectional area，and there shall be no visible voids, gaps o r cracks in the insulating material.



5.4.1.5.3



Thermal cycling test procedure



A sample o f a com ponent o r subassem bly is subjected to the follow ing sequence o f tests. The sample is subjected 10 times to the follow ing sequence o f therm al cycling: 68 h



at



1h



at



±



2h



at



(0 ± 2) °C;



> 1h



at



(2 5



(T^ ± 2) °C; °C ;



f



= T2 + Tma - Tamb + 10 K, or 85 °C, whichever is higher. However，the 10 K margin is not added if the tem perature is m easured by an embedded thermocouple o r by the resistance method. T2 is the temperature o f the parts m easured during the test o f 5.4.1.4. The significance o f Tma and Tarr)b are as given in B .2 .6 .1. The period o f time taken for the transition from one temperature to another is not specified, but the transition may be gradual. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



5.4.1.6 If t h e



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Insulation in transformers with varying dimensions in s u la tio n



of



a



tra n s fo rm e r



has



d iffe re n t



clearances, creepage distances



w in d in g , th e



working voltages



a lo n g



th e



le n g th



of



th e



a n d d i s t a n c e s t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n m a y v a r y in a



c o rre s p o n d in g fa s h io n .



NOTE An example of such a construction is a 30 kV winding, consisting of multiple bobbins connected in series, and earthed or connected to a common point at one end.



5.4.1.7 For



Insulation in circuits generating starting pulses



c irc u its



la m p ),



g e n e ra tin g



th e



insulation NOTE 1



s ta rtin g



e x c e e d in g



ES1



(fo r



e x a m p le ,



to



ig n ite



basic insulation, supplementary insulation creepage distances a n d d i s t a n c e s t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n .



re q u ire m e n ts a p p ly to



p u ls e s



fo r



a



d is c h a rg e



reinforced



and



For working voltages in the above cases, see 5.4.1.8.1 i).



NOTE 2 If the starting pulse is an AC waveform, the pulse width is determined by connecting the peak values of the AC waveform.



clearances



The



a re d e te rm in e d b y o n e o f th e fo llo w in g m e th o d s :



-



d e t e r m i n e th e m in im u m



-



conduct one



clearance



o f th e fo llo w in g



in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h



e le c tric



s tre n g th



5.4.2;



te s ts , w ith



or



th e



c o n n e c tio n



te rm in a ls



o f th e



s ta rtin g p u ls e c ir c u it (fo r e x a m p le , a la m p ) s h o rte d to g e th e r: •



t h e t e s t g i v e n in 5 . 4 . 9 . 1 ; o r



•



a p p l y 3 0 p u l s e s h a v i n g a n a m p l i t u d e e q u a l t o t h e r e q u i r e d t e s t v o l t a g e g i v e n in 5 . 4 . 9 . 1 g e n e r a te d b y a n e x te r n a l p u ls e g e n e r a to r . T h e p u ls e w id th s h a ll b e e q u a l to o r g r e a te r th a n th a t o f th e in te r n a lly g e n e r a te d s ta r tin g p u ls e .



Compliance is checked by inspection or test. During the test, the insulation shall show no breakdown or flashover.



5.4.1.8



Determination of working voltage



5.4.1.8.1



General



In d e t e r m i n i n g



working voltages,



a)



u n e a rth e d



accessible



b)



if a



a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s a p p ly :



c o n d u c t iv e p a r ts a re a s s u m e d to b e e a r th e d ;



tra n s fo rm e r w in d in g



o r o th e r



p a rt



is



n o t c o n n e c te d



to



a



c irc u it th a t e s ta b lis h e s



its



p o te n tia l re la tiv e to e a rth , th e w in d in g o r o th e r p a rt a re a s s u m e d to b e e a r th e d a t a p o in t b y w h ic h th e h ig h e s t c)



except



as



s p e c ifie d



working voltage in



5 .4 .1 .6 ,



fo r



is o b t a i n e d ; in s u la tio n



b e tw e e n



tw o



tra n s fo rm e r



h i g h e s t v o l t a g e b e t w e e n a n y t w o p o i n t s in t h e t w o w i n d i n g s i s t h e



w in d in g s ,



working voltage,



th e



ta k in g



in to a c c o u n t th e v o lt a g e s to w h ic h th e in p u t w in d in g s w ill b e c o n n e c t e d ; d)



e x c e p t a s s p e c ifie d p a rt,



th e



h ig h e s t



in 5 . 4 . 1 . 6 , f o r i n s u l a t i o n



v o lta g e



b e tw e e n



any



p o in t



b e tw e e n on



th e



a tra n s fo r m e r w in d in g w in d in g



and



th e



and



o th e r



a n o th e r



p a rt



is



th e



working voltage; e)



working voltage a c r o s s t h e basic insulation is d e t e r m i n e d b y i m a g i n i n g a s h o r t - c i r c u i t a c r o s s t h e supplementary insulation, a n d v i c e v e r s a . F o r double insulation b e t w e e n t r a n s f o r m e r w i n d i n g s , t h e s h o r t - c i r c u i t i s a s s u m e d t o t a k e p l a c e a t t h e p o i n t b y w h i c h t h e h i g h e s t working voltage i s p r o d u c e d a c r o s s t h e



w h e re



double insulation



is u s e d , t h e



o th e r in s u la tio n ; f)



when



th e



working voltage



th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e th e



is d e t e r m i n e d



by m e a s u re m e n t, th e



in p u t v o lta g e s u p p lie d



rated voltage



o r th e v o lta g e w ith in



th e



rated voltage range



t h a t r e s u l t s in t h e h i g h e s t m e a s u r e d v a l u e ; g)



th e



working voltage



-



a n y p a r t c o n n e c t e d to e a r th ; a n d



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



b e t w e e n a n y p o i n t in t h e c i r c u i t s u p p l i e d b y t h e



to



mains



and



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



-



a n y p o i n t in a c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m t h e



mains,



s h a ll b e ta k e n a s th e g r e a te r o f th e fo llo w in g :



h)



rated voltage



-



t he



-



t he m e a s u r e d v o lta g e ;



when



d e te rm in in g



o p e ra tin g d u ra tio n



i)



s h a ll



working voltage



th e



s ig n a ls



working voltage



th e



v o lta g e s



be ta k e n



(su ch



as



fo r



g e n e ra tin g



s ta rtin g



p u ls e s



be



ta k e n



as



creepage distances 5.4.1.8.2 In



or ES2



If t h e



external circuit,



o p e ra tin g



rin g in g )



s h a ll



(fo r e x a m p le ,



not



v o lta g e s



le s s



th a n



30



be



d is c h a rg e



is t h e p e a k v a l u e o f t h e p u l s e s w i t h t h e



la m p ig n ite s . T h e fr e q u e n c y o f th e s h a ll



ES1



a c c o u n t.



te le p h o n e



working voltage;



working voltage



in to



fo r an



and



a re



th e



n o rm a l



not known,



s h a ll b e ta k e n a s th e u p p e r lim its o f E S 1 o r E S 2 a s a p p lic a b le . S h o r t



d e te rm in in g c irc u its



rated voltage range;



o r th e u p p e r v o lta g e o f th e



ta k e n



in to



account



fo r



la m p s ,



see



5 .4 .1 .7 ),



th e



la m p c o n n e c te d



working voltage t o d e t e r m i n e k H z . T h e working voltage



b u t b e fo re th e



th e m in im u m to



d e te rm in e



clearance m in im u m



is t h e v o l t a g e m e a s u r e d a f t e r t h e ig n it io n o f t h e la m p .



RMS working voltage



d e te rm in in g



RMS working voltage, s h o r t - t e r m c o n d i t i o n s ( f o r e x a m p l e , c a d e n c e d s i g n a l s i n external circuits) a n d n o n - r e p e t i t i v e t r a n s i e n t s ( f o r e x a m p l e , d u e



th e



te le p h o n e rin g in g



to a t m o s p h e r ic d is t u r b a n c e s ) a re n o t ta k e n in to a c c o u n t.



NOTE



The creepage distances are determined from the RMS w o rkin g voltages.



5.4.1.9



Insulating surfaces



accessible i n s u l a t i n g d e te rm in in g clearances,



An



s u rfa c e



is



c o n s id e re d



creepage



to



distances



be



co ve re d



and



by



a



d is ta n c e



th in



m e ta llic



th ro u g h



fo il



fo r



in s u la tio n



(s e e F ig u re 0 . 1 3 ) .



5.4.1.10



Thermoplastic parts on which conductive metallic parts are directly mounted



5.4.1.10.1



Requirements



T h e rm o p la s tic s u ffic ie n tly



p a rts



re s is ta n t



on to



w h ic h heat



if



c o n d u c tiv e s o fte n in g



m e ta llic of



th e



p a rts



p la s tic



a re



d ire c tly



c o u ld



re s u lt



m o u n te d in



th e



s h a ll



fa ilu re



of



be a



safeguard. Compliance is checked by exam ination o f the Vicat test or ball pressure data from the m aterial manufacturer. If the data is not available, compliance is checked by either the Vicat test o f 5.4.1.10.2 o r by the ball pressure test o f 5.4.1.10.3.



5.4.1.10.2



Vicat test



The m easured tem perature during n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , as specified in Clause B.2f shall be at least 15 K less than the Vicat softening temperature as specified in Vicat test B50 o f ISO 306. The m easured tem perature during a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s o f Clause B.3 shall be less than the Vicat softening temperature. The Vicat softening tem perature o f a non-m etallic part supporting parts in a circuit supplied from the m a in s shall be not less than 125 °C.



5.4.1.10.3



Ball pressure test



Compliance is checked by subjecting the part to the ball pressure test according to IEC 60695-10-2. The test is made in a heating cabinet at a temperature o f (T ^amb + Tma + 15 °C) 土 2 °C (see B.2.6.1 for the explanation o f T， Tma and Tamb). However, a Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



thermoplastic part supporting parts in a circuit supplied from the m a in s is tested at a minimum of 125 °C. After the test, dimension d (diameter o f the indentation) shall not exceed 2 mm. The test is not made if it is clear from examination of the physical characteristics of the material that it will meet the requirements of this test.



5.4.2



Clearances



5.4.2.1



General requirements



Clearances



s h a ll b e s o d im e n s io n e d t h a t th e lik e lih o o d o f b r e a k d o w n d u e to :



-



temporary overvoltages;



-



t r a n s i e n t v o lta g e s th a t m a y e n te r th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d



-



recurring



peak



v o lta g e s



and



and



th e ir



re la te d



fre q u e n c ie s



th a t



a re



g e n e ra te d



w ith in



th e



e q u ip m e n t is r e d u c e d .



A ll



clearances



re q u ire d



and



a ltitu d e s ,



th e



m u ltip lic a tio n



ro u n d in g



up,



and



T a b le



11,



T a b le



b e fo re



14



te s t v o lta g e s



fa c to rs



any



a n d T a b le



o th e r



of



a p p ly



5.4.2.5



to



a p p ly



m u ltip lic a tio n



an



a ltitu d e



up



2 000



to



m.



For



a fte r a n y lin e a r in te rp o la tio n ,



fa c to rs



a re



a p p lie d



as



s ta te d



h ig h e r



b u t b e fo re



in



T a b le



10,



15.



NOTE For air gaps between contacts of safety interlocks, see Annex K. For air gaps between contacts of disconnect devices, see Annex L. For air gaps between contacts in components, see Annex G. For connectors, see G.4.1. U n le s s o th e rw is e s p e c ifie d



clearances



b y th e m a n u f a c t u r e r a n d s u p p lie d w ith m e a n s to a s s u r e



m in im u m



d u r in g a ll m o d e s o f n o r m a l o p e r a t io n , th e v o ic e c o il a n d a d j a c e n t c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s



o f a lo u d s p e a k e r a re c o n s id e r e d to b e c o n d u c t iv e ly c o n n e c t e d .



T o d e te rm in e th e



clearance,



th e h ig h e s t v a lu e o f th e fo llo w in g tw o p r o c e d u r e s s h a ll b e u s e d :



-



P r o c e d u r e 1: D e t e r m i n e



clearances



-



P r o c e d u r e 2: D e te rm in e



clearances



clearances



m ay



be



d e te rm in e d



a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .2 .2 . a c c o rd in g



u s in g



an



to



5 .2 .2 .3 .



e le c tric



A lte rn a tiv e ly ,



s tre n g th



te s t



th e



a c c o rd in g



adequacy to



5 .2 .2 .4 ,



of in



w h ic h c a s e th e v a lu e s a c c o r d in g to P r o c e d u r e 1 s h a ll b e m a in ta in e d . F o r O v e rv o lta g e C a te g o ry



II, clearances



in c i r c u i t s c o n n e c t e d t o a n A C



mains



n o t e x c e e d in g



4 2 0 V p e a k (3 0 0 V R M S ) m a y b e d e te rm in e d p e r A n n e x X a s a n a lte rn a tiv e .



5.4.2.2 To



Procedure 1 for determining clearance



d e te rm in e



th e



v o lta g e



to



be



used



in



T a b le 10



and



T a b le 11, th e



h ig h e s t v o lta g e



o f th e



f o l l o w i n g is u s e d a s a p p l i c a b l e :



working voltage



-



t he p e a k v a lu e o f th e



a c ro s s th e



-



t h e r e c u r r i n g p e a k v o lt a g e s , if a n y , a c r o s s t h e



-



f or c irc u its



clearance;



clearance;



AC mains: t h e temporary overvoltage, w h i c h i s t a k e n a s 2 000 V p e a k i f t h e n o m i n a l AC mains s y s t e m v o l t a g e d o e s n o t e x c e e d 250 V a n d i s t a k e n a s 2 500 V p e a k i f t h e n o m i n a l AC mains s y s t e m v o l t a g e e x c e e d s 250 V b u t d o e s n o t e x c e e d 600 V. c o n n e c te d



A lte rn a tiv e ly , th e



to



th e



temporary overvoltage



m a y b e d e t e r m i n e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 3 . 3 . 2 . 3



o f I E C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 : 2 0 0 7 a t t h e d i s c r e t i o n o f t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , in w h i c h c a s e t h e r e f e r e n c e to



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎



“ s o lid



旧C



2018



i n s u l a t i o n ” in 5 . 3 . 3 . 2 . 3 o f I E C 6 0 6 6 4 - 1 : 2 0 0 7



th e s h o r t te r m v a lu e e q u a l to



NOTE



Un



is r e p l a c e d



by “c le a ra n c e s ” . M o re o v e r，



+ 1 2 0 0 V is t a k e n a s t h e v o l t a g e f o r u s e in T a b l e 1 0 .



is the nominal line-to-neutral voltage of the neutral-earthed supply system.



T h is v o lt a g e s h a ll b e u s e d to d e te r m in e th e



-



clearance



-



clearance



clearance



a s fo llo w s :



v a lu e s o f T a b le 10 fo r c ir c u its w ith fu n d a m e n t a l f r e q u e n c ie s u p to 3 0 k H z ; o r v a lu e s



of



T a b le



11



fo r



c irc u its



w ith



fu n d a m e n ta l



fre q u e n c ie s



h ig h e r



th a n



30 kH z; or -



t he h ig h e s t



clearance



v a l u e s o f T a b l e 1 0 a n d T a b l e 11 f o r c i r c u i t s w h e r e b o t h f r e q u e n c i e s



lo w e r th a n 3 0 k H z a n d h ig h e r th a n 3 0 k H z a re p re s e n t.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



Table 10 - Minimum clearances fo r voltages with frequencies up to 30 kHz



Voltage up to and including



Basic insulation or supplementary insulation



Reinforced insulation



mm



mm



Pollution degree



Pollution degree



peak 1a



!



(



；



2



3



1a



330



0,01



0,02



400



0,02



0,04



500



0,04



600



0,06



800



0,13



1 000



0,26



〇



,2



2



0,08 0,8



0,26



3



0,4



0,12



1,5



0,26 0,52



0,52



1 200



0,42



0,84



1 500



0,76



1,52



1,6



2 000



1,27



2,54



2 500



1,8



3,6



3 000



2,4



4,8



4 000



3,8



7,6



5 000



5,7



11,0



6 000



7,9



15,8



8 000



11,0



20



10 000



15,2



27



12 000



19



33



15 000



25



42



20 000



34



59



25 000



44



77



30 000



55



95



40 000



77



131



50 000



100



175



60 000



120



219



80 000



175



307



100 000



230



395



Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum clearances being rounded up to the next higher specified increment. For values: -



not exceeding 0,5 mm， the specified increment is 0,01 mm; and



一



exceeding 0,5 mm, the specified increment is 0,1 mm.



a



The values for pollution degree 1 may be used if a sample complies with the tests of 5.4.1.5.2.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 Table 11 - Minimum clearances for voltages with frequencies above 30 kHz



Voltage up to and including



Basic insulation or supplementary insulation



Reinforced insulation



peak



mm



mm



600



0,07



0,14



800



0,22



0,44



1 000



0,6



1,2



1 200



1,68



3,36



1 400



2,82



5,64



1 600



4,8



9,6



1 800



8,04



16,08



2 000



13,2



26,4



Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum clearances being rounded up to the next higher specified increment. For values: 一



not exceeding 0,5 mmf the specified increment is 0,01 mm; and



一



exceeding 0,5 mm, the specified increment is 0,1 mm.



For pollution degree 1, use a multiplication factor of 0,8. For pollution degree 3, use a multiplication factor of 1,4.



5.4.2.3



Procedure 2 for determining clearance



5.4.2.3.1 The



General



d im e n s io n



external circuit Each



clearance



clearance



fo r a



th a t



is



is d e t e r m i n e d f r o m t h e



s u b je c t to



tra n s ie n t v o lta g e s



required withstand voltage



mains clearance. th e



fo r th a t



or an



s h a ll b e d e te r m in e d u s in g th e fo llo w in g s te p s :



-



d e t e r m i n e th e t r a n s ie n t v o lt a g e a c c o r d in g to 5 .4 .2 .3 .2 ; a n d



-



d e t e r m i n e th e



-



d e t e r m i n e th e m in im u m



required withstand voltage clearance



Determining transient voltages



5.4.2.3.2.1



General v o lta g e s



can



be



a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .2 .3 .3 ; a n d



a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .2 .3 .4 .



5.4.2.3.2



T ra n s ie n t



fro m



d e te rm in e d



based



on



th e ir



o rig in ,



or



can



be



m e a su re d



in



a c c o r d a n c e w ith 5 .4 .2 .3 .2 .5 .



If d if f e r e n t t r a n s ie n t v o lt a g e s a f f e c t th e s a m e



clearance,



t h e l a r g e s t o f t h o s e v o l t a g e s is u s e d .



T h e v a lu e s a re n o t a d d e d to g e th e r.



Outdoor equipment c o n n e c t e d transient voltage e x p e c t e d i n t h e



to



th e



mains



s h a ll



be



s u ita b le



fo r



th e



h ig h e s t



mains



in s ta lla tio n lo c a tio n .



C o n s id e r a tio n s h a ll b e g iv e n to th e fo llo w in g : -



t h e p r o s p e c t iv e fa u lt c u r r e n t o f th e s u p p ly to



outdoor equipment



can



b e h ig h e r th a n fo r



in d o o r e q u ip m e n t, s e e IE C 6 0 3 6 4 -4 -4 3 ; a n d -



t he



mains transient voltage



fo r



outdoor equipment



can



be



h ig h e r



th a n



fo r



in d o o r



e q u ip m e n t. C o m p o n e n ts



w ith in



outdoor equipment



th a t



re d u ce



th e



mains transient voltage



p r o s p e c tiv e fa u lt c u r r e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th e IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - s e r ie s .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



or



th e



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



NOTE 1 The overvoltage category of outdoor equipment is normally considered to be one of the following: 一



if powered via the normal building installation wiring, Overvoltage Category II;



-



if powered directly from the mains distribution system, Overvoltage Category III;



-



if at, or in the proximity of, the origin of the electrical installation, Overvoltage Category IV.



NOTE 2



For further information regarding protection from overvoltages, see IEC 60364-5-53.



Compliance is checked by inspection of the equipment, the installation instructions and, where necessary, by the applicable component tests specified in the IEC 61643-series.



5.4.2.3.2.2



Determining AC mains transient voltages



F o r e q u ip m e n t to be s u p p lie d fro m



mains,



th e A C



mains



d e p e n d s on th e o v e rv o lta g e c a te g o ry a n d th e A C g e n e ra l,



clearances



in



e q u ip m e n t



in te n d e d



to



mains transient voltage



th e v a lu e o f th e



be



v o l t a g e a n d is g iv e n



c o n n e c te d



to



th e



AC



in T a b l e 1 2 . In



mains,



s h a ll



be



d e s i g n e d f o r O v e r v o l t a g e C a t e g o r y II.



NOTE



See Annex I for further guidance on the determination of overvoltage categories.



E q u ip m e n t th a t



is



lik e ly ,



when



in s ta lle d ,



to



be



s u b je c te d



to



tra n s ie n t



v o lta g e s



th a t e x c e e d



t h o s e f o r its d e s ig n o v e r v o l t a g e c a t e g o r y r e q u ir e s a d d it io n a l t r a n s i e n t v o lt a g e p r o t e c t io n to b e p ro v id e d



e x te r n a l to th e



e q u ip m e n t.



In t h i s



c a s e , th e



in s ta lla tio n



in s tru c tio n s



s h a ll s ta te



th e



n e e d fo r s u c h e x te rn a l p ro te c tio n .



Table 12 - Mains transient voltages AC mains voltage a up to and including



Mains transient voltage b V peak Overvoltage Category



V RMS I



II



III



IV



50



330



500



800



1 500



100 c



500



800



1 500



2 500



150 d



800



1 500



2 500



4 000



300 e



1 500



2 500



4 000



6 000



600 f



2 500



4 000



6 000



8 000



For equipment designed to be connected to a three-phase 3-wire supply, where there is no neutral conductor, the AC mains supply voltage is the line-to-line voltage. In all other cases, where there is a neutral conductor, it is the line-to-neutral voltage. b



The mains transient voltage is always one of the values in the table. Interpolation is not permitted. In Japan, the value of the mains transient voltages for the nominal AC mains supply voltage of 100 V is determined from columns applicable to the nominal AC mains supply voltage of 150 V.



d



Including 120/208 V and 120/240 V.



e



Including 230/400 V and 277/480 V.



f



Including 400/690 V.



5.4.2.3.2.3 If a n



e a rth e d



Determining DC mains transient voltages DC



p o w e r d is trib u tio n



s y s te m



is e n t i r e l y w i t h i n



a s in g le



b u ild in g , th e tr a n s ie n t



v o l t a g e is s e l e c t e d a s f o l l o w s : -



if t h e



DC



p o w e r d is trib u tio n



s y s te m



is e a r t h e d



a t a s in g le



p o in t,



th e



tra n s ie n t v o lta g e



is



ta k e n to b e 5 0 0 V p e a k ; o r -



if t h e



DC



power



d is trib u tio n



s y s te m



is



e a rth e d



t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e is t a k e n t o b e 3 5 0 V p e a k ; o r



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



at



th e



so u rce



and



th e



e q u ip m e n t,



th e



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



NOTE The connection to protective earth can be at the source of the DC power distribution system or at the equipment location, or both (see ITU-T Recommendation K.27). -



if t h e c a b lin g



a s s o c ia te d



w ith



th e



DC



p o w e r d is trib u tio n



s y s te m



i s s h o r t e r t h a n 4 m o r is



i n s t a l l e d e n t i r e l y in c o n t i n u o u s m e t a l l i c c o n d u i t , t h e t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e is t a k e n t o b e 1 5 0 V peak. If a



DC



power



tra n s ie n t



voltage If t h e



d is trib u tio n



v o lta g e in t h e



DC



w ith



mains



s y s te m



r e s p e c t to



and



not



e a rth



e a rth e d



s h a ll



be



or



is



ta k e n



not



w ith in



be



equal



to



th e to



sam e



b u ild in g ,



th e



mains transient



th e



f r o m w h i c h t h e D C p o w e r is d e r iv e d .



p o w e r d is trib u tio n



in s ta lla tio n



is



p ro te c tio n



s y s te m



is n o t w i t h i n



te c h n iq u e s



s im ila r



th e s a m e



to



th o s e



b u ild in g , a n d



of



is c o n s t r u c t e d



external circuits,



th e



u s in g



tra n s ie n t



v o lta g e s h a ll b e d e te r m in e d u s in g th e r e le v a n t c la s s ific a tio n fro m 5 .4 .2 .3 .2 .4 .



If e q u i p m e n t is s u p p l i e d



mains



fro m



battery



th a t has



n o p ro v is io n



fo r c h a rg in g



fro m



a



s u p p ly w it h o u t r e m o v a l fro m th e e q u ip m e n t, th e tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e s h a ll b e d is r e g a r d e d .



W h e n d e te rm in in g th e D C



mains



s h a ll b e ta k e n



th e D C



mains



If t h e



a d e d ic a te d



DC



mains transient voltage,



in to a c c o u n t.



If t h e s e



p o w e r d is trib u tio n



s y s te m



mains transient voltage



d e c la re th e



5.4.2.3.2.4



mains transient voltage



a re n o t k n o w n , th e



outdoor equipment



s u p p ly fo r a n



th e in s ta lla tio n a n d th e s o u rc e o f th e D C



s h a ll b e ta k e n a s 1 ,5 kV .



is n o t w i t h i n on th e D C



on



th e



sam e



mains



b u ild in g , th e



m a n u f a c tu r e r s h a ll



s u p p l y in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s .



Determining external circuit transient voltages



T h e a p p lic a b le v a lu e o f th e tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e th a t m a y o c c u r o n a n d e te rm in e d



u s in g



T a b le 13.



W h e re



m o re



th a n



one



lo c a tio n



or



h ig h e s t tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e a p p lie s . A rin g in g o r o th e r in te rru p te d



external circuit



c o n d itio n



is



s h a ll b e



a p p lic a b le ,



th e



s ig n a l s h a ll n o t b e ta k e n



in to



a c c o u n t if t h e v o l t a g e o f t h i s s i g n a l is l e s s t h a n t h a t o f t h e t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e .



If t h e



tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e



te le p h o n e



rin g in g



is



le s s



s ig n a l), th e



th a n



th e



peak



v o lta g e



o f a s h o rt d u ra tio n



p e a k v o lta g e o f th e s h o rt d u ra tio n



s ig n a l



(su ch



s ig n a l s h a ll b e u s e d



as



a



a s th e



tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e .



If t h e



external circuit



tra n s ie n t v o lta g e s a re



known



to b e h ig h e r th a n



in d ic a te d



in T a b l e 1 3 ,



th e k n o w n v a lu e s h a ll b e u s e d .



NOTE 1 Australia has published its overvoltage limits in AS/ACIF G624:2005. NOTE 2 It is assumed that adequate measures have been taken to reduce the likelihood that the transient voltages presented to the equipment exceed the values specified in Table 13. In installations where transient voltages presented to the equipment are expected to exceed the values specified in Table 13, additional measures such as surge suppression can be necessary. NOTE 3 In Europe, the requirement for interconnection with an external circuit is in addition given in EN 50491-3:2009, G eneral requirem ents fo r Home and B uilding E lectronic System s (HBES) and B uilding A utom ation and C ontrol System s (BACS)



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



-



P art 3: E le ctrica l safety requirem ents.



- 100



旧C



-



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Table 13 - External circuit transient voltages ID



Cable type



Additional conditions



Transient voltages



Paired conductor a shielded or unshielded



The building or structure may or may not have equipotential bonding.



2



Any other conductors



The external circuit is not earthed at either end, but there is an earth reference (for example, from connection to mains).



Mains transient voltage or external circuit transient voltage of the circuit from which the circuit in question is derived whichever is higher.



3



Coaxial cable in the cable distribution network



Equipment other than power-fed coaxial repeaters. Cable shield is earthed at the equipment.



4 000 V 10/700 Ms



Coaxial cable in the cable distribution network



Power fed coaxial repeaters (up to 4,4 mm coaxial cable). Cable shield is earthed at the equipment.



5 000 V 10/700 ns



Coaxial cable in the cable distribution network



Equipment other than power-fed coaxial repeaters. Cable shield is not earthed at the equipment. Cable shield is earthed at building entrance.



4 000 V 10/700 ms



1



4



5



1 500 V 10/700 Ms Only differential if one conductor is earthed in the equipment



Centre conductor to shield



Centre conductor to shield



Centre conductor to shield 1 500 V 1,2/50 ps shield to earth



6



Coaxial cable



Cable connects to an outdoor antenna



no transient b



7



Paired conductor a



Cable connects to an outdoor antenna



no transient b



8



Coaxial cable within the building



The connection of the cable coming from outside the building is made via a transfer point. The shield of the coaxial cable from outside the building and the shield of the coaxial cable of the cable within the building are connected together and are connected to earth.



Not applicable



In general, for external circuits installed wholly within the same building structure, transients are not taken into account. However, a conductor is considered to leave the building if it terminates on equipment earthed to a different earthing network. The effects of unwanted steady state voltages generated outside the equipment (for example, earth potential differences and voltages induced on telecommunication networks by electric train systems) are controlled by installation practices. Such practices are application dependent and are not dealt with by this document. For a shielded cable to affect a reduction in transients, the shield shall be continuous, earthed at both ends, and have a maximum transfer impedance of 20 Q/km (fo r/le s s than 1 MHz). NOTE 1



Home appliances like audio, video and multimedia products are addressed by ID 6, 7 and 8.



NOTE 2 In Norway and Sweden, the cable shield on coaxial cables is normally not earthed at the building entrance (see the note in 5.7.7). For installation conditions, see IEC 60728-11. a



A paired conductor includes a twisted pair. These cables are not subject to any transients but they may be affected by a 10 kV electrostatic discharge voltage (from a 1 nF capacitor). The effect of such electrostatic discharge voltages is not taken into account when determining clearances. Compliance is checked by the test of G.10.4.



5.4.2.3.2.5



Determining transient voltage levels by measurement



T h e tra n s ie n t v o lta g e a c ro s s th e



D u rin g



circuit.



th e



m e a s u re m e n t,



th e



clearance



e q u ip m e n t



is m e a s u r e d u s i n g t h e f o l l o w i n g p r o c e d u r e .



is n o t c o n n e c t e d



to



th e



mains



o r to



O n l y s u r g e s u p p r e s s o r s i n t e r n a l t o t h e e q u i p m e n t in c i r c u i t s c o n n e c t e d t o



a r e d i s c o n n e c t e d . If t h e e q u i p m e n t is i n t e n d e d t o b e u s e d w i t h a s e p a r a t e



external t h e mains



any



p o w e r s u p p l y , it is



c o n n e c te d to th e e q u ip m e n t d u rin g th e m e a s u re m e n t.



T o m e a s u re th e tra n s ie n t v o lta g e a c ro s s a of



Annex D



is



used



to



g e n e ra te



clearance,



im p u ls e s .



At



le a s t



th e a p p ro p ria te im p u ls e te s t g e n e ra to r th re e



im p u ls e s



of



each



p o la rity ,



in te r v a ls o f a t le a s t 1 s b e tw e e n im p u ls e s , a re a p p lie d b e tw e e n e a c h r e le v a n t p o in t.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



w ith



旧C a)



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



T ra n s ie n t v o lta g e s fro m a n A C The



mains



AC mains transient voltages



is u s e d t o g e n e r a t e



1 , 2 / 5 0 (is i m p u l s e s



b e tw e e n th e fo llo w in g p o in ts :



-



line-to-line;



-



al l l i n e c o n d u c t o r s c o n d u c t i v e l y j o i n e d t o g e t h e r a n d n e u t r a l ;



-



al l l i n e c o n d u c t o r s c o n d u c t i v e l y j o i n e d t o g e t h e r a n d p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h ; a n d



-



neut r al a n d p ro te c tiv e e a rth .



mains



T ra n s ie n t v o lta g e s fro m a D C The



i m p u l s e t e s t g e n e r a t o r c i r c u i t 2 o f T a b l e D .1



DC mains transient voltages,



e q u a l to th e



c)



-



i m p u l s e t e s t g e n e r a t o r c i r c u i t 2 o f T a b l e D .1



e q u a l to th e



b)



- 101



is u s e d t o g e n e r a t e



a t th e fo llo w in g p o in ts :



-



t he p o s itiv e a n d n e g a tiv e s u p p ly c o n n e c tio n p o in ts ; a n d



-



al l s u p p l y c o n n e c t i o n p o i n t s j o i n e d t o g e t h e r a n d p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h .



T ra n s ie n t v o lta g e s fro m a n



1 , 2 / 5 0 (is i m p u l s e s



external circuit



T h e a p p r o p r i a t e t e s t g e n e r a t o r o f A n n e x D is u s e d t o g e n e r a t e i m p u l s e s a s a p p l i c a b l e a n d d e s c rib e d



in



T a b le 13



and



a re



a p p lie d



b e tw e e n



each



o f th e



fo llo w in g



external circuit



c o n n e c tio n p o in ts o f a s in g le in te rfa c e ty p e : -



e a c h p a i r o f t e r m i n a l s ( f o r e x a m p l e , A a n d B o r t i p a n d r i n g ) in a n i n t e r f a c e ; a n d



-



al l t e r m i n a l s o f a s i n g l e i n t e r f a c e t y p e j o i n e d t o g e t h e r a n d e a r t h .



A v o l t a g e m e a s u r i n g d e v i c e is c o n n e c t e d a c r o s s t h e



clearance



in q u e s t i o n .



W h e r e t h e r e a r e s e v e r a l i d e n t i c a l c i r c u i t s , o n l y o n e is t e s t e d .



5.4.2.3.3



Determining required withstand voltage



required withstand voltage



The



is e q u a l t o t h e t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e a s d e t e r m i n e d



in 5 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 2 ,



e x c e p t fo r th e fo llo w in g c a s e s : -



mains i s c o n n e c t e d t o t h e m a i n protective earthing t e r m i n a l t h r o u g h a protective bonding conductor, t h e required withstand voltage m a y b e o n e o v e r v o l t a g e c a t e g o r y l o w e r o r o n e AC mains v o l t a g e l o w e r in T a b l e 12. F o r a n AC mains If a c ir c u it is o la te d f r o m



th e



u p to a n d in c lu d in g 5 0 V R M S , n o a d ju s t m e n ts a re m a d e . -



In a c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m



th e



mains



s u p p lie d



b y a D C s o u r c e w ith c a p a c itiv e filte rin g , a n d



required withstand voltage s h a l l b e e q u a l t o t h e p e a k v a l u e o f t h e DC voltage o f t h e s o u r c e , o r t h e p e a k voltage o f t h e c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m t h e mains, w h i c h e v e r i s h i g h e r . c o n n e c te d



-



to



p ro te c tiv e



e a rth , th e



If e q u i p m e n t is s u p p l i e d f r o m th e th e



mains s u p p l y w i t h o u t r e m o v a l required withstand voltage i s



5.4.2.3.4 Each



a d e d ic a te d



th e



o f th e



to



be



working



th a t h a s n o p ro v is io n fo r c h a rg in g fro m



e q u ip m e n t, th e tra n s ie n t v o lta g e



e q u a l to th e p e a k o f th e



working voltage.



Determining clearances using required withstand voltage



clearance



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



fro m



battery



assum ed



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t v a lu e o f T a b le 14.



is z e r o



and



- 102



旧C



-



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Table 14 - Minimum clearances using required withstand voltage Required withstand voltage



Basic insulation or supplementary insulation



Reinforced insulation



mm



mm



Pollution degree



Pollution degree



V peak or DC up to and including



1a



330



0,01



0,02



400



0,02



0,04



500



0,04



0,08



600



0,06



2



3



2



1a



0,2



〇



3



,4



0,12 0,8



1,5



800



0,10



〇



,2



1 000



0,15



〇



,3



1 200



0,25



0,5



1 500



0,5



1,0



2 000



1,0



2,0



2 500



1,5



3,0



3 000



2,0



3,8



4 000



3,0



5,5



5 000



4,0



8,0



6 000



5,5



8,0



8 000



8,0



14



10 000



11



19



12 000



14



24



15 000



18



31



20 000



25



44



25 000



33



60



30 000



40



72



40 000



60



98



50 000



75



130



60 000



90



162



80 000



130



226



100 000



170



290



Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum clearances shall be rounded up to the next higher specified increment. For values: -



not exceeding 0,5 mm, the specified increment is 0,01 mm; and



一



exceeding 0 f5 mm, the specified increment is 0,1 mm.



a



The values for pollution degree 1 may be used if a sample complies with the tests of 5.4.1.5.2.



5.4.2.4



Determining the adequacy of a clearance using an electric strength test



The cle a ra n ce s shall withstand an electric strength test. The test may be conducted using an impulse voltage or an AC voltage or a DC voltage. The re q u ire d w ith s ta n d v o lta g e is determined as given in 5.4.2.3. The impulse withstand voltage test is carried out with a voltage having an appropriate waveform (see Annex D) with the values specified in Table 15. Five impulses of each polarity are applied with an interval of at least 1 s between pulses. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



-



103



-



The AC voltage test is conducted using a sinusoidal voltage with a peak value as specified in Table 15 and is applied for 5 s. The DC v o lta g e test is conducted using a DC v o lta g e specified in Table 15 and applied for 5 s in one polarity and then for 5 s in reverse polarity.



Table 15 - Electric strength test voltages Required withstand voltage up to and including



Test voltage for electric strength for clearances for basic insulation or supplementary insulation



kV peak



kV peak (impulse or AC or DC)



0,33



0,36



0,5



0,54



0,8



0,93



1,5



1,75



2,5



2,92



4,0



4,92



6,0



7,39



8,0



9,85



12,0



14,77 1,23



U a



x U a



Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum test voltage being rounded up to the next higher 0,01 kV increment. For reinforced insulation, the test voltage for electric strength is 160 % of the value for the basic insulation after which this calculated test voltage is rounded up to the next higher 0,01 kV increment. If the EUT fails the AC or DC test, the impulse test shall be used. If the test is conducted at an altitude of 200 m or more above sea level, Table F.5 of IEC 60664-1:2007 may be used, in which case linear interpolation between 200 m and 500 m altitudes and between the corresponding impulse test voltages of Table F.5 of IEC 60664-1:2007 may be used. a



V



is any required withstand voltage higher than 12,0 kV.



5.4.2.5



Multiplication factors for altitudes higher than 2 000 m above sea level



F o r e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d m in im u m v o lta g e s



clearances in



T a b le 15



and



in a re



d e s ig n e d



T a b le 10, m u ltip lie d



to



be



used



T a b l e 11



and



by



th e



m o re



th a n



T a b le 14



m u ltip lic a tio n



2 000 m and



fa c to r



th e fo r



above e le c tric th e



sea



le v e l,



s tre n g th



d e s ire d



te s t



a ltitu d e



a c c o rd in g to T a b le 16.



NOTE 1



Higher altitudes can be simulated in a vacuum chamber.



NOTE 2



In China, special requirements in choosing multiplication factors for altitudes above 2 000 m exist.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



th e



- 104 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Table 16 - Multiplication factors for clearances and test voltages Normal barometric pressure



Altitude m



Multiplication factor for electric strength test voltages



Multiplication factor for clearances



< 1 mm



> 1 mm to < 1 0 mm



> 1 0 mm to < 1 0 0 mm



kPa 2 000



80,0



1,00



1,00



1,00



1,00



3 000



70,0



1,14



1,05



1,07



1,1 〇



4 000



62,0



1,29



1,10



1,15



1,20



5 000



54,0



1,48



1,16



1,24



1,33



Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum multiplication factor being rounded up to the next higher 0,01 increment.



5.4.2.6



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by measurement and test taking into account the relevant clauses of Annex 〇 and Annex T. The following conditions apply: -



movabl e parts are placed in their most unfavourable positions;



-



cl ear ances from an e n c lo s u re of insulating material through a slot or opening are



measured according to Figure 0.13f point X; -



-



-



during the force tests, metal e n c lo s u re s shall not come into contact with bare conductive parts of: •



ES2 circuits， unless the product is in a re s tric te d a cce ss area, or



•



ES3 circuits;



after the tests of Annex T: •



the dimensions for cle a ra n ce s are measured, and



•



the relevant electric strength test shall be applied， and



•



for the glass impact test of Clause T.9， damage to the finish, small dents that do not reduce cle a ra n ce s below the specified values, surface cracks and the like are ignored. If a through crack appears, cle a ra n ce s shall not be reduced. For cracks not visible to the naked e y e , an electric strength test shall be conducted; and



components and parts, other than parts serving as an e n clo su re , are subjected to the test of Clause T.2. After the application of the force, cle a ra n ce s shall not be reduced below the required values.



For circuits connected to coaxial cable distribution or outdoor antennas, compliance is checked by the tests o f 5.5.8.



5.4.3



Creepage distances



5.4.3.1



General



Creepage distances pollution degree a n d



s h a ll



be



so



d im e n s io n e d



th a t,



fo r



a



g iv e n



m a te ria l g ro u p , n o fla s h o v e r o r b r e a k d o w n



RMS working voltage,



o f in s u la tio n



(fo r e x a m p le ,



d u e to tr a c k in g ) w ill o c c u r .



Creepage distances to



30 kH z



s h a ll



fo r



c o m p ly



basic insulation w ith



supplementary insulation c o m p ly w ith T a b le 18.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



fo r



T a b le 17.



supplementary insulation f o r f r e q u e n c i e s u p Creepage distances f o r basic insulation a n d and



fre q u e n c ie s



g re a te r



th a n



30 kH z



and



up



to



400 kH z



s h a ll



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 creepage distance



The



105



-



re q u ire m e n ts



fo r



-



fre q u e n c ie s



up



to



400 kHz



can



be



used



fo r



f r e q u e n c i e s o v e r 4 0 0 k H z u n t i l a d d i t i o n a l d a t a is a v a i l a b l e .



NOTE



Creepage distances for frequencies higher than 400 kHz are under consideration.



creepage distance



The



(in c lu d in g w ith in



an



th e



o p e n in g



c o n n e c to r



in (o r



b e tw e e n th e in



th e



o u te r



in s u la tin g



s u rfa c e



enclosure) a n d c o n d u c t i v e t h e enclosure) s h a l l c o m p l y



(se e



p a rts



5 .4 .3 .2 )



th a t



w ith



a re



th e



of a



c o n n e c to r



c o n n e c te d



to



ES2



basic



re q u ire m e n ts



fo r



5.4.3.2 )



c o n n e c to r



insulation. creepage distance



The



(in c lu d in g



an



o p e n in g



in



b e tw e e n th e



w i t h i n t h e c o n n e c t o r ( o r in t h e



th e



o u te r



enclosure) enclosure)



in s u la tin g



and



s u rfa c e



c o n d u c tiv e



(se e



p a rts



th a t



a re



of a



ES3 reinforced



c o n n e c te d



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s fo r



to



insulation. As



an



e x c e p tio n ,



insulation



th e



creepage distance



m ay



c o m p ly



w ith



th e



re q u ire m e n ts



fo r



basic



i f t h e c o n n e c t o r is :



-



f i xed to th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d



-



l o c a t e d in te r n a lly to th e o u t e r



-



only



accessible



electrical enclosure



a fte r re m o v a l o f a s u b a s s e m b ly th a t



•



i s r e q u i r e d t o b e in p l a c e d u r i n g



•



is p r o v i d e d w i t h a n



F o r a ll o t h e r



o f th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d



normal operating conditions,



instructional safeguard



creepage distances



and



to re p la c e th e re m o v e d s u b a s s e m b ly .



in c o n n e c t o r s , i n c l u d i n g c o n n e c t o r s t h a t a r e n o t f i x e d t o t h e



e q u i p m e n t , t h e m i n i m u m v a l u e s d e t e r m i n e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 3 a p p l y .



T h e a b o v e m in im u m



creepage distances



fo r c o n n e c t o r s d o n o t a p p ly to c o n n e c t o r s lis te d



in



C la u s e G .4.



If



th e



creepage distance d e r i v e d f r o m T a b l e 17 o r T a b l e 18 i s l e s s t h a n t h e clearance, t h e n t h e m i n i m u m clearance s h a l l b e a p p l i e d a s t h e m i n i m u m creepage



m in im u m



m in im u m



distance. For



g la s s ,



distance



m ic a ,



g la z e d



c e ra m ic



or



in o rg a n ic



reinforced insulation, t h e v a l u e s insulation in T a b l e 17 o r T a b l e 18. For



m a te ria ls ,



clearance, creepage distance.



is g r e a t e r t h a n t h e a p p l i c a b l e m i n i m u m



m a y be a p p lie d a s th e m in im u m



5.4.3.2



s im ila r



fo r



if t h e



m in im u m



th e v a lu e o f m in im u m



creepage distances



creepage clearance



a re tw ic e th e v a lu e s fo r



basic



Test method



The following conditions apply: 一



movable parts are placed in their most unfavourable positions;



-



for equipment incorporating ordinary n o n -d e ta ch a b le p o w e r s u p p ly cords, creepage d is ta n c e measurements are made with supply conductors of the largest cross-sectional area specified in Clause G.7f and also without conductors;



一



when measuring creepage d is ta n c e s from an a c c e s s ib le outer surface of an e n c lo s u re of insulating material through a slot or opening in the e n c lo s u re or through an opening in an a c c e s s ib le connector, the a c c e s s ib le outer surface of the e n c lo s u re shall be considered to be conductive as if it were covered by a metal foil during the test of V.1.2, applied without appreciable force (see Figure 0.73, point X);



一



the dimensions for creepage d is ta n c e s functioning as b a s ic in s u la tio n , s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n and re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n are measured after the tests of Annex T according to 4.4.3;



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 106 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



-



for the glass impact test of Clause T.9f damage to the finish, small dents that do not reduce creepage d is ta n c e s below the specified values, surface cracks and the like are ignored. If a through crack appears, creepage d is ta n c e s shall not be reduced;



-



components and parts, other than parts serving as an e n clo su re , are subjected to the test of Clause T.2. After the application of the force, creepage d is ta n c e s shall not be reduced below the required values.



5.4.3.3



Material group and CTI



M a te ria l g r o u p s a re b a s e d o n th e C T I a n d a re c la s s ifie d a s fo llo w s : M a te ria l G r o u p I



600 < CTI



M a t e r i a l G r o u p II



400 < CTI < 600



M a te ria l G r o u p Ilia



175 < CTI < 400



M a te ria l G r o u p lllb



100 < CTI < 175



The



m a te ria l



g ro u p



is c h e c k e d



b y e v a lu a tio n



o f th e



te s t d a ta



fo r th e



m a te ria l



a c c o rd in g



to



If a C T I o f 1 7 5 o r g r e a t e r is n e e d e d , a n d t h e d a t a is n o t a v a i l a b l e , t h e m a t e r i a l g r o u p c a n



be



IE C 6 0 1 1 2 u s in g 5 0 d r o p s o f s o lu tio n A .



If t h e m a t e r i a l g r o u p is n o t k n o w n , M a t e r i a l G r o u p l l l b s h a l l b e a s s u m e d .



e s t a b l i s h e d w i t h a t e s t f o r p r o o f t r a c k i n g i n d e x ( P T I ) a s d e t a i l e d in I E C 6 0 1 1 2 . A m a t e r i a l m a y be



in c lu d e d



in a g r o u p



if its P T I e s t a b l is h e d



by th e s e te s ts



is e q u a l t o , o r g r e a t e r t h a n , t h e



lo w e r v a lu e o f th e c o m p a r a tiv e tra c k in g in d e x (C T I) s p e c ifie d fo r th e g ro u p .



5.4.3.4



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by measurement taking into account Annex 0 7 Annex T and Annex V.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



- 107 -



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Table 17 - Minimum creepage distances for basic insulation and supplementary insulation in mm RMS working voltage up to and including



Pollution degree 1a



V



I, II ， Ilia, m b



I



II



Ilia, lllb



I



II



Ilia, lllb b



10



0,08



0,4



0,4



0,4



1,0



1,0



1,0



12,5



0,09



0,42



0,42



0,42



1,05



1,05



1,05



16



0,1



0,45



0,45



0,45



1,1



1,1



1,1



20



0,11



0,48



0,48



0,48



1,2



1,2



1,2



25



0,125



0,5



0,5



0,5



1,25



1,25



1,25



32



0,14



0,53



0,53



0,53



1,3



1,3



1,3



40



0,16



0,56



0,8



1,1



1,4



1,6



1,8



50



0,18



0,6



0,85



1,2



1,5



63



0,2



0,63



0,9



1,25



1,6



1,8



2,0



80



0,22



0,67



0,95



1,3



1,7



1,9



2,1



100



0,25



0,71



1,0



1,4



1,8



2,0



2,2



125



0,28



0,75



1,05



1,5



1,9



2,1



2,4



160



0,32



0,8



1,1



1,6



2,0



2,2



2,5



200



0,42



1,0



1,4



2,0



2,5



2,8



3,2



250



0.56



1,25



1,8



2,5



3,2



3,6



4,0



320



0,75



1,6



2,2



3,2



4,0



4,5



5,0



400



1,0



2,0



2,8



4,0



5,0



5,6



6,3



500



1,3



2,5



3,6



5,0



6,3



7,1



8,0



630



1,8



3,2



4,5



6,3



8,0



9.0



10



800



2,4



4,0



5,6



8,0



10



11



12,5



1 000



3,2



5,0



7,1



10



12,5



14



16



1 250



4,2



6,3



9,0



12,5



16



18



20



1 600



5,6



8,0



11



16



20



22



25



2 000



7,5



10



14



20



25



28



32



2 500



10



12,5



18



25



32



36



40



3 200



12,5



16



22



32



40



45



50



4 000



16



20



28



40



50



56



63



5 000



20



25



36



50



63



71



80



6 300



25



32



45



63



80



90



100



8 000



32



40



56



80



100



110



125



10 000



40



50



71



100



125



140



160



12 500



50



63



90



125



16 000



63



80



110



160



20 000



80



100



140



200



25 000



100



125



180



250



32 000



125



160



220



320



40 000



160



200



280



400



50 000



200



250



360



500



63 000



250



320



450



600



2



3 Material group



1,9



Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated minimum creepage distance being rounded to the next higher 0,1 mm increment or the value in the next row below whichever is lower. For reinforced insulation, the rounding to the next higher 0,1 mm increment or to double the value in the next row is done after doubling the calculated value for basic insulation. a



The values for pollution degree 1 may be used if a sample complies with the tests of 5.4.1.5.2.



b



Material Group lllb is not recommended for applications in pollution degree 3 with an RMS working voltage above 630 V.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 108 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Table 18 - Minimum values of creepage distances (in mm) for frequencies higher than 30 kHz and up to 400 kHz Voltage



30 kHz < / < 100 kHz



100 kHz < f < , 200 kHz



200 kHz



< f< ,



400 kHz



kV 〇



,1



0,016 7



0,02



0,025



〇



,2



0,042



0,043



0,05



〇



,3



0,083



0,09



0,1



0,4



0,125



0,13



0,15



,5



0,183



0,23



0,25



0,6



0,267



0,38



0,4



0,7



0,358



0,55



0,68



0,8



0,45



0,8



1,1



0,9



0,525



1,0



1,9



1,15



3



〇



1



〇



,6



The values for the creepage distances in the table apply for pollution degree 1. For pollution degree 2 a multiplication factor of 1,2 and for pollution degree 3, a multiplication factor of 1,4 shall be used. Linear interpolation may be applied, the result being rounded up to the next significant digit. The data given in this Table 18 (from Table 2 of IEC 60664-4:2005) does not take into account the influence of tracking phenomena. For that purpose, Table 17 has to be taken into account. Therefore, if values in Table 18 are smaller than those in Table 17, the values of Table 17 apply.



5.4.4



Solid insulation



5.4.4.1 The



General requirements



re q u ire m e n ts



o f th is s u b c la u s e



a p p ly to



solid insulation， i n c l u d i n g



com pounds



and gel



m a te ria ls u s e d a s in s u la tio n .



Solid insulation -



s h a ll n o t b re a k d o w n :



d u e to o v e rv o lta g e s , in c lu d in g tra n s ie n ts , th a t e n te r th e e q u ip m e n t, a n d p e a k v o lta g e s th a t m a y be g e n e r a te d w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t; a n d



-



d u e t o p i n h o l e s in t h i n l a y e r s o f i n s u l a t i o n .



E n a m e lle d



c o a tin g s



s h a ll



reinforced insulation



not



be



used



fo r



basic insulation, supplementary insulation



e x c e p t a s g i v e n in G . 6 . 2 .



E x c e p t fo r p rin te d b o a rd s ,



solid insulation



s h a ll e ith e r:



-



c o m p l y w i t h m i n i m u m d i s t a n c e s t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 4 . 4 . 2 ; o r



-



m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s a n d p a s s t h e t e s t s in 5 . 4 . 4 . 3 t o 5 . 4 . 4 . 7 , a s a p p l i c a b l e .



G la s s u s e d a s



T.9.



Dam age



solid insulation to



th e



fin is h ,



s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e g l a s s i m p a c t t e s t a s s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e



s m a ll



d e n ts



th a t do



v a lu e s , s u r fa c e c r a c k s a n d th e lik e a re ig n o r e d .



creepage distances F o r p rin te d



not



re d u ce



If a t h r o u g h



clearances



b e lo w



cra ck a p p e a rs,



th e



s p e c ifie d



clearances



and



s h a ll n o t b e r e d u c e d b e lo w th e s p e c ifie d v a lu e s .



b o a rd s , s e e C la u s e G .1 3 . F o r a n te n n a te rm in a ls , s e e 5 .4 .5 . F o r



o n in te rn a l w irin g , s e e 5 .4 .6 .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



or



solid insulation



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



5.4.4.2



—109 —



Minimum distance through insulation



E xce p t w h e re d im e n s io n e d



a n o th e r s u b c la u s e a c c o rd in g



to



th e



o f C la u s e



a p p lic a tio n



5 a p p lie s ,



o f th e



d is ta n c e s



in s u la tio n



and



th ro u g h



in s u la tio n



a s fo llo w s



(se e



s h a ll



be



F ig u re 0 . 1 5



a n d F ig u re 0 .1 6 ) : -



working voltage



if th e



does



not exceed



ES2



v o lta g e



lim its , th e r e



is n o



re q u ire m e n t fo r



d is ta n c e th ro u g h in s u la tio n ; -



working voltage



if th e



e x c e e d s E S 2 v o lta g e lim its , th e fo llo w in g ru le s a p p ly :



•



fo r



basic insulation,



•



fo r



supplementary insulation



n o m i n i m u m d i s t a n c e t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n is s p e c i f i e d ; or



reinforced insulation



c o m p ris e d



o f a s in g le



la y e r,



th e m in im u m d is ta n c e th r o u g h in s u la tio n s h a ll b e 0 ,4 m m ; •



supplementary insulation



fo r



or



reinforced insulation



c o m p ris e d



o f m u ltip le



la y e rs ,



th e m in im u m d is ta n c e th r o u g h in s u la tio n s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .4 .6 .



5.4.4.3



Insulating compound forming solid insulation



T h e r e is n o m i n i m u m -



t he



in s u la tin g



in te rn a l



clearance



com pound



creepage distance



or



c o m p le te ly



fills



th e



c a s in g



of



r e q u i r e d if:



a



com ponent



or



s u b a s s e m b ly ,



in c lu d in g a s e m ic o n d u c to r d e v ic e (fo r e x a m p le , a n o p to c o u p le r); a n d -



t he



com ponent



or



s u b a s s e m b ly



m e e ts



th e



m in im u m



d is ta n c e s



th ro u g h



in s u la tio n



o f 5 .4 .4 .2 ; an d -



a s in g le s a m p le p a s s e s th e te s ts o f 5 .4 .1 .5 .2 .



NOTE Some examples impregnation.



of such



treatment are variously



known



as



potting,



encapsulation



and



vacuum



S u c h c o n s tr u c tio n s c o n ta in in g c e m e n te d jo in ts s h a ll a ls o c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .4 .5 .



Alternative requirements for semiconductor devices are given in 5.4.4.4. F o r p rin te d b o a rd s , s e e C la u s e G .1 3 a n d fo r w o u n d c o m p o n e n ts , s e e 5 .4 .4 .7 .



Compliance is checked by sectioning the sample. There shall be no visible voids in the insulating material.



5.4.4.4 T h e re



Solid insulation in semiconductor devices is



th ro u g h



no



m in im u m



in s u la tio n



in s u la tin g



fo r



com pound



clearance o r creepage distance, a n d n o m i n i m u m d i s t a n c e supplementary insulation o r reinforced insulation c o n s i s t i n g o f a n in te rn a l



c o m p le te ly



fillin g



th e



c a s in g



of



a



s e m ic o n d u c to r



com ponent



(fo r



routine tests



fo r



e x a m p le , a n o p to c o u p le r ) p ro v id e d th a t th e c o m p o n e n t: -



passes



th e



type tests



and



in s p e c tio n



c rite ria



of



5 .4 .7 ;



and



passes



e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h d u r i n g m a n u f a c t u r i n g , u s i n g t h e a p p r o p r i a t e t e s t in 5 . 4 . 9 . 2 ; o r -



c o m p l i e s w ith C la u s e G .1 2 .



S u c h c o n s tr u c tio n s c o n ta in in g c e m e n te d jo in ts s h a ll a ls o c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .4 .5 .



A lte rn a tiv e ly , a s e m ic o n d u c to r m a y b e e v a lu a te d a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .4 .3 .



5.4.4.5



Insulating compound forming cemented joints



T h e re q u ire m e n ts s p e c ifie d b e lo w a p p ly w h e n an in s u la tin g c o m p o u n d fo rm s a c e m e n te d jo in t b e tw e e n



tw o



n o n -c o n d u c tiv e



p a rts o r b e tw e e n



a n o th e r n o n -c o n d u c tiv e



p a rt and



r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to o p to c o u p le r s th a t c o m p ly w ith IE C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



its e lf. T h e s e



- 110



W h e re



th e



p a th



b e tw e e n



c o n d u c tiv e



p a rts



旧C



-



is



fille d



w ith



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



in s u la tin g



com pound,



and



th e



in s u la tin g c o m p o u n d fo rm s a c e m e n te d jo in t b e tw e e n tw o n o n -c o n d u c tiv e p a rts o r b e tw e e n a n o n -c o n d u c tiv e



p a rt a n d



its e lf (s e e



F ig u re 0 . 1 4 ,



F ig u re 0 . 1 5



and



F ig u re 0 . 1 6 ) ,



one



o f th e



fo llo w in g a ), b ) o r c) a p p lie s . a)



T h e d is ta n c e a lo n g



th e p a th



clearances



m in im u m



and



b e tw e e n



th e tw o c o n d u c tiv e



creepage distances



p a rts s h a ll b e n o t le s s th a n th e



pollution degree



fo r



2. T h e re q u ire m e n ts



fo r d is ta n c e th ro u g h in s u la tio n o f 5 .4 .4 .2 d o n o t a p p ly a lo n g th e jo in t. b)



The



d is ta n c e a lo n g th e



clearances



m in im u m



p a th



and



b e tw e e n th e tw o



c o n d u c tiv e



creepage distances



fo r



p a rts s h a ll n o t b e le s s th a n th e



pollution degree 1.



A d d itio n a lly , o n e



s a m p l e s h a l l p a s s t h e t e s t o f 5 . 4 . 1 . 5 . 2 . T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r d i s t a n c e t h r o u g h i n s u l a t i o n in 5 .4 .4 .2 d o n o t a p p ly a lo n g th e jo in t. c)



The



re q u ire m e n ts fo r d is ta n c e th ro u g h



in s u la tio n



o f 5 .4 .4 .2



a p p ly b e tw e e n th e c o n d u c tiv e



p a rts a lo n g th e jo in t. A d d itio n a lly , th r e e s a m p le s s h a ll p a s s th e te s t o f 5 .4 .7 . For a) and



b) a b o v e ,



if t h e



in s u la tin g



m a te ria ls



in v o lv e d



have



d iffe r e n t m a te ria l g ro u p s , th e



w o r s t c a s e is u s e d . If a m a t e r i a l g r o u p is n o t k n o w n , M a t e r i a l G r o u p l l l b s h a l l b e u s e d .



F o r b) a n d c) a b o v e , th e te s ts o f 5 .4 .1 .5 .2 a n d 5 .4 .7 p rin te d



b o a rd



m ade



u s in g



p re -p re g



a re n o t a p p lie d



if t h e t e m p e r a t u r e



o f th e



p rin te d



to th e in n e r la y e rs o f a b o a rd



m e a su re d



d u rin g



th e h e a tin g te s t o f 5 .4 .1 .4 d o e s n o t e x c e e d 9 0 °C .



NOTE



Some examples of cemented joints are as follows:



-



two non-conductive parts cemented together (for example, two layers of a multilayer board, see Figure 0 .1 4 ) or the split bobbin of a transformer where the centre limb is secured by adhesive (see Figure 0.16); spirally wrapped insulation on a winding wire, sealed by adhesive insulating compound, is an example of PD1; or



-



the joint between a non-conductive part (the casing) and the insulating compound itself in an optocoupler (see Figure 0.15).



5.4.4.6



Thin sheet material



5.4.4.6.1 T h e re



is



used as



General requirements no



d im e n s io n a l



o r c o n s tru c tio n a l



re q u ire m e n t



fo r



in s u la tio n



in



th in



sheet



m a te ria l



basic insulation.



NOTE An instrument to carry out the electric strength test on thin sheets of insulating material is described in Figure 29. I n s u l a t i o n in t h i n s h e e t m a t e r i a l s m a y b e u s e d f o r



insulation,



supplementary insulation



t wo o r m o re la y e rs a re u s e d ; a n d



-



t h e i n s u l a t i o n is w i t h i n t h e e q u i p m e n t



-



t h e i n s u l a t i o n is n o t s u b j e c t to h a n d l i n g o r a b r a s i o n d u r i n g



-



t he



reinforced



irre s p e c tiv e o f th e d is ta n c e th ro u g h in s u la tio n , p ro v id e d th a t:



-



person



and



enclosure;



and



ordinary person



or



instructed



s e rv ic in g ; a n d



re q u ire m e n ts



and



te s ts



of



5 .4 .4 .6 .2



(fo r



s e p a ra b le



la y e rs )



or



5 .4 .4 .6 .3



(fo r



non-



s e p a r a b le la y e r s ) a re m e t. T h e tw o o r m o r e la y e r s a re n o t r e q u ir e d to b e fix e d to th e s a m e c o n d u c t iv e m o re la y e rs c a n be: -



f i xed to o n e o f th e c o n d u c tiv e p a rts re q u irin g s e p a ra tio n ; o r



-



s h a r e d b e tw e e n th e tw o c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ; o r



-



not fix e d to e ith e r c o n d u c tiv e p a rt.



F o r i n s u l a t i o n in t h r e e o r m o r e l a y e r s o f n o n - s e p a r a b l e t h i n s h e e t m a t e r i a l s :



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



p a rt. T h e tw o o r



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 111



-



-



m i n i m u m d is ta n c e s th ro u g h in s u la tio n a re n o t re q u ire d ; a n d



-



e a c h la y e r o f in s u la tio n d o e s n o t h a v e to b e o f th e s a m e m a te r ia l.



5.4.4.6.2



Separable thin sheet material



In a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5 . 4 . 4 . 6 . 1 , f o r :



-



supplementary insulation c o n s i s t i n g o f t w o l a y e r s e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h t e s t f o r supplementary insulation;



-



supplementary insulation



c o n s is tin g



o f th re e



la y e r s s h a ll p a s s th e e le c tr ic s tr e n g th te s t fo r



-



c o n s is tin g



e le c tric s tre n g th te s t fo r



reinforced insulation;



reinforced insulation



tw o



la y e r s h a ll p a s s th e



or



la y e rs o f m a te ria l, a n y c o m b in a tio n



supplementary insulation;



reinforced insulation



of



o f m a te ria l, e a c h



la y e rs



of



m a te ria l,



each



o f tw o



or



la y e r



s h a ll



pass



th e



or



c o n s is tin g o f th re e la y e rs o f m a te ria l, a n y c o m b in a tio n o f tw o la y e rs



s h a ll p a s s th e e le c tr ic s tr e n g th te s t fo r



reinforced insulation.



If m o r e th a n t h r e e la y e r s a r e u s e d , la y e r s m a y b e d iv id e d



in to tw o o r th r e e g r o u p s o f la y e rs .



E a c h g r o u p o f la y e rs s h a ll p a s s th e e le c tr ic s tr e n g th te s t fo r th e a p p r o p r ia te in s u la tio n .



A t e s t o n a l a y e r o r g r o u p o f l a y e r s is n o t r e p e a t e d o n a n i d e n t i c a l l a y e r o r g r o u p .



T h e r e is n o r e q u i r e m e n t f o r a ll l a y e r s o f i n s u l a t i o n t o b e o f t h e s a m e m a t e r i a l a n d t h i c k n e s s .



5.4.4.6.3



Non-separable thin sheet material



F o r i n s u l a t i o n c o n s i s t i n g o f n o n - s e p a r a b l e t h i n s h e e t m a t e r i a l s , in a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5 . 4 . 4 . 6 . 1 , t h e t e s t p r o c e d u r e s in T a b l e 1 9 a r e a p p l i e d . T h e r e is n o r e q u i r e m e n t f o r a ll l a y e r s o f in s u la tio n to b e o f th e s a m e m a te ria l a n d th ic k n e s s .



Compliance is checked by inspection and by the tests specified in Table 19.



Table 19 - Tests for insulation in non-separable layers Number of layers



Test procedure Supplementary insulation



Two or more layers:



The test procedure of 5.4.4.6.4 is applied Reinforced insulation



Two layers:



The test procedure of 5.4.4.6.4 is applied



Three or more layers:



The test procedures of 5.4.4.6.4 and 5.4.4.6.5 a are applied



NOTE The purpose of the tests in 5.4.4.6.5 is to ensure that the material has adequate strength to resist damage when hidden in inner layers of insulation. Therefore, the tests are not applied to insulation in two layers. The tests in 5.4.4.6.5 are not applied to supplementary insulation. a



Where the insulation is integral to winding wire, the test does not apply.



5.4.4.6.4



Standard test procedure for non-separable thin sheet material



For non-separable layers， electric strength tests are applied in accordance with 5.4.9.1 to all layers together. The test voltage is: - 2 0 0 % of Utes{ if two layers are used; or - 1 5 0 % o f Utest if three or more layers are used ， where Utes{ is the test voltage specified in 5.4.9.1 for s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n or re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n as appropriate.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 112



旧C



-



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



NOTE Unless all the layers are of the same material and have the same thickness, there is a possibility that the test voltage will be divided unequally between layers， causing breakdown of a layer that would have passed if tested separately.



5.4.4.6.5



Mandrel test



The test requirements for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n made of three or more thin insulating sheets of material that are inseparable are specified below. NOTE



This test is based on IEC 61558-1 and will give the same results.



Three test samples, each individual sample consisting of three or more layers of nonseparable thin sheet material forming re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n , are used. One sample is fixed to the mandrel of the test fixture given in Figure 25. The fixing shall be performed as shown in Figure 26. D im ensions in m illim etres



Side view Material: corrosion-resistant metal



60。 ± 5〇 Detail A - Tip



Figure 25 - Mandrel



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018



- 113 D im ensions in m illim etres



Fixing system



Insulating material ▼1 5 0 N ± 1 0 N IEC



IEC



The final position of the mandrel is rotated 230° 土 5° from the initial position.



Figure 26 - Initial position of mandrel



Figure 27 - Final position of mandrel



A pull is applied to the free end of the sample, using an appropriate clamping device. The mandrel is rotated: -



f rom the initial position (Figure 26) to the final position (Figure 27) and back;



-



a second time from the initial position to the final position.



If a sample breaks during rotation where it is fixed to the mandrel or to the clamping device, this does not constitute a failure. If a sample breaks at any other place, the test has failed. After the above test， a sheet of metal foil, 0,035 mm ± 0,005 mm thick, at least 200 mm long, is placed along the surface of the sample, hanging down on each side of the mandrel (see Figure 27). The surface of the foil in contact with the sample shall be conductive， not oxidized or otherwise insulated. The foil is positioned so that its edges are not less than 18 mm from the edges of the sample (see Figure 28). The foil is then tightened by two equal weights, one at each end, using appropriate clamping devices. D im ensions in m illim etres



Insulating material Metal foil



IEC



Figure 28 - Position of metal foil on insulating material



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 114 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



While the mandrel is in its final position, and within the 60 s following the final positioning, an electric strength test is applied between the mandrel and the metal foil in accordance with 5.4.9.1. The test voltage is 150 % of U[esV but not less than 5 kV RMSf C/te s t is the test voltage specified in 5.4.9.1 for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n as appropriate. The test is repeated on the other two samples.



5.4.4.7



Solid insulation in wound components



Basic insulation， supplementary insulation



reinforced



or



insulation



in



a



wound



c o m p o n e n t m a y b e p ro v id e d by: 一



-



t he in s u la tio n on w o u n d c o m p o n e n ts (s e e C la u s e G .5 ); o r th e in s u la tio n on o th e r w ire (s e e C la u s e G .6 ); o r a c o m b in a tio n o f th e tw o .



W o u n d c o m p o n e n ts c o n ta in in g c e m e n te d jo in ts s h a ll a ls o c o m p ly w ith 5 .4 .4 .5 .



P la n a r t r a n s fo r m e r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f C la u s e G .1 3 .



5.4.4.8



Compliance criteria



Compliance with the requirements of 5.4.4.2 to 5.4.4.7 for the adequacy o f solid insulation is checked by inspection and measurement， taking into account Annex O , by the electric strength tests o f 5.4.9.1 and the additional tests required in 5.4.4.2 to 5A .4.7f as applicable.



5.4.4.9



Solid insulation requirements at frequencies higher than 30 kHz



T h e s u ita b ility o f th e -



solid insulation



D e t e r m i n e th e v a lu e



mains



power



o f th e



fre q u e n c y



s h a ll b e d e te r m in e d a s fo llo w s :



b re a kd o w n



EP



e le c tr ic fie ld



in k V / m m



(R M S )



fo r



s tre n g th th e



fo llo w in g m e th o d s s h a ll b e u s e d to d e te r m in e th e v a lu e



o f th e



in s u la tin g



in s u la tio n m a te ria l.



m a te ria l at One



of



th e



of Ep:



•



th e v a lu e d e c la r e d b y th e m a n u f a c t u r e r b a s e d o n m a te r ia l m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s d a ta ; o r



•



th e v a lu e fro m T a b le 2 0 ; o r



•



t h e v a l u e b a s e d o n t h e t e s t s p e c i f i e d in I E C 6 0 2 4 3 - 1 .



T h e m a n u f a c t u r e r is r e s p o n s i b l e f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e v a l u e . -



Determine



th e



re d u c tio n



fa c to r



A： R



fo r



th e



b re a kd o w n



e le c tric



fie ld



s tre n g th



of



th e



i n s u l a t i n g m a t e r i a l a t t h e a p p l i c a b l e f r e q u e n c y f r o m T a b l e 2 1 o r T a b l e 2 2 . I f t h e m a t e r i a l is n o t o n e l i s t e d in T a b l e 21



o r T a b l e 2 2 , u s e t h e a v e r a g e r e d u c t i o n f a c t o r in t h e l a s t r o w o f



T a b l e 21 o r T a b l e 2 2 a s a p p li c a b le . -



D e t e r m i n e th e v a lu e o f th e b r e a k d o w n e le c tr ic fie ld s tr e n g th a t th e a p p lic a b le fr e q u e n c y b y m u ltip ly in g th e v a lu e



w ith th e re d u c tio n fa c to r



Ep -



Determine v a lu e



Ef



th e



a c tu a l



EF



e le c tric



s tre n g th



w ith th e to ta l th ic k n e s s



(d



—



Ep



Fw



x ATp o f th e



in s u la tin g



m a te ria l



by



m u ltip ly in g



th e



in m m ) o f t h e i n s u l a t i n g m a t e r i a l .



V]N = EF x d -



For



basic insulation



fre q u e n c y p e a k o f th e



supplementary insulation, working voltage F p w b y 2 0 % . or



I’ w > -



For th e



reinforced insulation， Kw working voltage F p w b y 2 0



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



1， 2 x ^ pw



s h a ll e x c e e d %.



,



Fw



s h a ll e x c e e d



th e



m e a su re d



h ig h



1， 41



tw ic e



th e



m e a su re d



h ig h fr e q u e n c y



peak of



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



- 115 厂w



〉 1 , 2 x 2 x



Vp\j\j



/ 1 ,4 1



A s a n a lte rn a tiv e to th e a b o v e , th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t a c c o rd in g to 5 .4 .9 .1 e x c e p t th a t th e



mains



m a y b e a p p lie d



fr e q u e n c y te s t v o lta g e s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



-



f or



basic insulation:



1 , 2 x J/pW /



-



f or



reinforced insulation:



1 , 2 x 2 x Kpw /



T h e r e s h a ll b e n o b r e a k d o w n .



Table 20 - Electric field strength E p for some commonly used materials Breakdow n e le c tric fie ld strength



E p



kV/mm M aterial



T hickness o f the m aterial mm 0,75



0,08



0,06



0,05



0,03



Porcelain a



9,2



-



•



_



-



Silicon-glass a



14



■



_



_



■



Phenolic a



17



■



■



-



■



Ceramic a



19



■



m m



_



■



Teflon® a 1



27



■



■



■



■



Melamine-glass a



27



■



_



_



■



Mica a



29



■



■



■



■



Paper phenolic a



38



■



•



_



-



Polyethylene b



49



■



_



52



■



Polystyrene c



55



65



■



-



■



Glass a



60



■



m m



_



■



Kapton® 3 2



303



■



■



-



■



FR530L3



33



_



m m



_



■



Mica-filled phenolic a



28



■



■



■



■



Glass-silico 门 e lam inate3



18



■



雜



_



雜



Cellulose-acetobutyrate d



■



■



120



_



210



Polycarbonate d



-



■



160



-



270



Cellulose-triacetate d



■



■



120



_



210



NOTE



Missing values in the above and the values for other materials not in the list are under investigation.



a



For the breakdown electric field strength of the specified materials, the EP value of 0,75 mm thickness may be used for all thicknesses.



b



The EP value of 0,05 mm thickness is used for the insulation equal to or thinner than 0,05 mm. The EP value of 0,75 mm thickness is used otherwise.



c



The EP value of 0,08 mm thickness is used for the insulation equal to or thinner than 0,08 mm. The EP value of 0,75 mm thickness is used otherwise.



d



The EP value of 0,03 mm thickness is used for the insulation equal to or thinner than 0,03 mm. The EP value of 0,06 mm thickness is used for the insulation equal to or thinner than 0,06 mm and greater than 0,03 mm.



1



Teflon® is the trademark of a product supplied by DuPont. This information is given for the convenience of users of this document and does not constitute an endorsement by IEC of the product named. Equivalent products may be used if they can be shown to lead to the same results.



2



Kapton® is the trademark of a product supplied by DuPont. This information is given for the convenience of users of this document and does not constitute an endorsement by IEC of the product named. Equivalent products may be used if they can be shown to lead to the same results.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 116 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Table 21 - Reduction factors for the value of breakdown electric field strength E p at higher frequencies Frequency kHz Material a



30



100



200



300



400



500



1 000



Reduction factor



2 000



3 000



5 000



10 000



KR



Porcelain



0,52



0,42



0,40



0,39



0,38



0,37



0,36



0,35



0,35



0,34



0,30



Silicon-glass



0,79



0,65



0,57



0,53



0,49



0,46



0,39



0,33



0,31



0,29



0,26



Phenolic



0,82



0,71



0,53



0,42



0,36



0,34



0,24



0,16



0,14



0,13



0,12



Ceramic



0,78



0,64



0,62



0,56



0,54



0,51



0,46



0,42



0,37



0,35



0,29



Teflon®



0,57



0,54



0,52



0,51



0,48



0,46



0,45



0,44



0,41



0,37



0,22



Melamine-glass



0,48



0,41



0,31



0,27



0,24



0,22



0,16



0,12



0,10



0,09



0,06



Mica



0,69



0,55



0,48



0,45



0,41



0,38



0,34



0,28



0,26



0,24



0,20



Paper phenolic



0,58



0,47



0,40



0,32



0,26



0,23



0,16



0,11



0,08



0,06



0,05



Polyethylene



0,36



0,28



0,22



0,21



0,20



0,19



0,16



0,13



0,12



0,12



0,11



Polystyrene



0,35



0,22



0,15



0,13



0,13



0,11



0,08



0,06



0,06



0,06



0,06



Glass



0,37



0,21



0,15



0,13



0,11



0,10



0,08



0,06



0,05



0,05



0,04



Other materials



0,43



0,35



0,30



0,27



0,25



0,24



0,20



0,17



0,16



0,14



0,12



If the frequency lies between the values in any two columns, the reduction factor value in the next column shall be used or a logarithmic interpolation may be used between any two adjacent columns with the calculated value rounded down to the nearest 0,01 value. This data is for materials that are 0,75 mm thick.



Table 22 - Reduction factors for the value of breakdown electric field strength E p at higher frequencies for thin materials Frequency kHz Thin material



30



100



200



300



400



500



1 000



Reduction factor



2 000



3 000



5 000



10 000



K R



Cellulose-acetobutyrate (0,03 mm)



0,67



0,43



0,32



0,27



0,24



0,20



0,15



0,11



0,09



0,07



0,06



Cellulose-acetobutyrate (0,06 mm)



0,69



0,49



0,36



0,30



0,26



0,23



0,17



0,13



0,11



0,08



0,06



Polycarbonate (0,03 mm)



0,61



0,39



0,31



0,25



0,23



0,20



0,14



0,10



0,08



0,06



0,05



Polycarbonate (0,06 mm)



0J0



0,49



0,39



0,33



0,28



0,25



0,19



0,13



0,11



0,08



0,06



Cellulose-triacetate (0,03 mm)



0,67



0,43



0,31



0,26



0,23



0,20



0,14



0,10



0,09



0,07



0,06



Cellulose-triacetate (0,06 mm)



0,72



0,50



0,36



0,31



0,27



0,23



0,17



0,13



0,10



0,10



0,06



Other thin foil materials



0,68



0,46



0,34



0,29



0,25



0,22



0,16



0,12



0,10



0,08



0,06



If the frequency lies between the values in any two columns, the reduction factor value in the next column shall be used or a logarithmic interpolation may be used between any two adjacent columns with the calculated value rounded down to the nearest 0,01 value.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



5.4.5



- 117 -



Antenna terminal insulation



5.4.5.1



General



T h e in s u la tio n -



between



mains



-



between



m a in s



a n d a n te n n a te rm in a ls ; a n d



external circuits



and



p ro v id in g



n o n -m a in s



s u p p ly



v o lta g e s



to



o th e r



e q u ip m e n t h a v in g a n te n n a te r m in a ls s h a ll w ith s ta n d e le c tr o s ta tic d is c h a r g e s a t th e a n te n n a te rm in a ls .



T h is



te s t



does



not



a p p ly



to



e q u ip m e n t



w h e re



one



a n te n n a



te rm in a l



on



th e



e q u ip m e n t



is



c o n n e c t e d t o e a r t h in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 6 . 7 .



NOTE



In China, connection of the CATV to the main protective earthing terminal of equipment is not permitted.



5.4.5.2



Test method



The sample is subjected to 50 discharges from the antenna interface test generator (circuit 3) of Clause D.2f at not more than 12 discharges per minute， with Uc equal to 10 kV. The equipment shall be placed on an insulating surface. The antenna interface test generator output shall be connected to the antenna terminals connected together and to the mains terminals connected together. If the equipment has external circuits providing non-mains supply voltages to other equipment having antenna terminals, the test is repeated with the generator connected to the mains terminals connected together and the e x te rn a l c ir c u it terminals connected together. The equipment is not energized during these tests. NOTE



Test personnel are cautioned not to touch the equipment during this test.



5.4.5.3



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by measuring the insulation resistance with 500 V DC. The equipment complies with the requirement if the insulation resistance measured after 1 min is not less than the values given in Table 23.



Table 23 - Values for insulation resistance Insulation requirements between parts



Insulation resistance MQ



Between parts separated by basic insulation or by supplementary insulation



2



Between parts separated by double insulation or reinforced insulation



4



As an alternative to the above, compliance may be checked by an electric strength test in accordance with 5 .4 .9 . 1 for b a s ic in s u la tio n or re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n as applicable. The test voltage shall be the highest of the test voltages determined by methods 1, 2 and 3. There shall be no insulation breakdown.



5.4.6 The



Insulation of internal wire as a part of a supplementary safeguard re q u ire m e n ts



m e e ts



th e



o f th is



re q u ire m e n ts



s u b c la u s e fo r



a p p ly



w h e re



basic insulation,



th e but



in s u la tio n does



not



of



an



m eet



in te rn a l th e



w ire ,



a lo n e ,



re q u ire m e n ts



fo r



supplementary insulation. W h e re



w ire



i n s u l a t i o n is



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



in s u la tio n



is u s e d



accessible



to a n



supplementary insulation ordinary person: as



p a rt o f a



s y s te m



and



th e w ire



- 118 -



旧C



-



t h e w ir e in s u la tio n d o e s n o t n e e d to b e h a n d le d b y th e



-



t h e w i r e is p l a c e d s u c h t h a t t h e



ordinary person



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



ordinary person;



and



i s u n l i k e l y t o p u l l o n it, o r t h e w i r e s h a l l



b e s o fix e d th a t th e c o n n e c tin g p o in ts a re re lie v e d fro m s tra in ; a n d -



t h e w i r e is r o u t e d a n d f i x e d s u c h a s n o t t o t o u c h



u n e a rth e d



accessible



c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ;



and -



t he



w ire



in s u la tio n



insulation; -



passes



th e



e le c tric



s tre n g th



te s t



of



5 .4 .9 .1 fo r



supplementary



and



t h e d i s t a n c e t h r o u g h t h e w i r e i n s u l a t i o n s h a l l b e a t l e a s t a s g i v e n in T a b l e 2 4 .



Table 24 - Distance through insulation of internal wiring Working voltage in case of failure of basic insulation



Minimum distance through insulation



V peak or DC



V RMS (sinusoidal)



mm



> 71 < 350



> 50 < 250



0,17



> 350



> 250



0,31



Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement, and by the test of 5.4.9.1.



5.4.7



Tests for semiconductor components and for cemented joints



Three samples are subjected to the thermal cycling sequence of 5.4.1.5.3. Before testing a cemented jo in t， any winding of enamelled wire used in the component is replaced by metal foil or by a few turns o f bare wire, placed close to the cemented joint. The three samples are then tested as follows: -



one of the samples is subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, immediately after the last period at (T1 土 2) °C during thermal cycling， except that the test voltage is multiplied by 1,6; and



-



the other samples are subjected to the relevant electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 after the humidity conditioning o f 5.4.8, except that the test voltage is multiplied by 1,6.



Compliance is checked by test and the following inspections: Except for cemented joints on the same inner surface of a printed board, compliance is checked by inspection o f the cross-sectional area, and there shall be no visible voids， gaps or cracks in the insulating material. In the case of insulation between conductors on the same inner surface of printed boards and the insulation between conductors on different surfaces of multilayer boards, compliance is checked by external visual inspection. There shall be no delamination.



5.4.8



Humidity conditioning



Humidity conditioning is carried out for 48 h in a cabinet or room containing air with a relative humidity of (93 ± 3) %• The temperature of the air, at all places where samples can be located， is maintained within ± 2 °C of any value T between 20 °C and 3d °C so that condensation does not occur. During this conditioning, the component or subassembly is not energized. For tropical conditions the time duration shall be 120 h at a temperature of (40 ± 2) °C and a relative humidity of (93 ± 3) %. Before the humidity conditioning, the sample is brought to a temperature between the specified temperature T and (T + 4) °C. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



5.4.9 5.4.9.1



- 119 -



Electric strength test Test procedure for type testing of solid insulation



Unless otherwise specified, compliance is checked either: -



immedi atel y following the temperature test in 5.4.1.4; or



-



if a component or subassembly is tested separately outside the equipment, it is brought to the temperature attained by that part during the temperature test in 5.4.1.4 (for example, by placing it in an oven) prior to performing the electric strength test.



Alternatively, thin sheet material for s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n or re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n may be tested at room temperature. Unless otherwise specified, the test voltage for the electric strength of b a s ic in s u la tio n , s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n or re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n is the highest value o f the following three methods: -



Method 1: Determine the test voltage according to Table 25 using the re q u ire d w ith s ta n d v o lta g e (based on transient voltages from the AC m a in s or DC m a in s or from e x te rn a l c irc u its ).



-



Method 2: Determine the test voltage according to Table 26 using the peak of the w o rk in g v o lta g e or the recurring peak voltages, whichever is higher.



-



Method 3: Determine the test voltage according to Table 21 using the nominal AC m ains voltage (to cover te m p o ra ry o ve rvo lta g e s).



The insulation is subjected to the highest test voltage as follows: -



by applying an AC voltage of substantially sine-wave form having a frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz; or



-



by applying a DC v o lta g e for the time specified below.



The voltage applied to the insulation under test is gradually raised from zero to the prescribed voltage and maintained at that value for 60 s (for ro u tin e te s ts see 5.4.9.2). Where necessary, the insulation is tested with a metal foil in contact with the insulating surface. This procedure is limited to places where the insulation is likely to be weak (for example, where there are sharp metal edges under the insulation). If practicable, insulating linings are tested separately. Care is taken that the metal foil is so placed that no flashover occurs at the edges of the insulation. Where adhesive metal foil is used, the adhesive shall be conductive. To avoid damage to components or insulations that are not involved in the test, ICs or the like, may be disconnected and equipotential bonding may be used. A varistor complying with Clause G.8 may be removed during the test. For equipment incorporating b a s ic in s u la tio n and s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n in parallel with re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n , care is taken that the voltage applied to the re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n does not overstress b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n . Where capacitors are in parallel with the insulation under test (for example ， radio-frequency filter capacitors) and the capacitors can affect the test results, DC test voltages shall be used. Components providing a DC path in parallel with the insulation to be tested， such as discharge resistors for filter capacitors and voltage limiting devices, may be disconnected. Where insulation of a transformer winding varies along the length of the winding in accordance with 5.4.1.6, an electric strength test method is used that stresses the insulation accordingly. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 120



旧C



-



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



EXAMPLE Such a test method may be an induced voltage test that is applied at a frequency sufficiently high to avoid saturation of the transformer. The input voltage is raised to a value that would induce an output voltage equal to the required test voltage.



Table 25 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on transient voltages Required withstand voltage up to and including



Test voltage for basic insulation or supplementary insulation



kV peak



Test voltage for reinforced insulation



kV peak or DC



0,33



0,33



0,5



0,5



0,8



,8



0,8



1,5



1,5



1,5



2,5



2,5



2,5



4



4



4



6



6



6



8



8



8



12



12



12



18



〇



〇



1,5



^R a



,5



x UR a



Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points. 3



UR



is any required withstand voltage higher than 12 kV.



Table 26 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on the peak of the working voltages and recurring peak voltages Voltage up to and including



Test voltage for basic insulation or supplementary insulation



kV peak



Test voltage for reinforced insulation



kV peak or DC



0,33



0,43



0,53



〇



,5



0,65



〇



,8



1,04



1,28



1,5



1,95



2,4



2,5



3,25



4



4



5,2



6,4



6



7,8



9,6



8



10,4



12,8



12



15,6



19,2



〇



1,3 x t/p a



,8



1,6 x



Up a



Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points. a



Up



is any voltage higher than 12 kV.



Table 27 - Test voltages for electric strength tests based on temporary overvoltages Nominal mains system voltage



Test voltage for basic insulation or supplementary insulation



V RMS



Test voltage for reinforced insulation



kV peak or DC



Up to and including 250



2



4



Over 250 up to and including 600



2,5



5



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 121



-



D im ensions in m illim etres



Terminals for test voltage



base ie c



Figure 29 - Example of electric strength test instrument for solid insulation NOTE Thin sheet insulation can be tested using the instrument of Figure 29. When applying the test fixture ， ensure that the specimen sample diameter is of sufficient size to prevent breakdown around the edges.



There shall be no insulation breakdown during the test. Insulation breakdown is considered to have occurred when the current that flows as a result of the application o f the test voltage, rapidly increases in an uncontrolled manner, that is, the insulation does not restrict the flow of the current. Corona discharge or a single momentary flashover is not regarded as insulation breakdown.



5.4.9.2



Test procedure for routine tests



Where required ， ro u tin e te s ts are performed according to 5 .4 .9 .1, except for the following: -



the test may be performed at room temperature; and



一



the duration of the electric strength test shall be between 1 s to 4 s; and



-



the test voltage may be reduced by 10 %.



NOTE



Routine testing for equipment is specified in IEC 62911.



There shall be no insulation breakdown during the test. Insulation breakdown is considered to have occurred when the current that flows as a result of the application o f the test voltage, rapidly increases in an uncontrolled manner， that is, the insulation does not restrict the flow of the current. Corona discharge or a single momentary flashover is not regarded as insulation breakdown.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 122



5.4.10



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Safeguards against transient voltages from external circuits



5.4.10.1



Requirements



A d e q u a te



e le c tric a l



c o n n e c t e d to a)



旧C



-



external circuits



n o n -c o n d u c tiv e h e ld



s e p a ra tio n



p a rts



o r o th e rw is e



and



s h a ll



be



p ro v id e d



b e tw e e n



th e



c irc u itry



in te n d e d



to



be



to



be



a s i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 1 3 , ID n u m b e r 1, F i g u r e 3 0 a n d : u n e a rth e d



m a in ta in e d



c o n d u c tiv e



in c o n t i n u o u s



p a rts



o f th e



c o n ta c t w ith th e



e q u ip m e n t e x p e c te d b o d y d u rin g



n o rm a l u s e (fo r



e x a m p le , a t e le p h o n e h a n d s e t o r h e a d s e t o r th e p a lm r e s t s u r fa c e o f a la p to p o r n o te b o o k c o m p u te r); b)



accessible p a r t s a n d c i r c u i t r y , e x c e p t f o r t h e p i n s o f c o n n e c t o r s . H o w e v e r , s u c h p i n s s h a l l n o t b e accessible u n d e r normal operating conditions b y t h e b l u n t p r o b e o f F i g u r e V . 3 ;



c)



ES1 o r ES2 external circuit. T h e p a r t i s accessible. a n o th e r



p a rt



s e p a ra te d



fro m



th e



c irc u itry



re q u ire m e n t fo r s e p a ra tio n



in te n d e d



to



be



c o n n e c te d



a p p lie s w h e th e r o r n o t th e



ES1



T h e s e re q u ire m e n ts d o n o t a p p ly w h e re c irc u it a n a ly s is a n d e q u ip m e n t in v e s tig a tio n th a t a d e q u a te



p ro te c tio n



is a s s u r e d



to or



an



ES2



in d ic a te



b y o th e r m e a n s (fo r e x a m p le , b e tw e e n tw o c irc u its e a c h



o f w h ic h h a s a p e r m a n e n t c o n n e c t io n to p r o te c tiv e e a r th ) .



Connection for AC mains supply



Figure 30 - Application points of test voltage 5.4.10.2



Test methods



5.4.10.2.1



General



The separation is checked by the test of either 5.4.10.2.2 or 5.4.10.2.3. NOTE



In Australia, the tests of both 5.4.10.2.2 and 5.4.10.2.3 apply.



During the test: -



all conductors intended to be connected to the e x te rn a l c ir c u it are connected together, including any conductors that may be connected to earth in the e x te rn a l c irc u it; and



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



-



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 123 -



all conductors intended to be connected to other e x te rn a l c irc u its are also connected together.



Table 28 - Test values for electric strength tests Impulse test (see Annex D) Parts



Steady state test Test generator



Parts indicated in 5.4.10.1 a) a



2,5 kV



circuit 1



1,5 kV



Parts indicated in 5.4.10.1 b) and c) b



1,5 kV



circuit 1 c



1,0 kV



Surge suppressors shall not be removed. b



Surge suppressors may be removed, provided that such devices pass the impulse test of 5.4.10.2.2 when tested as components outside the equipment. During this test, it is allowed for a surge suppressor to operate and for a sparkover to occur in a GDT.



5.4.10.2.2



Impulse test



The electrical separation is subjected to ten impulses of alternating polarity as given in Table 28. The interval between successive impulses is 60 s. Uc is the value to which the capacitor needs to be charged. NOTE In Australia, a value of U 〇= 7,0 kV is used for hand-held telephones and for headsets and 2,5 kV for other equipment in 5.4.10.1 a). The 7 kV impulse simulates lightning surges on typical rural and semi-rural network lines.



5.4.10.2.3



Steady state test



The electrical separation is subjected to an electric strength test according to 5.4.9.1, with a voltage as given in Table 28. NOTE In Australia, the steady state test voltage is 3 kV for 5.4.10.1 a), and 1,5 kV for 5.4.10.1 b) and c). These values have been determined considering the low frequency induced voltages from the power supply distribution system.



5.4.10.3



Compliance criteria



During the tests of 5.4.10.2.2 and 5.4.10.2.3: -



there shall be no insulation breakdown; and



-



except as indicated in Table 28, footnote c, a surge suppressor shall not operate, or a sparkover shall not occur within a GDT.



For the electric strength test, insulation breakdown is considered to have occurred when the current that flows as a result of the application of the test voltage rapidly increases in an uncontrolled manner. For the impulse tests, insulation breakdown is verified in one of the following two ways: -



during the application of the impulses, by observation of oscillograms, surge suppressor operation or breakdown through insulation is judged from the shape of an oscillogram;



-



after application of all the impulses, by an insulation resistance test. Disconnection of surge suppressors is permitted while insulation resistance is being measured. The test voltage is 500 V DC or, if surge suppressors are left in place, a DC test voltage that is 10 % less than the surge suppressor operating or striking voltage. The insulation resistance shall not be less than 2 MO.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 124 5.4.11



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Separation between external circuits and earth



5.4.11.1 These



旧C



General



re q u ire m e n ts



a p p ly o n ly to e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d



to



be c o n n e c te d



to



external circuits



i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 1 3 , ID n u m b e r 1.



T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to :



-



permanently connected equipment;



-



pluggable equipment type B;



-



stationary pluggable equipment type A,



or



or t h a t i s i n t e n d e d t o b e u s e d in a l o c a t i o n h a v i n g



e q u ip o te n tia l b o n d in g (s u c h a s a te le c o m m u n ic a tio n c e n tre , a d e d ic a te d c o m p u te r ro o m o r



restricted access area) a n d protective earthing c o n n e c t i o n



a



-



h a s in s ta lla tio n



o f th e s o c k e t-o u tle t b y a



stationary pluggable equipment type A, protective earthing conductor, i n c l u d i n g t o b u i l d i n g e a r t h b y a skilled person.



5.4.11.2 T h e re



skilled person;



o f th e



or



th a t h a s p ro v is io n fo r a p e r m a n e n tly c o n n e c te d in s tru c tio n s fo r th e in s ta lla tio n o f th a t c o n d u c to r



Requirements



s h a ll



m e n tio n e d



in s tru c tio n s th a t re q u ire v e rific a tio n



be



s e p a ra tio n



above



and



any



b e tw e e n



c irc u itry



in te n d e d



to



be



c o n n e c te d



p a rts o r c ir c u itr y th a t w ill b e e a r th e d



external circuits



to



in s o m e



a p p lic a tio n s , e ith e r



w ith in th e E U T o r v ia o th e r e q u ip m e n t.



S P D s th a t b rid g e



th e s e p a ra tio n



external circuits



and



b e tw e e n



ES1



or ES2



e a rth s h a ll h a v e a m in im u m



c irc u itry in te n d e d



to



ra te d o p e ra tin g v o lta g e



be c o n n e c te d



U0[)



to



(fo r e x a m p le ,



t h e s p a r k o v e r v o lt a g e o f a g a s d i s c h a r g e t u b e ) o f:



^ o p - "p e a k +



+



w h e re :



Upeak



is o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g v a l u e s : -



for



e q u ip m e n t



in te n d e d



v o lta g e o f th e A C A ^ / sp



mains



to



be



in s ta lle d



in



an



a re a



e xce e d s 130 V:



n e g a tiv e



to le ra n c e



th e



n o m in a l ra te d



n o m in a l



180 V. o f th e



ra te d



o p e ra tin g



v o lta g e



S P D p ro d u c tio n , o b ta in e d b y s u b tra c tin g th e m in im u m fro m



th e



360 V;



f o r a ll o t h e r e q u i p m e n t :



is t h e



w h e re



o p e ra tin g



v o lta g e .



m a n u f a c t u r e r , A ( 7 sp s h a l l b e t a k e n



as



If t h is



10 %



due



to v a r ia t io n s



in



ra te d o p e ra tin g v o lta g e



is n o t s p e c i f i e d



b y th e S P D



o f th e ra te d o p e ra tin g



v o lta g e o f



th e S P D .



AUsa



is t h e c h a n g e o f t h e r a t e d o p e r a t i n g v o l t a g e d u e t o t h e S P D e x p e c te d o p e ra tin g s p e c ifie d



life



of



th e



e q u ip m e n t， o b ta in e d



v o lta g e a fte r a g e in g fro m b y th e S P D



th e



by



s u b tra c tin g



a g e in g o v e r th e th e



ra te d o p e ra tin g v o lta g e .



m in im u m



If t h i s is n o t



m a n u f a c t u r e r , A " sa s h a l l b e t a k e n a s 1 0 % o f t h e r a t e d



o p e ra tin g v o lta g e o f th e S P D . ( A t / sp + A [ / s a ) m a y b e a s i n g l e v a l u e p r o v i d e d b y t h e c o m p o n e n t m a n u f a c t u r e r .



5.4.11.3



Test method and compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection and by the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 with a test voltage according to Table 25 for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n based on the re q u ire d w ith s ta n d v o lta g e for the m a in s voltage of the equipment. Components， other than capacitors, that bridge the separation， may be removed during electric strength testing. Components that are left in place during the test shall not be damaged. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 125 -



If components are removed, the following additional test with a test circuit according to Figure 31 is performed with all components in place. For equipment powered from AC m ains, the test is performed with a voltage equal to the ra te d v o lta g e of the equipment or to the upper voltage of the ra te d v o lta g e range. For equipment powered from DC m ains, the test is performed with a voltage equal to the highest nominal voltage o f the AC m a in s in the region where the equipment is to be used (for example, 230 V for Europe or 120 V for North America). The current flowing in the test circuit of Figure 31 shall not exceed 10 mA. Components bridging the insulation，for example,



Figure 31 - Test for separation between an external circuit and earth 5.4.12



Insulating liquid



5.4.12.1 An



General requirements



insulating liquid



s h a ll n o t b r e a k d o w n d u e to o v e r v o lta g e s , in c lu d in g tr a n s ie n ts , th a t e n te r



th e e q u ip m e n t, a n d p e a k v o lta g e s th a t m a y be g e n e ra te d w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t.



insulating liquid s h a l l insulating liquid s h a l l c o m p l y



The



5.4.12.2 The



w ith th e



5.4.12.3 The



w ith



5 .4 .1 2 .2



and



5 .4 .1 2 .3 .



The



c o n ta in e r



fo r



th e



w ith 5 .4 .1 2 .4 .



Electric strength of an insulating liquid insulating liquid s h a l l insulating liquid i n t h e e q u i p m e n t .



e le c tric s tre n g th



5.4.9



c o m p ly



o f th e



c o m p ly w ith



th e



e le c tric



s tre n g th



t e s t in



Compatibility of an insulating liquid



insulating liquid



-



solid insulation;



-



t he



s h a ll n o t r e a c t w ith o r o th e r w is e d e te r io r a te



safeguards,



such as:



or



insulating liquid



its e lf.



For in s u la tin g liq u id s with a thermal classification of IEC 60085 Class 105 (A)t compliance is checked by operating the immersed equipment for 60 days followed by an electric strength test in accordance with 5.4.9. There shall be no breakdown and there shall be no visible damage or deformation of the other immersed e q u ip m e n t sa fe g u a rd s. For higher thermal classes the requirements of 5.4.1.4.3 are applicable.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 126 5.4.12.4 The



旧C



62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018



Container for insulating liquid insulating liquid



c o n ta in e r fo r th e



s h a ll



b e p ro v id e d



w ith



a



m e a n s o f p re ssu re



r e l i e f if



t h e r e is a c l o s e d v e s s e l .



insulating liquid



The



For an



c o n t a in e r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G . 1 5 .2 .1 fo r a c lo s e d v e s s e l.



insulating liquid



t h a t is a ls o c o n s i d e r e d to b e a



hazardous substance,



th e c o n ta in e r



s h a ll a ls o c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 7 .2 .



Compliance is checked by the relevant tests.



5.5



Components as safeguards



5.5.1 A



General



com ponent



is c o n s i d e r e d



safeguard



a



if th e



c la s s ific a tio n



o f th e



e n e rg y



so u rce



changes



d u e to a fa ilu r e o f th e c o m p o n e n t.



A com ponent



used as a



safeguard



s h a ll:



-



c o m p l y w i t h a ll t h e a p p l i c a b l e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h a t



-



b e u s e d w it h in its r a tin g .



NOTE



safeguard;



and



See Annex G for the qualification of components used as a safeguard.



5.5.2



Capacitors and RC units



5.5.2.1



General requirements



C a p a c ito rs



and



RC



u n its



th a t



se rve



as



safeguards



(e le c tric a l)



s h a ll



c o m p ly



w ith



IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 . R C u n its m a y c o n s is t o f d is c r e te c o m p o n e n ts .



C a p a c ito r s o r R C u n its w ith o n e o r m u ltip le c a p a c ito r s s h a ll: -



c o m p l y w ith



C la u s e



G .1 1 , h o w e v e r, th e



c a p a c ito r a n d R C u n it u s e d a s a •



ES3



•



E S 2 a n d p ro te c tiv e e a rth ; a n d



•



ES2 and ES1;



is o la te d fro m th e



mains



re q u ire m e n ts o f C la u s e



basic safeguard



G .1 1



d o n o t a p p ly to th e



b e tw e e n :



a n d p ro te c tiv e e a rth ; a n d



and -



pass



th e



e le c tric



s tre n g th



te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1 , ta k in g



in to



a c c o u n t th e



to ta l



working voltage



a c r o s s th e c a p a c it o r ( s ) a n d R C u n it. C a p a c it o r s c o m p ly in g w ith IE C 6 0 3 8 4 - 1 4 d o n o t n e e d t o b e t e s t e d if: •



th e re q u ire d p e a k im p u ls e te s t v o lta g e o f T a b le G .1 2 ; a n d



•



th e r e q u ire d R M S te s t v o lta g e o f T a b le G .1 2 m u ltip lie d b y 1 ， 414



a re e q u a l to o r g r e a te r th a n th e re q u ire d te s t v o lta g e o f 5 .4 .9 .1 . W hen



m u ltip le



c a p a c ito rs



a re



u s e d , th e te s t v o lta g e s



o f T a b le G .1 2



a re



m u ltip lie d



by th e



n u m b e r o f c a p a c ito rs u s e d . Under



single fault conditions,



if a c a p a c it o r o r R C u n it c o n s is t s o f m o r e th a n o n e c a p a c it o r ，



th e v o lta g e o n e a c h o f th e re m a in in g in d iv id u a l c a p a c ito r s s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e v o lta g e ra tin g o f th e re le v a n t in d iv id u a l c a p a c ito rs .



NOTE In Norway, due to the IT power system used, capacitors are required to be rated for the applicable line-toline voltage (230 V).



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎



旧C



- 127 -



2018



basic safeguards



C la s s X c a p a c ito rs m a y b e u s e d a s



in c i r c u i t s i s o l a t e d f r o m



th e



mains



but



s h a ll n o t b e u s e d a s a: -



basic safeguard



-



supplementary safeguard.



in c i r c u i t s c o n n e c t e d t o t h e



C la s s X c a p a c ito r s s h a ll n o t b e u s e d a s a



5.5.2.2 W h e re



mains;



or



reinforced safeguard.



Capacitor discharge after disconnection of a connector a



c a p a c ito r



v o lta g e



mains



e x a m p le , th e



accessible u p o n d i s c o n n e c t i o n o f a c o n n e c t o r ( f o r accessible v o l t a g e m e a s u r e d 2 s a f t e r d i s c o n n e c t i o n o f



becom es



c o n n e c to r) th e



th e c o n n e c to r , s h a ll c o m p ly w ith : -



t he



ES1



lim its



normal operating conditions



o f T a b le 5 u n d e r



ordinary person;



fo r an



and -



normal operating conditions



t h e E S 2 lim its o f T a b le 5 u n d e r



fo r an



instructed person;



and -



t he an



A



ES2 l i m i t s o f T a b l e 5 instructed person.



re s is to r o r a



s u b je c te d



to



g ro u p



under



single fault conditions



safeguard single fault conditions i f t h e



o f re s is to rs



s im u la te d



used



as



a



fo r b o th a n



ordinary person



a g a in s t



c a p a c ito r d is c h a rg e



re s is to r



or



th e



g ro u p



of



and



is



not



re s is to rs



c o m p lie s w ith 5 .5 .6 .



If a n IC t h a t i n c l u d e s a c a p a c i t o r d i s c h a r g e f u n c t i o n ( I C X ) is u s e d t o c o m p l y w i t h t h e a b o v e : -



t he



accessible



g iv e n



above



mains single fault condition o f a n



v o lta g e (fo r e x a m p le , a t th e



under a



c o n n e c t o r ) s h a ll n o t e x c e e d IC X



or of any one



th e lim its



c o m p o n e n t in t h e



a s s o c ia te d c a p a c ito r d is c h a r g e c irc u it; o r -



t he



IC X w ith th e



a s s o c ia te d



c irc u itry a s



p ro v id e d



in t h e



e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e



re q u ire m e n ts o f C la u s e G .1 6 . A n y im p u ls e a tte n u a tin g c o m p o n e n ts (s u c h a s v a ris to rs a n d G D T s ) a re d is c o n n e c te d ; o r -



three



s a m p le s



of



th e



IC X



te s te d



s e p a ra te ly



s h a ll



c o m p ly



w ith



th e



re q u ire m e n ts



of



C la u s e G .1 6 . The



m e a su re m e n t



is



m ade



w ith



an



in s tru m e n t



h a v in g



an



in p u t



im p e d a n c e



c o n s is tin g



of a



r e s i s t a n c e o f 1 0 0 M Q ± 5 M Q in p a r a l l e l w i t h a n i n p u t c a p a c i t a n c e o f 2 5 p F o r l e s s .



If a s w i t c h th e



(fo r e x a m p le , th e



m o s t u n fa v o u ra b le



mains



s w i t c h ) h a s a n i n f l u e n c e o n t h e t e s t r e s u lt , it is p la c e d



p o s itio n . T h e d is c o n n e c tio n



o f th e c o n n e c to r (s ta rt o f d is c h a rg e



in



tim e )



h a s t o b e d o n e a t t h e m o m e n t w h e n t h e i n p u t c a p a c i t o r o f t h e d e v i c e u n d e r t e s t is c h a r g e d t o its p e a k v a lu e .



O th e r m e th o d s th a t g iv e a s im ila r re s u lt a s th e a b o v e m e th o d m a y b e u s e d .



5.5.3



Transformers



T ra n s fo rm e rs u se d as a



5.5.4



safeguard



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .5 .3 .



Optocouplers



In s u la tio n o f o p to c o u p le rs u s e d a s a



safeguard



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 5 .4 o r



w ith C la u s e G .1 2 .



5.5.5



Relays



In s u la tio n o f re la y s u s e d a s a



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



safeguard



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f



5.4.



-128



5.5.6 The



旧C



-



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Resistors fo llo w in g



re s is to r



a p p lic a tio n s



s h a ll



c o m p ly



w ith



th e



re le v a n t



te s ts



as



in d ic a te d



in



T a b le 2 9 : -



a s in g le re s is to r u s e d a s a



-



a re s is to r o r a g ro u p th e



-



mains



reinforced safeguard



o f re s is to rs s e rv in g



as a



reinforced insulation;



o r fo r b rid g in g



safeguard



b e tw e e n



a c irc u it c o n n e c te d



to



a n d a c ir c u it in te n d e d to b e c o n n e c t e d to c o a x ia l c a b le ;



safeguard.



r e s i s t o r s s e rv in g a s a c a p a c ito r d is c h a rg e



NOTE In Finland, Norway and Sweden, resistors used as a basic safeguard or for bridging basic insulation in class I pluggable equipment type A shall comply with the relevant requirements of Clause G.10. In a d d i t i o n , r e s i s t o r s t h a t b r i d g e



insulation -



a



basic insulation, supplementary insulation



f or



s in g le



a



reinforced



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith e a c h o f th e fo llo w in g : re s is to r



or



a



g ro u p



of



re s is to rs



s h a ll



distance r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5.4.2 a n d 5.4.3, t o t a l working voltage a c r o s s t h e i n s u l a t i o n -



or



g ro u p



insulation,



of th e



s h o rt-c irc u ite d



re s is to rs



used



clearance



and



in



tu rn



c o m p ly



re s p e c tiv e ly , (s e e F ig u re



clearance



w ith



b e tw e e n



u n le s s



a



th e



g ro u p



c o m p lie s



creepage



its t e r m i n a t io n s



fo r th e



0.4);



reinforced safeguard o r creepage distance a r e a s s e s s e d as



and



w ith



th e



fo r



reinforced



b rid g in g



a s if e a c h



re le v a n t



re s is to r w e re



re q u ire m e n ts



of



C la u s e G .1 0 .



Table 29 - Overview of tests for resistor applications Conditioning



Resistor test



Voltage surge test



Impulse test



Overload test



G.10.2



G.10.3



G.10.4



G.10.5



G.10.6



Reinforced safeguard or bridging reinforced insulation



X



X



Between a mains connected circuit and a coaxial cable



X



Xa



Xb



Capacitor discharge safeguard



X



Resistor application



a



X



For an external circuit indicated in Table 13, ID 6 and 7. For an external circuit indicated in Table 13, ID 3, 4 and 5.



5.5.7



SPDs



W h e r e a v a r i s t o r is u s e d b e t w e e n a



mains



c irc u it a t E S 3 v o lta g e a n d



-



t h e e a rth c o n n e c tio n s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 5 .6 .7 ; a n d



-



t h e v a r is to r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e G .8 .



W h e re



a



v a ris to r



is



used



b e tw e e n



lin e



and



n e u tra l



or



b e tw e e n



protective earthing:



lin e s ,



it s h a l l



c o m p ly



w ith



protective earthing,



it s h a l l



c o n s is t



of a



C la u s e G .8 .



W h e re



an



SPD



is



used



b e tw e e n



th e



mains



and



v a r i s t o r a n d a G D T c o n n e c t e d in s e r i e s , w h e r e t h e f o l l o w i n g a p p l i e s : -



t h e v a r is to r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e G .8 ;



-



t h e G D T s h a ll c o m p ly w ith : •



th e e le c tric s tre n g th te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1 fo r



•



th e



e x te rn a l



re s p e c tiv e ly



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



basic insulation;



clearance a n d creepage distance f o r basic insulation.



and



re q u ire m e n ts



of



5.4.2



and



5.4.3



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 129 -



NOTE 1 Some examples of SPDs are MOVs, varistors and GDTs. A varistor is sometimes referred to as a VDR or a metal oxide varistor (MOV). T h e a b o v e r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to S P D s c o n n e c t e d to r e lia b le e a r th in g ( s e e 5 .6 .7 ).



NOTE 2 It is not a requirement of this document that surge suppressors comply with any particular component standard. However, attention is drawn to the IEC 61643 series of standards, in particular: -



IEC 61643-21 (surge suppressors in telecommunications application)



-



I EC 61643-311 (gas discharge tubes)



一



IEC 61643-321 (avalanche breakdown diodes)



一



IEC 61643-331 (metal oxide varistors)



-



I EC 61643-341 (thyristor surge suppressors TSS).



NOTE 3 SPDs between an external circuit and earth are not considered to be a safeguard. Requirements for those SPDs are covered in 5.4.11.2.



5.5.8 The



Insulation between the mains and an external circuit consisting of a coaxial cable in s u la tio n



r e s i s t o r in



circuit



b e tw e e n



p a ra lle l w ith



a n d fro m th e



th e th is



mains



and



in s u la tio n ,



th e



s h a ll



c o n n e c tio n be



a b le



to



a



c o a x ia l



to w ith s ta n d



c a b le ,



su rg e s



fro m



in c lu d in g th e



any



external



mains.



T h i s r e q u i r e m e n t d o e s n o t a p p l y in a n y o f t h e f o l l o w i n g e q u i p m e n t : -



e q u i p m e n t fo r in d o o r u s e p r o v id e d w ith a b u ilt-in ( in te g r a l) a n te n n a a n d n o t p r o v id e d w ith a c o n n e c tio n to a c o a x ia l c a b le ; o r



-



e q u i p m e n t c o n n e c t e d t o a r e l i a b l e e a r t h i n g in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 6 . 7 .



The combination of the insulation with the resistor is tested after the conditioning of G.10.2 as follows: -



for equipment intended to be connected to a coaxial cable connected to an outdoor antenna， the voltage surge test of G.10.4; or



-



for equipment intended to be connected to another coaxial cable， the impulse test of G.10.5; or



-



for equipment intended to be connected to both an outdoor antenna and other coaxial connections, the voltage surge test o f G.10.4 and the impulse test o f G.10.5.



After the tests: -



the insulation shall comply with 5.4.5.3 and the resistor may be removed during this test; and



-



the resistors shall comply with G.10.3, unless available data shows compliance of the resistor.



5.5.9



Safeguards for socket-outlets in outdoor equipment



A re s id u a l c u r r e n t p r o te c tiv e d e v ic e (R C D ) w ith ra te d re s id u a l o p e ra tin g c u r r e n t n o t e x c e e d in g 3 0 m A s h a l l b e u s e d in t h e



The



RCD



mains



s u p p ly to s o c k e t- o u tle t s in te n d e d fo r g e n e r a l u s e .



s h a ll b e a n in te g ra l p a rt o f th e



in s t a lla tio n . If th e



RCD



o r s h a ll b e p a rt o f th e b u ild in g



is n o t a n i n t e g r a l p a r t o f t h e e q u i p m e n t , t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l p r o v i d e



th e in s ta lla tio n re q u ire m e n ts fo r th e



RCD.



Compliance is checked by inspection.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



outdoor equipment



- 130 5.6



62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018



Protective conductor



5.6.1



General



Under -



旧C



normal operating conditions， a protective conductor



as a



basic safeguard



accessible



to p r e v e n t



c o n d u c tiv e



m a y se rve :



p a rts fro m



e x c e e d in g



ES1



lim its ;



and -



a s a m e a n s t o l i m i t t r a n s i e n t v o l t a g e s in a n e a r t h e d c i r c u i t .



single fault conditions, safeguard t o p r e v e n t accessible Under



5.6.2



a



protective conductor



m ay



se rve



as



supplementary



a



c o n d u c t iv e p a r ts fr o m e x c e e d in g E S 2 lim its .



Requirements for protective conductors



5.6.2.1



General requirements



Protective conductors



s h a ll



not



c o n ta in



s w itc h e s ,



cu rre n t



lim itin g



d e v ic e s



or



o ve rcu rre n t



p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e s .



protective conductors single fault conditions.



T h e c u rre n t-c a rry in g c a p a c ity o f th e fa u lt c u rre n t u n d e r



T h e c o n n e c tio n s fo r th e



protective conductors



s h a ll b e a d e q u a te fo r th e d u r a tio n o f



s h a ll m a k e e a r lie r a n d s h a ll b r e a k la te r th a n



t h e s u p p l y c o n n e c t i o n s in e a c h o f t h e f o l l o w i n g : -



a c o n n e c to r (o n a c a b le ) o r a c o n n e c to r a tta c h e d to a p a rt o r a s u b a s s e m b ly th a t c a n re m o v e d b y o th e r th a n a



be



skilled person;



NOTE It is good practice that this construction also be applied when it is expected that the skilled person will replace powered parts and assemblies while the equipment is operational. -



a p lu g o n a p o w e r s u p p ly c o r d ;



-



a n a p p lia n c e c o u p le r.



S o ld e r s h a ll n o t s e rv e



a s th e s o le



m e a n s to p ro v id e



m e c h a n ic a l s e c u re m e n t o f a



protective



conductor A protective conductor



te rm in a tio n



s h a ll



be



m ade



such



t h a t it i s n o t l i k e l y t o



be lo o s e n e d



A s in g le te rm in a l m a y be protective bonding conductors. A protective earthing conductor



d u r in g s e r v ic in g , o t h e r th a n s e r v ic in g o f th e a c tu a l c o n d u c t o r its e lf. u s e d to c o n n e c t m u ltip le te rm in a tio n



s h a ll



not



se rve



as



a



m eans



to



se cu re



any



com ponent



or



p a rt



o th e r



th a n



a



protective bonding conductor. A s i n g l e w i r i n g t e r m i n a l o f t h e s c r e w o r s t u d t y p e m a y b e u s e d t o s e c u r e b o t h t h e protective earthing conductor a n d t h e protective bonding conductor in e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g a nondetachable power supply cord. I n t h i s c a s e , t h e w i r i n g t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e protective earthing conductor s h a l l b e s e p a r a t e d b y a n u t f r o m t h a t o f t h e protective bonding conductor. T h e protective earthing conductor s h a l l b e o n t h e b o t t o m o f t h e s t a c k , s o t h a t it is t h e l a s t c o n n e c t i o n d i s t u r b e d .



5.6.2.2



Colour of insulation



T h e in s u la tio n o f th e



If a



protective earthing conductor



protective bonding conductor



is



in s u la te d ,



s h a ll b e g r e e n - a n d - y e llo w .



th e



in s u la tio n



s h a ll



e x c e p t in t h e f o l l o w i n g t w o c a s e s : -



f or a n e a r t h in g b r a id , t h e i n s u la t io n , if p r o v id e d , m a y b e t r a n s p a r e n t ;



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



be



g re e n -a n d -y e llo w



旧C



-



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 131 -



protective bonding conductor



a



w irin g ,



e tc .,



m ay



be



of any



in a s s e m b l i e s s u c h a s r i b b o n c a b l e s , b u s b a r s , p r i n t e d



c o lo u r



p ro v id e d



th a t



no



m is in te rp re ta tio n



o f th e



use



o f th e



c o n d u c t o r is l i k e l y t o a r i s e .



Compliance is checked by inspection.



5.6.3



Requirements for protective earthing conductors



Protective earthing conductors



s h a ll



c o m p ly



w ith



th e



m in im u m



c o n d u c to r



s iz e s



in



T a b le G .7 .



NOTE 1 For permanently connected equipment provided with terminal(s) for connection to mains supply, reference is made to the national building wiring requirements for the size of the protective earthing conductor. NOTE 2 For



IEC 60364-5-54 can also be used to determine the minimum conductor size.



co rd



c o n n e c te d



e q u ip m e n t



s u p p lie d



fro m



a



DC



mains，



th e



protective earthing



c o n n e c tio n m a y b e p ro v id e d b y a s e p a r a te te rm in a l.



protective earthing conductor s e r v i n g a s a reinforced safeguard m a y b e u s e d pluggable equipment type B o r o n permanently connected equipment o n l y a n d s h a l l :



A



-



be



in c lu d e d



in



and



p ro te c te d



by



a



s h e a th e d



s u p p ly



co rd



th a t



c o m p lie s



w ith



G .7 .1



on



and



w h i c h i s n o t l i g h t e r t h a n h e a v y d u t y a s s p e c i f i e d in A n n e x C o f I E C 6 2 4 4 0 : 2 0 0 8 ; o r -



h a v e a m in im u m



c o n d u c t o r s iz e n o t le s s t h a n 4 m m 2 if n o t p ro te c te d fro m p h y s ic a l d a m a g e ;



or -



h a v e a m i n i m u m c o n d u c t o r s i z e n o t l e s s t h a n 2 , 5 m m 2 i f p r o t e c t e d f r o m p h y s i c a l d a m a g e ；o r



-



b e p ro te c te d b y a c o n d u it in te n d e d to b e c o n n e c te d to th e e q u ip m e n t a n d h a v e a m in im u m s i z e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h T a b l e 3 0 .



NOTE 3



For mains supply cords, see also Clause G.7.



NOTE 4



A heavy duty cord jacket is considered suitable for protection against physical damage.



Table 30 - Protective earthing conductor sizes for reinforced safeguards for permanently connected equipment Protection provided by



Minimum protective earthing conductor size mm2 4



Non-metallic flexible conduit Metallic flexible conduit



2,5



Non-flexible metal conduit



1,5



The protective earthing conductor is intended for installation by a skilled person.



protective earthing conductor s e r v i n g a s a double safeguard m a y b e u s e d equipment type B o r o n permanently connected equipment o n l y a n d s h a l l i n d e p e n d e n t protective earthing conductors. A



on



pluggable



c o n s is t o f tw o



Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement of p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g c o n d u c to r sizes in accordance with Table 30 or Table G.7 as applicable.



5.6.4 5.6.4.1



Requirements for protective bonding conductors Requirements



Protective bonding conductors c o m p ly w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



o f p a rts



re q u ire d



to



be



e a rth e d



fo r s a fe ty



p u rp o se s



s h a ll



- 132 -



t he m in im u m



-



if e it h e r t h e



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



c o n d u c t o r s i z e s in T a b l e G . 7 ; o r



rated current



o f th e e q u ip m e n t o r th e



protective current rating



o f th e c irc u it



e x c e e d s 2 5 A , w i t h t h e m i n i m u m c o n d u c t o r s i z e s in T a b l e 3 1 ; o r -



if b o t h t h e



rated current



o f th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th e



protective current rating



o f th e c irc u it



d o n o t e x c e e d 2 5 A ; e ith e r



-



•



w i t h t h e m i n i m u m c o n d u c t o r s i z e s in T a b l e 3 1 ; o r



•



w ith th e lim ite d s h o r t- c ir c u it te s t o f A n n e x R ; o r



f or



c o m p o n e n ts



o n ly ,



be



not



s m a lle r



th a n



th e



c o n d u c to rs



s u p p ly in g



power



to



th e



c o m p o n e n t. If t h e v a lu e



NOTE



rated current o f t h e e q u i p m e n t i s n o t d e c l a r e d o f t h e rated power d i v i d e d b y rated voltage.



b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r , it is t h e c a l c u l a t e d



The value of the protective current rating is used in Table 31 and in the test of 5.6.6.2.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



133



-



-



Table 31 - Minimum protective bonding conductor size of copper conductors Smaller of the rated current of the equipment or the protective current rating of the circuit under consideration



Minimum conductor sizes Cross-sectional area



AWG



mm2



[cross-sectional area in mm2]



A up to and including 3



0,3



22



[0,324]



6



0,5



20



[0,519 】



10



0,75



18



[〇 ,8]



13



1,0



16



[1.3]



16



1,25



16



[1,3 】



25



1,5



14



P]



32



2,5



12



[3]



40



4,0



10



[5]



63



6,0



8



[8]



80



10



6



[13]



100



16



4



[21 】



125



25



2



03]



160



35



1



[42]



190



50



0



[53]



230



70



000



[85]



260



95



0000



[107 】



kcmil [cross-sectional area in mm2 300



120



250



[126]



340



150



300



[152 】



400



185



400



[202]



460



240



500



[253]



】



NOTE AWG and kcmil sizes are provided for information only. The associated cross-sectional areas have been rounded to show significant figures only. AWG refers to the American Wire Gage and the term "cmil” refers to circular mils where one circular mil is equal to (diameter in mils)2. These terms are commonly used to designate wire sizes in North America.



5.6.4.2



Determination of the protective current rating



5.6.4.2.1 W h e re ra tin g



th e



Mains supply as the source so u rce



is t h e



mains



s u p p ly ,



o f th e o v e r c u r r e n t p ro te c tiv e



th e



d e v ic e



protective current rating



p ro v id e d



in t h e



b u ild in g



o f th e



c irc u it



in s ta lla tio n , o r a s



is t h e p a rt o f



th e e q u ip m e n t.



W h e r e t h e o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e i s p r o v i d e d in t h e b u i l d i n g i n s t a l l a t i o n , t h e n : -



f or



pluggable equipment type A,



o ve rcu rre n t



p ro te c tiv e



b u i l d i n g w i r i n g , in t h e



d e v ic e



mains



th e



p ro v id e d



protective current rating e x te rn a l



to



th e



e q u ip m e n t



is (fo r



th e



ra tin g



e x a m p le ,



of in



an th e



p l u g o r in a n e q u i p m e n t r a c k ) , w i t h a m i n i m u m o f 1 6 A ;



NOTE 1 In most countries, 16 A is considered to be suitable as the protective current rating of the circuit supplied from the mains. NOTE 2 In Canada and the USA, the protective current rating of the circuit supplied from the mains is taken as 20 A. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 134 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



NOTE 3 In the UK and Ireland, the protective current rating is taken to be 13 A, this being the largest rating of fuse used in the mains plug. NOTE 4 In France, in certain cases, the protective current rating of the circuit supplied from the mains is taken as 20 A instead of 16 A.



-



pluggable equipment type B, a n d permanently connected equipment t h e protective current rating i s t h e m a x i m u m r a t i n g o f t h e o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e



fo r



s p e c ifie d



in



th e



e q u ip m e n t



in s ta lla tio n



in s tru c tio n s



to



be



p ro v id e d



e x te rn a l



to



th e



e q u ip m e n t.



5.6.4.2.2



Other than mains supply as the source



W h e r e t h e s o u r c e is a n e x t e r n a l s u p p l y h a v i n g t h e m a x i m u m in te rn a l



so u rce



im p e d a n c e



current rating W h e re



th e



as



an



im p e d a n c e



p ro te c te d



tra n s fo rm e r),



protective



th e



o f t h e c i r c u i t is t h e h i g h e s t c u r r e n t a v a i l a b l e f r o m t h a t s u p p l y i n t o a n y l o a d .



m a x im u m



c o m p o n e n ts



(su ch



c u r r e n t in h e r e n tly lim ite d b y th e



in



th e



cu rre n t



so u rce ,



th e



fro m



th e



e x te rn a l



s u p p ly



so u rce



protective current rating



s h a ll



is



be



lim ite d



ta k e n



as



by



e le c tro n ic



th e



m a x im u m



o u t p u t c u r r e n t w i t h a n y r e s i s t i v e l o a d , i n c l u d i n g a s h o r t - c i r c u i t . I f t h e c u r r e n t is l im i t e d



by an



i m p e d a n c e , a f u s e , a P T C d e v i c e o r a c i r c u i t b r e a k e r , t h e c u r r e n t is m e a s u r e d 6 0 s a f t e r t h e a p p lic a tio n



o f th e



lo a d .



If t h e c u r r e n t is l i m i t e d



b y o t h e r m e a n s , t h e c u r r e n t is m e a s u r e d



5 s



a fte r th e a p p lic a tio n o f th e lo a d .



5.6.4.2.3



Internal circuit as the source



W h e r e t h e s o u r c e is a c i r c u i t w i t h i n t h e e q u i p m e n t , t h e



protective current rating



o f th e c irc u it



is : -



t he



ra tin g



o f th e



o v e rc u rre n t p ro te c tiv e



d e v ic e



if t h e



c u r r e n t is l i m i t e d



by an



o ve rcu rre n t



p ro te c tiv e d e v ic e ; o r -



t he



m a x im u m



s u p p ly .



The



m e a su re d



o u tp u t



c u rre n t,



o u tp u t c u rre n t



60



s a fte r th e



is



if th e



cu rre n t



m e a su re d



a p p lic a tio n



w ith



o f th e



is



lim ite d



any



lo a d



by



th e



re s is tiv e



so u rce



lo a d



im p e d a n c e



in c lu d in g



if c u r r e n t is l i m i t e d



a



of



th e



s h o rt-c irc u it



b y im p e d a n c e



o r th e



c u r r e n t l i m i t i n g d e v i c e is a f u s e , a c i r c u i t b r e a k e r o r a P T C d e v i c e , o r 5 s in o t h e r c a s e s .



5.6.4.2.4



Current limiting and overcurrent protective devices



A c u r r e n t lim itin g d e v ic e (a P T C d e v ic e ) o r a n o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t iv e d e v ic e (a f u s e o r a c ir c u it b r e a k e r ) s h a ll n o t b e c o n n e c te d



in p a r a l l e l w i t h a n y o t h e r c o m p o n e n t t h a t c o u l d f a i l t o a l o w -



r e s i s t a 门c e s t a t e .



5.6.4.3



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement of the p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r sizes in accordance with Table 31 or Table G.7 and the test of 5.6.6 or Annex R as applicable.



5.6.5



Terminals for protective conductors



5.6.5.1 T e rm in a ls



Requirements fo r



protective earthing conductors



c o n n e c tin g



s h a ll



c o m p ly



w ith



th e



m in im u m



t e r m i n a l s i z e s in T a b l e 3 2 .



T e rm in a ls



fo r



c o n n e c tin g



protective bonding conductors



s h a ll



c o m p ly



w ith



one



of



th e



fo llo w in g : -



t h e m i n i m u m t e r m i n a l s i z e s in T a b l e 3 2 ; o r



-



if e it h e r th e exceeds



25



T a b le 3 2 ; o r



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



rated current A,



w ith



o f th e e q u ip m e n t o r th e



te rm in a l



s iz e s



th a t



a re



not



protective current rating m o re



th a n



one



s iz e



o f th e c irc u it



s m a lle r



th a n



in



旧C -



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



if b o th th e



rated current



-135-



o f th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th e



protective current rating



o f th e c irc u it



d o n o t e x c e e d 2 5 A ; e ith e r •



w i t h t e r m i n a l s i z e s t h a t a r e n o t m o r e t h a n o n e s i z e s m a l l e r t h a n in T a b l e 3 2 ; o r



•



w ith th e lim ite d s h o r t- c ir c u it te s t o f A n n e x R;



or -



f or



c o m p o n e n ts



o n ly ,



be



not



s m a lle r



th a n



th e



te rm in a l



s iz e s



s u p p ly in g



power



to



th e



c o m p o n e n t.



Table 32 - Sizes of terminals for protective conductors Conductor size



Minimum nominal thread diameter



Area of cross section



mm2



mm



mm2



(from Table G.7)



Pillar type or stud type



Screw type a



Pillar type or stud type



Screw type a



1



3,0



3,5



7



9,6



1,5



3,5



4,0



9,6



12,6



2,5



4,0



5,0



12,6



19,6



4



4,0



5,0



12,6



19,6



6



5,0



5,0



19,6



19,6



10 b



6,0



6,0



28



28



16 b



7,9



7,9



49



49



’’Screw type" refers to a terminal that clamps the conductor under the head of a screw， with or without a washer. b



As an alternative to the requirements of this table, the protective earthing conductor may be attached to special connectors, or suitable clamping means (for example, an upturned spade or closed loop pressure type; clamping unit type; saddle clamping unit type; mantle clamping unit type; etc.) that is secured by a screw and nut mechanism to the metal chassis of the equipment. The sum of the cross-sectional areas of the screw and the nut shall not be less than three times the cross-sectional area of the conductor size in Table 31 or Table G.7 as applicable. The terminals shall comply with IEC 60998-1 and IEC 60999-1 or IEC 60999-2.



Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement of protective terminal sizes in accordance with Table 32, the test of 5.6.6 or Annex R as applicable.



5.6.5.2



Corrosion



C o n d u c tiv e



p a rts



in



c o n ta c t



at



th e



m a in



protective earthing



te rm in a l,



p ro te c tiv e



b o n d in g



t e r m i n a l s a n d c o n n e c t i o n s s h a l l b e s e l e c t e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h A n n e x N s o t h a t t h e p o t e n t i a l d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n a n y t w o d i f f e r e n t m e t a l s is 0 , 6 V o r l e s s .



Compliance is checked by inspection of the materials of the conductors and terminals and associated parts and determination of the potential difference.



5.6.6



Resistance of the protective bonding system



5.6.6.1



Requirements



Protective bonding conductors



a n d th e ir te r m in a tio n s s h a ll n o t h a v e e x c e s s iv e re s is ta n c e .



NOTE A protective bonding system in the equipment consists of a single conductor or a combination of conductive parts, connecting a main protective earthing terminal to a part of the equipment that is to be earthed for safety purposes.



Protective bonding conductors th ro u g h o u t



th e ir



le n g th



and



whose



c o n s id e r e d to c o m p ly w ith o u t te s t.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



th a t



m eet



te rm in a ls



th e a ll



m in im u m m eet



th e



c o n d u c to r m in im u m



s iz e s



s iz e s



in



in



T a b le G .7



T a b le 3 2



a re



- 136 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



O n e q u i p m e n t w h e r e t h e p r o t e c t i v e e a r t h c o n n e c t i o n t o a s u b a s s e m b l y o r t o a s e p a r a t e u n i t is m a d e b y m e a n s o f o n e c o r e o f a m u ltic o r e c a b le th a t a ls o s u p p lie s p o w e r to th a t s u b a s s e m b ly o r u n it a n d w h e r e a c c o u n t th e



s iz e



th e c a b le o f th e



is p r o t e c t e d



c o n d u c to r,



th e



b y a s u ita b ly ra te d re s is ta n c e



o f th e



p r o te c tiv e d e v ic e t h a t ta k e s in to



protective bonding conductor



in



t h a t c a b l e i s n o t i n c l u d e d in t h e m e a s u r e m e n t .



5.6.6.2



Test method



The test current can be either AC or DC and the test voltage shall not exceed 12 V. The measurement is made between the main p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g terminal and the point in the equipment that is required to be earthed. The resistance of the p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g c o n d u c to r and of any earthed conductor in other external wiring is not included in the measurement. However， if the p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g c o n d u c to r is supplied with the equipment， the conductor may be included in the test circuit but the measurement of the voltage drop is made only from the main p ro te c tiv e e a rth in g terminal to the part required to be earthed. Care is taken that the contact resistance between the tip of the measuring probe and the conductive part under test does not influence the test results. The test current and duration of the test are as follows: a) For equipment powered from the m a in s where the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g of the circuit under test is 25 A or less， the test current is 200 % of the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g applied for 2 min. b) For equipment powered from the AC m a in s where the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g of the circuit under test exceeds 25 Af the test current is 200 % of the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g or 500 A， whichever is less, and the duration of the test is as shown in Table 33.



Table 33 - Test duration， mains connected equipment Protective current rating of the circuit A up to and including



Duration of the test



30



2



60



4



100



6



200



8



over 200



10



min



c) As an alternative to b)， the tests are based on the time-current characteristic of the overcurrent protective device that limits the fault current in the p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r. This device is either one provided in the BUT or specified in the installation instructions to be provided external to the equipment. The tests are conducted at 200 % of the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g , for the duration corresponding to 200 % on the time-current characteristic. If the duration for 200 % is not given, the nearest point on the time-current characteristic may be used. d) For equipment powered from a DC m ains, if the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g o f the circuit under test exceeds 25 Af the test current and duration are as specified by the manufacturer. e) For equipment receiving its power from an e x te rn a l c irc u it, the test current is 1,5 times the maximum current available from the e x te rn a l c ir c u it or 2 A ， whichever is greater， for a duration o f 2 min. For parts connected to the p ro te c tiv e b o n d in g c o n d u c to r to limit the transients or to limit to u c h c u rre n t to an e x te rn a l c ir c u it and that do not exceed an ES2 level during s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s , the test is conducted in accordance with the relevant test method of either a), b), c) or d) based on the power source assumed.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



- 137 -



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



5.6.6.3



Compliance criteria



Where the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g does not exceed 25 A f the resistance of the protective bonding system, calculated from the voltage drop, shall not exceed 0,1 Q. Where the p ro te c tiv e c u rre n t ra tin g exceeds 25 A f the voltage drop over the protective bonding system shall not exceed 2,5 V.



5.6.7



Reliable connection of a protective earthing conductor



permanently connected equipment， e a r t h i n g



For



mains



F o r co rd c o n n e c te d



e q u i p m e n t , e a r t h i n g is a ls o c o n s i d e r e d to b e r e l i a b l e f o r :



-



pluggable equipment type B;



-



stationary pluggable equipment type A ， •



th a t



is



in te n d e d



to



te le c o m m u n ic a tio n



is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e r e lia b le .



be



or



used



in



a



lo c a tio n



c e n tre , a d e d ic a te d



h a v in g



e q u ip o te n tia l



c o m p u te r ro o m , o r a



b o n d in g



(su ch



as



a



restricted access area);



and •



has



in s ta lla tio n



in s tru c tio n s



th a t



re q u ire



skilled person;



c o n n e c tio n o f th e s o c k e t- o u tle t b y a



-



v e rific a tio n



of



th e



protective earthing



or



stationary pluggable equipment type A, •



th a t h a s p ro v is io n fo r a p e r m a n e n tly c o n n e c te d



•



has



in s tru c tio n s



fo r



th e



in s ta lla tio n



o f th a t



protective earthing conductor;



c o n d u c to r



to



b u ild in g



e a rth



by



a



and



skilled



person. F o r e q u ip m e n t c o n n e c te d to a n 4



and



5,



e a rth in g



is



external circuit



c o n s id e re d



pluggable equipment type B t h a t



to



be



a s i n d i c a t e d in T a b l e 1 3 ，I D n u m b e r s 1 , 2 , 3 ,



re lia b le



fo r



pluggable equipment type A



h a v e p ro v is io n fo r:



protective earthing conductor;



-



a p e rm a n e n tly c o n n e c te d



一



h a s in s tr u c tio n s fo r th e in s ta lla tio n o f th a t c o n d u c to r to b u ild in g e a rth b y a



5.6.8



protective earthing conductor functional earthing:



-



in t h e



mains



t he r e q u ir e m e n ts fo r c o n d u c to r s iz e a s g iv e n th e



and



skilled person.



Functional earthing



If a



-



and



mains



s u p p ly



in G . 7 . 2



co rd



is o n l y



used



fo r e s ta b lis h in g



a p p ly to th e e a rth in g



c o n d u c to r o f



s u p p ly c o rd ; a n d



t he m a rk in g fo r



class II equipment



w ith



functional earthing



s h a ll b e u s e d a s s p e c ifie d



in



F .3 .6 .2 : an d -



t he



a p p lia n c e



in le t,



re q u ire m e n ts fo r



if



used,



s h a ll



double insulation



creepage distance reinforced insulation.



c o m p ly or



w ith



th e



and



clearance



NOTE 1 Some appliance inlets for class I equipment do not have sufficient insulation to serve as double insulation or reinforced insulation between the phases and the protective earthing terminal. Equipment using such an inlet is not considered to be class II equipment. NOTE 2 In Norway, equipment connected with an earthed mains plug is classified as class I equipment. See the marking requirement in the country note to 4.1.15. The symbol IEC 60417-6092, as specified in F.3.6.2, is accepted.



5.7



Prospective touch voltage, touch current and protective conductor current



5.7.1



General



M e a s u re m e n ts



current



of



prospective touch voltage, touch current,



and



protective conductor



a re m a d e w ith th e E U T s u p p lie d a t th e m o s t u n fa v o u r a b le s u p p ly v o lta g e (s e e B .2 .3 ).



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 138 5.7.2



旧C



62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018



Measuring devices and networks



5.7.2.1



Measurement of touch current



F o r m e a s u re m e n ts o f in F i g u r e s 4 a n d



current



5 re s p e c tiv e ly



w a v e fo rm



5.7.2.2



touch current, in



th e in s tru m e n t u s e d fo r m e a s u rin g



IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6



s h a ll



in d ic a te



U2



and



p e a k v o lta g e .



U3



s p e c ifie d



If t h e



touch



is s i n u s o i d a l , a n R M S i n d i c a t i n g i n s t r u m e n t m a y b e u s e d .



Measurement of voltage



E q u i p m e n t , o r p a r t s o f e q u i p m e n t , t h a t a r e i n t e n d e d t o b e e a r t h e d in t h e i n t e n d e d a p p l i c a t i o n , b u t a re



u n e a rth e d



as



p r o v id e d , s h a ll



p o in t b y w h ic h th e h ig h e s t



5.7.3 The



be



c o n n e c te d



to



prospective touch voltage



e a rth



d u rin g



th e



m e a s u r e m e n t a t th e



is o b t a i n e d .



Equipment set-up, supply connections and earth connections e q u ip m e n t



s e t-u p ,



e q u ip m e n t



s u p p ly



c o n n e c tio n s



and



e q u ip m e n t



e a rth in g



s h a ll



be



in



a c c o r d a n c e w ith C la u s e 4 , 5 .3 a n d 5 .4 o f IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6 .



E q u ip m e n t



conductor



p ro v id e d



w ith



a



c o n n e c tio n



to



e a rth



s e p a ra te



fro m



protective earthing



th e



s h a ll b e te s te d w ith th a t c o n n e c tio n d is c o n n e c te d .



S y s te m s o f in te r c o n n e c te d e q u ip m e n t w ith s e p a r a te c o n n e c tio n s to th e



mains



s h a ll h a v e e a c h



e q u ip m e n t te s te d s e p a ra te ly .



S y s te m s o f in te rc o n n e c te d



e q u ip m e n t w ith o n e c o n n e c t io n to th e



mains



s h a ll b e te s te d a s a



s in g le e q u ip m e n t.



NOTE 1



Systems of interconnected equipment are specified in more detail in Annex A of IEC 60990:2016.



mains,



E q u i p m e n t t h a t is d e s i g n e d f o r m u lt ip l e c o n n e c t i o n s t o t h e is



re q u ire d



at



a



tim e ,



s h a ll



have



each



c o n n e c tio n



te s te d



w h ile



w h e re o n ly o n e c o n n e c tio n th e



o th e r



c o n n e c tio n s



a re



d is c o n n e c te d .



E q u ip m e n t



th a t



c o n n e c tio n



is



c o n n e c te d ,



w ith



is



d e s ig n e d



re q u ire d , th e



s h a ll



fo r



m u ltip le



have



each



c o n n e c tio n s c o n n e c tio n



to



th e



te s te d



w h ile



th e



w h e re



m o re



th a n



o th e r c o n n e c tio n s



one a re



protective earthing conductors c o n n e c t e d t o g e t h e r . I f t h e touch l i m i t i n 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 f t h e touch current s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d i n d i v i d u a l l y .



current



e x c e e d s th e



NOTE 2



It is not necessary that the EUT operates normally during this test.



5.7.4



mains,



Unearthed accessible parts



normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions conditions ( e x c e p t f o r a safeguard f a u l t ) , t o u c h v o l t a g e o r touch current f r o m a l l u n e a r t h e d accessible c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s . Touch current ( c u r r e n t Under



and



single fault



s h a ll b e m e a s u r e d a and



cu rre n t b of



T a b l e 4 ) s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 1 , 5 . 4 a n d 6 . 2 . 1 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 .



single fault conditions o f a r e l e v a n t basic safeguard o r a supplementary safeguard, i n c l u d i n g 6 . 2 . 2 . 2 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 , t o u c h v o l t a g e o r touch current s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d f r o m a l l u n e a r t h e d accessible c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s . Touch current ( c u r r e n t b o f Under



T a b l e 4 ) s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d w i t h t h e n e t w o r k s p e c i f i e d in F i g u r e 5 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 .



For an



accessible



o f IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6 .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



n o n - c o n d u c t i v e p a r t , t h e t e s t is m a d e w i t h a m e t a l f o i l a s s p e c i f i e d in 5 .2 .1



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



5.7.5



-139-



Earthed accessible conductive parts



A t le a s t o n e



accessible



e a rth e d



c o n d u c tiv e



p a rt s h a ll b e te s te d



fo r



touch current



fo llo w in g



s u p p l y c o n n e c t i o n f a u l t s in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 6 .1 a n d 6 . 2 . 2 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 , e x c e p t 6 . 2 . 2 . 8 . E x c e p t a s p e r m i t t e d in 5 . 7 . 6 , t h e



S u b c la u s e



6 .2 .2 .3



of



disconnect device NOTE



touch current



IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6



does



s h a l l n o t e x c e e d t h e E S 2 l i m i t s in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2 .



n o t a p p ly



to



e q u ip m e n t



w ith



a



s w itc h



or



o th e r



t h a t d i s c o n n e c t s a ll p o le s o f t h e s u p p ly .



An appliance coupler is an example of a disconnect device.



5.7.6



Requirements when touch current exceeds ES2 limits



W h e re th e



touch current



e x c e e d s t h e E S 2 l i m i t s in 5 . 2 . 2 . 2



u n d e r th e s u p p ly fa u lt c o n d itio n s



s p e c i f i e d in 6 . 2 . 2 . 2 o f I E C 6 0 9 9 0 : 2 0 1 6 , a ll o f t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s a p p l y : -



t he



protective conductor current



m e a su re d



a c c o rd in g



s h a ll n o t e x c e e d 5 % o f th e in p u t c u r r e n t m e a s u r e d u n d e r -



t he



c o n s tru c tio n



o f th e



protective earthing conductor



to



C la u s e



8 o f IE C 6 0 9 9 0 :2 0 1 6



normal operating conditions; c irc u it a n d



its



c o n n e c tio n s



s h a ll



have: •



• -



t he



protective earthing conductor s e r v i n g a s a reinforced safeguard 5 . 6 . 3 o r t w o i n d e p e n d e n t protective earthing conductors s e r v i n g safeguard, a n d a



protective earthing



a re lia b le c o n n e c tio n to m a n u fa c tu re r



s h a ll



in d ic a te



th e



v a lu e



a s s p e c i f i e d in



o f th e



a s s p e c ifie d as



in



double



a



5.6.7;



protective conductor current



in



th e



i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s if t h e c u r r e n t e x c e e d s 1 0 m A ; -



an



instructional safeguard



s h a ll b e p ro v id e d



e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l . T h e e l e m e n t s o f t h e



in a c c o r d a n c e w it h C l a u s e F . 5 , e x c e p t t h a t



instructional safeguard



旧 C 6 0 4 1 7 -6 0 4 2



s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



(2 0 1 0 -1 1 ); and



IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 1 7 3 (2 0 1 2 -1 0 ); a n d



(T ) •



, IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 5 0 1 9 (2 0 0 6 -0 8 )



e le m e n t 2: “ C a u t io n ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o r d o r te x t, a n d “ H ig h to u c h c u r r e n t ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



•



e le m e n t 3:



o p tio n a l



•



e le m e n t 4:



“ C o n n e c t to e a r th b e fo r e c o n n e c t in g to s u p p ly ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



instructional safeguard



th a t a re re q u ire d to b e p la c e d o n th e e q u ip m e n t



s h a ll b e a ffix e d to th e e q u ip m e n t a d ja c e n t to th e e q u ip m e n t s u p p ly c o n n e c tio n .



NOTE In Denmark, the installation instruction shall be affixed to the equipment if the protective conductor current exceeds the limits of 3t5 mA AC or 10 mA DC.



5.7.7 5.7.7.1



Prospective touch voltage and touch current associated with external circuits Touch current from coaxial cables



If t h e e q u i p m e n t is c o n n e c t e d t o



external circuits



w it h a c o a x ia l c a b le a n d if s u c h c o n n e c t i o n



is l i k e l y t o c r e a t e a h a z a r d , t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r s h a l l p r o v i d e of



th e



c o a x ia l



c a b le



IE C 6 0 7 2 8 -1 1 :2 0 1 6 .



Copyright Inlernatiohal Etectrotechmcal Commission



to



th e



b u ild in g



e a rth



in



in s tr u c tio n s to c o n n e c t th e s h ie ld



a cco rd a n ce



w ith



6 .2 g )



and



6 . 2 I)



of



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



NOTE 1 In Norway and Sweden, the screen of the television distribution system is normally not earthed at the entrance of the building and there is normally no equipotential bonding system within the building. Therefore the protective earthing of the building installation needs to be isolated from the screen of a cable distribution system. It is however accepted to provide the insulation external to the equipment by an adapter or an interconnection cable with galvanic isolator, which may be provided by a retailer, for example. The user manual shall then have the following or similar information in Norwegian and Swedish language respectively, depending on in what country the equipment is intended to be used in: “Apparatus connected to the protective earthing of the building installation through the mains connection or through other apparatus with a connection to protective earthing - and to a television distribution system using coaxial cable, may in some circumstances create a fire hazard. Connection to a television distribution system therefore has to be provided through a device providing electrical isolation below a certain frequency range (galvanic isolator, see IEC 60728-11)” . NOTE 2 In Norway, due to regulation for CATV-installations, and in Sweden, a galvanic isolator shall provide electrical insulation below 5 MHz. The insulation shall withstand a dielectric strength of 1,5 kV RMS, 50 Hz or 60 Hzf for 1 minute. Translation to Norwegian (the Swedish text will also be accepted in Norway): t4Apparater som er koplet til beskyttelsesjord via nettplugg og/eller via annet jordtilkoplet utstyr - og er tilkoplet et koaksialbasert kabel-TV nett, kan forarsake brannfare. For a unnga dette skal det ved tilkopling av apparater til kabel-TV nett installeres en galvanisk isolator mellom apparatet og kabe 卜 TV nettet.” Translation to Swedish: ”Apparater som ar kopplad till skyddsjord via jordat vagguttag och/eller via annan utrustning och samtidigt ar kopplad till kabel-TV nat kan i vissa fall medfora risk for brand. For att undvika detta skall vid anslutning av apparaten till kabel-TV nat galvanisk isolator finnas mellan apparaten och kabel-TV natet.>,



5.7.7.2



Prospective touch voltage and touch current associated with paired conductor cables



F o r c irc u its in te n d e d to b e c o n n e c te d to



external circuits



s u c h a s th o s e d e s c rib e d



in I D 1 o f



T a b le 13: -



t he



prospective touch voltage



-



t he



touch current



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith E S 2 ; o r



s h a ll n o t e x c e e d 0 ,2 5 m A .



T h e a b o v e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly if t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g a



external circuits



a re c o n n e c t e d to



protective earthing conductor.



Compliance is checked by measurement according 5.7.2 and 5.7.3 by using the measurement arrangement in Figure 32 for single-phase equipment and Figure 33 for three-phase equipment. NOTE



For other power distribution systems, see IEC 60990:2016.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



IEC 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018 Point of connection to AC mains supply (Polarity)



External circuit ports



P2



(Polarity)



Optional test transformer for isolation Measuring network



(Test switch) ie c



Figure 32 - Test circuit for touch current of single-phase equipment Point of connection to AC mains supply L1



(Polarity) P1_____



L2



External circuit ports



L2



(Polarity) L3



L3



N



N e



PE



T



p2



PE



EUT



(Earthing conductor)



Optional test transformer for isolation



b Oa Measuring network



(Test switch) ICC



Figure 33 - Test circuit for touch current of three-phase equipment 5.7.8 The



Summation of touch currents from external circuits re q u ire m e n ts



conductor s h o u ld th e



is



re q u ire d



mains



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



b e lo w fo r



s p e c ify



when



a



p e rm a n e n tly



pluggable equipment type A



c o n n e c tio n b e d is c o n n e c te d .



protective earthing pluggable equipment type B,



c o n n e c te d or



旧C The



re q u ire m e n ts



a p p ly o n ly to e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d



to



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



be c o n n e c te d



to a n



external circuit



s u c h a s d e s c r i b e d in T a b l e 1 3 , I D n u m b e r s 1 , 2 , 3 a n d 4 .



NOTE



These types of external circuits are typically telecommunication networks.



T h e s u m m a tio n



touch currents



of



fro m



e q u ip m e n t th a t p ro v id e s



external circuits,



m u ltip le



s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e lim its fo r E S 2 (s e e T a b le 4 ).



T h e fo llo w in g a b b re v ia tio n s a re u s e d :



-



I y touch current



re c e iv e d fro m o th e r e q u ip m e n t v ia a n e x te r n a l n e tw o rk ;



-



S(I^):



of



s u m m a tio n



touch current



re c e iv e d



fro m



a ll



o th e r



e q u ip m e n t



v ia



an



e x te rn a l



n e tw o rk ;



touch current



一



/ 2:



It



s h a ll



be



re c e iv e s



assum ed



0 ,2 5



th a t



(1^)



mA



mains



d u e to th e each



fro m



c irc u it



th e



o th e r



o f th e e q u ip m e n t. o f th e



e q u ip m e n t



e q u ip m e n t,



u n le s s



external circuit



c o n n e c te d



to



th e



c u rre n t fro m



a c tu a l



an



th e



o th e r



e q u i p m e n t is k n o w n t o b e l o w e r .



T h e fo llo w in g r e q u ir e m e n ts , a ) o r b) a s a p p lic a b le , s h a ll b e m e t: a)



E q u ip m e n t c o n n e c t e d to a n e a r th e d For



e q u ip m e n t



c o n n e c te d



to



in



a



w h ic h



each



te rm in a l



fo r



external circuit



c irc u it



th e



th a t



can



be



c o n n e c te d



to



an



protective earthing conductor



external circuit



o f th e



e q u ip m e n t,



is



th e



fo llo w in g s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d : 1)



If



S(I^)



-



(n o t in c lu d in g



I2)



e x c e e d s E S 2 lim its o f T a b le 4:



t h e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll h a v e p r o v is io n fo r a p e r m a n e n t c o n n e c tio n



to p r o te c tiv e e a rth



protective earthing conductor i n t h e p o w e r pluggable equipment type A o r pluggable equipment type B; a n d in



-



a d d itio n



to



th e



s u p p ly



co rd



of



t h e in s t a lla t io n in s t r u c t io n s s h a ll s p e c if y th e p r o v is io n o f a p e r m a n e n t c o n n e c t io n to p ro te c tiv e



e a rth



w ith



a



c ro s s -s e c tio n a l



a re a



of



not



le s s



th a n



2 ,5 m m 2,



if



m e c h a n ic a lly p ro te c te d , o r o th e rw is e 4 ,0 m m 2; a n d 2)



p r o v i d e a m a r k i n g in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 5 . 7 . 6 a n d C l a u s e F . 3 .



S u c h e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 5 .7 .6 . T h e v a lu e o f



I2 s h a ll



b e u s e d to c a lc u la te th e



5 % i n p u t c u r r e n t l i m i t p e r p h a s e s p e c i f i e d in 5 . 7 . 6 . 3)



The sum of



S(I^)



a n d / 2 s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e lim its o f T a b le 4.



Compliance with item a) is checked by inspection and if necessary by test. If the equipment has provision for a permanent protective earth connection in accordance with item 1) above, it is not necessary to make any measurements, except that I2 shall comply with the relevant requirements of 5.7. Touch c u rre n t tests, if necessary, are made using the relevant measuring instrument



described in IEC 60990:2016, Figure 5f or any other instrument giving the same results. A source (for example, a capacitively coupled AC source of the same line frequency and phase as the AC m ains) is applied to each e x te rn a l c ir c u it and adjusted so that 0,25 mAf or the actual current from other equipment, if known to be lower, is available to flow into that e x te rn a l c irc u it. The current flowing in the earthing conductor is then measured. b)



E q u ip m e n t c o n n e c t e d to a n u n e a r th e d If e a c h



c irc u it o f th e



have a com m on



external circuit



e q u ip m e n t th a t c a n



c o n n e c tio n , th e



be



c o n n e c te d



touch current



to



an



external circuit



fo r e a c h c ir c u it s h a ll n o t e x c e e d



does



not



th e E S 2



lim its o f T a b le 4.



external circuit o r a n y g r o u p s touch current f r o m e a c h c o m m o n



If a ll c i r c u i t s o f t h e e q u i p m e n t t h a t c a n b e c o n n e c t e d to a n of such



p o rts



have



a



com m on



c o n n e c tio n ,



th e



to ta l



c o n n e c tio n s h a ll n o t e x c e e d th e E S 2 lim its o f T a b le 4.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Compliance with item b) is checked by inspection and, if there are common connection points, by the following test. A capacitively coupled AC source of the same frequency and phase as the AC m a in s is applied to each circuit of the equipment that can be connected to an e x te rn a l c ir c u it so that 0,25 mA, or the actual current from the other equipment if known to be lower, is available to flow into that circuit. Common connection points are tested in accordance with 5.7.3, whether or not the points are a cce ssib le .



5.8 A



Backfeed safeguard in battery backed up supplies



battery



backed



b a c k fe e d in g



up



s u p p ly



th a t



is



an



s h a ll p r e v e n t g r e a t e r th a n



in te rru p tio n o f th e



mains



in te g ra l



ES1



p a rt



fro m



b e in g



of



th e



e q u ip m e n t



and



mains



p re s e n t on th e



is



c a p a b le



of



te rm in a ls a fte r



p o w e r.



mains t e r m i n a l s w h e n m e a s u r e d 1 s a f t e r d e - e n e r g i z a t i o n o f t h e mains f o r pluggable type A equipment, 5 s f o r pluggable type B equipment o r 1 5 s f o r permanently connected equipment u s i n g t h e m e a s u r e m e n t i n s t r u m e n t s d e s c r i b e d i n 5 . 7 . 2 . W h e r e t h e m e a s u r e d o p e n - c i r c u i t v o l t a g e d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e E S 1 l i m i t s , t h e touch current N o h a z a rd s h a ll e x is t a t th e



d o e s n o t h a v e to b e m e a s u re d .



Compliance is checked by inspection o f the equipment and the relevant circuit diagram, by measurement and by s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s in accordance with BA. NOTE 1 For standards related to battery backed up power supply systems that are not an integral part of the equipment, see standards related to UPS, such as IEC 62040-1. For transfer switches, see IEC 62310-1:2005. NOTE 2 W hen



See also the explanatory information in IEC TR 62368-2. an



a ir



clearances -



gap



and



s u b j e c t to



is



5.4.3



backfeed safeguard, t h e creepage distances a p p l y i n a d d i t i o n t o



e m p lo y e d fo r



c o n firm a tio n



stored energy mode



fro m



as



a



th e



m a n u fa c tu re r,



th e



battery



re q u ire m e n ts



of



5.4.2



fo r



th e fo llo w in g :



backed



up



s u p p ly



o u tp u t,



in



m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d a t r a n s i e n t f r e e c i r c u i t o f O v e r v o l t a g e C a t e g o r y I;



clearances a n d creepage distances s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s degree 2 o r h i g h e r i f e x p e c t e d i n t h e i n t e n d e d i n s t a l l a t i o n l o c a t i o n ;



-



t he



-



reinforced insulation s h a l l b e a p p l i e d b e t w e e n t h e u n i t o u t p u t stored energy mode o f o p e r a t i o n n o t a l l i n p u t p o l e s a r e safeguard d e v i c e . I n a l l o t h e r c a s e s , basic insulation s h a l l b e



fo r



pollution



a n d t h e u n it i n p u t if d u r in g is o la te d



by



th e



backfeed



a p p lie d .



Compliance is checked by inspection.



6



Electrically-caused fire



6.1 To



General re d u ce



th e



lik e lih o o d



of



in ju ry



or



p ro p e rty



dam age



due



to



an



e le c tric a lly -c a u s e d



o r ig in a tin g w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t, e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p ro v id e d w ith th e



safeguards



fire



s p e c ifie d



in C l a u s e 6 .



6.2 6.2.1



Classification of power sources (PS) and potential ignition sources (PIS) General



E le c tric a l s o u r c e s o f h e a tin g c a n b e c la s s ifie d (se e



6 .2 .2 .4 ,



6 .2 .2 .5



and



in to a v a ila b le p o w e r le v e ls P S 1 , P S 2 a n d P S 3



6 .2 .2 .6 ) th a t m a y c a u s e



re s is tiv e



h e a tin g



o f b o th



c o m p o n e n ts



and



c o n n e c tio n s . T h e s e p o w e r s o u r c e s a re b a s e d o n a v a ila b le e n e r g y to a c irc u it.



W ith in a p o w e r s o u rc e , a o f c o n ta c ts



(arcing PIS)



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



PIS



m a y a r is e d u e to a r c in g o f e it h e r b r o k e n c o n n e c t io n s o r o p e n in g



o r fro m c o m p o n e n ts d is s ip a tin g m o re th a n 15 W



(resistive PIS).



旧C D e p e n d in g



on



th e



p o w e r so u rce



c la s s ific a tio n



of each



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



c irc u it, o n e



o r m o re



safeguards



a re



r e q u ir e d e it h e r to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n o r to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f s p r e a d o f fire b e y o n d th e e q u ip m e n t.



6.2.2



Power source circuit classifications



6.2.2.1



General



A n e l e c t r i c c i r c u i t is c l a s s i f i e d P S 1 , P S 2 , o r P S 3 b a s e d o n t h e e l e c t r i c a l p o w e r a v a i l a b l e t o th e c irc u it fro m th e p o w e r s o u rc e .



The



e le c tric a l



p o w e r so u rce



c la s s ific a tio n



s h a ll



be



d e te rm in e d



by



m e a s u rin g



th e



m a x im u m



p o w e r u n d e r e a c h o f th e fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s : -



f or lo a d c irc u its : a p o w e r s o u r c e u n d e r



normal operating conditions



a s s p e c ifie d



b y th e



m a n u f a c t u r e r in to a w o r s t - c a s e fa u lt ( s e e 6 .2 .2 .2 ) ; -



f or p o w e r s o u r c e c irc u its : a w o r s t- c a s e



p o w e r s o u r c e fa u lt in to th e s p e c ifie d



n o r m a l lo a d



c irc u it (s e e 6 .2 .2 .3 ). T h e p o w e r is m e a s u r e d a t p o i n t s X a n d Y in F i g u r e 3 4 a n d F i g u r e 3 5 .



6.2.2.2



Power measurement for worst-case fault



With reference to Figure 34: -



the measurement may be performed without the load circuit maximum power is dependent on the connection o f the load;



-



at points X and Y， insert a wattmeter (or a voltmeter， VA， and a current meter， IA);



-



connect a variable resistor,



-



adjust the variable resistor, L V R , for maximum power. Measure the maximum power and classify the power source according to 6.2.2.4, 6.2.2.5 or 6.2.2.6.



L VR,



I NL



connected, unless the



as shown;



If an overcurrent protective device operates during the test， the measurement shall be repeated at 125 % of the current rating of the overcurrent protective device. If a power limiting device or circuit operates during the test， the measurement shall be repeated at a point ju s t below the current at which the power limiting device or circuit operated. When evaluating accessories connected via cables to the equipment， the impedance of the cable may be taken into account in the determination of PS1 or PS2 on the accessory side.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Key V



voltage source



R、



internal resistance of the power source



/A



current from the power source



VA



voltage at the points where determination of PS power is made



△ VR variable resistor load L



nl



normal load



Figure 34 - Power measurement for worst-case fault 6.2.2.3



Power measurement for worst-case power source fault



With reference to Figure 35: 一



At points X and Y， insert a wattmeter (or a voltmeter, VA， and a current meter， IA).



-



Within the power source circuit, simulate any s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n that will result in maximum power to the circuit being classified. All relevant components in the power source circuits shall be short-circuited or disconnected one at a time at each measurement.



-



Equi pment containing audio amplifiers shall also be tested under a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s as specified in Clause E.3.



-



Measure the maximum power as specified and classify circuits supplied by the power source according to 6.2.2.4, 6.2.2.5 or 6.2.2.6.



If an overcurrent protective device operates during the test， the measurement shall be repeated at 125 % of the current rating o f the overcurrent protective device. If a power limiting device or circuit operates during the test， the measurement shall be repeated at a point ju s t below the current at which the power limiting device or circuit operated. When the tests are repeated, a variable resistance may be used to simulate the component under fault. To avoid damage to the components of the normal load, a resistor (equal to the normal load) may be substituted for the normal load. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C NOTE



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Experimentation can be used to identify the single component fault that produces maximum power.



Key V



voltage source internal resistance of the power source



/A current from the power source VA



voltage at the points where determination of PS power is made



Z，NLnormal load



Figure 35 - Power measurement for worst-case power source fault 6.2.2.4 PS1



PS1



is a c i r c u i t w h e r e t h e p o w e r s o u r c e , ( s e e



F ig u re 3 6 ) m e a s u r e d



a c c o rd in g to 6 .2 .2 , d o e s



n o t e x c e e d 1 5 W m e a s u r e d a f t e r 3 s.



The



p o w e r a v a ila b le fro m



external circuits



d e s c rib e d



in T a b l e 1 3 , I D n u m b e r s



1 and



2, a re



c o n s id e r e d to b e lim ite d to P S 1 .



6.2.2.5



PS2



P S 2 is a



c irc u it w h e r e th e p o w e r s o u rc e , (s e e F ig u re 3 6 ) m e a s u r e d a c c o r d in g to 6 .2 .2 :



-



e x c e e d s PS1



-



d o e s n o t e x c e e d 1 0 0 W m e a s u r e d a fte r 5 s.



6.2.2.6



lim its ; a n d



PS3



P S 3 is a c i r c u i t w h o s e



p o w e r so u rce e xce e d s



h a s n o t b e e n c la s s ifie d (s e e F ig u re 3 6 ).



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



P S 2 lim its , o r a n y c ir c u it w h o s e



p o w e r so u rce



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



4 000W



PS3 circuit l



—



o



o s



s d



C NJ



T -



d



100 w



PS2 circuit 15 w



PS 1 circuit



Figure 36 - Illustration of power source classification 6.2.3



Classification of potential ignition sources



6.2.3.1



Arcing PIS



An



arcing PIS



-



an



open



is a l o c a t i o n w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s :



c irc u it



v o lta g e



(m e a su re d



a fte r



3



s)



a cro ss



an



open



c o n d u c to r



or



o p e n in g



e le c tric a l c o n ta c t e x c e e d in g 5 0 V (p e a k ) A C o r D C ; a n d -



t he



p ro d u c t o f th e



p e a k o f th e



( / rm s ) e x c e e d s 1 5 ( t h a t is ,



Fp x



open



c irc u it v o lta g e



( F p) a n d



th e



m e a su re d



a c o n ta c t, s u c h a s a s w itc h o r c o n n e c to r;



•



a te r m in a tio n , s u c h a s o n e m a d e b y a c rim p , s p rin g o r s o ld e r te r m in a tio n ;



•



o p e n in g



o f a c o n d u c to r, su ch



a s a p rin te d w ir in g



b o a rd tra c e , as a c o n s e q u e n c e



An



arcing PIS



of a



T h i s c o n d it io n d o e s n o t a p p ly if e le c t r o n i c p r o t e c t i o n c ir c u it s o r



a d d itio n a l c o n s tr u c tio n a l m e a s u r e s a re u s e d to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d th a t s u c h be co m e s an



cu rre n t



/ rm s > 1 5 ) f o r a n y o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :



•



single fault condition.



RMS



a fa u lt



arcing PIS.



i s c o n s i d e r e d n o t t o e x i s t in a P S 1



b e c a u s e o f th e lim its o f th e p o w e r s o u rc e .



NOTE 1 An open conductor in an electric circuit includes those interruptions that occur in conductive patterns on printed boards. R e lia b le o r r e d u n d a n t c o n n e c tio n s a re n o t c o n s id e re d to be a n



Redundant



c o n n e c tio n s



a re



any



k in d



o f tw o



or



m o re



arcing PIS.



c o n n e c tio n s



in



p a ra lle l,



w h e re



in



th e



e v e n t o f th e fa ilu r e o f o n e c o n n e c t io n , th e r e m a in in g c o n n e c t io n s a re s till c a p a b le o f h a n d lin g th e fu ll p o w e r .



R e lia b le c o n n e c tio n s a re c o n n e c tio n s th a t a re c o n s id e re d n o t to o p e n .



NOTE 2



Connections that could be considered reliable are:



一



holes of solder pads on a printed board that are through-metallized;



-



tubular rivets/eyelets that are additionally soldered;



-



machine-made or tool-made crimp or wire-wrap connections.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C NOTE 3



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Other means to avoid the occurrence of an arcing PIS can be used.



NOTE 4 Connection failure due to thermal fatigue phenomena could be prevented by selection of components with a coefficient of thermal expansion similar to that of the printed board material, taking into account the location of the component with respect to the fibre direction of the board material.



6.2.3.2 A



Resistive PIS



resistive PIS



-



is a n y p a r t in a P S 2 o r P S 3 c i r c u i t t h a t :



d i s s i p a t e s m o re th a n 15 W m e a s u re d a fte r 30 s u n d e r



-



NOTE



During the first 30 s there is no limit.



under



single fault conditions:



•



normal operating conditions;



or



d is s ip a te s m o re th a n



100 W



m e a s u r e d fo r 3 0 s, d is r e g a r d in g th e firs t 3 s, im m e d ia te ly



a fte r th e



o f th e



f a u l t if e le c t r o n i c



in tro d u c tio n



c irc u its ,



re g u la to rs



or PTC



d e v ic e s



a re



used; or • A



d is s ip a te s m o re th a n 15 W m e a s u r e d 3 0 s a fte r th e in tr o d u c tio n o f th e fa u lt.



resistive PIS



6.3



is c o n s i d e r e d n o t t o e x i s t in a P S 1



b e c a u s e o f th e lim its o f th e p o w e r s o u rc e .



Safeguards against fire under normal operating conditions and abnormal operating conditions



6.3.1



Requirements



normal operating conditions basic safeguards a r e r e q u i r e d : Under



-



i gni t i on s h a ll n o t o c c u r; a n d



-



no



p a rt



of



th e



s p o n ta n e o u s



e q u ip m e n t



ig n itio n



s h a ll



and



a tta in



te m p e ra tu re



lim it,



abnormal operating conditions,



a in



te m p e ra tu re C e ls iu s ,



v a lu e



o f th e



g re a te r



p a rt



as



th a n



d e fin e d



th e



fo llo w in g



90 % by



of



th e



IS O 8 7 1 .



W h e n t h e s p o n t a n e o u s i g n i t i o n t e m p e r a t u r e o f t h e m a t e r i a l is n o t k n o w n , t h e t e m p e r a t u r e s h a ll b e lim ite d to 3 0 0 ° C ; a n d



NOTE This document currently does not contain requirements for flammable dust or liquids other than for insulating liquids. -



combustible materials f o r c o m p o n e n t s a n d o t h e r p a r t s ( i n c l u d i n g electrical enclosures， mechanical enclosures a n d d e c o r a t i v e p a r t s ) n o t i n s i d e a fire enclosure s h a l l c o m p l y w ith : •



HB75 class material



if t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s o f t h i s m a t e r i a l is < 3 m m ; o r



•



HB40 class material



i f t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s o f t h i s m a t e r i a l is > 3 m m ; o r



•



HBF class foamed material;



•



s h a ll p a s s th e G lo w - W ir e te s t a t 5 5 0 °C a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 2 - 1 1 .



or



T h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to : •



p a rts w ith a v o lu m e o f le s s th a n 1 7 5 0 m m 3 ;



•



p a rts w ith a m a s s o f



•



s u p p lie s ,



•



p a rts



consumable materials， m e d i a



th a t



fu n c tio n s ,



combustible material



a re such



re q u ire d as



to



s y n th e tic



have



o f le s s th a n



g;



a n d r e c o rd in g m a te ria ls ;



p a rtic u la r



ru b b e r



4



ro lle rs ,



p ro p e rtie s in k



tu b e s



in and



o rd e r



to



p e rfo rm



m a te ria l



in te n d e d



re q u irin g



o p tic a l



c h a ra c te ris tic s ; a n d •



g e a rs , c a m s , b e lts , b e a r in g s a n d o th e r p a rts th a t w o u ld



c o n trib u te



fir e , in c lu d in g , la b e ls , m o u n t in g fe e t, k e y c a p s , k n o b s a n d th e lik e .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



n e g lig ib le fu e l to a



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



6.3.2



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection of the data sheets and by test under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s according to Clause B.2 and under a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s according to Clause B.3. The temperatures of materials are measured continuously until thermal equilibrium has been attained. NOTE



See B.1.5 for details on thermal equilibrium.



Temperature limiting b a s ic s a fe g u a rd s that comply with the applicable requirements of this document or the applicable safety device standard shall remain in the circuit being evaluated.



6.4



Safeguards against fire under single fault conditions



6.4.1



General



T h is



s u b c la u s e



d e fin e s



th e



p o s s ib le



lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n o r s p r e a d o f fire



T h e re



a re



tw o



m e th o d s



safeguard m e t h o d s t h a t c a n u n d e r single fault conditions.



o f p ro v id in g



p ro te c tio n .



E ith e r m e th o d



be



m ay



used



to



be



a p p lie d



th a t



under



re d u c e



to



th e



d iffe re n t



p a rts o f th e s a m e e q u ip m e n t. 一



Reduce the likelihood of ignition: E q u i p m e n t conditions n o p a r t s h a l l h a v e s u s t a i n e d f l a m i n g . in w h i c h



th e



a v a ila b le



s te a d y



s ta te



p o w e r to



is



so



d e s ig n e d



single fault



T h is m e th o d c a n b e u s e d fo r a n y c irc u it



th e



c irc u it d o e s



not exceed



4 000 W .



The



a p p r o p r i a t e r e q u i r e m e n t s a n d t e s t s a r e d e t a i l e d in 6 . 4 . 2 a n d 6 . 4 . 3 .



•



Pluggable equipment type A



is c o n s i d e r e d



n o t to e x c e e d



th e



s te a d y



s ta te



v a lu e



of



4 000 W .



•



Pluggable c o n s id e re d n o m in a l



equipment type not



to



mains



exceed



v o lta g e



th e and



B



permanently



and



s te a d y th e



s ta te



v a lu e



of



connected 4 000 W



equipment



if t h e



protective current rating



of



p ro d u ct th e



a re



o f th e



in s ta lla tio n



o v e r c u r r e n t p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e ( F mains x / max) d o e s n o t e x c e e d 4 0 0 0 W .



-



Control fire spread:



S e le c tio n



and



a p p lic a tio n



of



supplementary safeguards



fo r



c o m p o n e n ts , w ir in g , m a te r ia ls a n d c o n s tr u c tio n a l m e a s u r e s th a t r e d u c e th e s p r e a d o f fire and, w h e re



enclosure.



supplementary safeguard



n e c e s s a ry , b y th e u s e o f a s e c o n d T h is



m e th o d



can



be



used



fo r



any



ty p e



of



e q u ip m e n t.



such as a



The



fire



a p p ro p ria te



r e q u i r e m e n t s a r e d e t a i l e d in 6 . 4 . 4 , 6 . 4 . 5 a n d 6 . 4 . 6 .



6.4.2 No



Reduction of the likelihood of ignition under single fault conditions in PS1 circuits



supplementary safeguards



c o n s id e re d



a re



needed



to b e c a p a b le o f p r o v id in g



enough



fo r



p ro te c tio n



e n e rg y to



a g a in s t



PS1.



A



PS1



r e s u l t in m a t e r i a l s r e a c h i n g



is



not



ig n itio n



te m p e ra tu re s .



6.4.3



Reduction of the likelihood of ignition under single fault conditions in PS2 circuits and PS3 circuits



6.4.3.1 The



Requirements



lik e lih o o d



of



ig n itio n



under



single fault conditions



in



PS2



c irc u its



and



PS3



c irc u its



w h e r e th e a v a ila b le p o w e r d o e s n o t e x c e e d 4 0 0 0 W (s e e 6 .4 .1 ) s h a ll b e re d u c e d b y u s in g th e fo llo w in g



NOTE -



supplementary safeguards



a s a p p lic a b le :



For PS3 circuits where the available power exceeds 4 000 W, see 6.4.6.



arcing PIS o r a resistive PIS s h a l l b e s e p a r a t e d accessible o u t e r s u r f a c e o f t h e e q u i p m e n t c o n s i d e r e d t o material; an



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



as



s p e c ifie d



in



b e c o v e re d w ith



6.4.7 w i t h t h e a combustible



- 150 -



safeguard



p r o t e c t i v e d e v ic e s a c tin g a s a



旧C



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



G.3.1



to



G.3.4



o r th e re le v a n t



IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd s ; -



motors



and



tra n s fo rm e rs



s h a ll



c o m p ly



w ith



G .5 .3 ,



G .5 .4



o r th e



re le v a n t



IE C



com ponent



re le v a n t



IEC



com ponent



s ta n d a rd ; -



v a r i s t o r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .8 .2 ; a n d



-



components



a s s o c ia te d



w ith



th e



mains



s h a ll



c o m p ly



w ith



th e



s ta n d a r d s a n d th e re q u ire m e n ts o f o th e r p a rts o f th is d o c u m e n t. In a d d i t i o n , t h e t e s t s o f 6 . 4 . 3 . 2 a p p l y .



EXAMPLES Components associated with the mains include the supply cord, appliance couplers, EMC filtering components, switches, etc.



6.4.3.2



Test method



The conditions of Clause B.4f that are possible causes for ignition, are applied in turn. A c〇 A?sec/tyeA7f/a/ fau/f may 厂 /nfeATi/pf or s/?〇 At-c/厂cu/f a c 〇 Ar?p〇 A7eA7f. / a ? case ofcyoubf, f/?e fesf shall be repeated two more times with replacement components in order to check that sustained flaming does not occur. The equipment is operated under s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s and the temperatures of materials are monitored continuously until thermal equilibrium has been attained. If a conductor opens during a simulated s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n ， the conductor shall be bridged and the simulated s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n shall be continued. In all other cases, where an applied s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n results in interruption of the current before steady state has been reached, the temperatures are measured immediately after the interruption. NOTE 1



See B.1.5 for details on thermal equilibrium.



NOTE 2



Temperature rise can be observed after interruption of the current due to thermal inertia.



If the temperature is limited by a fuse, under a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n : -



a fuse complying with the IEC 60127 series shall open within 1 s; or



-



a fuse not complying with the IEC 60127 series shall open within 1 s for three consecutive times; or



-



the fuse shall comply with the following test.



The fuse is short-circuited and the current that would have passed through the fuse under the relevant s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n is measured. If the fuse current remains less than 2,1 times the current rating o f the fuse， the temperatures are measured after a steady state has been attained. If the current either immediately reaches 2,1 times the current rating of the fuse or more， or reaches this value after a period o f time equal to the maximum pre-arcing time for the relevant current through the fuse under consideration, both the fuse and the short-circuit link are removed after an additional time corresponding to the maximum pre-arcing time of the fuse under consideration and the temperatures are measured immediately thereafter. If the fuse resistance influences the current of the relevant circuit, the maximum resistance value o f the fuse shall be taken into account when establishing the value of the current. Printed board conductors are tested by applying the relevant s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s of B A A .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



6.4.3.3



- 151 -



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection, tests and measurements. See B.4.8 for compliance criteria.



6.4.4



Control of fire spread in PS1 circuits



supplementary safeguards



No



c o n s id e re d



to b e c a p a b le



a re



needed



o f p ro v id in g



enough



fo r



p ro te c tio n



a g a in s t



PS1.



e n e r g y t o r e s u l t in m a t e r i a l s



A



PS1



re a c h in g



is



not



ig n itio n



te m p e ra tu re s .



6.4.5



Control of fire spread in PS2 circuits



6.4.5.1 For



General



th e



p u rp o se s



of



re d u c in g



combustible materials,



th e



lik e lih o o d



of



fire



sp re a d



in



PS2



c irc u its



to



n e a rb y



c irc u its th a t m e e t th e re q u ire m e n ts o f A n n e x Q a re c o n s id e re d to be



P S 2 c irc u its .



6.4.5.2 A



Requirements



supplementary safeguard



PIS



is r e q u i r e d t o c o n t r o l t h e s p r e a d o f f i r e f r o m a n y p o s s i b l e



to



o th e r p a rts o f th e e q u ip m e n t a s g iv e n b e lo w .



C o n d u c to rs a n d d e v ic e s th a t c o n s titu te a



PIS



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e fo llo w in g :



V-1 class material



-



p r i n t e d b o a rd s s h a ll b e m a d e o f



-



wi r e in s u la tio n a n d tu b in g s h a ll c o m p ly w ith 6 .5 .1 .



or



VTM-1 class material;



and



M o to r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .5 .4 .



T r a n s fo r m e r s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith G .5 .3 .



A ll o t h e r c o m p o n e n t s in a P S 2 c i r c u i t s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :



V-1 class material



be m o u n te d on



-



be m ade of



-



c o m p l y w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f C la u s e S . 1 ; o r



-



h a v e a s iz e o f le s s th a n 1 7 5 0 m m 3 ; o r



-



have a m ass of



-



b e s e p a ra te d fro m a



-



c o m p l y w ith th e fla m m a b ilit y r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th e r e le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a r d ; o r



-



be



in



a



If



V-2 class material, VTM-2 class material



s e a le d



material



or



VTM-1 class material;



-



combustible material PIS



or



o f le s s th a n 4 g; o r



enclosure



of



0 ,0 6 m 3



or



le s s ,



c o n s is tin g



to ta lly



of



non-combustible



a n d h a v in g n o v e n tila tio n o p e n in g s ; o r



fo llo w in g



re q u ire m e n ts



conditions



HF-2 class foamed material;



b y th e re q u ire m e n ts o f 6 .4 .7 ; o r



t h e c o m p o n e n t s h a ll n o t ig n ite d u rin g th e



or



or



of



m a te ria ls 6 .4 .7 ,



th e n



and th e



p a rts



single fault conditions a re



not



s e p a ra te d



m a te ria ls



and



p a rts



s h a ll



fro m not



a s s p e c i f i e d in 6 . 4 . 3 . 2 . a



PIS



ig n ite



a c c o rd in g



d u rin g



to



th e



single fault



a s s p e c i f i e d in 6 . 4 . 3 . 2 :



consumable materials,



-



supplies,



m e d ia a n d re c o rd in g m a te ria ls ; a n d



-



p a r t s t h a t a r e r e q u i r e d t o h a v e p a r t i c u l a r p r o p e r t i e s in o r d e r t o p e r f o r m i n t e n d e d f u n c t i o n s , s u c h a s s y n th e tic r u b b e r ro lle rs , in k tu b e s a n d m a te r ia l r e q u ir in g o p tic a l c h a r a c te r is tic s .



6.4.5.3



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by testing or by inspection of the equipment and material data sheets. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 152 6.4.6



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Control of fire spread in a PS3 circuit



F ire s p r e a d



in P S 3 c i r c u i t s s h a l l b e c o n t r o l l e d



b y a p p ly i n g a ll o f t h e f o l lo w i n g



supplementary



safeguards: -



c o n d u c t o r s a n d d e v ic e s w ith in a P S 3 c ir c u it s h a ll m e e t th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 6 .4 .5 ;



-



devices



s u b je c t



to



a rc in g



or



c h a n g in g



c o n ta c t



re s is ta n c e



(fo r



e x a m p le ,



p lu g g a b le



c o n n e c t o r s ) s h a ll c o m p ly w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g :



V_1 class material,



•



h a v e m a te ria ls m a d e o f



•



c o m p ly w ith th e fla m m a b ilit y r e q u ir e m e n t s o f th e r e le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a r d , o r



•



c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f C la u s e S . 1 , o r



•



be m o u n te d



o n m a te ria l m a d e o f



o f a v o lu m e n o t e x c e e d in g



or



V-1 class material



VTM-1 class material a n d b e o f combustible material o f l e s s



or



1 750 m m 3 or have a m ass



th a n 4 g; a n d -



b y p ro v id in g a



W ith in



fire enclosure



a s s p e c i f i e d in 6 . 4 . 8 .



fire enclosure, combustible materials



th e



th a t d o



n o t c o m p ly w ith



th e



fla m m a b ility



r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r P S 2 o r P S 3 c i r c u i t s s h a l l c o m p l y w it h t h e f l a m m a b i l i t y t e s t o f C l a u s e S .1 be



m ade



V-2 class material, VTM-2 class material



of



or



or



HF-2 class foamed material.



T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to : -



par t s w ith a v o lu m e o f le s s th a n 1 7 5 0 m m 3;



-



par t s w ith a m a s s o f



-



supplies,



-



p a r t s t h a t a r e r e q u i r e d t o h a v e p a r t i c u l a r p r o p e r t i e s in o r d e r t o p e r f o r m i n t e n d e d f u n c t i o n s ,



combustible material



consumable materials,



o f le s s th a n 4 g;



m e d ia a n d re c o rd in g m a te ria ls ;



s u c h a s s y n t h e t ic r u b b e r r o lle r s , in k tu b e s a n d m a te r ia l r e q u ir in g o p tic a l c h a r a c t e r is t ic s ; -



g e a r s , c a m s , b e lts , b e a r in g s a n d o t h e r p a rts th a t w o u ld c o n tr ib u t e n e g lig ib le fu e l to a fire , in c lu d in g , la b e ls , m o u n t in g fe e t, k e y c a p s , k n o b s a n d th e lik e ; a n d



-



t u b i n g fo r a ir o r flu id s y s te m s , c o n ta in e r s fo r p o w d e r s o r liq u id s a n d fo a m e d



p la s tic p a rts ,



HB75 class material i f t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s o f o r HB40 class material i f t h e t h i n n e s t s i g n i f i c a n t t h i c k n e s s o f o r HBF class foamed material o r p a s s t h e g l o w - w i r e t e s t a t 5 5 0



p ro v id e d th a t th e y a re o f



th e



m a te ria l



th e



is < 3 m m ,



m a t e r i a l is > 3 m m ,



°C



a c c o r d in g to IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 2 - 1 1 . A



fire enclosure



is n o t n e c e s s a r y f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g c o m p o n e n t s a n d m a t e r i a l s :



-



wi r e in s u la tio n a n d tu b in g c o m p ly in g w ith 6 .5 .1 ;



-



components,



in c lu d in g c o n n e c to r s , c o m p ly in g w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f 6 .4 .8 .2 .1 , a n d th a t



fire enclosure;



f i l l a n o p e n i n g in a -



pl ugs



and



c o n n e c to rs



fo rm in g



p a rt



of



a



power



s u p p ly



co rd



or



in te rc o n n e c tin g



c a b le



c o m p ly in g w ith 6 .4 .9 , G .4 .1 a n d C la u s e G .7 ; -



m o t o r s c o m p ly in g w ith G .5 .4 ; a n d



-



t r a n s f o r m e r s c o m p ly in g w ith G .5 .3 .



Compliance is checked by inspection of the material data sheets or by test, or both.



6.4.7



Separation of combustible materials from a PIS



6.4.7.1 W hen



General re q u ire d ,



materials,



in



th e



m in im u m



o r d e r to



re d u c e



s e p a ra tio n th e



re q u ire m e n ts



lik e lih o o d



o f s u s ta in e d



b e tw e e n fla m in g



a



PIS



and



or sp re a d



combustible



o f fire ,



m ay



a c h ie v e d b y e ith e r s e p a ra tio n b y d is ta n c e (6 .4 .7 .2 ) o r s e p a ra tio n b y a fire b a rrie r (6 .4 .7 .3 ).



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



be



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



-153-



fire enclosure o r a f i r e b a r r i e r o f combustible material arcing PIS o r 5 m m o f a resistive PIS a r e g i v e n i n 6 . 4 . 8 . 4 .



A d d itio n a l re q u ire m e n ts fo r a w ith in



13 m m o f an



6.4.7.2



Separation by distance



Combustible material， e x c e p t t h e m a t e r i a l o n w h i c h t h e PIS i s m o u n t e d , s h a l l f r o m a n arcing PIS o r a resistive PIS a c c o r d i n g t o F i g u r e 3 7 a n d F i g u r e 3 8 . Base



lo c a te d



m a te ria l



of



p rin te d



b o a rd s,



on



w h ic h



V-1 class material, VTM-1 class material



or



arcing PIS i s l o c a t e d , s h a l l HF-1 class foamed material. an



be s e p a ra te d



be



m ade



of



Figure 37 - Minimum separation requirements from a PIS



NOTE -



This figure can be used for:



an arcing PIS that consists of tracks or areas on printed boards; the resistive PIS areas of components. Measurements are made from the nearest power dissipating element of the component involved. If in practice it is not readily possible to define the power dissipating part, then the outer surface of the component is used.



Figure 38 - Extended separation requirements from a PIS W hen



th e



d is ta n c e



b e tw e e n



a



PIS



and



F ig u re 3 7 a n d F ig u re 3 8 a s a p p lic a b le , th e -



h a v e a v o lu m e o f le s s th a n 1 7 5 0 m m 3 ;



-



have a m ass of



-



c o m p l y w ith :



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



combustible material



combustible materials i s l e s s combustible materials s h a l l :



o f le s s th a n 4 g; o r



th a n



s p e c ifie d



in



- 154 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



•



th e fla m m a b ility re q u ir e m e n ts o f th e re le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a r d ; o r



•



be



m ade



material 6.4.7.3



V-1 class material, VTM-1 class material



of



Separation by a fire barrier s h a ll



be



b a r r i e r a s d e f i n e d in 6 . 4 . 8 . 2 . 1



sam e



HF-1 class foamed



o r c o m p l y w i t h I E C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 . S e v e r i t i e s a r e i d e n t i f i e d in C l a u s e S . 2 .



Combustible material



P rin te d



or



b o a rd s a re b o a rd .



a g a in s t a n



s e p a ra te d



b o a rd s



arcing PIS



an



arcing PIS



or a



resistive PIS



b y a fire



(s e e F ig u re 3 9 ).



n o t c o n s id e re d



P rin te d



fro m



to b e a fire



c o m p ly in g



w ith



b a rrie r a g a in s t a n



6 .4 .8



m ay



be



arcing PIS



c o n s id e re d



to



be



lo c a te d a



fire



o n th e b a rrie r



lo c a te d o n a d iffe re n t b o a r d



P r in te d b o a r d s c a n b e c o n s id e r e d to b e a fire b a r r ie r a g a in s t a



resistive PIS



p ro v id e d th a t th e



fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s a re m e t: -



t h e p r in te d b o a rd s h a ll: •



c o m p l y w i t h t h e f l a m m a b i l i t y t e s t o f C l a u s e S . 1 a s u s e d in t h e a p p l i c a t i o n ; o r



•



be



m ade



of



V-1 class material， VTM-1 class material



or



HF-1 class foamed



material; -



wi t h i n th e re s tric te d



v o lu m e , c o m p o n e n ts s h a ll m e e t th e fla m m a b ilit y r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th e



re le v a n t c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a rd



and



n o o th e r m a te ria ls



ra te d



s h a ll b e m o u n te d o n th e s a m e s id e o f a p rin te d b o a rd a s th e -



within



th e



c o n d u c to rs



re s tric te d



v o lu m e ,



(e x c e p t fo r th e



th e



p rin te d



c o n d u c to rs



b o a rd



s h a ll



th a t s u p p ly



th e



V-1 class material resistive PIS; a n d



le s s th a n



have



no



PS2



c o n d u c to rs



or



PS3



c irc u it u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n ).



T h is



a p p lie s to a n y s id e o f th e p rin te d b o a rd a s w e ll a s th e in n e r la y e r o f th e p rin te d b o a rd .



Diverted cone



/



Barrier



IEC



Figure 39a - Illustration showing an angled barrier



Figure 39b - Illustration showing a horizontal barrier



NOTE 1 The volume of the flame is nearly constant; consequently the shape of the flame is dependent upon the position and the shape of the barrier. Different shapes of barriers might give different flame shapes and result in a different restricted area and separation requirements. NOTE 2 Dimensions are identical to Figure 37 and Figure 38 but, except as given in 6.4.8.4, the distance of the barrier from the PIS is not significant.



Figure 39 - Deflected separation requirements from a PIS when a fire barrier is used 6.4.7.4



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection or measurement or both. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



6.4.8



Fire enclosures and fire barriers



6.4.8.1 The



General



safeguard



fire th ro u g h th e



The The



-155-



fu n c tio n o f th e



enclosure



fire enclosure fire enclosure



a d d itio n to th a t o f a



6.4.8.2



fire enclosure



o r b a rrie r.



m a y be th e o v e ra ll need



a n d t h e f ir e b a r r i e r is to i m p e d e t h e s p r e a d o f



enclosure,



o r it m a y b e w i t h i n t h e o v e r a l l



n o t h a v e a n e x c lu s iv e fu n c tio n , b u t m a y p ro v id e



enclosure.



o th e r fu n c tio n s



in



fire enclosure.



Fire enclosure and fire barrier material properties



6.4.8.2.1



Requirements for a fire barrier



A fire b a r r ie r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f C la u s e S . 1 .



T h e s e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p l y p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e m a t e r i a l is : -



made of



non-combustible material



-



made of



V-1 class material



6.4.8.2.2



or



(fo r e x a m p le , m e ta l, g la s s , c e ra m ic , e tc .); o r



VTM-1 class material.



Requirements for a fire enclosure



F o r c irc u its w h e re th e a v a ila b le p o w e r d o e s n o t e x c e e d 4 0 0 0 W



(s e e 6 .4 .1 ), a



fire enclosure



s h a ll: -



c o m p l y w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f C la u s e S . 1 ; o r



-



be m ade of



non-combustible material



-



be m ade of



V-1 class material.



(fo r e x a m p le , m e ta l, g la s s , c e ra m ic , e tc .); o r



F o r c irc u its w h e re th e a v a ila b le p o w e r e x c e e d s 4 0 0 0 W f a -



c o m p l y w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f C la u s e S .5 ; o r



-



be m a d e o f



non-combustible material



-



be m a d e o f



5VA class material



M a te ria l



fo r



c o m p o n e n ts



t h a t fill



or



an



fire enclosure



s h a ll:



(fo r e x a m p le , m e ta l, g la s s , c e ra m ic , e tc .); o r



5VB class material. o p e n in g



in



a



fire enclosure



or th a t



is



in te n d e d



to



be



m o u n t e d in s u c h o p e n i n g s h a l l : -



c o m p l y w ith th e fla m m a b ility r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th e r e le v a n t IE C c o m p o n e n t s ta n d a r d ; o r



-



be m a d e o f



-



c o m p l y w ith C la u s e S .1 .



6.4.8.2.3



V-1 class material;



or



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection of applicable data sheets or test. The m a te ria l fla m m a b ility c la s s is checked for the thinnest significant thickness used.



6.4.8.3



Constructional requirements for a fire enclosure and a fire barrier



6.4.8.3.1 O p e n in g s



Fire enclosure and fire barrier openings in



a



fire enclosure



p ro d u c ts o f c o m b u s tio n o u ts id e o f th e



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



o r in a f i r e



p a s s in g



enclosure



b a r r ie r s h a ll



th ro u g h th e o p e n in g s



be of such



d im e n s io n s



a re n o t lik e ly to ig n ite



o r o n th e s id e o f a fire b a r r ie r o p p o s ite to th e



PIS.



th a t fire



and



m a te ria l o n th e



- 156 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018 PIS



T h e o p e n in g s to w h ic h th e s e p r o p e r tie s a p p ly a re re la tiv e to th e s ite o r lo c a tio n o f th e of



combustible materials.



and



T h e lo c a tio n s o f o p e n in g s r e la tiv e to th e fla m e p r o p e r t y a re s h o w n



in F i g u r e 4 1 a n d F i g u r e 4 2 .



R e g a rd le s s o f th e v e rtic a l.



W h e re



PIS i s a l w a y s normal operating condition o r i e n t a t i o n s ,



e q u ip m e n t o rie n ta tio n , th e fla m e o rie n ta tio n



th e



e q u ip m e n t



has



tw o



or



m o re



p ro p e rty o f th e



o p e n in g p r o p e r tie s a p p ly to e a c h p o s s ib le o r ie n ta tio n .



R e q u ire m e n ts fo r th e



D e te rm in a tio n a cco rd a n ce



of



w ith



to p



fire enclosure o p e n in g s ,



F ig u re 4 0 ,



s id e



ta k in g



secondary lithium battery



of a



o p e n in g s



in to



account



and a ll



b o tto m



p o s s ib le



a r e s p e c i f i e d in



o p e n in g s



s h a ll



o rie n ta tio n s



of



be



use



M.4.3. done (se e



in



a ls o



4 .1 .6 ).



Enclosure top



Enclosure top 5C



s u c d o pjg



s u cd op !



o)



o)



(D



a)



(l>



a)



a)



Enclosure bottom



Enclosure bottom



^5C



Figure 40 - Determination of top, bottom and side openings 6.4.8.3.2



Fire barrier dimensions



T h e e d g e s o f th e fire b a r rie r s s h a ll e x te n d b e y o n d th e r e s tr ic te d v o lu m e (s e e F ig u re 3 9 ).



6.4.8.3.3



Top openings and top opening properties



T o p o p e n in g p ro p e rtie s o f a



fire enclosure



s h a ll a p p ly to o p e n in g s o n a h o r iz o n ta l s u r fa c e o r



a n y s u rfa c e w ith a n in c lin a tio n o f m o re th a n 5 d e g r e e s fro m



PIS



lo c a te d



in a P S 3 c i r c u i t a s s h o w n



s h a ll a p p ly to o p e n in g s a b o v e a



PIS



in



F ig u re 4 1 . T o p



v e rtic a l (s e e F ig u re 4 0 ) a b o v e a



o p e n in g



p ro p e rtie s o f a fire



b a rrie r



a s s h o w n in F i g u r e 4 1 .



Top openings that fall within the volume defined in Figure 41 shall comply with Clause S.2.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018



- 157 -



IEC



NOTE



Dimensions of the cone are identical to Figure 37 and Figure 38.



Figure 41 - Top openings No test is required provided that the openings do not exceed: - 5



mm in any dimension; or



- 1



mm in width regardless of length.



6.4.8.3.4 B o tto m



Bottom openings and bottom opening properties



o p e n in g



p ro p e rtie s o f a



h o riz o n ta l s u rfa c e



o r a n y o th e r s u rfa c e



v e rtic a l (s e e F ig u re 4 0 ) b e lo w a o n o th e r s u rfa c e s b e lo w th e



B o tto m



o p e n in g s



a re



th o s e



PIS



PIS



w ith



a n d a fire b a r r ie r s h a ll a p p ly to o p e n in g s o n a



an



in c lin a tio n



o f m o re th a n



5 d e g re e s fro m



th e



l o c a t e d i n a P S 3 c i r c u i t a s s h o w n in F i g u r e 4 2 . O p e n i n g s



s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d s id e o p e n in g s a n d 6 .4 .8 .3 .5 a p p lie s .



o p e n in g s



e x te n d in g in d e fin ite ly b e lo w th e



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



fire enclosure



PIS.



b e lo w



a



PIS



and



w ith in



30 m m



d ia m e te r



c y lin d e r



- 158 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018



With respect to the potential ignition source, bottom openings are any horizontal openings within the volume shown (2 mm around the cone)



Potential ignition source IEC



NOTE



Dimensions of the cone are identical to Figure 37 and Figure 38.



Figure 42 - Bottom openings B o tto m o p e n in g s s h a ll c o m p ly w ith C la u s e S .3 .



N o t e s t is n e c e s s a r y p r o v i d e d t h a t o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s is m e t : a)



b)



th e b o tto m o p e n in g s d o n o t e x c e e d : - 3



m m in a n y d i m e n s i o n ; o r



- 1



m m in w i d t h r e g a r d l e s s o f l e n g t h .



u n d e r c o m p o n e n ts



and



p a rts



class foamed material



or



m e e tin g under



th e



re q u ire m e n ts



c o m p o n e n ts



th a t



fo r



V-1 class material,



pass



th e



n e e d le -fla m e



IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 u s in g a 3 0 s fla m e a p p lic a tio n , b o tto m o p e n in g s s h a ll n o t e x c e e d :



c)



- 6



m m in a n y d i m e n s i o n ; o r



- 2



m m in w i d t h r e g a r d l e s s o f l e n g t h .



c o m p l y w i t h a b a f f l e p l a t e c o n s t r u c t i o n a s i l l u s t r a t e d in F i g u r e 4 3 .



Not less than 2 ^



Baffle plates (may be above or below the bottom of a fire enclosure)



X



Bottom of fire enclosure IEC



Figure 43 - Baffle plate construction



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



or



HF-1



te s t



of



旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 1 :2 0 1 8 -



◎



旧C 2 0 1 8



-159-



Fixed equipment i n t e n d e d t o b e r e q u i r e a fire enclosure b o t t o m .



flo o r



s ta n d in g



Such



on



e q u ip m e n t



a



n o n -c o m b u s tib le



s h a ll



be



m a rke d



s u rfa c e



in



does



a cco rd a n ce



not w ith



C l a u s e F .5 , e x c e p t t h a t e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .



T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



instructional safeguard



s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



-



e l e m e n t 1a : n o t a v a ila b le



-



e l e m e n t 2: “ R IS K O F F IR E ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



-



e l e m e n t 3: o p tio n a l



-



e l e m e n t 4: “ In s ta ll o n ly o n c o n c r e te o r o th e r n o n - c o m b u s tib le s u r f a c e ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



6.4.8.3.5



Side openings and side opening properties



S id e o p e n in g p ro p e rtie s o f a



fire enclosure



a n d a fire b a r rie r s h a ll a p p ly to o p e n in g s th a t a re



o n a v e r tic a l (± 5 d e g r e e s ) s id e s u r fa c e .



W h e r e a p o rtio n o f th e s id e o f a a n g le



in



F ig u re 4 4 ,



enclosures



th e



fire enclosure



lim ita tio n s



in



fa lls w ith in th e a re a in d ic a te d b y th e 5 d e g re e



6 .4 .8 .3 .4



on



s iz e s



of



o p e n in g s



in



b o tto m s



of



fire



a ls o a p p ly to th is p o rtio n o f th e s id e .



Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement. Except for that portion of the side of a fire e n c lo s u re that is subject to the requirements of 6.4.8.3.5 (see above paragraph), there are no other considerations for side openings. NOTE



Limitations affecting the size of side openings are contained in other clauses of this document.



15 mm PIS



15 mm



•



No fire opening requirements apply



5° 5°



^---------------------------



• 6.4.8.3.4 applies



No fire opening requirements apply



No fire opening | 6.4.8.3.4 applies requirements apply ie c



The PIS can be either a point, a component or a trace on a printed board.



Figure 44 - PIS trajectory downwards 6.4.8.3.6



Integrity of a fire enclosure



If p a r t o f a



person, a)



fire enclosure



c o n s is ts



o f a d o o r o r c o v e r th a t c a n



be opened



by an



ordinary



th e d o o r o r c o v e r s h a ll c o m p ly w ith r e q u ir e m e n t s a ), b), o r c ):



th e d o o r o r c o v e r s h a ll b e in te rlo c k e d a n d c o m p ly w ith th e



safety interlock



re q u ire m e n ts



ordinary person,



s h a ll c o m p ly



in A n n e x K . b)



a d o o r o r co ve r,



in te n d e d



to



b e ro u tin e ly



w ith b o th o f th e fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s :



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



opened



b y th e



- 160 -



it



-



s h a ll



not



person;



and



it



be



s h a ll



be



re m o v a b le



p ro v id e d



fro m



w ith



a



o th e r



旧C



p a rts



m eans



to



of



fire enclosure



th e



keep



it



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



c lo s e d



by



ordinary



th e



normal operating



d u rin g



conditions. c)



ordinary person, s u c h a s f o r t h e instructional safeguard i s p r o v i d e d



a d o o r o r c o v e r in te n d e d o n ly fo r o c c a s io n a l u s e b y th e in s ta lla tio n



o f a c c e s s o rie s ,



m ay



be re m o v a b le



if a n



fo r c o rre c t re m o v a l a n d re in s ta lla tio n o f th e d o o r o r c o v e r.



6.4.8.3.7



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection of applicable data sheets andf where necessary, by test.



6.4.8.4



Separation of a PIS from a fire enclosure and a fire barrier



A fire enclosure



o r fire b a r rie r m a d e o f



combustible material



-



h a v e a m in im u m d is ta n c e o f 13 m m to a n



-



h a v e a m in im u m d is ta n c e o f 5 m m to a



arcing PIS;



s h a ll:



and



resistive PIS.



S m a lle r d is ta n c e s a re a llo w e d p ro v id e d th a t th e p a rt o f th e



fire enclosure



o r fire b a r r ie r w ith in



th e r e q u ire d s e p a ra tio n d is ta n c e c o m p lie s w ith o n e o f th e fo llo w in g : -



fire



t he



enclosure



or



fire



b a rrie r



m e e ts



IE C 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 5 . S e v e r itie s a re id e n tifie d o r fire



b a r rie r m a te ria l



s h a ll



not have



th e



n e e d le -fla m e



te s t



a c c o rd in g



fire enclosure



in C l a u s e S . 2 . A f t e r t h e t e s t , t h e



fo rm e d



any



h o le s



th a t a re



to



b ig g e r th a n



a llo w e d



in



6 .4 .8 .3 .3 o r 6 .4 .8 .3 .4 a s a p p ro p ria te ; or



fire enclosure



-



t he



-



t h e f i r e b a r r i e r is m a d e o f



6.4.9



is m a d e o f



V-0 class material;



V-0 class material



or



or



VTM-0 class material.



Flammability of an insulating liquid



An



insulating liquid:



-



s h a l l h a v e a n a u t o i g n i t i o n t e m p e r a t u r e n o t l e s s t h a n 3 0 0 ° C a s d e t e r m i n e d in a c c o r d a n c e w ith IS O 871 o r s im ila r n a tio n a l s ta n d a rd (fo r e x a m p le A S T M



-



shall



n o t fla s h ;



o r s h a ll



w ith



IS O 2 7 1 9



u s in g



e x a m p le



ASTM



D 9 3 );



have



a fla s h p o in t h ig h e r th a n



P e n s k y -M a rte n s or



by



th e



c lo s e d



S m a ll



cup



S c a le



m e th o d



c lo s e d



IS O 3 6 7 9 (o r n a tio n a l s ta n d a rd s , fo r e x a m p le A S T M



135 cup



E 6 5 9 -8 4 ); and °C



d e te rm in e d



(o r



a



n a tio n a l



m e th o d



D3828 and ASTM



If t r a n s f o r m e r o il, s i l i c o n o il, m i n e r a l o il o r o t h e r s i m i l a r o il is u s e d a s



in a c c o r d a n c e



in



s ta n d a rd ,



a cco rd a n ce



fo r w ith



D 3 2 7 8 ).



insulating liquid， t h e



o il



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e fla s h p o in t, fire p o in t o r fla m m a b ilit y r e q u ir e m e n t s o f th e a p p lic a b le IE C s t a n d a r d . S e e T a b le 3 4 fo r a lis t o f th e IE C s ta n d a r d s .



The



te m p e ra tu re



fla s h p o in t o f th e



o f c o m p o n e n ts



in



c o n ta c t w ith



th e



insulating liquid



s h a ll



not exceed



th e



insulating liquid.



Table 34 - List of applicable IEC standards regarding insulating liquids IE C 6 0 2 9 6



Fluids fo r e le ctrote chn ica l applications - Unused m ine ra l insu la tin g oils fo r transform ers and sw itchgear



IE C 6 0 8 3 6



S pecifications fo r unused silicone insu la tin g liquids fo r e le ctrote chn ica l purposes



IE C 6 1 0 3 9



C lassification o f insu la tin g liquids



IE C 6 1 0 9 9



Insulating liquids



IE C 6 0 0 7 6 - 1 4



P ow er transform ers - Part 14: Liquid-im m ersed p o w e r transform ers using high-tem perature insulation m aterials



IE C T S 6 2 3 3 2 -1



E le ctrica l insulation system s (EIS) - Therm al evaluation o f com bined liq u id and so lid com ponents - P art 1: G eneral requirem ents



Copyright Inlernational Etectrotechmcal Commission



-



S pecifications fo r unused synthetic organic esters fo r e le ctrica l purposes



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 161 -



Compliance is checked by the available data or by inspection and tests as applicable.



6.5



Internal and external wiring



6.5.1



General requirements



In P S 2 c i r c u i t s o r P S 3 c i r c u i t s , t h e i n s u l a t i o n o n i n t e r n a l o r e x t e r n a l w i r i n g s h a l l p a s s t h e t e s t m e th o d s d e s c r ib e d b e lo w , o r th e e q u iv a le n t.



For



c o n d u c to rs



w ith



a



c ro s s -s e c tio n a l



a re a



of



0 ,5



mm2



or



g re a te r,



th e



te s t



m e th o d s



in



0 ,5 m m 2,



th e



te s t



m e th o d s



in



IE C 6 0 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 a n d IE C 6 0 3 3 2 - 1 - 3 s h a ll b e u s e d .



For



c o n d u c to rs



w ith



a



c ro s s -s e c tio n a l



a re a



of



le s s



th a n



IE C 6 0 3 3 2 - 2 - 2 s h a ll b e u s e d .



F o r b o th in te rn a l a n d e x te r n a l w irin g , th e te s t m e th o d



d e s c rib e d



in I E C T S 6 0 6 9 5 - 1 1 - 2 1



m ay



b e u s e d i n s t e a d o f t h e t e s t m e t h o d s in I E C 6 0 3 3 2 - 1 - 2 , I E C 6 0 3 3 2 - 1 - 3 o r I E C 6 0 3 3 2 - 2 - 2 .



NOTE



Wire complying with UL 2556 VW-1 is considered to comply with these requirements.



The insulated conductor or cable shall be acceptable if it complies with the recommended performance requirements of the applicable IEC 60332 standards or with the requirements of IEC TS 60695-11-21.



6.5.2



Requirements for interconnection to building wiring.



E q u ip m e n t in te n d e d th e



o u tp u t



cu rre n t



o v e rh e a tin g , e q u ip m e n t



to p ro v id e to



a



under any



s h a ll



not



v a lu e



p o w e r o v e r th e w irin g



s y s te m



th a t



dam age



e x te rn a l



exceed



a



does



lo a d



not



cause



c o n d itio n .



cu rre n t



lim it



The



th a t



is



to r e m o te e q u ip m e n t s h a ll lim it to



m a x im u m s u ita b le



th e



w irin g



c o n tin u o u s fo r



th e



s y s te m ,



due



c u rre n t fro m



m in im u m



w ire



to th e



gauge



s p e c i f i e d in t h e e q u i p m e n t i n s t a l l a t i o n i n s t r u c t i o n s .



NOTE This wiring is not usually controlled by the equipment installation instructions, since the wiring is often installed independent of the equipment installation. P S 2 c irc u its o r P S 3 L P S to



c irc u its th a t p ro v id e



external circuits



pow er and



th a t a re



in te n d e d



to



b e c o m p a tib le



(s e e A n n e x Q ) s h a ll h a v e th e ir o u tp u t p o w e r lim ite d



w ith



to v a lu e s th a t



re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n w ith in b u ild in g w irin g .



E x te rn a l p a ire d c o n d u c to r c a b le



c irc u its , s u c h a s th o s e d e s c rib e d



in T a b l e 1 3 , I D n u m b e r s



1



a n d 2 h a v in g a m in im u m w ir e d ia m e t e r o f 0 ,4 m m , s h a ll h a v e th e c u r r e n t lim ite d to 1 ,3 A .



EXAMPLE Time/current characteristics of type gD and type gN fuses specified in IEC 60269-2 comply with the above limit. Type gD or type gN fuses rated 1 A f would meet the 1,3 A current limit.



Compliance is checked by test， inspection and where necessary by the requirements of Annex Q.



6.5.3



Internal wiring for socket-outlets



In te rn a l



w irin g



e q u ip m e n t



s h a ll



fo r



s o c k e t-o u tle ts



have



a



n o m in a l



or



c ro s s -s e c tio n a l



in c lu d in g th e c o n d itio n o f fo o tn o te a.



Compliance is checked by inspection.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



a p p lia n c e



o u tle ts a re a



p ro v id in g at



le a s t



as



mains



power



s p e c ifie d



in



to



o th e r



T a b le G .7 ,



- 162 6.6 The



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Safeguards against fire due to the connection of additional equipment p o w e r d e liv e re d



c o m p ly w ith



C la u s e



to c o n n e c te d Q .1 ,



u n le s s



e q u ip m e n t o r a c c e s s o r ie s s h a ll b e lim ite d to P S 2 o r s h a ll



it is l i k e l y t h a t t h e



c o n n e c te d



e q u ip m e n t o r a c c e s s o ry



a ls o



c o m p lie s w ith th is d o c u m e n t.



T h is r e q u ir e m e n t d o e s n o t a p p ly to th e a u d io o u tp u t o f a u d io a m p lifie r s .



EXAMPLE Connected equipment or accessories that are likely to comply with this document include a scanner, a mouse, a keyboard, a DVD drive, a CD ROM drive or a joystick.



Compliance is checked by inspection or measurement.



7



Injury caused by hazardous substances



7.1



General



T o r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f in ju r y d u e to e x p o s u r e to b e p r o v id e d w ith th e



safeguards



hazardous substances,



e q u ip m e n t s h a ll



s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 7.



NOTE 1 These safeguards are not intended to be the only means to reduce the likelihood of such injury. NOTE 2 The classification of other possible hazardous substances not addressed in Clause 7 is not covered by this document. In many regions of the world different legislation applies, such as Restriction of Hazardous Substances Directive (RoHS) and Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH).



7.2



Reduction of exposure to hazardous substances



hazardous substances s h a l l hazardous substances s h a l l b e c o n t r o l l e d b y substances. C o n t a i n e r s s h a l l b e s u f f i c i e n t l y r o b u s t The



e xp o su re



to



be



re d u ce d .



u s in g



R e d u c tio n



c o n ta in m e n t



of



of



e xp o su re



to



hazardous



th e



a n d s h a ll n o t b e d a m a g e d o r d e g r a d e d b y



th e c o n te n ts o v e r th e life tim e o f th e p ro d u c t.



Compliance is checked by: -



the examination of the effects the chemical has on the material of the container; and



-



any relevant tests of Annex T according to 4.4.3, following which there shall be no leakage from the container.



7.3



Ozone exposure



F o r e q u ip m e n t th a t p ro d u c e s th a t p re c a u tio n



s h a ll b e ta k e n



o z o n e , th e in s ta lla tio n



and



o p e ra tin g



to e n s u re th a t th e c o n c e n tra tio n



in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll in d ic a te



of ozone



is l im i t e d



to a s a fe



v a lu e .



NOTE 1 Currently, the typical long term exposure limit for ozone is considered to be 0,1 x 10~6 (0,2 mg/m3) calculated as an 8 h time-weighted average concentration. Time-weighted average is the average level of exposure over a given time period. NOTE 2



Ozone is heavier than air.



Compliance is checked by inspection of instructions or accompanying documents.



7.4



Use of personal safeguards or personal protective equipment (PPE)



safeguards, s u c h a s safeguard a n d i t s u s e s h a l l W h e re



c o n ta in m e n t



of



a



be



in



th e



s p e c ifie d



c h e m ic a l,



a re



in s tru c tio n s



not th a t



p ra c tic a l, a re



p ro v id e d



e q u ip m e n t.



Compliance is checked by inspection of instructions or accompanying documents.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



a



personal w ith



th e



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



7.5



- 163 -



Use of instructional safeguards and instructions hazardous substance



W h e re a s p e c ifie d



in I S O 7 0 1 0



and



is c a p a b l e o f c a u s i n g a n i n j u r y ,



in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll



b e a p p lie d



instructional safeguards



as



t o t h e e q u i p m e n t in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h



C la u s e F .5 .



Compliance is checked by inspection o f instructions or accompanying documents.



7.6



Batteries and their protection circuits



Batteries



8



a n d th e ir p r o te c tio n c ir c u its s h a ll c o m p ly w ith A n n e x M .



Mechanically-caused injury



8.1



General



T o r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f in ju r y d u e to e x p o s u r e to m e c h a n ic a l h a z a r d s , e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p ro v id e d w ith th e



NOTE 1



safeguards



s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e



8.



In some cases, the person is the source of the kinetic energy.



NOTE 2 Where not specifically mentioned in Clause 8， the words “products” and “equipment” also cover carts ， stands and carriers used with these products or equipment.



8.2



Mechanical energy source classifications



8.2.1 General classification V a r i o u s c a t e g o r i e s o f m e c h a n i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e s a r e g i v e n in T a b l e 3 5 .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 164 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Table 35 - Classification for various categories of mechanical energy sources Line



C ategory



MS1



MS2



1



Sharp edges and corners



Does not cause pain or injury b



Does not cause injury b but may be painful



May cause injury



2



Moving parts



Does not cause pain or injury b



Does not cause injury b but may be painful



May cause injury



Plastic fan blades a



3a



3b



N



十



See Figure 46



15 000



Other fan blades a



N



丨



See Figure 45



15 000



'



。



K



2 400 尺



叫



2 400



N



44 000 N



22 000



MS3



( K ^ ' 7 200 ' 丨



尺



^



> MS2



叫



> MS2



1 3 600 _



4



Loosening, exploding or imploding parts



NA



NA



See d



5



Equipment mass f



< 7 kg



< 25 kg



> 25 kg



6



Wall/ceiling or other structure m ountf



Equipment mass < 1 kg mounted < 2 m e



Equipment mass > 1 kg mounted < 2 m e



All equipment mounted > 2 m



10— 7 (w r 2 A^2), where w is the mass (kg) of the moving part of the fan assembly (blade, shaft and rotor), r is the radius (mm) of the fan blade from centre line of the motor (shaft) to the tip of the outer area likely to be contacted, ;V is the rotational speed (rpm) of the fan blade. In the end product, the fan maximum operational voltage can be different than the rated voltage of the fan and this difference should be taken into account. b



The phrase “Does not cause injury” means that, according to experience and/or basic safety standards, a doctor or hospital emergency attention is not needed. The phrase “May cause injury” means that， according to experience and/or basic safety standards, a doctor or hospital emergency attention may be needed. The following equipment constructions are examples considered MS3: 一



CRTs having a maximum face dimension exceeding 160 mm; and



一



lamps in which the pressure exceeds 0,2 MPa when cold or 0,4 MPa when operating.



This classification can only be used if the manufacturer’s instructions state that the equipment is only suitable for mounting at heights < 2 m. Mass of supplies, consumable materials, media or the like that may be contained in the equipment shall be included in the calculation of the equipment mass. The additional mass of such items is determined by the manufacturer.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 165 -



25 000



20 000



15 0 0 0



MS3



| 10 000



MS2



MS1



5 000



o 0



000



2 000



1 500 尺



2 500



3 000



3 500



4 000



-factor



IEC



Figure 45 - Limits for moving fan blades made of non-plastic materials



44 000 40 000• 36 000 32 000. 28 000



M 33



看



24 000. CL



CH



20 ooo -i -



16 000 -I



M$2 12 000 -I 8 000



-



4 000-



M$1



0 0



1 000



2 000



3 000



4 000 5 000 欠 -factor



6 000



7 000



8 000 IEC



Figure 46 - Limits for moving fan blades made of plastic materials 8.2.2



MS1



MS1 i s a c l a s s 1 m e c h a n i c a l normal operating conditions u n d e r single fault conditions. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



e n e rg y and



so u rce



w ith



le v e ls



not



e x c e e d in g



abnormal operating conditions



and



MS1



lim its



n o t e x c e e d in g



under



MS2



- 166 8.2.3 MS2



MS3



62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018



MS2 is



a



c la s s



2



m e c h a n ic a l



e n e rg y



normal operating conditions, conditions, b u t i s n o t M S 1 . 8.2.4



旧C



so u rce



abnormal



w ith



le v e ls



not



operating



e x c e e d in g



conditions，



MS2 and



lim its



under



single



fault



MS3 is a c l a s s



3 m e c h a n ic a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w ith



le v e ls e x c e e d in g



operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions



or



MS2



lim its



under



single fault conditions,



normal or any



m e c h a n ic a l e n e rg y s o u rc e d e c la re d to b e tre a te d a s M S 3 b y th e m a n u fa c tu re r.



8.3



Safeguards against mechanical energy sources



E x c e p t a s g iv e n



b e lo w ,



instructed persons



and



safeguard r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r p a r t s accessible skilled persons a r e g i v e n in 4 . 3 .



instructional safeguard person o r f o r M S 3 t h a t i s n o t



An



s h a ll



b e p ro v id e d



o b v io u s to a



fo r M S 2



to



ordinary persons,



t h a t is n o t o b v i o u s



to a n



instructed



skilled person.



O th e r M S 3 p a rts n o t a c tiv e ly b e in g s e r v ic e d s h a ll b e lo c a te d o r g u a r d e d s o th a t u n in te n tio n a l c o n ta c t w ith



such



p a rts d u rin g



s e rv ic e o p e ra tio n s



is a n



u n l i k e l y r e s u l t in t h e



skilled person



in v o lu n ta r y re c o ilin g fro m c la s s 2 o r c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s b e in g s e r v ic e d .



8.4



Safeguards against parts with sharp edges and corners



8.4.1 Requirements Safeguards t h a t accessible a r e a s



re d u ce



th e



lik e lih o o d



o f in ju ry



by



p a rts



w ith



sh a rp



edges



and



co rn e rs



in



o f th e e q u ip m e n t a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .



C l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f t h e e n e r g y s o u r c e s s h a ll b e d o n e a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3 5 , lin e 1.



W h e r e a s h a r p e d g e o r c o r n e r c l a s s i f i e d a s M S 2 o r M S 3 is r e q u i r e d t o b e



accessible



fo r th e



fu n c tio n o f th e e q u ip m e n t: -



a n y p o t e n t ia l e x p o s u r e s h a ll n o t b e life t h r e a t e n in g ; a n d



-



t h e s h a r p e d g e o r c o r n e r s h a ll b e o b v io u s to a n



ordinary person



or an



instructed person



w hen exposed; and -



t h e s h a r p e d g e s h a ll b e g u a r d e d a s m u c h a s p ra c tic a b le ; a n d



-



an



instructional safeguard



s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d t o r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f u n i n t e n t i o n a l c o n t a c t in



a c c o r d a n c e w it h C l a u s e F .5 , e x c e p t t h a t e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l . T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



instructional safeguard



-



e l e m e n t 1a:



^



-



e l e m e n t 2:



“ S h a rp e d g e s ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



-



e l e m e n t 3:



o p tio n a l



-



e l e m e n t 4:



“ D o n o t to u c h ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



8.4.2



~



\



s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 4 3 ( 2 0 1 1 -0 1 )



Compliance criteria



Where a sharp edge or corner is required to be a c c e s s ib le for the function of the equipment, compliance is checked by inspection.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



- 167 -



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Where a sharp edge or corner is not required to be a c c e s s ib le for the function of the equipment compliance is checked by the relevant tests of Annex V. During and after the application of the force, the sharp edge or corner shall not be a cce ssib le .



8.5



Safeguards against moving parts



8.5.1



Requirements



Safeguards e x a m p le ,



th a t re d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f in ju ry c a u s e d



p in c h



p o in ts ,



m e s h in g



g e a rs



and



p a rts



b y m o v in g p a rts o f th e e q u ip m e n t (fo r



th a t



m ay



s ta rt



m o v in g



due



to



u n e x p e c te d



re s e ttin g o f a c o n tro l d e v ic e ) a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .



P la s tic fa n b la d e s a re c la s s ifie d a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 3 a . O t h e r fa n b la d e s a re c la s s ifie d a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 3 b . O t h e r m o v in g p a r ts a r e c la s s ifie d a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 2.



NOTE 1 The ability of a part to cause injury is not solely dependent upon the kinetic energy it possesses. Consequently, the classification used in this document can only be based on typical experience and engineering judgement. NOTE 2 Examples of factors influencing the energy transfer to a body part include shape of the surface that strikes the body part, elasticity, velocity and the mass of equipment and body part.



safety interlock



If a MS1



safeguard, accessible.



is u s e d a s



b e f o r e t h e p a r t is



U n le s s o th e rw is e



s p e c ifie d , w h e re th e



th e e n e r g y o f th e m o v in g p a r t s h a ll b e r e d u c e d to



lik e lih o o d



e x is ts th a t fin g e rs , je w e lle ry ,



e tc ., c a n c o m e in to c o n ta c t w ith m o v in g M S 2 o r M S 3 p a rts , a n



c lo th in g ,



equipment safeguard



h a ir,



s h a ll b e



p r o v id e d to p r e v e n t e n tr y o f b o d y p a r ts o r e n t a n g le m e n t o f s u c h ite m s .



If a



m o v in g



MS2



p a r t is r e q u i r e d



to



be



accessible



ordinary person, t h e m o v i n g p a r t s h a l l b e instructional safeguard a s g i v e n in 8 . 5 . 2 s h a l l



g u a rd e d



fu n c tio n



as



m uch



m o v in g



fo r th e



fu n c tio n



-



a n y e x p o s u r e s h a ll n o t b e life t h r e a t e n in g ; a n d



-



t h e m o v in g p a rt s h a ll b e o b v io u s w h e n e x p o s e d ; a n d



-



t h e m o v in g p a rt s h a ll b e g u a r d e d a s m u c h a s p r a c tic a b le ; a n d



-



an



-



a



instructional safeguard m a n u a lly



a c tiv a te d



o f th e as



e q u ip m e n t to



p ra c tic a b le



and



an an



be used.



MS3 p a r t i s r e q u i r e d t o b e accessible ordinary person o r a n instructed person: If a



fo r th e



o f th e



e q u ip m e n t to



an



a s g i v e n in 8 . 5 . 2 s h a l l b e u s e d ; a n d



s to p p in g



d e v ic e



s h a ll



b e c le a rly



v is ib le



and



p la c e d



in a



p ro m in e n t



p o s itio n w ith in 7 5 0 m m o f th e M S 3 p a rt. C o m p o n e n ts



o f th e



m a n u a lly



a c tiv a te d



s to p p in g



d e v ic e



s h a ll



be o f an



e le c tro m e c h a n ic a l



t y p e . A m a n u a l l y a c t iv a t e d s t o p p in g d e v ic e m a y c o n s is t o f: •



a s w itc h c o m p ly in g w ith



IE C 6 1 0 5 8 -1



th a t



a



is



p ro v id e d



w ith



la tc h in g



a n d th a t m e e ts th e re q u ire m e n ts o f A n n e x K a n d ty p e



m e c h a n is m



m e e tin g



th e



re q u ire m e n ts



of



IE C 6 0 9 4 7 -5 -5 , o r •



a n e m e r g e n c y s t o p d e v i c e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I E C 6 0 9 4 7 - 5 - 5 .



R e s ta rtin g



o f th e



m e c h a n ic a l



s y s te m



s h a ll



o n ly



be



p o s s ib le



by



in itia tin g



a



s ta rt c o n tro l



p ro c e d u re a fte r th e m a n u a lly a c tiv a te d s to p p in g d e v ic e h a s b e e n m a n u a lly re s e t. M o v in g M S 3 p a rts : -



t hat a re o n ly



-



where



th e



m o v e m e n t),



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



accessible



MS3



m o v in g



to a p a rt



skilled person; is



not



o b v io u s



and (fo r



e x a m p le ,



a



d e v ic e



h a v in g



in te rm itte n t



- 168 instructional safeguard



s h a ll h a v e a n lo c a te d ,



e n c lo s e d



or g u a rd e d



in s u c h



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



a s g i v e n in 8 . 5 . 2 . U n l e s s t h e m o v i n g p a r t is a r r a n g e d , a way



th a t th e



p a r t s is u n l i k e l y , a s t o p p i n g d e v i c e s h a l l b e p l a c e d



p o s s ib ility o f c o n ta c t w ith



th e



m o v in g



in a c l e a r l y v i s i b l e a n d p r o m i n e n t p o s i t i o n



w ith in 7 5 0 m m o f th e M S 3 p a rt.



8.5.2 An



Instructional safeguard requirements



instructional safeguard



s h a ll b e p r o v id e d to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f u n in te n tio n a l c o n ta c t



w i t h a m o v i n g p a r t in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 , e x c e p t t h a t e l e m e n t 3 i s o p t i o n a l .



instructional safeguard



T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



-



L--------- M



e l e m e n t 1a:



/ 〇



E C



s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 5 6 ( 2 0 1 1 - 0 5 ) fo r m o v in g fa n b la d e s ; o r



^



IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 5 7 ( 2 0 1 1 - 0 5 ) fo r o th e r m o v in g p a rts -



e l e m e n t 2:



“ M o v in g p a r ts ” o r “ M o v in g fa n b la d e ” a s a p p lic a b le , o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



-



e l e m e n t 3:



o p tio n a l



-



e l e m e n t 4:



“Keep fa n



b o d y p a rts a w a y fro m



b la d e s ” o r “ K e e p



body



m o v in g p a rts



p a rts ” o r “ K e e p



o u t o f th e



m o tio n



b o d y p a r t s a w a y 1Yom p a th ” a s a p p lic a b le ,



or



e q u iv a le n t te x t



ordinary person equipment safeguard instructional safeguard D u rin g



-



d i s c o n n e c t th e



s e rv ic in g



c o n d itio n s , w h e re



p re v e n tin g



access



to



it i s n e c e s s a r y t o d e f e a t o r b y p a s s t h e



a



m o v in g



p a rt



c la s s ifie d



MS2,



as



an



s h a ll b e p r o v id e d to :



p o w e r so u rce



p rio r to



d e fe a tin g



o r b y p a s s in g



equipment safeguard;



th e



and -



r e s t o r e th e



8.5.3



equipment safeguard



b e fo re re s to rin g p o w e r.



Compliance criteria



The accessibility o f moving parts shall be checked by inspection and, if necessary， be evaluated according to the relevant parts o f Annex V.



8.5.4



Special categories of equipment containing moving parts



8.5.4.1



General in



restricted access areas



(fo r e x a m p le , a d a ta c e n tre ), ty p ic a lly o f s u c h a s iz e th a t a p e rs o n



m a y e n te r c o m p le te ly , o r



C la u s e



8 .5 .4



a p p lie s to la rg e



s e lf-c o n ta in e d



e q u ip m e n t in s ta lle d



m a y in s e r t a c o m p le te lim b o r h e a d in to a r e a s c o n ta in in g



h a z a rd o u s m o v in g



p a rts a n d w h e re



a p e r s o n is e x p e c t e d t o e n t e r t h e a r e a t o s e r v i c e o r o p e r a t e t h e e q u i p m e n t .



E q u ip m e n t c o v e re d s y s te m s



th a t



use



e x a m p le , ta p e



b y th is



in te g ra l



p a ra g ra p h h a za rd o u s



c a rtrid g e s , ta p e



a re a u to m a te d m o v in g



p a rts



in fo rm a tio n



fo r th e



m a s s s to ra g e



h a n d lin g



c a s s e tte s , o p tic a l d is c s , e tc .) a n d



and



o f re co rd e d



re trie v a l



m e d ia



s im ila r fu n c tio n s



and



(fo r la rg e



p rin te rs .



8.5.4.2



Equipment containing work cells with MS3 parts



8.5.4.2.1



Protection of persons in the work cell



normal operating conditions, enclosure o f a work cell. D u rin g



The



e q u ip m e n t s h a ll



m o v in g



p a rts



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



in t h e



be



p ro v id e d



work cell.



w ith



accessible



n o M S 3 m o v in g p a rts s h a ll b e



safeguards



to



re d u ce



th e



O th e r c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s w ith in



ris k



o f in ju ry



a



work cell



at th e o u te r



due



to



MS3



s h a ll n o t b e



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 169 -



accessible u n d e r normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions single fault conditions.



and



EXAMPLES Safeguards include interlocks, barriers and awareness signals, together with designated procedures and training. NOTE 1



Some authorities may require installation of fire detection and extinguishing systems in work cells.



A c c e s s to a



work cell



o r a n y o f its c o m p a r t m e n t s s h a ll b e p r o t e c t e d b y e it h e r o f th e f o llo w in g



m e th o d s : -



1 - Safety interlock m e t h o d . N o k e y o r tool i s n e e d e d t o cell. Safety interlocks m e e t i n g t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f A n n e x K s h a l l a c c e s s t o t h e work cell w h i l e p o w e r i s a v a i l a b l e t o t h e M S 3 Method



c o m p a rtm e n t. c lo s e d



and



P o w e r to th e



la tc h e d .



MS3



O p e n in g



work cell



c o n ta in in g



c o n ta in in g



MS3



MS3



m o v in g



m o v in g



o f th e



m o v in g



p a rts a n d



p a rts



s h a ll



in te rlo c k e d p a rts ,



or



not be



access



an



access



b e p ro v id e d to p re v e n t m o v in g



re s to re d



door



in to



door



work



g a in e n tr y to th e p a rts



u n til th e



any



in



th a t



d o o rs



a re



c o m p a rtm e n t o f a



b e tw e e n



a



c o m p a rtm e n t



o n e th a t h a s b e e n d is a b le d , s h a ll a u to m a tic a lly in itia te



d is c o n n e c tio n o f th e s u p p ly to s u c h p a rts , a n d to r e d u c e to a c la s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e w ith in



instructed person



2 s fo r an ta k e s



lo n g e r th a n 2 s, th e n



skilled person. I f r e d u c t i o n instructional safeguard s h a l l



or a



an



o f th e e n e r g y s o u r c e c la s s b e p ro v id e d



in a c c o r d a n c e



w ith C la u s e F .5 . -



tool s h a l l b e r e q u i r e d t o g a i n a n d c o n t r o l a c c e s s t o t h e work cell, a n d a c c e s s t o t h e work cell s h a l l b e p r e v e n t e d w h i l e p o w e r i s a v a i l a b l e t o t h e M S 3 m o v i n g p a r t s i n t h a t work cell. T h e o p e r a t i n g a n d s e r v i c i n g i n s t r u c t i o n s , a s a p p r o p r i a t e , s h a l l s p e c i f y t h a t t h e k e y o r tool m u s t b e c a r r i e d b y t h e p e r s o n w h i l e i n t h e work cell. W h e n t h e work cell c a n b e e n t e r e d c o m p l e t e l y c l o s i n g o f t h e d o o r w i t h o u t t h e k e y o r tool s h a l l n o t r e s u l t i n t h e e q u i p m e n t b e i n g r e s t a r t e d a u t o m a t i c a l l y . Method 2 -



Key or



tool



m e th o d . A k e y o r



NOTE 2 The key or tool may be used as the means to remove power before access to the work cell or compartment. E x c e p t a s p e rm itte d



in 8 . 5 . 4 . 2 . 2 , i t s h a l l n o t b e p o s s i b l e t o s t a r t o r r e s t a r t t h e s y s t e m



u n t il a ll



r e le v a n t a c c e s s d o o rs a re c lo s e d a n d la tc h e d .



W h e re



it i s p o s s i b l e



in te rlo c k w o u ld



s h a ll



be



to e n te r a



p ro v id e d



so



work cell th a t th e



c o m p le te ly , a n a u to m a tic a lly a c tiv a te d



door



a llo w th e e q u ip m e n t to b e re s ta rte d .



cannot



be



c lo s e d



in a d v e rte n tly



It s h a l l b e p o s s i b l e t o o p e n



if th is



c lo s u re



a n y d o o r fro m



work cell w i t h o u t t h e u s e o f a k e y o r tool. T h e m e a n s o f o p e n i n g t h e work cell s h a l l b e r e a d i l y i d e n t i f i a b l e a n d v i s i b l e , w h e t h e r t h e d o o r th e



m e c h a n ic a l



d o o r fro m is



open



in s id e



in s id e th e or



c lo s e d ,



irre s p e c tiv e o f th e o p e ra tin g s ta tu s o f th e e q u ip m e n t.



Compliance is checked by inspection. D u r in g s e r v ic in g o f th e e q u ip m e n t, th e r e m a y b e a n e e d to e n e r g iz e th e e q u ip m e n t to a llo w fo r a lig n m e n t,



e tc .



conditions, do



In



th e



cases,



under



single fault conditions



or



abnormal operating



a d e q u a t e m e a n s s h a ll b e p r o v id e d to lim it th e m o v e m e n t o f t h e p a r ts s o t h a t t h e y



not becom e



fro m



such



M S3,



m o v in g



such



a s s e m b ly .



as



by e x te n d e d



Such



m eans



le s s th a n M S 3 u n d e r ra te d lo a d , m a x im u m



tra v e l o r b y h a v in g



s h a ll



be



c a p a b le



p a rts



o f lim itin g



d e ta c h th e s e



and



b e e je c te d



m o v in g



s p e e d c o n d itio n s a n d a t m a x im u m



p a rts



to



e x te n s io n .



Compliance is checked by inspection, and， if necessary， by the tests of B.3 and BA. The e n c lo s u re or compartment separation barriers shall contain any part that may become detached during the test.



8.5.4.2.2



Access Protection Override



8.5.4.2.2.1



General



If it is n e c e s s a r y f o r a



interlock



fo r



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



access



skilled person t o a work cell



to o v e r r id e a p r o te c tiv e or



c o m p a rtm e n t,



an



m e c h a n is im



o v e rrid e



such



s y s te m



as a



safety



c o m p ly in g



w ith



- 170 C la u s e s to p



K .4



s h a ll



s y s te m



be



s h a ll



p ro v id e d . be



In a d d i t i o n , w h e n



p ro v id e d



in



旧C



an



a cco rd a n ce



o v e rrid e



w ith



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



s y s te m



8 .5 .4 .2 .3 ,



is u s e d ,



and



s h a ll



an



e m e rg e n c y



c o m p ly



w ith



th e



o p e ra tio n a l e n d u ra n c e re q u ire m e n ts o f 8 .5 .4 .2 .4 .



Compliance is checked by inspection.



8.5.4.2.2.2



Visual indicator



A s e t o f tw o o r m o re b rig h t fla s h in g



in d ic a to r s c o m p ly in g w ith



IE C 6 0 0 7 3 s h a ll o p e r a te u n d e r



th e fo llo w in g c o n d itio n s : a)



work cell



fo r a



o r c o m p a r tm e n t th a t c a n b e e n te re d c o m p le te ly to in d ic a te th e e q u ip m e n t



is b e i n g r e s t o r e d t o n o r m a l o p e r a t i o n a n d m o t i o n is p e n d i n g ; o r b)



fo r a n y e q u ip m e n t w h e n



th e



i n t e r l o c k is o v e r r i d d e n



and



d riv e



p o w e r is a v a i l a b l e



to



MS3



m o v in g p a rts . The



in d ic a to rs



c o m p a rtm e n t m in im u m c o n d itio n



s h a ll



and



be



a t th e



re a d ily



v is ib le



p o in t o f e n try .



at



any



F o r c o n d itio n



o f 10 s p rio r to m o v e m e n t o f a M S 3 a)



can



occur



w h ile



p o in t



c o n d itio n



b)



m o v in g



is



in



w ith in



a),



th e



in d ic a to rs



p a rt a lo n g



e ffe c t,



work cell



th e



th e re



th e



s h a ll



or



re le v a n t



o p e ra te



fo r a



m o s t s ig n ific a n t a x is .



s h a ll



be



a



change



of



If



lig h t



s e q u e n c i n g s u c h t h a t t h e c h a n g e in s t a t u s w i l l b e o b v i o u s t o p e r s o n s i n o r a t t h e p o i n t o f e n t r y to th e



work cell.



NOTE



The most significant axis is the one with the longest travel distance. This is usually the horizontal (X) axis.



Compliance is checked by inspection and test.



8.5.4.2.3 T h is



Emergency stop system



s u b c la u s e



o n ly



a p p lie s



if



a



safety interlock



o v e rrid e



is



p ro v id e d



as



s p e c ifie d



in



8 .5 .4 .2 .2 .



An



e m e rg e n c y



m o v in g



s to p



s y s te m



s h a ll o v e r r id e



a ll o t h e r c o n t r o ls ,



re m o ve



d riv e



p o w e r fro m



p a r t s a n d e m p l o y a u t o m a t i c b r a k in g , if n e c e s s a r y , to c a u s e a ll t h e s e



m o v in g



MS3



p a r ts to



s to p w ith in a r e a s o n a b le tim e p e rio d s u c h th a t a le v e l 3 h a z a rd c a n n o t b e c o n ta c te d .



C o m p o n e n ts



of



th e



e m e rg e n c y



s to p



s y s te m



s h a ll



be



of



an



e le c tro m e c h a n ic a l



ty p e .



An



e m e r g e n c y s t o p c o n t r o l m a y c o n s is t o f: -



a s w itc h c o m p ly in g w ith IE C 6 1 0 5 8 -1



a n d th a t m e e ts th e re q u ire m e n ts o f A n n e x K a n d th a t



is p r o v i d e d w i t h a l a t c h i n g t y p e m e c h a n i s m



m e e tin g th e r e q u ir e m e n ts o f IE C 6 0 9 4 7 -5 -5 , o r



e q u iv a le n t; o r -



a n e m e r g e n c y s t o p d e v i c e in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I E C 6 0 9 4 7 - 5 - 5 .



NOTE In the United Kingdom, an emergency stop system complying with the requirements of IEC 60204-1 and ISO 13850 is required where there is a risk of personal injury. A lte rn a tiv e ly , th e s a fe ty fu n c tio n L e v e l (S IL )



o f th e e m e rg e n c y s to p s y s te m



p e r IE C 6 2 0 6 1 , o r a P e r fo r m a n c e



w ith th e r e s u lts o f a ris k a s s e s s m e n t o f th e



R e s ta rtin g



of



th e



m e c h a n ic a l



s y s te m



Level



(P L )



s h a ll h a v e a S a fe ty



p e r IS O 1 3 8 4 9 -1



In te g rity



t h a t is c o n s i s t e n t



work cell.



s h a ll



o n ly



be



p o s s ib le



by



in itia tin g



a



s ta rt



c o n tro l



p ro c e d u re a fte r th e e m e rg e n c y s to p c o n tro l h a s b e e n m a n u a lly re s e t.



For



e q u ip m e n t



s y s te m and



w h e re



s h a ll in c lu d e



o n e w ith in



th e



a



p e rso n



a m in im u m



work cell.



m ay



c o m p le te ly



o f tw o



The



e m e rg e n c y



s y s te m



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



th e



work cell,



s to p c o n tro ls , o n e



s ta rt up p ro c e d u re



m e t h o d t o e n s u r e n o p e r s o n is p r e s e n t in t h e th e s in g le fa u lt te s ts s p e c ifie d



e n te r



work cell.



th e



e m e rg e n c y



o u ts id e



s h a ll in c lu d e



th e



s to p



work cell



a n o n -h a z a rd o u s



If it c a n b e s h o w n , a f t e r a p p l i c a t i o n o f



in 8 . 5 . 4 . 2 . 4 t o t h e m o v e m e n t c o n t r o l c i r c u i t r y o r o t h e r s e n s i n g



旧C



- 171 -



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



m e a n s , th a t s u c h te s ts d o n o t b y -p a s s th e n o n -h a z a rd o u s s ta rt up p ro c e d u re , th e e m e rg e n c y s t o p p i n g d i s t a n c e t e s t o f t h is s u b c l a u s e is n o t r e q u i r e d .



For



e q u ip m e n t



m in im u m



w h e re



of one



a



p e rso n



e m e rg e n c y



e m e rg e n c y s to p s y s te m



m ay



s to p



o n ly



c o n tro l



p a rtia lly s h a ll



be



e n te r



p ro v id e d



s h a ll b e o p e r a b le b y th e p e r s o n



work cell



or



o u ts id e



work cell. T h e a c c e s s t o t h e work



a



c o m p a rtm e n t,



a



o f th e



n e e d in g to h a v e



cell. work cell



A n e m e r g e n c y s to p c o n tro l p ro v id e d o u ts id e th e lo c a te d



on



th e



e q u ip m e n t



o c c u p ie d . T h e in s ta lla tio n so th a t an



An



e m e rg e n c y



s to p



s h a ll



c o n s is t



a rra n g e m e n t,



of



c o n tro l



such



or



re d



as



an



th e



p e rso n



skilled person



p ro v id e d



work cell a



th a t



o p e ra tin g



it c a n



see



if th e



work cell



is



in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll r e q u ir e th a t s p a c e b e p r o v id e d a r o u n d th e c o n tro l



instructed person



a n y w h e re in s id e th e It



such



s h a ll b e r e a d ily v is ib le a n d s h a ll be



in s id e



th e



c a n e a s i l y r e a c h a n d a c t i v a t e it.



work cell



s h a ll



be



re a d ily



a c c e s s ib le



fro m



a n d s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w ith lig h tin g to p e r m it e a s y id e n tific a tio n .



p a lm e a s ily



or



m u sh ro o m



id e n tifia b le



head re d



b u tto n



s a fe ty



or



c a b le ,



be



p ro v id e d



th a t a c tiv a te s



w ith th e



an



in d ire c t



e m e rg e n c y



s to p s y s te m .



Compliance is checked by inspection and, if necessary, by the following tests. While the mechanical system is operating at its maximum kinetic energy (carrying maximum load capacity at maximum speed)， the emergency stop system is to be activated and the distance to stop measured. The results of the distance measurements shall show that after activation of the emergency stop system, any subsequent motion in any direction would be unlikely to present a risk of injury. The maximum stopping distance from the point o f activation， along the most significant axis, shall be 1 m or less. In addition, if there is an end point along the most significant axis beyond which the MS3 moving part does not operate, there shall be at least 150 mm of empty space available between this end point and the nearest fixed mechanical part, intended to provide sufficient space for a person not to be harmed. The requirements of B.3.8 apply.



8.5.4.2.4 Except



as



Endurance requirements re fe re n c e d



o v e r r i d e is p r o v i d e d



accessible



in



8.5 . 4.2 . 3 ,



a s s p e c ifie d



in



th is



s u b c la u s e



8.5 . 4.2 . 2 ,



safety interlock instructed person o r skilled person



o n ly



o r if a n y



a p p lie s



when



a



c a b le c o n ta in s E S 3 v o lta g e s .



M o v a b le c a b le a s s e m b lie s a re te s te d to e n s u r e th a t n o m e c h a n ic a l d a m a g e o c c u r s th a t c o u ld r e s u l t in a n y o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :



safety interlock



-



a m a lfu n c tio n o f th e



s y s te m ;



-



c o m p r o m i s e a n y c o m p a r tm e n t s e p a ra tio n b a rrie rs o r



-



e x p o s e a p e rs o n to o th e r h a z a rd s .



mechanical enclosures;



I f t h e v o l t a g e in t h e s e c a b l e s a n d m o v e m e n t c o n t r o l c i r c u i t r y a r e E S 3 , m e c h a n i c a l e n d u r a n c e te s ts s h a ll b e a p p lie d to e n s u r e th a t n o e le c tr ic s h o c k h a z a rd re s u lts .



F o r c a b l e s t h a t c a r r y o n l y v o l t a g e s m e e t i n g t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r E S 1 f if it c a n b e s h o w n t h a t s in g le o p e n - c ir c u it o r s h o rt-c irc u it fa u lt te s tin g o f th e s e c a b le s a n d m o v e m e n t c o n tro l c irc u itry w o u l d n o t r e s u l t in a h a z a r d , t h e y a r e e x e m p t f r o m t h e m e c h a n i c a l e n d u r a n c e t e s t s .



Compliance is checked by inspection and, when necessary, by the following mechanical endurance tests.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 172 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



The mechanical system, including the means (for example, limit switches) that limit movement during normal operation, are subjected to 100 000 cycles of operation at rated load and maximum speed through the maximum length or rotation o f travel permitted by the design. After the cycling: -



a mechanical function check (for example, MS3 moving parts to operate electromechanical switches; end of travel mechanical stop, etc.) and a visual inspection, are conducted. Mechanical stops and electromechanical switches shall perform as intended. There shall be no evidence of loss of mechanical integrity. All safety-related functions (including emergency stop systems, and the like, as applicable) shall operate normally; and



-



the assembly cables that control the MS3 moving parts, other than those containing only ES1， are examined for damage that exposes conductors carrying greater than ES1. No conductor shall be broken and no individual strands shall have penetrated the insulation. If damage cannot be determined by inspection, the cable assembly shall pass an electric strength test of 1 000 V， in accordance with 5.4, applied between the conductors carrying greater than ES1 and foil wrapped around the body of the cable.



8.5.4.3



Equipment having an electromechanical device for destruction of media



8.5.4.3.1



General requirements



Equipment safeguards



to



p ro te c t



m e c h a n ic a lly d e s tro y v a rio u s



p e rso n s,



m e d ia



in c lu d in g



c h ild re n ,



b y m e a n s o f m o v in g



fo r



e q u ip m e n t



p a rts th a t d ra w



th e



in te n d e d



m e d ia



to



in to th e



e q u i p m e n t a r e s p e c i f i e d b e l o w . T h e m e d i a d e s t r u c t i o n d e v i c e w i t h i n t h i s e q u i p m e n t is c l a s s e d as M S3.



EXAMPLES Equipment that includes household use and home-office use document shredding and similar media destruction devices, as determined by the nature of their power source. F o r e q u i p m e n t f o r u s e in l o c a t i o n s w h e r e c h i l d r e n a r e n o t l i k e l y t o b e p r e s e n t , s e e C l a u s e F . 4 .



NOTE This equipment design typically applies to commercial or industrial equipment expected to be installed in locations where only adults are normally present. E q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p ro v id e d w ith th e



a p p ro p ria te



R e q u ire m e n ts fo r cannot



be



jo in te d



te s t



safeguards



p ro b e



safety interlocks



re d u ce d



to



th e



of



so th a t



Annex V



a re a c c o rd in g



a p p ro p ria te



e n e rg y



MS3 and



m o v in g p a rts a re n o t th e



wedge



p ro b e



accessible of



F ig u re V .4 .



to 4 .4 .5 , e x c e p t th a t w h e r e a m o v in g



c la s s



w ith in



2



s,



safety interlock



th e



to



p a rt s h a ll



c o n tin u e to p re v e n t a c c e s s .



8.5.4.3.2



Instructional safeguards against moving parts



F o r e q u ip m e n t in s ta lle d w h e r e c h ild r e n



m a y be p re s e n t, an



instructional safeguard



s h a ll b e



p r o v i d e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 , e x c e p t t h a t e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .



T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



instructional safeguard



s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



-



e l e m e n t 1a:



IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 5 7 (2 0 1 1 -0 5 )



-



element 2:



o p tio n a l



-



e l e m e n t 3:



o p tio n a l



-



element 4:



“ T h i s e q u i p m e n t is n o t i n t e n d e d m e d ia



fe e d o p e n in g



e q u ip m e n t w h e n te x t



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



w ith



n o t in



use



fo r u s e b yc h ild re n ”



th e h a n d s , fo r an



c lo th in g



e x te n d e d



a n d “ A v o id to u c h in g th e



o r h a ir”



p e rio d



and



“ U n p lu g



th is



o f tim e ” o r e q u iv a le n t



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 173 -



8.5.4.3.3



Disconnection from the supply



An



s w itc h



is o la tin g



m o v in g



c o m p ly in g



w ith



A n n e x L s h a ll



be



p ro v id e d



to



d is c o n n e c t



p a r ts . A s w it c h w it h a n “ O F F ” p o s it io n , t h a t r e m o v e s a ll p o w e r f r o m



p a r t is a c c e p t a b l e . T h e s w i t c h s h a l l b e l o c a t e d w h e r e it is e a s i l y



accessible



p o w e r to



th e M S 3



MS3



m o v in g



to th e u s e r w h o s e



b o d y p a rt o r c lo th e s m a y b e c a u g h t.



The



”〇 N



丨 丨



and



"O F F "



p o s itio n s



of



a



tw o -p o s itio n



s w itc h



s h a ll



be



m a rke d



in



a cco rd a n ce



w ith F .3 .5 .2 .



F o r a m u lti-p o s itio n



s w itc h , th e



,,O F F M p o s i t i o n



o f th e s w itc h



s h a ll



be m a rke d



in a c c o r d a n c e



w ith F .3 .5 .2 , a n d th e o th e r p o s itio n s s h a ll b e m a r k e d w ith a p p r o p r ia te w o r d s o r s y m b o ls .



8.5.4.3.4



Test method



The media destruction device is tested with the wedge probe of Figure V.4 applied in any direction relative to the opening: -



wi th a force up to 45 N for a strip-cut type device; and



-



wi th a force up to 90 N for a cross-cut type device.



NOTE Media destruction devices are typically identified as either strip-cut type or cross-cut type. A strip-cut media destruction device shreds the media into long strips using a motor-based shredding mechanism. A cross-cut media destruction device shreds the media two or more ways into tiny particles, typically using a more powerful motor and more complex shredding mechanism.



Any e n c lo s u re or guard that can be removed or opened by an o rd in a ry p e rs o n or an in s tru c te d p e rs o n shall be removed or opened prior to application of the probes.



8.5.4.3.5



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked in accordance with V.1.2 and V.1.5. The wedge probe shall not contact any moving part. Where the equipment is provided with a s a fe ty in te rlo c k ， compliance is checked according to 4.4.5， except where a moving part cannot be reduced to the appropriate energy class within 2 s , the s a fe ty in te rlo c k shall continue to prevent access.



8.5.5



High pressure lamps



8.5.5.1



General



The



c o n ta in m e n t m e c h a n is m



L in e



4



re d u ce



fo r h ig h



p re ssu re



la m p s th a t a re c o n s id e re d



explosion o f t h e instructed person



o f T a b le 3 5 s h a ll h a v e a d e q u a te s tr e n g th to c o n ta in a n th e



lik e lih o o d



o f in ju ry to



an



ordinary person



or



MS3



a c c o rd in g



to



la m p s o a s to d u rin g



n o rm a l



u s e , o r la m p a s s e m b ly re p la c e m e n t, a s a p p ro p ria te .



8.5.5.2



Test method



For the protection against the effects of a high pressure lamp failure， the following test is performed as follows: -



l amp assemblies considered MS3 parts during field replacement are tested separate from the equipment;



-



l amp assemblies only considered MS3 parts during operation, may be tested separately, or as normally installed in the equipment, or both.



An e x p lo s io n of the lamp is stimulated by mechanical impact, electronic pulse generator or similar method. The lamp shall operate for at least 5 min to obtain operational temperature and pressure. To evaluate the rupture results for potential debris area and particle size, the equipment or lamp assembly is placed on a horizontal surface， and a dark sticky mat (or Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 174 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



another adequate method) of adequate size to capture the particles is placed near the exhaust vent of the equipment. The equipment opening shall be oriented to maximize potential for particles to be expelled from the product horizontally across the dark sticky mat. After the rupture, the glass particles generated are measured using a magnified glass piece with a 0,1 mm resolution. The test shall be conducted to simulate the worst case operating position specified in the instructions. NOTE



It is easier for the inspection of potential glass debris if the sticky mat has a dark blue colour.



An example of an electronic pulse generator method is given in Figure D.3. The charge is increased in steps o f 5 J until the lamp ruptures are repeatable.



8.5.5.3



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by physical inspection or, if necessary, by the tests of 8.5.5.2. When tested in accordance with 8.5.5.2, inspect the dark sticky mat for glass particles ， and: -



gl ass particles less than 0,8 mm in the longest axis shall not be found beyond 1 m of the e n c lo s u re opening; and



-



gl ass particles equal to or greater than 0,8 mm in the longest axis shall not be found.



For p ro fe s s io n a l e q u ip m e n t ， where it is unlikely that the particles will be within reach of an o rd in a ry p e rso n , the value of 0,8 mm may be replaced with 5 mm.



8.6



Stability of equipment



8.6.1



Requirements



C la s s ific a tio n



o f p ro d u c ts



fo r th e



p u rp o se s



o f a s s e s s in g



e q u ip m e n t



s ta b ility



is



to



be



done



a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 5.



I n c a s e u n i t s a r e f i x e d t o g e t h e r , t h e M S c l a s s i s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e t o t a l w e i g h t o f t h e u n i t s . If u n it s a r e i n t e n d e d t o b e s e p a r a t e d f o r r e l o c a t i o n , t h e M S c l a s s is d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e i n d i v i d u a l w e ig h t.



In d iv id u a l u n its th a t a re d e s ig n e d to b e m e c h a n ic a lly fix e d t o g e t h e r o n s ite a n d a re n o t u s e d in d iv id u a lly ,



or



stationary equipment,



s h a ll



be



assessed



by



in s p e c tio n



a fte r



in s ta lla tio n



a c c o r d i n g to t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s i n s t r u c t i o n s a n d , if n e c e s s a r y , t e s t e d a c c o r d i n g to 8 . 6 . 2 . 2 .



E q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t s a n d te s ts g iv e n



in 8 . 6 . 2 f 8 . 6 . 3 , 8 . 6 . 4 a n d 8 . 6 . 5



a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3 6 . W h e r e a n “ x ” is g i v e n , it m e a n s t h a t t h e t e s t is a p p l i c a b l e .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 175 -



Table 36 - Overview of requirements and tests Type o f te st Equipm ent type



MS1



Static s ta b ility



Downward force



R elocation



Glass slide b



H orizontal force



8.6.2.2



8.6.2.3



8.6.3



8.6.4



8.6.5



All equipment



No stability requirements



Floor standing



X



Non-floor standing



X



Controls or display a



X



MS2 X



Fixed equipm ent



No stability requirements



Floor standing



X



Non-floor standing



X



Controls or display



X



X



X



Moo X



Fixed equipm ent



X



No stability requirements



Equipment with front mounted accessible user controls and equipment having displays with moving images likely to be used in the home or similar installation environments where the equipment may be accessible to children. b



The glass slide test is not applicable to floor standing equipment, even though the equipment may have controls or a display.



W h e re



th e rm o p la s tic



m a te ria ls



have



an



r e le v a n t s ta b ility te s ts s h a ll b e c o n d u c te d



in flu e n c e



on



th e



s ta b ility



of



th e



e q u ip m e n t,



a f t e r t h e s t r e s s r e l i e f t e s t in C l a u s e



th e



T .8 w h e n th e



e q u ip m e n t h a s c o o le d to ro o m te m p e ra tu re .



MS2



and



C la u s e



MS3



F .5 ,



te le v is io n



except



th a t



instructional safeguard in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h instructional safeguard m a y b e i n c l u d e d i n t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n



s e ts th e



s h a ll



have



an



in s tru c tio n s o r e q u iv a le n t d o c u m e n t a c c o m p a n y in g th e e q u ip m e n t.



T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



instructional safeguard



s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



-



e l e m e n t 1a:



n o t a v a ila b le



-



e l e m e n t 2:



“ S ta b ility H a z a r d ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd



-



e l e m e n t 3:



“T he



te le v is io n



set



m ay



fa ll,



c a u s in g



e q u iv a le n t te x t -



e l e m e n t 4:



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



th e te x t b e lo w o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



s e rio u s



p e rso n a l



in ju ry



or



d e a th ” or



- 176 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



A television set may fall, causing serious personal injury or death. Many injuries, particularly to children, can be avoided by taking simple precautions such as: ALWAYS use cabinets or stands or mounting methods recommended by the manufacturer of the television set.



一



一



ALWAYS use furniture that can safely support the television set,



-



ALWAYS ensure the television set is not overhanging the edge of the supporting furniture.



-



ALWAYS educate children about the dangers of climbing on furniture to reach the television set or its controls.



-



ALWAYS route cords and cables connected to your television so they cannot be tripped over, pulled or grabbed.



-



NEVER place a television set in an unstable location.



-



NEVER place the television set on tall furniture (for example, cupboards or bookcases) without anchoring both the furniture and the television set to a suitable support.



-



NEVER place the television set on cloth or other materials that may be located between the television set and supporting furniture. NEVER place items that might tempt children to climb, such as toys and remote controls, on the top of the television or furniture on which the television is placed.



一



If the existing television set is going to be retained and relocated, the same considerations as above should be applied.



8.6.2 8.6.2.1



Static stability Test setup



The equipment shall be blocked， if necessary, by means of a stop of the smallest dimensions possible to keep it from sliding or rolling during the test. During the tests ， containers, if any, are to contain the amount of substance within their rated capacity that will result in the most disadvantageous condition. All doors ， drawers ， casters， adjustable feet and other appurtenances that are a c c e s s ib le to an o rd in a ry p e rso n , are arranged in any combination that results in the least stability. Equipment provided with multi-positional features shall be tested in the least favourable position based on the equipment construction. However, if the casters are intended only to transport the unit, and if the installation instructions require adjustable feet to be lowered after installation, then the adjustable feet (and not the casters) are used in this test. Where equipment is subject to periodic maintenance or routinely serviced or repaired at its intended use location， the doors, drawers, etc. or any other adjustment means a c c e s s ib le to an in s tru c te d p e rs o n or s k ille d p e rs o n shall be arranged in any combination specified by the servicing instructions that results in the least stability. The tests of 8.6.2.2 and 8.6.2.3 shall be performed as indicated in Table 36.



8.6.2.2



Static stability test



The equipment shall be subjected to one of the following tests: -



The equipment is tilted in all directions such that the base of the equipment is at an angle up to and including 10°; or



-



The equipment is placed on a plane at an angle of 10° from the horizontal and rotated slowly through an angle o f 360° about its normal vertical axis; or



-



The equipment is placed on a horizontal non-skid surface and subjected to a force equal to: •



50 % of the weight of the unit vertical downwards， but not more than 100 N. If， during the test, the supporting surface prevents the equipment from overturning, the test shall be repeated such that the supporting surface is not used to pass the test; and



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



•



- 177 -



13 % o f the weight in all horizontal directions but not more than 250 N9



that is applied to the worst case positions on the equipment by means of a suitable test apparatus having a flat surface of approximately 125 mm by 200 mm, in such a way as to produce the maximum overturning moment. The test may be applied at any height not exceeding 1f5 m from the base of the equipment. The test force shall be discontinued if the equipment remains stable after being tilted 10° from vertical.



8.6.2.3



Downward force test



Equipment shall not tip over when a constant downward force of 800 N is applied at the point of leverage for a maximum moment to any point of any surface within 10° of horizontal of at least 125 mm by at least 200 mm， at any height up to 1 m from the base of the equipment. The 800 N force is applied by means of a suitable test apparatus having a flat surface of approximately 125 mm by 200 mm. The downward force is applied with the complete flat surface of the test apparatus in contact with the equipment， however the test apparatus need not be in full contact with uneven surfaces (for example, corrugated or curved surfaces). Equipment having a shape or a flexibility of the surface that is not likely to be used as a step or a ladder are exempt from the test. EXAMPLE Products in combination with a cart or stand or products with protrusion or recess where the construction is obviously not to be used as a step or ladder.



8.6.2.4



Compliance criteria



During the tests, the equipment shall not tip over.



8.6.3 8.6.3.1



Relocation stability Requirements



E q u i p m e n t s h a l l b e s t a b l e w h e n it is b e i n g r e l o c a t e d . E q u i p m e n t s h a l l : -



b e e q u ip p e d w ith w h e e ls h a v in g a m in im u m d ia m e te r o f 1 0 0 m m ; o r



-



c o m p l y w ith th e te s t o f 8 .6 .3 .2 .



8.6.3.2



Test method and compliance criteria



The equipment is tilted to an angle of 10° from its normal upright position in any direction. If the equipment is such that when it is tilted through an angle of 10° when standing on a horizontal plane, a part of the equipment not normally in contact with the supporting surface would touch the horizontal plane, the equipment is placed on the edge of the horizontal support during the test so that the contact is not made. Alternatively， the equipment may be placed on a plane and is rotated through an angle of 360° about its normal vertical axis while tilted at 10°. Equipment expected to be moved or relocated by o rd in a ry p e rs o n s shall have: 一



all doors and drawers not having a positive means of retention and that can be opened inadvertently; and



一



casters， adjustable feet and the like



arranged in any combination that results in the least stability. Equipment expected to be moved or relocated by an in s tru c te d p e rs o n or a s k ille d pe rso n , shall have all doors ， drawers, etc” positioned in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. A unit provided with multi-positional features shall be tested in the least favourable position based on the equipment construction. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 178 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018



The equipment shall not tip over during the test.



8.6.4



Glass slide test



The equipment is placed on a clean ， dry， glass covered horizontal surface so that only the supporting feet are in contact with the glass. The glass-covered surface is then tilted in the most unfavourable direction through an angle of 10°. During the test, the equipment shall not slide or tip over.



8.6.5



Horizontal force test and compliance criteria



The equipment is to be placed on a horizontal non-skid surface with all doors， drawers ， casters， adjustable feet and other movable parts arranged in any combination that results in the least stable condition. The equipment shall be blocked， if necessary， by means of a stop of the smallest dimensions possible, to keep it from sliding or rolling when subjected to one of the following tests: -



an external horizontal force of 20 % of the weight of the equipment or 250 A/, whichever is less， is applied to that point on the equipment that will result in the least stability. The force shall not be applied more than 1,5 m above the supporting surface; or



-



the equipment shall be moved through any angle o f tilt up to and including 15° from the vertical; or



-



the equipment is placed on a plane and is rotated through an angle of 360° about its normal vertical axis while tilted at an angle o f 15°.



During the test, the equipment shall not tip over.



8.7



Equipment mounted to a wall， ceiling or other structure



8.7.1



Requirements



C la s s ific a tio n o f e q u ip m e n t fo r th e p u rp o s e s o f a s s e s s in g m o u n tin g m e a n s fo r a tta c h m e n t to a w a ll,



c e ilin g



or



o th e r



fix e d



s tru c tu re



(fo r



e x a m p le ,



a



p o le



or



to w e r)



is



done



a c c o rd in g



to



T a b le 3 5 , lin e 6.



F o r M S 2 o r M S 3 e q u ip m e n t: -



If th e



m a n u fa c tu re r



m eans



and



th e



d e fin e s



s p e c ific



m o u n tin g



e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith to



th e



e q u ip m e n t



s h a ll



m eans,



th e



c o m b in a tio n



8 . 7 . 2 , T e s t 1. T h e e ith e r



be



p ro v id e d



o f th e



m o u n tin g



h a rd w a re



used



w ith



e q u ip m e n t,



th e



to fix th e



m o u n tin g



m eans



or



d e s c rib e d



in d e t a i l in t h e u s e r i n s t r u c t i o n s ( f o r e x a m p l e , l e n g t h o f s c r e w s , d i a m e t e r o f t h e



s c re w s , e tc .). -



If



th e



m a n u fa c tu re r



p ro v id e d such



w ith



m o u n tin g



does



not



d e fin e



s p e c ific



m o u n tin g



a n y p a rt (fo r e x a m p le , a h o o k o r th re a d e d m eans



to



th e



e q u ip m e n t,



such



p a rts



m eans,



but



h o le ) w h ic h



s h a ll



c o m p ly



th e



is



fa c ilita te s a tta c h in g



w ith



a p p r o p r ia te . T h e u s e r in s tr u c tio n s h a ll a d v is e o n th e s a fe u s e o f s u c h



e q u ip m e n t



8 .7 .2 ,



T est 2 f as



p a rts (fo r e x a m p le ,



s c r e w s iz e in c lu d in g th re a d s iz e a n d le n g th , n u m b e r o f s c re w s , e tc .). -



If t h e th e



e q u i p m e n t is p r o v i d e d



th re a d e d



p a rts



w ith o u t



w ith th e



th re a d e d m o u n tin g



p a rts fo r a tta c h m e n t o f th e m eans



s h a ll



a d d itio n a lly



m o u n tin g



c o m p ly



w ith



m eans, 8 .7 .2 ,



T e s t 3.



NOTE The tests are meant to test the fixing of the mounting means to the equipment and not to test the fixing to the wall, ceiling or other structure.



8.7.2



Test methods



If the construction involves thermoplastic materials that have an influence on the strength of the mounting system, the tests shall be performed after the stress relief test of Clause T.8.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 179 -



Test 1 The equipment is mounted in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the mounting means positioned, when possible， to represent the most severe stress on the supports. A force in addition to the weight o f the equipment is applied downwards through the centre of gravity of the equipment， for 1 min. The additional force shall be: -



three times the weight of the equipment; or



-



the weight of the equipment plus 880



A/,



whichever is less. Afterwards， for equipment mounted to a wall or another structure， a horizontal force of 50 N is applied laterally for 1 min. Test 2 The test force shall be equivalent to the least of the following divided by the number of attachment points in the mounting system: -



f our times the weight of the equipment; or



-



t wo times the weight of the equipment plus 880 N.



Each individual representative point in the mounting system, one at a time， shall be subjected to the following six test forces: -



a shear force perpendicular to its centre axis for 1 min. The force shall be applied in four directions， one direction at a time， separated by 90°.



-



an inward directed push force parallel to its centre axis for 1 min.



-



an outward directed pull force parallel to its centre axis for 1 min.



Test 3 If the mounting system design relies upon threaded parts, each threaded part， one at a time, shall be subjected to the following test. The screw is tightened with a torque according to Table 37 and then loosened， for a total of 5 times. The torque shall be applied gradually. If a corresponding screw fastener is supplied by the manufacturer, it shall be used for the test. If no corresponding screw fastener is supplied by the manufacturer, even though a screw type may be recommended in the user instructions, any screw with the same diameter shall be used for the test.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 180 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Table 37 - Torque to be applied to screws Nominal diameter of screw



Torque



mm



Nm



up to and including 2,8



0,4



over 2,8



up to and including 3,0



0,5



over 3,0



up to and including 3,2



0,6



over 3,2



up to and including 3,6



0,8



over 3,6



up to and including 4,1



1,2



over 4,1



up to and including 4,7



1,8



over 4,7



up to and including 5,3



2,0



over 5,3



up to and including 6,0



2,5



8.7.3



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection and by the tests of 8.7.2, as applicable. The equipment or its associated mounting means shall not become dislodged and shall remain mechanically intact and secure during the test. Threaded parts shall remain mechanically intact.



8.8



Handle strength



8.8.1 A



General



p a r t o f t h e e q u i p m e n t u s e d f o r liftin g o r c a r r y in g t h e e q u ip m e n t , r e g a r d l e s s o f its s h a p e o r



lo c a tio n



or



w h e th e r



th e



p a rt



is



in te n d e d



fo r



liftin g



or



c a rry in g



by



hand



or



v ia



m e c h a n ic a l



m e a n s , is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e a h a n d l e a n d s h a l l h a v e a d e q u a t e s t r e n g t h .



T h e e q u i p m e n t is c l a s s i f i e d a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3 5 , l in e 5.



If e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g m u ltip le



u n its



h a n d le s



to g e th e r, th e



is d e s i g n e d , o r p r o v i d e d c la s s



is d e t e r m i n e d



ta k in g



w ith in to



in s tr u c tio n s , fo r liftin g o r c a r r y in g a c c o u n t th e w e ig h t th a t m a y



be



c a rrie d .



Compliance is checked by inspection or by available data, or， where necessary， by the test of 8.8.2. As a result o f the test， the handle， its securing means, or that portion of the e n c lo s u re to which it is secured， shall not break, crack， or detach from the equipment.



8.8.2



Test method



A weight shall be uniformly applied over a 75 mm width at the centre of the handle, without clamping. The weight shall be the equipment weight plus an additional weight as specified below: -



for MS1 equipment with two or more handles, a weight that exerts a force o f three times the weight of the equipment; NOTE



一



一



No tests apply to MS1 equipment having only one handle.



for MS2 equipment, a weight that exerts a force of three times the weight of the equipment; for MS3 equipment with a mass 50 kg or less， a weight that exerts a force of two times the weight of the equipment or 75 kgf whichever is greater; and for MS3 equipment with a mass greater than 50 kg， a weight that exerts a force of the weight of the equipment or 100 kg, whichever is greater.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



- 181 -



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



The additional weight shall be started at zero and gradually increased so that the test value is attained in 5 s to 10 s and maintained for 60 s. When more than one handle is provided， the force shall be distributed between the handles. The distribution of the forces shall be determined by measuring the percentage of the equipment's weight sustained by each handle with the equipment in the intended carrying position. When MS2 equipment is furnished with more than one handle, and it can be considered capable of being carried by only one handle, each handle shall be capable o f sustaining the total force.



8.9



Wheels or casters attachment requirements



8.9.1



General



T h e e q u i p m e n t is c l a s s i f i e d a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3 5 , l i n e 5 . W h e n



e q u i p m e n t is i n t e n d e d t o b e



u s e d w ith c a rts , s ta n d s a n d s im ila r c a r r ie r s p r o v id e d w ith w h e e ls o r c a s te r s , th e c la s s ific a tio n is a p p l i e d u s i n g t h e c o m b i n e d m a s s .



T h e lik e lih o o d o f M S 3 e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g c a rts , s ta n d s a n d s im ila r c a rrie rs th a t s u p p o rt th e e q u ip m e n t, fro m tip p in g o v e r d u rin g m o v e m e n t s h a ll b e r e d u c e d .



8.9.2



Test method



Wheels or casters on MS3 equipment， or their supporting cart， stand or similar carrier， intended to be moved as part of its n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ， shall be capable of withstanding a pull of 20 N. The pull force is to be applied by a weight， or a steady pull， to the wheel or caster for a period o f 1 min in any direction made possible by the construction. During the test, the wheels or casters shall not be damaged or pull free from its securing means.



8.10



Carts， stands， and similar carriers



8.10.1 The



General



e q u ip m e n t s h a ll



be



s ta b le



T a b le 3 5 , lin e 5 a re a p p lie d



w ith



th e



c a rt,



s ta n d



u s in g th e c o m b in e d



o r s im ila r c a rrie r. T h e



c la s s ific a tio n s



of



m a s s o f b o th th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th e c a rts o r



s ta n d s s p e c ifie d w ith th e e q u ip m e n t.



A ll c a r ts a n d s ta n d s s p e c ifie d fo r u s e w ith th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e a p p lic a b le te s ts d e s c rib e d



in t h e f o l l o w i n g s u b c l a u s e s . A c a r t , s t a n d



o r c a r r ie r s h a ll b e s u b je c te d to th e



a p p lic a b le te s ts a lo n e a n d a g a in w ith th e e q u ip m e n t s p e c ifie d



b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r p la c e d o n



th e c a rt o r s ta n d .



M S 3 e q u ip m e n t, in c lu d in g



th e ir s u p p o rtin g



c a rts , s ta n d s a n d s im ila r c a rrie rs th a t s u p p o r t th e



normal operating conditions,



e q u ip m e n t , t h a t a r e n o t m o v e d a s p a r t o f its



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith



th e h o riz o n ta l fo rc e te s t o f 8 .6 .5 .



MS2



or



MS3



s p e c ifie d



e q u ip m e n t



c a rt, s ta n d



m o re



th a n



1m



in



h e ig h t,



o r c a rrie r, s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e



in c lu d in g re lo c a tio n



e q u ip m e n t



m o u n te d



on



s t a b i l i t y t e s t in 8 . 6 . 3



th e ir



except



t h a t t h e t ip a n g l e b e c o m e s 1 5 ° . If e q u i p m e n t is p r o v i d e d w i t h w h e e l s o r c a s t e r s t h a t a l l o w t h e e q u ip m e n t to o n ly m o v e



in l i m i t e d



d i r e c t i o n s , t h e t e s t is o n l y a p p l i e d



in t h o s e



d ire c tio n s



(fo r



e x a m p le , a n e le c tro n ic w h ite b o a rd ).



8.10.2 A



c a rt,



Marking and instructions s ta n d



e q u ip m e n t, w ith a n



or



s im ila r



c a rrie r th a t



b u t is p a c k a g e d



and



instructional safeguard



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



is



s p e c ifie d



m a rk e te d



by



th e



m a n u fa c tu re r fo r



s e p a ra te ly fro m



in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e



use



w ith



s p e c ific



th e e q u ip m e n t, s h a ll b e p r o v id e d



F.5.



- 182 T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



instructional safeguard



-



e l e m e n t 1a:



n o t a v a ila b le



-



e l e m e n t 2:



“ C a u tio n ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



-



e l e m e n t 4:



4T h i s



(c a rt,



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



s ta n d , o r c a rrie r)



is i n t e n d e d



fo r u s e



o n ly w ith



(m a n u fa c tu re rs



n a m e ), (m o d e l n u m b e r o r s e rie s ), ( e q u ip m e n t n a m e ) .” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t -



e l e m e n t 3:



“Use



w ith



o th e r



e q u ip m e n t



m ay



re s u lt



in



in s ta b ility



c a u s in g



in ju ry ”



or



e q u iv a le n t te x t T h e e l e m e n t s s h a l l b e in t h e o r d e r 2 , 4 , a n d 3.



instructional safeguard



The



s h a ll b e a ffix e d



to th e c a rt, s ta n d



o r c a rrie r, o r in c lu d e d



in t h e



in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s o r e q u iv a le n t d o c u m e n t a c c o m p a n y in g th e e q u ip m e n t.



E q u ip m e n t o n ly s h a ll



be



in te n d e d



p ro v id e d



w ith



and



an



s h ip p e d



fo r



use



w ith



instructional safeguard



a s p e c ific in



c a rt,



a cco rd a n ce



s ta n d w ith



o r s im ila r



C la u s e



F.5



c a rrie r, and



be



c o m p r is e d o f: -



e l e m e n t 1a:



n o t a v a ila b le



-



e l e m e n t 2:



“ C a u tio n ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t



-



e l e m e n t 4:



“ T h i s ( e q u i p m e n t n a m e ) is f o r u s e o n l y w it h ( m a n u f a c t u r e r s



n a m e ) ，（m o d e l



n u m b e r o r s e r i e s ) ，（c a r t ，s t a n d ，o r c a r r i e r ) ” o r e q u i v a l e n t t e x t -



e l e m e n t 3:



ttU s e w i t h



o t h e r ( c a r t s , s t a n d s , o r c a r r i e r s ) m a y r e s u l t in i n s t a b i l i t y c a u s i n g



in ju ry ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t T h e e l e m e n t s s h a l l b e in t h e o r d e r 2 f 4 , a n d 3.



The



instructional safeguard



s h a ll b e a ffix e d to th e e q u ip m e n t o r in c lu d e d



in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n



in s tru c tio n s o r e q u iv a le n t d o c u m e n t a c c o m p a n y in g th e e q u ip m e n t.



8.10.3



Cart, stand or carrier loading test and compliance criteria



A cart， stand or carrier shall be constructed so that permanent deformation or damage that is capable of resulting in injury to a person, does not occur when it is subjected to a force of 220 N applied for 1 min to any grippable or leverage point a c c e s s ib le to a child. To determine compliance, the force is applied through the end of a 30 mm diameter circular cylinder. The force is to be applied to a shelf drawer， dowel rung support， or equivalent part that is within 750 mm from the floor and will support some or all of a child's weight. The force is to be applied for 1 min with the cart or stand at room temperature. The part shall not collapse or break so as to expose sharp edges or produce pinch points that are capable of resulting in injury. In addition， a cart， stand or other carrier shall be constructed so that permanent deformation or damage that is capable of resulting in injury to persons does not occur when each supporting surface is individually loaded with: -



the manufacturer’s intended load plus 440 N for the surface intended to support a display with moving images; or



-



f our times the manufacturer’s intended load or 100 N， whichever is greater but not to exceed 440 N, is applied to all applicable surfaces.



A dedicated storage area intended to accommodate specific accessories such as media tapes, discs ， etc. shall be fully loaded to the rated load. The weight is to be applied for 1 min on each supporting surface, with the other supporting surfaces unloaded. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



8.10.4



- 183 -



Cart, stand or carrier impact test



When tested as described below, a cart, stand or carrier shall not produce a risk o f injury to persons. A single impact is to be applied to any part of the cart or stand and the test method is to be as described in Clause T.6. However， a cart， stand or carrier made of glass shall instead be tested according to 4.4.3.6.



8.10.5



Mechanical stability



A cart， stand or carrier， including floor standing types， shall be subjected to the applicable tests described in 8.6.3 and 8.6.5 by itself, and where applicable in combination with its intended MS2 or MS3 equipment. For the purposes of these tests， the weight shall be considered as the total weight of the equipment plus the weight of the cart, stand or carrier. The equipment shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions and the horizontal force shall be applied to either the cart, stand or carrier or intended equipment to produce a maximum overturning moment on the equipment at a point up to a maximum height of 1,5 m above the floor level. If during the tests of 8.6.3 and 8.6.5 the equipment starts to slide or tip relative to the cart, stand or carrier， only the horizontal force test shall be repeated by reducing the force to 13 % of the weight o f the equipment alone， or 100 N， whichever is less. The equipment and cart or stand shall not tip over.



8.10.6 An



Thermoplastic temperature stability



e q u ip m e n t,



w ith s ta n d



th e



c a r t ，s t a n d



o r c a rrie r



te s t o f C la u s e



T .8



u s in g



th e rm o p la s tic



m a te ria ls



w ith o u t a n y s h rin k a g e , w a rp a g e ,



in



its



c o n s tru c tio n



o r o th e r d is to rtio n



s h a ll o f th e



t h e r m o p l a s t i c m a t e r i a l s t h a t r e s u l t s in t h e e q u i p m e n t f a i l i n g t o c o m p l y w i t h 8 . 1 0 . 3 t 8 . 1 0 . 4 a n d 8 .1 0 .5 .



8.11



Mounting means for slide-rail mounted equipment (SRME)



8.11.1 T h is



General



s u b c la u s e



lik e lih o o d



s p e c ifie s



re q u ire m e n ts



o f in ju ry b y re ta in in g th e S R M E



fo r



h o riz o n ta lly



in a s t a b l e



m o u n te d



p o s itio n



s lid e -ra ils



to



re d u ce



th e



a n d n o t a llo w in g th e s lid e -ra ils



to b u c k le , th e m e a n s o f a t t a c h m e n t to b r e a k , o r th e S R M E to s lid e p a s t th e e n d o f th e s lid e ra ils .



T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s b e l o w a p p l y t o t h e m o u n t i n g m e a n s o f M S 2 a n d M S 3 S R M E t h a t is : -



i n s t a l l e d in a r a c k a n d t h a t i s i n t e n d e d t o b e e x t e n d e d o n s l i d e - r a i l s a w a y f r o m t h e r a c k f o r in s ta lla tio n , u s e o r s e rv ic e ; a n d



-



S R M E th a t e x te n d s th e fu ll w id th o f th e ra c k ; a n d



-



h a v i n g a t o p i n s t a l l a t i o n p o s i t i o n m o r e t h a n 1 m in h e i g h t f r o m t h e s u p p o r t i n g s u r f a c e .



T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s d o n o t a p p ly to : :一



e q u ip m e n t s u b a s s e m b lie s ; or



:一



o t h e r e q u i p m e n t f i x e d i n p l a c e in t h e r a c k ; o r



::一



e q u i p m e n t t h a t is n o t i n t e n d e d t o b e s e r v i c e d w h i l e e x t e n d e d o n s l i d e - r a i l s .



T h e m e c h a n ic a l m o u n tin g be



th e



a c tu a l



enclosure



m e a n s fo r th e S R M E a re r e fe r r e d to a s s lid e - r a ils . T h e S R M E



p ro d u c t c o n fig u re d



in



its w o r s t c a s e



m e c h a n ic a l



w ith w e ig h ts to s im u la te w o r s t c a s e lo a d in g .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



lo a d in g ,



or a



m ay



re p re s e n ta tiv e



- 184 NOTE 1



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Slide-rails include bearing slides, friction slides or other equivalent mounting means.



NOTE 2 Subassemblies of the end product (for example, removable modules, component drawers, pull out paper/heater trays in copiers/printers) are not considered to be SRME.



8.11.2



Requirements



C la s s ific a tio n



o f p ro d u c ts



fo r th e



p u rp o se s



o f a s s e s s in g



e q u ip m e n t



s ta b ility



is



to



be



done



SRME



fro m



a c c o r d in g to T a b le 3 5 , lin e 5.



NOTE



For assessing equipment stability, see 8.6.



S lid e -ra ils



s h a ll



re ta in



th e



SRME



and



have



end



s to p s



th a t



p re ve n t



th e



u n in te n tio n a lly s lid in g o ff th e m o u n tin g m e a n s .



The



s lid e - r a ils s h a ll b e in s ta lle d



in a r e p r e s e n t a t i v e



r a c k w i t h t h e S R M E , o r in a n e q u i v a l e n t



s e t u p in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s i n s t r u c t i o n s .



S lid e



ra ils



8 .1 1 .3 .1



S lid e



w ith



a



s in g le



e x te n d e d



p o s itio n



s h a ll



c o m p ly



w ith



th e



d o w n w a rd



fo rc e



te s t



of



in t h e e x t e n d e d p o s it io n .



ra ils



h a v in g



a



s e rv ic e



p o s itio n



d o w n w a rd fo rc e te s t o f 8 .1 1 .3 .1



and



an



in s ta lla tio n



p o s itio n



s h a ll



c o m p ly



w ith



th e



in t h e s e r v i c e p o s i t i o n .



A ll s l i d e r a i l s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e t e s t s o f 8 . 1 1 . 3 . 2 a n d 8 . 1 1 . 3 . 3 in b o t h t h e s e r v i c e p o s i t i o n a n d th e in s ta lla tio n p o s itio n .



F o llo w in g e a c h te s t, th e s lid e -ra ils a n d th e S R M E m a y b e re p la c e d b e fo re c o n d u c tin g th e n e x t te s t.



A m u lt i p o s i t i o n s lid e ra il s h a ll n o t e x t e n d a u t o m a t i c a l l y t o a n y o f t h e e x t e n d e d



p o s itio n s . T h e



S R M E s h a ll o n ly b e a b le to g o to th e s e r v ic e p o s itio n w h e n p u lle d o u t. A la tc h o r o th e r m e a n s s h a ll



be



p ro v id e d



in s ta lla tio n



to



s to p



th e



SRME



in



th e



s e rv ic e



p o s itio n .



Any



instructional safeguard s h a l l instructional safeguard s h a l l b e a s f o l l o w s :



p o s itio n s h a ll b e e x p la in e d . A n



in s ta lle r. T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



s e rv ic e



-



e l e m e n t 1a:



n o t a v a ila b le



-



e l e m e n t 2:



S ta b ility h a z a rd



-



e l e m e n t 3:



“ T h e ra c k m a y tip o v e r c a u s in g s e r io u s p e r s o n a l in ju r y ”



-



e l e m e n t 4:



th e te x t b e lo w o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



p o s itio n



and



b e p ro v id e d fo r th e



B e fo re e x te n d in g th e ra c k to th e in s ta lla tio n p o s itio n , re a d th e in s ta lla tio n in s tru c tio n s . D o n o t p u t a n y l o a d o n t h e s l i d e - r a i l m o u n t e d e q u i p m e n t in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p o s i t i o n . D o n o t l e a v e t h e s l i d e - r a i l m o u n t e d e q u i p m e n t in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n p o s i t i o n .



8.11.3 8.11.3.1



Mechanical strength test Downward force test



With the SRME in its extended position, a force in addition to the weight of the SRME is to be applied downwards through the centre o f gravity for 1 min. The additional force applied to the SRME shall be equal to the greater o f the following two values, with a maximum of 800 N: - 5 0 % o f the SRME weight plus a force of 330 N; or



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 185 -



50 % of the SRME weight， plus an additional weight， where the additional weight is equal to the SRME weight or a force of 530 N， whichever is less.



-



NOTE This additional force is intended to take into account other items or devices that are stacked on top of the installed SRME while in the extended position during installation of other SRME.



For slide-rail mounted shelves, the shelf shall be tested with a weight of 125 % of the maximum weight that is intended to be placed on the shelf. A marking shall be provided on the shelf to indicate the maximum weight that can be added to the shelf.



8.11.3.2



Lateral push force test



A 250 N static push force is applied laterally， in both directions at or near the end of the SRME with the slide rails in their fully extended (service) position for a period of 1 min. The applied weight need not be in full contact with uneven surfaces (for example, corrugated or curved surfaces) but shall be concentrated within 30 mm of the end of the SRME.



8.11.3.3



Integrity of slide rail end stops



To test the integrity of the end stops, a 250 N static pull force is applied at the front of the fully extended rail on the SRME for a period of 1 min9 in an attempt to cause the SRME to come off the slide-rail. The SRME is then returned to the (installed) use position and then placed back in the fully extended position. The test is performed 10 times.



8.11.4



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection and available manufacturer’s data. If data is not available, then the tests according to 8.11.3 are conducted. Following each test, the SRME and its associated slide-rails shall remain secure for one complete cycle of travel on its slide-rails. If the mounting means is not able to perform one complete cycle without binding， a force o f 100 N shall be applied horizontally to the front of the SRME at its centre point with the intent to completely retract the SRME into the rack. The mounting means shall not bend or buckle to any extent that could introduce an injury. End stops shall retain the SRME in a safe position and shall not allow the SRME to slide past the end of the slide-rails.



8.12 A



Telescoping or rod antennas



te le s c o p in g



b a ll o n



th e



o r ro d



end. An



a n te n n a a n te n n a



s h a ll end



be



p ie c e



p ro v id e d and



w ith



th e



a m in im u m



s e c tio n s



6 ,0



mm



d ia m e te r b u tto n



o f a te le s c o p in g



a n te n n a



s h a ll



or be



s e c u r e d in s u c h a m a n n e r a s t o p r e v e n t r e m o v a l .



Compliance is checked by inspection and the test o f Clause T.11.



9 9.1



Thermal burn injury General



T o re d u c e th e



lik e lih o o d



o f p a in fu l e ffe c ts a n d



in ju r y d u e to th e r m a l b u r n s ,



s h a ll b e c la s s ifie d a n d w h e n n e c e s s a r y p r o v id e d w ith th e



safeguards



accessible



p a rts



s p e c i f i e d in C l a u s e 9 .



NOTE Electric burns due to radio frequency (RF) energy sources are a special case in this document. They are controlled by limiting accessibility above a specified frequency. These limits and conditions are defined in the notes d and e defined in Table 4.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 186 9.2



旧C



62368-1:2018 © IEC 2018



Thermal energy source classifications



9.2.1 TS1



TS1 is a c l a s s l t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w i t h t e m p e r a t u r e l e v e l s :



-



not e x c e e d in g



TS1



lim its u n d e r



-



not e x c e e d in g



TS2



lim its u n d e r:



normal operating conditions;



•



abnormal operating conditions;



•



single fault conditions.



9.2.2



and



or



TS2



T S 2 is a c l a s s 2 t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w h e r e : -



t he te m p e ra tu re e x c e e d s th e T S 1



lim its ; a n d



-



normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions conditions t h e t e m p e r a t u r e d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e T S 2 l i m i t s . under



single fault



or



W h e r e t h e m a l f u n c t i o n o f t h e e q u i p m e n t is e v i d e n t , n o l i m i t s a p p l y .



9.2.3 TS3



TS3 is



a



c la s s



3 th e rm a l



e n e rg y



so u rce



w h e re



under



normal operating conditions single fault conditions.



9.3



Touch temperature limits



T a b le 3 8 u n d e r



9.3.1



accessible



to u c h and



te m p e ra tu re



or under



exceeds



th e



TS2



lim its



in



abnormal operating conditions,



or



Requirements



E x c e p t a s n o te d b e lo w , to u c h te m p e r a tu r e s o f



An



th e



can



p a rt th a t, w h ile



b e e v a lu a te d



accessible



p a rts s h a ll c o m p ly w ith T a b le



38.



in c o n t a c t w i t h t h e b o d y , i s l i k e l y t o d r o p in t e m p e r a t u r e u p o n



u n d e r th e



lim its o f A n n e x A



r e p r o d u c i b l e t e s t m e t h o d o l o g y is d e t e r m i n e d



in



IE C



G u id e



1 1 7 :2 0 1 0 . A n



b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r w ith d u e



a p p ro p ria te



r e g a r d to th e



t e s t m e t h o d in I E C G u i d e 1 1 7 .



9.3.2



Test method and compliance criteria



The temperature tests are run with the room ambient conditions as defined in B.1.5 and B.2.39 except that the mom ambient temperature shall be 25 0C ± 5 °C. If the test is performed at a temperature between 20 °C and 25 reflect a value of 25 °C.



°C ,



the results are adjusted to



NOTE 1 For an explanation of why the test is done at 25 °C without adjusting results for higher ambient temperatures, see IEC TR 62368-2.



The equipment shall be operated in a manner the manufacturer determines likely to result in elevated thermal conditions of a c c e s s ib le surfaces and parts. NOTE 2 This may not be the condition of maximum input current or wattage but the condition that delivers the highest thermal level to the part in question.



Compliance is checked by measuring the steady state temperature of a c c e s s ib le surfaces.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



- 187 -



Table 38 - Touch temperature limits for accessible parts Maximum tem perature (7max} °C A cce ssible parts b



TS1



Metal d



Glass, porcelain and vitre o us m aterial



P lastic and rubber



Wood



Devices worn on the body (in direct contact with the skin) in normal use (> 8 h) e



43 to 48



43 to 48



43 to 48



43 to 48



Handles, knobs, grips, etc.， and surfaces either held or touched in normal use (> 1 min and < 8 h) a



48



48



48



48



Handles, knobs, grips, etc., and surfaces held for short periods of time or touched occasionally (> 10 s and < 1 min)



51



56



60



60



Handle, knobs, grips etc., and surfaces touched occasionally for very short periods (> 1 s and < 10 s) f



60



71



77



107



Surfaces that need not be touched to operate the equipment (< 1 s)



70



85



94



140



Handles, knobs, grips, etc., and surfaces held in normal use (> 1 min) a



58



58



58



58



Handles, knobs, grips, etc., and surfaces held for short periods of time or touched occasionally (> 10 s and < 1 min)



61



66



70



70



Handle, knobs, grips etc.f and surfaces touched occasionally for very short periods (> 1 s and < 10 s ) f



70



81



87



117



80 (100) c



95 (100) c



104



150



TS2



Surfaces that need not be touched to operate the equipment (< 1 s) TS3



Higher than the TS2 limits



Examples of these surfaces include a telephone handset, a mobile phone or another handheld device, and the palm rest surface of a notebook computer. Limits for > 1 s and < 10 s may be used for local hotspots where touching can be easily avoided by changing the way the device is held. b



Where necessary, time of contact shall be determined by the manufacturer and shall be consistent with the intended use in accordance with the equipment instructions.



c



The values in parentheses may be used for the following areas and surfaces: 一



一



an area on the surface of the equipment that has no dimension exceeding 50 mm, and that is not likely to be touched in normal use; or heatsinks and metallic parts directly covering heatsinks, except those on surfaces incorporating switches or controls handled during normal use.



For these areas and parts, an instructional safeguard in accordance with Clause F.5 shall be provided on or near the hot part. Under abnormal operating conditions and single fault conditions, for other areas and surfaces of the equipment, an equipment basic safeguard is required. For metal parts that are covered with plastic or rubber material of at least 0,3 mm thick, the covering is considered suitable for use as a safeguard and the temperature limit of plastic and rubber is allowed. Examples include portable lightweight devices such as watches, headsets, personal music players and sports monitoring equipment. For larger devices or devices in direct contact with vital areas of the face (e.g. the airways), lower limits may apply. For contact durations less than 8 hours based on its intended normal use, apply limits between 48 °C/1 min and 43 °C/8 h. Calculations shall be rounded down to the nearest whole number. An example is a headset with a limited battery charge of 2 h. f



9.4



Examples include surfaces that need to be touched for disconnection.



Safeguards against thermal energy sources



E x c e p t a s g iv e n



b e lo w ,



instructed persons Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



and



safeguard r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r p a r t s accessible skilled persons a r e g i v e n in 4 . 3 .



to



ordinary persons,



- 188 -



w ith 9 .5 .2 m a y b e



ordinary person a g a i n s t T S 2 , u s e d a s t h e basic safeguard.



Accessible



(in te rn a l



F o r p ro te c tio n o f a n



p a rts



in te n d e d fu n c tio n



and



e x te rn a l)



c la s s ifie d



旧C an



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



instructional safeguard



as TS2



or TS 3



in a c c o r d a n c e



th a t re q u ire



h e a t fo r th e



(fo r e x a m p le , a d o c u m e n t la m in a to r , th e r m a l p rin t h e a d , fu s e r h e a te r, e tc .)



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith a ll o f th e f o llo w in g : -



t h e p a r t d o e s n o t n e e d to b e t o u c h e d



to o p e r a te th e e q u ip m e n t ( fo r e x a m p le , a p a rt a ls o



s e r v in g a h a n d le , k n o b , o r g rip fu n c tio n ) ; -



it



is



u n lik e ly



th a t



ordinary person



an



w ill



to u c h



th e



p a rt



in te n tio n a lly



under



normal



operating conditions; -



u n i n t e n t i o n a l c o n t a c t w i t h t h e p a r t is u n l i k e l y b y a n



ordinary person



d u rin g



m a in te n a n c e



n o t in v o lv in g th e p a rt; -



t he



p a r t is p r o v i d e d



w ith



instructional safeguard



an



on o r n e a r th e



p a r t in a c c o r d a n c e



w ith 9 .5 .2 ; a n d -



it is u n l i k e l y t h a t t h e p a r t w i l l b e t o u c h e d b y c h i l d r e n .



skilled person, equipment safeguard o r p r o v i d e d F o r p ro te c tio n o f a



p a rts a n d s u r fa c e s c la s s e d T S 3 s h a ll b e p r o v id e d w ith a n w ith



an



instructional safeguard



so



th a t



u n in te n tio n a l



c o n t a c t w i t h s u c h p a r t s a n d s u r f a c e s d u r i n g s e r v i c e o p e r a t i o n s is u n l i k e l y t o c a u s e t h e



person 9.5



skilled



to r e c o il in to o t h e r c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e s ( s e e F ig u r e 1 9 ).



Requirements for safeguards



9.5.1



Equipment safeguard



equipment safeguard s h a l l l i m i t t h e t r a n s f e r o f t h e r m a l e n e r g y ( s o u r c e t e m p e r a t u r e ) u n d e r normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions a n d single fault conditions o r l i m i t a c c e s s i b i l i t y t o a t h e r m a l e n e r g y s o u r c e t o a t o u c h t e m p e r a t u r e a s



An



c l a s s i f i e d in T a b l e 3 8 .



T e m p e r a t u r e lim its a re a p p lie d o n ly fo r th o s e



conditions w h e r e t h e operating condition



abnormal operating conditions



e q u ip m e n t c o n tin u e s to o p e r a te a s in te n d e d a n d , or



single fault condition



is



n o t o b v io u s .



If a



single fault h e n c e ，t h e abnormal or



m a lfu n c tio n



is



e v id e n t,



th e n th e lim its a re n o t a p p lic a b le .



9.5.2



Instructional safeguard



instructional safeguard



An



s h a ll



be



p ro v id e d



in



a cco rd a n ce



w ith



F.5,



C la u s e



e x c e p t th a t



e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .



T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



e le m e n t 1a



instructional safeguard



, IEC 6 0 4 1 7 -5 0 4 1



s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



(2 0 0 2 -1 0 )



-



e l e m e n t 2:



“ C A U T IO N ” a n d “ H o t s u rfa c e ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t



-



e l e m e n t 3:



o p tio n a l



-



e l e m e n t 4:



“ D o n o t to u c h ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



9.6 9.6.1



Requirements for wireless power transmitters General



Wireless power transmitters



fo r



near



fie ld



w ire le s s



power



tra n s fe r



can



w a rm



up



m e ta llic o b je c ts th a t m a y b e p la c e d c lo s e to o r o n s u c h a tr a n s m it te r . T o a v o id a b u m h ig h



te m p e ra tu re s



9 .6 .3 .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



o f th e



fo re ig n



m e ta llic



o b je c ts ,



th e



tra n s m itte r



is



te s te d



as



fo re ig n d u e to



s p e c ifie d



in



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



9.6.2



—189 —



Specification of the foreign objects



T h e fo llo w in g fo re ig n o b je c ts a re u s e d : -



a s te e l d is c , s e e F ig u re 4 7 ;



-



a n a lu m in iu m



-



a n a lu m in iu m fo il, s e e F ig u r e 4 9 .



rin g , s e e F ig u re 4 8 ; a n d



D im ensions in m illim etres



SECTION A - A



DETAIL S



A



No



Name



Remarks



1



Disc



Steel 1,1011/ RFe 160



2



Thermocouple



Any suitable type



3



Heatsink compound



Heat transport



4



Silicon tubing



Strain relief



Figure 47 - Steel disc



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



-1 9 0 -



IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018 D im ensions in m illim etres



Gh



阶



⑼



No



Name



Remarks



1



Ring



Aluminium (for example AISilM gIM n 100 Hv)



2



Thermocouple



Any suitable type



3



Heatsink compound



Heat transport



4



Silicon tubing



Strain relief



Figure 48 - Aluminium ring



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



r©



IEC 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



191 D im ensions in m illim etres



5 〇



DETAIL



S



A IEC



No



Name



Remarks



1



Foil



Al 99,5 %



2



Thermocouple



Any suitable type



3



Heatsink compound



Heat transport



4



Silicon tubing



Strain relief (or use of glue layer on the foil)



Figure 49 - Aluminium foil 9.6.3



Test method and compliance criteria



The w ire le s s p o w e r tra n s m itte r is placed in a room under the temperature conditions as specified in 9.3.2. The test is performed once with each of the foreign objects specified in 9.6.2 placed in direct contact with the transmitter. Each test has four cycles: -



one without a receiver present and with the foreign object in direct contact with the transmitter; and



-



one with a receiver placed in direct contact with the foreign object; and



-



one with a receiver placed at a distance of 2 mm from the foreign object; and



-



one with a receiver placed at a distance of 5 mm from the foreign object.



The transmitter is operated to transmit its maximum power.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 192 -



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



NOTE The test is not meant to test the temperature of the receiver, therefore any compatible receiver that can draw the maximum power from the w ire le ss pow er tra n s m itte r can be used and the temperature of the receiver does not have to be monitored.



During each cycle, the foreign object can be moved on the transmitter in order to find the location where the highest temperature occurs. During the tests, the temperature of the foreign object shall not exceed 70 °C.



10 Radiation 10.1



General



T o r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f p a in f u l e f f e c t s a n d in ju r y d u e to o p t ic a l e n e r g y ( v is ib le , IR , U V ) , X ra y , a n d a c o u s tic e n e rg y , e q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e p r o v id e d



w ith th e



safeguards



s p e c ifie d



in t h i s



c la u s e .



10.2



Radiation energy source classifications



10.2.1 General classification R a d i a t i o n e n e r g y s o u r c e c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s a r e g i v e n in T a b l e 3 9 .



Table 39 - Radiation energy source classifications Source



Lasers



RS2



optical fibre communication systems (OFCS)



According to IEC 60825-2



free space optical communication systems for transmission of information



According to IEC 60825-12



Other lasers, except those used in image projectors



According to IEC 60825-1 a



Lamps and lamp systems (including LEDs), except those used in image projectors Image projectors (beamers)



RS1



According to IEC 62471:2006 b



Image projectors with lasers



According to IEC 60825-1 a or IEC 62471-5:2015 if applicable



Image projectors with lamps or LEDs



According to IEC 62471-5:2015



X-Ray



RS3



< 36 pA/kg at 50 mm c



< 1 8 5 pA/kg at 100 mm d



> RS2



PMP Acoustic



sound output



< 85 dB(A)



< 100 dB(A)



> RS2



Maximum sound



analogue output



< 27 mV



< 150 mV



> RS2



pressure e



digital output



< - 2 5 dBFS



< -1 0 dBFS



> RS2



^ 100 dB(A)



> RS2



100 % CSD = PMP Acoustic



sound output



Maximum dose exposure e



analogue output



< 15 mV



< 150 mV



> RS2



digital output



< - 3 0 dBFS



< - 1 0 dBFS



> RS2



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



a t h a t



s p e c ifie d



is



at



le a s t



in



7 .4 .3



equal



o f IE C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 :2 0 0 7 to



th e



a p p ro p ria te



te s t



s h a ll



be



v o lta g e



p e rfo rm e d in



5 .4 .9 .1



w ith of



a



th is



d o c u m e n t; and -



t he



routine testing



v o lta g e



K ini>b t h a t



d o c u m e n t.



Copyright Inlern^lional Etectrotechmcal Commission



a s s p e c i f i e d in 7 . 4 . 1 is



at



le a s t



equal



to



o f IE C 6 0 7 4 7 - 5 - 5 : 2 0 0 7 s h a ll b e p e r fo r m e d w ith a th e



a p p ro p ria te



te s t



v o lta g e



in



5 .4 .9 .2



of



th is



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



G.13 Printed boards G.13.1 The and



General



re q u ire m e n ts



basic insulation， supplementary insulation, reinforced insulation



fo r



double insulation



o n p rin te d b o a rd s a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .



T h e s e r e q u ir e m e n t s a ls o a p p ly to th e w in d in g s o f a p la n a r tr a n s fo r m e r .



G.13.2 The



Uncoated printed boards



in s u la tio n



c o m p ly



w ith



distance



b e tw e e n th e



c o n d u c to rs on th e o u te r s u rfa c e s o f an u n c o a te d



clearance 5.4.3.



m in im u m



re q u ire m e n ts o f



re q u ire m e n ts



of



5.4.2



and



th e



p rin te d



b o a rd s h a ll



m in im u m



creepage



Compliance is checked by inspection and by measurement.



G.13.3



Coated printed boards



T h e r e q u ir e m e n ts fo r s e p a r a tio n d is ta n c e s b e fo re th e b o a rd s a re c o a te d a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .



A n a l t e r n a t i v e m e t h o d t o q u a l i f y c o a t e d p r i n t e d b o a r d s is g i v e n in I E C 6 0 6 6 4 - 3 .



F o r p r in te d b o a r d s w h o s e o u te r s u r fa c e s a re to b e c o a te d w ith a s u ita b le c o a tin g m a te r ia l, th e m in im u m



s e p a ra tio n



d is ta n c e s



of



T a b le G .1 3



a p p ly



to



c o n d u c tiv e



p a rts



b e fo re



th e y



a re



c o a te d .



Double insulation



and



reinforced insulation



s h a ll p a s s



routine tests



fo r e le c tric s tre n g th o f



5 .4 .9 .2 .



E ith e r o n e



o r b o th



c o n d u c tiv e



p a rts



and



th e



e n tire



d is ta n c e s



o v e r th e



s u rfa c e



b e tw e e n



th e



c o n d u c tiv e p a rts s h a ll b e c o a te d .



T h e m in im u m



clearances



o f 5 .4 .2 a n d th e m in im u m



-



if t h e a b o v e c o n d it io n s a r e n o t m e t;



-



b e t w e e n a n y tw o u n c o a te d c o n d u c tiv e p a rts ; a n d



-



o v e r th e o u ts id e o f th e c o a tin g .



creepage distances



o f 5 .4 .3 s h a ll a p p ly :



Compliance is checked by inspection and measurement, taking Figure 0.11 and Figure 0.12 into account, and by the tests of G.13.6.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 Table G.13 - Minimum separation distances for coated printed boards



Peak of the working voltage up to and including



Basic insulation or supplementary insulation



Reinforced insulation



V peak



mm



mm



71 a



0,025



0,05



89 a



0,04



0,08



113a



0,063



0,125



141 a



0,1



177a



0,16



0,32



227 a



0,25



0,5



283 a



0,4



0,8



354 a



0,56



1,12



455 a



0,75



1,5



570



1,0



2,0



710



1,3



2,6



895



1,8



3,6



1 135



2,4



3,8



1 450



2,8



4,0



1 770



3,4



4,2



2 260



4,1



4,6



2 830



5,0



5,0



3 540



6,3



6,3



4 520



8,2



8,2



5 660



10



10



7 070



13



13



8 910



16



16



11 310



20



20



14 140



26



26



17 700



33



33



22 600



43



43



28 300



55



55



35 400



70



70



45 200



86



86



〇



,2



Linear interpolation may be used between the nearest two points, the calculated spacing being rounded up to the next higher 0,1 mm increment. a



The test of G.13.6 is not required.



G.13.4 The



Insulation between conductors on the same inner surface



re q u ire m e n ts



fo r in s u la tio n



on th e



sam e



in n e r la y e r o f a m u ltila y e r b o a rd



a re



s p e c ifie d



b e lo w .



On



an



in n e r s u rfa c e



o f a m u lti- la y e r p rin te d



b o a rd



(se e



F ig u re 0 .1 4 ) , th e



p a th



t w o c o n d u c t o r s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r a c e m e n t e d j o i n t in 5 . 4 . 4 . 5 .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



b e tw e e n



any



旧C



G.13.5 The



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Insulation between conductors on different surfaces



re q u ire m e n ts



fo r



in s u la tio n



on



th e



d iffe re n t



la y e rs



of a



m u ltila y e r



b o a rd



a re



s p e c ifie d



b e lo w .



basic insulation



For



t h e r e is n o t h i c k n e s s r e q u i r e m e n t .



Supplementary insulation s u rfa c e s co re



in



d o u b le -s id e d



p rin te d



or



reinforced insulation



s in g le -la y e r



b o a rd s , s h a ll e ith e r h a v e



p rin te d



b o a rd s,



a m in im u m



b e tw e e n



c o n d u c tiv e



m u lti-la y e r



th ic k n e s s



p rin te d



o f 0 ,4 m m



p a rts



on



b o a rd s



p ro v id e d



d iffe re n t



and



m e ta l



b y a s in g le



l a y e r o r c o n f o r m w i t h o n e o f t h e s p e c i f i c a t i o n s a n d p a s s t h e r e l e v a n t t e s t s in T a b l e G . 1 4 .



Table G.14 - Insulation in printed boards Specification of insulation



Type tests a



Routine tests for electric strength c



Two layers of sheet insulating material including pre-preg b



No



Yes



Three or more layers of sheet insulating material including pre-preg b



No



No



An insulation system with ceramic coating over a metallic substrate, cured at > 500 °C



No



Yes



An insulation system, with two or more coatings other than ceramic over a metallic substrate, cured at < 500 °C



Yes



Yes



NOTE 1



Pre-preg is the term used for a layer of glass cloth impregnated with a partially cured resin.



NOTE 2



For definition of ceramic, see IEC 60050-212:2010, 212-15-25.



a



Thermal conditioning of G.13.6.2 followed by the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1.



b



Layers are counted before curing.



c



Electric strength testing is carried out on the finished printed board.



G.13.6 G.13.6.1



Tests on coated printed boards Sample preparation and preliminary inspection



Three sample printed boards (or， for coated components in Clause G.14, two components and one board) identified as samples 7, 2 and 3 are required. Either actual boards or specially produced samples with representative coating and minimum separations may be used. Each sample board shall be representative of the minimum separations used, and coated. Each sample is subjected to the full sequence of manufacturing processes， including soldering and cleaning， to which it is normally subjected during equipment assembly. When visually inspected, the boards shall show no evidence of pinholes or bubbles in the coating or breakthrough of conductive tracks at corners.



G.13.6.2



Test method and compliance criteria



Sample 1 is subjected to the thermal cycling sequence of 5.4.1.5.3. Sample 2 is aged in a full draught oven at a temperature and for a time duration chosen from the graph shown in Figure G.3 using the temperature index line that corresponds to the maximum operating temperature of the coated board. The temperature of the oven is maintained at the specified temperature ± 2 °C. The temperature used to determine the temperature index line is the highest temperature on the board where safety is involved. When using Figure G.3, interpolation may be used between the nearest two temperature index lines. Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018 00 09



0O9Z



00 06



(LI)ESg Q)



■



6e leou 卜 q



.E a)



a>



M



■ j l l l l ll f l l r f l l f l



300



280



266~ 246~ ~ 226~ ~ 260------------- m ----------^60-------- H 0 ---------------- ^ 2 Q -------------W Oven temperature (°C) IEC



Figure G.3 - Thermal ageing time Samples 1 and 2 are then subjected to the humidity conditioning of 5.4.8 and shall withstand the electric strength test o f 5.4.9.1 between conductors. Sample board 3 is subjected to the following abrasion resistance test: Scratches are made across five pairs of conducting parts and the intervening separations at points where the separations will be subject to the maximum potential gradient during the tests. The scratches are made by means of a hardened steel pin， the end of which has the form of a cone having a tip angle of 40°， its tip being rounded and polished， with a radius of 0,25 mm 土 0,02 mm. Scratches are made by drawing the pin along the surface in a plane perpendicular to the conductor edges at a speed of 20 mm/s ± 5 mm/s as shown in Figure G.4. The pin is so loaded that the force exerted along its axis is 10 N 土 0,5 N. The scratches shall be at least 5 mm apart and at least 5 mm from the edge of the specimen.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C B



NOTE



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



C



The pin is in the plane ABCD that is perpendicular to the specimen under test.



Figure G.4 - Abrasion resistance test for coating layers After the test, the coating layer shall neither have loosened nor have been pierced. The coating shall withstand an electric strength test as specified in 5.4.9.1 between conductors. In the case of metal core printed boards, the substrate is one of the conductors. If mechanical stress or bending is applied to the board, additional tests to identify cracking may be needed (see IEC 60664-3).



G.14 Coatings on component terminals G.14.1



Requirements



T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r c o a t i n g s o n c o m p o n e n t t e r m i n a l s a n d t h e l ik e , w h e r e t h e c o a t i n g is u s e d to r e d u c e



clearances



C o a tin g s



m ay



clearances



be



and



o f T a b le G .1 3



creepage distances



and



used



over



e x te rn a l



creepage distances



a p p ly



to



th e



te rm in a tio n s



(se e



com ponent



a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .



of



c o m p o n e n ts



F ig u re 0 . 1 1 ) . T h e



b e fo re



c o a tin g ,



and



to



m in im u m th e



in c re a s e



s e p a ra tio n



c o a tin g



s h a ll



e ffe c tiv e d is ta n c e s



m eet



a ll



th e



r e q u ir e m e n ts o f G .1 3 .3 . T h e m e c h a n ic a l a r r a n g e m e n t a n d rig id ity o f th e te r m in a tio n s s h a ll b e a d e q u a te



to



e n s u re



th a t, d u rin g



n o rm a l



h a n d lin g ,



a s s e m b ly



in to



e q u ip m e n t a n d



subsequent



u s e , th e te r m in a t io n s w ill n o t b e s u b je c t to d e f o r m a t io n th a t w o u ld c r a c k th e c o a tin g o r r e d u c e th e



s e p a ra tio n



d is ta n c e s



b e tw e e n



c o n d u c tiv e



p a rts



b e lo w



th e



v a lu e s



in



T a b le G .1 3



(se e G .1 3 .3 ).



G.14.2



Test method and compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection taking into account Figure 0.11 and by applying the sequence of tests covered by G.13.6. These tests are carried out on a completed assembly including the component(s). The abrasion resistance test o f G.13.6.2 is carried out on a specially prepared sample printed board as described for sample 3 in G. 13.6.1, except that the separation between the conductive parts shall be representative o f the minimum separations and maximum potential gradients used in the assembly.



Copyright International Electrotechnical Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



G.15 Pressurized liquid filled components G.15.1



Requirements



A n L F C lo c a t e d in t e r n a l to th e e q u ip m e n t s h a ll c o m p ly w ith a ll o f th e f o llo w in g r e q u ir e m e n t s : -



flammable



o r c o n d u c tiv e



liq u id



s h a ll b e s to re d



in a c o n t a i n e r , a n d



th e



LFC



s h a ll c o m p ly



w ith th e te s ts o f G . 1 5 .2 .3 , G . 1 5 .2 .4 , G . 1 5 .2 .5 a n d G . 1 5 .2 .6 ; -



t he



liq u id



s h a ll



be



p ro v id e d



w ith



p ro te c tio n



in



a cco rd a n ce



w ith



C la u s e



7



(hazardous



substances); -



non-metallic



p a rts



of



th e



c o n ta in e r



s y s te m



s h a ll



w ith s ta n d



th e



te s ts



o f G . 1 5 . 2 .1



and



G .1 5 .2 .2 ; a n d -



t he



LFC



s h a ll



be



m o u n te d



w ith in



th e



e q u i p m e n t in s u c h



a w a y th a t th e



tu b in g



s h a ll



not



c o m e in to c o n ta c t w ith s h a r p e d g e s o r a n y o th e r s u r fa c e th a t c o u ld d a m a g e th e tu b in g a n d if th e



LFC



b u r s t s o r r e l i e v e s its p r e s s u r e , t h e liq u id c a n n o t d e f e a t a



safeguard.



T h e o r d e r o f t e s t s is n o t s p e c i f i e d . T h e t e s t s m a y b e p e r f o r m e d o n s e p a r a t e s a m p l e s , e x c e p t a f t e r t h e t e s t o f G . 1 5 . 2 . 2 , t h e t e s t o f G . 1 5 . 2 .1 is c o n d u c t e d .



G.15.2



Test methods and compliance criteria



G.15.2.1



Hydrostatic pressure test



Compliance is checked by evaluation o f the available data or by the following test. An LFC that is open to the atmosphere or is non-pressurised (for example, an ink cartridge) is not subjected to this test. One sample of the LFC is subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test for 2 min at room temperature and at a pressure that is the highest of the following: -



three times the maximum working pressure specified by the manufacturer at the maximum temperature measured during n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ; and



-



t wo times the maximum measured working pressure at the maximum temperature measured during application of the a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s of Clause B.3 and s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s of Clause BA.



G.15.2.2



Creep resistance test



Two samples of the LFC， of which one or more parts are made of non-metallic materials， shall be conditioned for 14 days at a temperature of 87 °C and placed in a full draft air-circulating oven. Following the conditioning, the system shall comply with the test of G.15.2.1 and nonmetallic parts shall show no sign of deterioration such as cracking and embrittlement.



G.15.2.3



Tubing and fittings compatibility test



Ten samples of the test specimens made o f the material used for the tubing and associated fittings of the LFC， of which one or more parts are made of non-metallic materials， shall be tested for tensile strength in accordance with the ISO 527 series. Five specimens shall be tested in the condition as received and the remaining five specimens after a conditioning test for 40 days in a water bath filled with the intended liquid and maintained at 38 °C. The internal pressure o f the assemblies is maintained at atmospheric pressure. The tensile strength after conditioning shall not be less than 60 % of the tensile strength before the tests. Alternatively, the five samples of the finished LFC assembly may be tested as far as the part under test is suitable for the tensile strength test. The samples of finished assembly filled with the intended liquid at the internal pressure maintained at atmospheric pressure is conditioned for 40 days at 38 °C in a full draft air-circulating oven.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



G.15.2.4



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Vibration test



One sample of the LFC, or the equipment containing the LFCt shall be fastened to the vibration generator in its normal position o f use, as specified in IEC 60068-2-6， by means of screws, clamps or straps round the component. The direction of vibration is vertical, and the severities are: -



duration:



30 min;



-



amplitude:



0,35 mm;



-



frequency range:



-



sweep rate:



G.15.2.5



10 Hz， 55 Hz， 10 Hz; approximately one octave per minute.



Thermal cycling test



One sample of the LFC is subjected to three cycles of conditioning for 7 h at a temperature that is 10 °C above the maximum temperature obtained during n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s o f Clause B.3 and s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s of Clause B.4f followed by room temperature for 1 h. NOTE



The LFC is not energized during the above test.



G.15.2.6



Force test



One sample of the LFC is subjected to the tests of Clause T.2 (10 N test applied to fittings a c c e s s ib le to a s k ille d p e rso n ) and Clause T.3 (30 N test applied to fittings a c c e s s ib le to an in s tru c te d p e rs o n or to an o rd in a ry p e rso n ).



G.15.3



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection and evaluation o f the available data or by the tests of G.15.2. During and after these tests, there shall be no rupture， no leaks and no loosening of any connection or part.



G.16 IC that includes a capacitor discharge function (ICX) G.16.1



Requirements



A n IC X a n d a n y a s s o c ia te d c o m p o n e n ts c ritic a l to th e d is c h a rg e fu n c tio n o f a c a p a c ito r (s u c h a s th e



mains



c a p a c ito r) to



an



accessible



p a rt



a re fa u lt te s te d



u n le s s o n e



o f th e fo llo w in g



c o n d i t i o n s is m e t : -



t he IC X w ith th e a s s o c ia te d c irc u itry a s p ro v id e d of



G .1 6 .2.



Any



im p u ls e



a tte n u a tin g



in t h e e q u i p m e n t c o m p l i e s w i t h t h e t e s t s



c o m p o n e n ts



(su ch



as



v a ris to rs



and



G DTs)



th a t



a tte n u a te th e im p u ls e to th e IC X a n d th e a s s o c ia te d c irc u itry a re d is c o n n e c te d ; o r -



t he



IC X



te s te d



s e p a ra te ly



c o m p lie s



w ith



th e



re q u ire m e n ts



of



G .1 6 .2.



If



d is c h a rg e



c o m p o n e n ts e x te rn a l to th e IC X a re n e c e s s a ry : •



t h e y s h a l l b e i n c l u d e d in t h e t e s t o f G . 1 6 . 2 , a n d



•



t h e d i s c h a r g e c o m p o n e n t s u s e d in t h e e q u i p m e n t s h a l l b e w i t h i n t h e r a n g e t e s t e d .



G.16.2



Tests



Where the ICX is tested by itself, the test set up shall be as recommended by the ICX manufacturer. -



humidi ty treatment o f 5.4.8 for 120 h.



- 1 0 0 positive impulses and 100 negative impulses between line and neutral using a capacitor with the smallest capacitance and a resistor with the smallest resistance specified by the manufacturer of the ICX. The time between any two impulses shall not be Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



less than 1 s. The impulse shall be as specified in circuit 2 of Table D. 1 with Uc equal to the transient voltage as determined in 5.4.2.3.2.2. The impulses are to be superimposed on the m ains voltage. The m ains voltage is taken as the maximum of:



-



•



the equipment rated voltage range when tested in the equipment， or



•



the maximum m ains voltage as specified by the ICX manufacturer when tested separately.



Application o f an AC m ains voltage that is 120 % of the rated voltage for 2,5 min.



- 1 0 000 cycles of the connection and disconnection of the mains. If the ICX is tested by itself， a capacitor with the largest capacitance and a resistor with the smallest resistance as specified by the manufacturer shall be used. The connection and disconnection cycle time shall not be less than 2 s. If any of the associated circuitry components other than those critical for the discharge function fails, it may be replaced with a new component.



G.16.3



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by evaluation of the available data or by conducting the above tests. The capacitor discharge test is conducted after the above tests, ensuring the ICX or the BUT provided with the ICX continues to provide the safeguard function. NOTE Evaluation of available data includes information of failure of any associated circuitry components that keeps the discharge mode in the on/stay mode.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Annex H (n o rm a tive )



Criteria for telephone ringing signals H_1



General



The



tw o



a lte rn a tiv e



d iffe re n t p a rts and



o f th e



m e th o d s w o rld .



M e th o d B o f th o s e



in



d e s c rib e d



M e th o d A



N o rth



in



th is



annex



re fle c t



is t y p i c a l o f a n a l o g u e



A m e ric a .



The



tw o



m e th o d s



s a tis fa c to ry



te le p h o n e



e x p e rie n c e



n e tw o rk s



r e s u l t in s t a n d a r d s



in



in



E u ro p e ,



o f e le c tric a l



s a fe ty th a t a re b ro a d ly e q u iv a le n t.



H.2



Method A



This method requires that the currents I TS1 and I TS2 flowing through a 5 000 Q resistor, between any two conductors or between one conductor and protective earth do not exceed the limits specified, as follows: a) For n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , I TS1, the current determined from the calculated or measured current for any single active ringing period t 1 (as defined in Figure H.1)3 does not exceed: -



for cadenced ringing (t1 < °°)9 the current given by the curve of Figure H.2 at tp



-



for continuous ringing (t^



=



°°)y 16 mA.



/ r S 7 , i n m A ，i s a s g i v e n b y



I TS1



/



丨



-



600



600



TS1=去 /pp



1200 - /|



X 2 v¥ +



600



for (t^\ P



< 6 0 0 m s)



for



(600 m s




m e e ts



500 Q,



th e



trip



no



m o n ito rin g



c rite ria



w ith



v o lta g e



R>



is



1 500 Q,



100



mA



p e a k -to -p e a k ,



m e e ts th e trip c rite ria re q u ire d . a



If,



m o n ito rin g



h o w e ve r, v o lta g e



s p e c ifie d th e



s h a ll



a in



trip p in g a ls o



be



p ro v id e d ; -



if t h e c u r r e n t t h r o u g h



a 500



c u rre n t th ro u g h a 1 5 0 0 •



o r g re a te r re s is to r e x c e e d s



100



mA



p e a k -to -p e a k ,



b u t th e



o r g r e a te r r e s is to r d o e s n o t e x c e e d th is v a lu e , e ith e r:



a t r i p p i n g d e v i c e s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d , m e e t i n g t h e t r i p c r i t e r i a s p e c i f i e d in F i g u r e H . 4 w i t h



R> •



Cl



Q



500



or



a m o n ito r in g v o lta g e s h a ll b e p r o v id e d .



NOTE 1 Tripping devices are, in general, current-sensitive and do not have a linear response, due to the resistance/current characteristics and time delay/response factor in their design. NOTE 2



In order to minimize testing time, a variable resistor box is normally used.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



( l m d



a



3



a)



NOTE 1 / is measured from the time of connection of the resistor NOTE 2



R



to the circuit.



The sloping part of the curve is defined as / = 100 / V7 •



Figure H.4 - Ringing voltage trip criteria H.3.2.2 A



s e rie s



Tripping device c u rre n t-s e n s itiv e trip p in g



d e v ic e



in t h e



rin g le a d



th a t w ill trip



rin g in g



a s s p e c ifie d



in



F ig u re H .4 .



H.3.2.3



Monitoring voltage



A v o lt a g e to e a r th o n th e tip o r rin g c o n d u c t o r w ith a m a g n itu d e o f a t le a s t 19 V p e a k , b u t n o t e x c e e d i n g 6 0 V D C , w h e n e v e r t h e r i n g i n g v o l t a g e is n o t p r e s e n t ( i d l e s t a t e ) .



Copyright Iniernatipnal Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎



旧C



2018



Annex I (in fo rm a tiv e )



Overvoltage categories (see IEC 60364-4-44) T h e c o n c e p t o f o v e rv o lta g e



c a te g o rie s



is u s e d f o r e q u i p m e n t e n e r g i z e d



d ire c tly fro m



th e A C



mains. The



la rg e s t



tra n s ie n t



v o lta g e



lik e ly



to



be



e x p e rie n c e d



mains i s k n o w n d o c u m e n t , m i n i m u m clearances f o r i n s u l a t i o n in o n t h e mains transient voltage. e q u ip m e n t



A c c o rd in g



mains The



c o n n e c te d



to



th e



IE C 6 0 6 6 4 -1 , th e v a lu e



o f th e



as



th e



power



in p u t



in te rfa c e



mains transient voltage. c o n n e c t e d t o t h e mains a r e



th e



c irc u its



mains transient voltage



In



of th is



based



is d e t e r m i n e d f r o m



th e



v o lta g e a n d th e O v e r v o lta g e C a te g o r y , I to IV (s e e T a b le 12 o f th is d o c u m e n t) .



o v e rv o lta g e



c o n n e c t e d to th e



The



to



at



o v e rv o lta g e



c a te g o ry



mains



th e re fo re



s h a ll



be



id e n tifie d



fo r



each



e q u ip m e n t



in te n d e d



to



be



m e a n in g



of



( s e e T a b l e 1 .1 ).



c a te g o rie s



have



a



p ro b a b ilis tic



im p lic a tio n



p h y s ic a l a tte n u a tio n o f th e tr a n s ie n t v o lta g e d o w n s tr e a m



ra th e r



th a n



th e



in t h e i n s t a l l a t i o n .



NOTE 1 This concept of overvoltage categories is used in IEC 60364-4-44:2007, section 443. NOTE 2 The term overvoltage category in this document is synonymous with impulse withstand category used in IEC 60364-4-44:2007, section 443. T h e t e r m o v e r v o l t a g e c a t e g o r y i s n o t u s e d i n c o n n e c t i o n w i t h D C p o w e r d i s t r i b u t i o n s y s t e m s in th is d o c u m e n t.



Table 1.1 - Overvoltage categories Overvoltage category



IV



III



II



I



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



Equipment and its point of connection to the AC mains Equipment that will be connected to the point where the mains supply enters the building



Equipment that will be an integral part of the building wiring



Examples of equipment •



Electricity meters



•



Communications ITE for remote electricity metering



•



Socket outlets, fuse panels and switch panels



•



Power monitoring equipment



•



Household appliances, portable tools, home electronics



•



Most ITE used in the building



•



ITE supplied via an external filter or a motor driven generator



Pluggable or permanently connected equipment that will be supplied from the building wiring Equipment that will be connected to a special mains in which measures have been taken to reduce transients



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Annex J (n o rm a tive )



Insulated winding wires for use without interleaved insulation J.1



General



R e q u ire m e n ts fo r w in d in g



supplementary



w ire s w h o s e



insulation,



double



in s u la tio n



m ay be used



insulation



or



to



basic insulation, insulation i n w o u n d



p ro v id e



reinforced



c o m p o n e n ts w it h o u t in te r le a v e d in s u la tio n a re s p e c ifie d b e lo w .



T h is a n n e x a p p lie s to : -



sol i d ro u n d w in d in g w ire s



h a v in g d ia m e te r s



b e tw e e n



0 ,0 1



mm



and



5 ,0 m m , a n d s tra n d e d



w in d in g w ire s w ith e q u iv a le n t c r o s s - s e c tio n a l a re a s ; a n d -



sol i d



sq u a re



and



s o lid



re c ta n g u la r



(fla tw is e



b e n d in g )



w in d in g



w ire s



w ith



c ro s s -s e c tio n a l



a re a s o f 0 ,0 3 m m 2 to 1 9 ,6 m m 2.



NOTE



See G.6.1 for the minimum number of overlapping layers.



J.2



Type tests



J.2.1



General



Unless otherwise specified, the winding wire shall pass thefollowing typ e tests, carried out at a temperature between 15 °C and 35 °C and a relative humidity between 45 % and 75 %.



J.2.2



Electric strength



J.2.2.1Solid round winding wires J.2.2.1.1



and strandedwinding wires



Wires with a nominal conductor diameter up to and including 0,1 mm



The test specimen is prepared according to 4.3 of IEC 60851-5:2008. The specimen is then subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, between the conductor of the wire and the cylinder, with a minimum test voltage of: - 3



kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or



- 1 , 5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .



J.2.2.1.2



Wires with a nominal conductor diameter over 0,1 mm up to and including 2,5 mm



The test specimen is prepared according to 4.4.1 of IEC 60851-5:2008. The specimen is then subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 with a test voltage that is not less than twice the appropriate voltage of 5.4.9.1, with a minimum of: - 6



kV RMS or 8,4 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or



- 3



kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .



J.2.2.1.3



Wires with a nominal conductor diameter over 2,5 mm



The test specimen is prepared according to 4.5.1 of IEC 60851-5:2008. The specimen is then subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 between the conductor o f the wire and the shot, with a minimum test voltage of: - 3 -



kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or 1,5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



J.2.2.2



Square or rectangular wires



The test specimen is prepared according to 4.7.1 of IEC 60851-5:2008 (single conductor surrounded by metal shots). The specimen is then subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, with a minimum test voltage of: - 3



kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or



- 1 , 5 kV RMS or 2t 1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .



J.2.3



Flexibility and adherence



Clause 5.1.1 (in Test 8) of IEC 60851-3:2009 shall be used， using the mandrel diameters of Table J.1. The test specimen is then examined in accordance with 5.1.1.4 of IEC 60851-3:2009, followed by the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 in this document, with minimum test voltage of: - 3 -



kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or 1,5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .



The test voltage is applied between the wire and the mandrel.



Table J.1 - Mandrel diameter



3



Nominal conductor diameter or thickness



Mandrel diameter



mm



mm



less than 0,35



4,0



土



0,2



less than 0,50



6,0



士



0,2



less than 0,75



8,0



土



0,2



less than 2,50



10,0±0,2



less than 5,00



Four times the conductor diameter or thickness a



In accordance with IEC 60317-43.



The tension to be applied to the wire during winding on the mandrel is calculated from the wire diameter to be equivalent to 118 MPa ± 10 % (118 N/mm2 ± 10 %). Edgewise bending on the smaller dimension side (width) is not required for rectangular wire. For mandrel winding test of the square and rectangular wire， two adjacent turns do not need to contact each other.



J.2.4



Heat shock



The test specimen shall be prepared in accordance with 5.1.1 (in Test 8) of IEC 60851-3:2009， followed by the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1 in this document， with a minimum test voltage of: - 3



kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or



- 1 ，5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n . The test voltage is applied between the wire and the mandrel. The oven temperature is the relevant temperature of the thermal class of insulation in Table J.2. The mandrel diameter and tension applied to the wire during winding on the mandrel are as specified in J.2.3. The electric strength test is conducted at room temperature after removal from the oven.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Table J.2 - Oven temperature Thermal class



Oven temperature 0C



Class 105 (A)



Class 120 (E)



Class 130 (B)



Class 155 (F)



Class 180 (H)



Class 200 (N)



Class 220 (R)



Class 250



200



215



225



250



275



295



315



345



_



Oven temperatures shall be maintained within ± 5° of the specified temperature. The classes are related to the classification of electrical insulating materials and EISs in accordance with IEC 60085. The assigned letter designations are given in parentheses.



Edgewise bending on the smaller dimension side (width) is not required for rectangular wire.



J.2.5



Retention of electric strength after bending



Five specimens are prepared as in J.2.3 and tested as follows. Each specimen is removed from the mandrel， placed in a container and positioned so that it can be surrounded by at least 5 mm of metal shot. The ends of the conductor in the specimen shall be sufficiently long to avoid flash over. The shot shall be not more than 2 mm in diameter and shall consist of balls of stainless steel， nickel or nickel plated iron. The shot is gently poured into the container until the specimen under test is covered by at least 5 mm of shot. The shot shall be cleaned periodically with a suitable solvent. NOTE The above test procedure is reproduced from 4.6.1 c) of IEC 60851-5:1996, now withdrawn. It is not included in the fourth edition (2008) of that standard.



The specimen shall be subjected to the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, with a minimum test voltage of: - 3



kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or



- 1 ，5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n . The mandrel diameter and tension applied to the wire during winding on the mandrel are as in Table 丄 1.



J.3



Testing during manufacturing



J.3.1



General



The wire manufacturer shall subject the wire to a spark test during manufacture according to IEC 62230 as specified in J.3.2 and J.3.3.



J.3.2



Spark test



The test voltage for the spark test shall be in accordance with the electric strength test of 5.4.9.1, with a minimum of: - 3 -



kV RMS or 4,2 kV peak for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n ; or 1,5 kV RMS or 2,1 kV peak for b a s ic in s u la tio n or s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n .



J.3.3



Sampling test



The s a m p lin g te s t shall be conducted according to the suitable test specified in J.2.2.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Annex K (n o rm a tive )



Safety interlocks K.1



General



K.1.1



General requirements



Safety interlocks so u rce s



and



s h a ll



c la s s 3



be



so



e n e rg y



d e s ig n e d



so u rce s



p o s itio n th a t th o s e p a rts b e c o m e



Safety interlocks



s h a ll



s o u r c e s w ill b e r e m o v e d



accessible



be



so



b e fo re



th a t,



w ill



be



accessible



d e s ig n e d th e



fo r



ordinary person,



an



re m o ve d



b e fo re



th e



co ve r,



th e



c la s s 2



d o o r,



e tc .



e n e rg y is



in



a



a s a c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e .



th a t, fo r an



c o v e r, d o o r, e tc .



instructed person, is in a p o s i t i o n



th e



c la s s 3 e n e rg y



th a t th is



p a rt b e c o m e s



a s a c la s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e o r le s s .



T h e in te r lo c k s h a ll e ith e r: -



n e c e s s i t a t e p re v io u s d e -e n e rg iz a tio n o f s u c h p a rts ; o r



-



a u t o m a t i c a l l y in itia te d is c o n n e c t io n o f th e s u p p ly to s u c h p a r ts , a n d to r e d u c e to a:



If



c la s s



•



c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e w ith in 2 s fo r a n



re d u c tio n



safeguard -



1 e n e rg y



•



of



th e



s o u rc e w ith in 2 s fo r a n



e n e rg y



so u rce



c la s s



ordinary person,



and



instructed person.



ta k e s



lo n g e r



th a n



2



s,



th e n



instructional



an



s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 , e x c e p t t h a t :



element



1a



s h a ll



be



p la c e d



on



th e



d o o r,



c o v e r o r o th e r



p a rt th a t



in itia te s



th e



in te rlo c k



a c t i o n a n d is o p e n e d o r r e m o v e d t o g a in a c c e s s ; a n d -



e l e m e n t 3 is o p t i o n a l .



T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



-



instructional safeguard



e l e m e n t 1a:



s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



IE C 6 0 4 1 7 - 6 0 5 7 ( 2 0 1 1 -0 5 ) fo r m o v in g p a rts o r



A



IE C 6 0 4 1 7 -5 0 4 1



(2 0 0 2 -1 0 ) fo r h o t p a rts



-



e l e m e n t 2:



n o t s p e c ifie d



-



e l e m e n t 3:



n o t s p e c ifie d



-



e l e m e n t 4:



th e tim e w h e n th e e n e r g y s o u r c e w ill b e r e d u c e d to th e r e q u ir e d c la s s



K.1.2



Test method and compliance criteria



The energy level of class 2 or class 3 energy source parts are monitored. Compliance is checked by inspection, measurement and use o f the straight unjointed version o f the test probe according to Annex V.



K.2 The



Components of the safety interlock safeguard mechanism c o m p o n e n ts



safeguards,



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



c o m p ris in g



th e



safety



interlock



m e c h a n is m



a n d s h a ll c o m p ly w ith A n n e x G o r K .7 .1 w h e r e a p p lic a b le .



s h a ll



be



c o n s id e re d



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Compliance is checked in accordance with Annex G or K.7.1 and by inspection.



K.3



Inadvertent change of operating mode



A safety interlock s h a l l F i g u r e V.2, a s a p p l i c a b l e p o in t b e in g



c o n tro lle d



not



be



by



m eans



of



p ro b e s



s p e c ifie d



in



F ig u re



V.1



or



s o a s to c h a n g e th e e n e r g y c la s s w ith in th e a r e a , s p a c e o r a c c e s s



to a c la s s



e n e rg y s o u rc e o r a c la s s



o p e ra b le



3



3



e n e rg y



instructed person, ordinary person.



so u rce



e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r an



fo r an



o r to a c la s s



2



Compliance is checked in accordance with Annex V and by inspection.



K.4



Interlock safeguard override



A safety interlock



m ay



be



o v e rrid d e n



by a



skilled person.



The



safety interlock



o v e rrid e



s y s te m : -



s hal l r e q u ir e a n in te n tio n a l e ffo r t to o p e r a t e ; a n d



-



shal l



re se t



a u to m a tic a lly



to



n o rm a l o p e ra tio n u n le s s th e -



if lo c a t e d



in a n



a re a



person, s h a l l n o t b e a tool f o r o p e r a t i o n .



n o rm a l



o p e ra tio n



skilled person



accessible



to a n



when



s e rv ic in g



is



c o m p le te ,



or



p re ve n t



h a s c a rrie d o u t re s to ra tio n ; a n d



ordinary person



o r,



if a p p li c a b le ,



an



instructed



o p e r a b l e b y m e a n s o f p r o b e s s p e c i f i e d in A n n e x V , a n d s h a l l r e q u i r e



Compliance is checked in accordance with Annex V and by inspection.



K.5 K.5.1 In



th e



Fail-safe Requirement event



of



c o n tro lle d b y th e -



r ev e r t to a c la s s 1 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r a n an



-



single fault condition safety interlock s h a l l : any



instructed person;



b e l o c k e d in t h e



in



th e



safety interlock



ordinary person



s y s te m ,



th e



space



o r a c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e fo r



or



normal operating condition



a n d c o m p ly w ith a p p lic a b le r e q u ir e m e n t s fo r



a c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e .



K.5.2



Test method and compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by introduction component faults, one at a time. S in g le each fault, the space controlled by the requirements for s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s



of electrical， electro-mechanical， and mechanical fa u lt c o n d itio n s are described in Clause B.4. For s a fe ty in te rlo c k shall comply with the applicable for the respective energy source.



The components and parts of the s a fe ty in te rlo c k used as a s a fe g u a rd mechanism are not subjected to s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s if they comply with K.2 or K.6 as applicable. Fixed separation distances in s a fe ty in te rlo c k circuits (for example, those associated with printed boards) are not subjected to simulated s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s if the separation distances comply with K.7.1.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



K.6



Mechanically operated safety interlocks



K.6.1



Endurance requirement



M o v i n g m e c h a n i c a l p a r t s in m e c h a n i c a l a n d e l e c t r o m e c h a n i c a l



safety interlock



s y s te m s s h a ll



h a ve a d e q u a te e n d u ra n c e .



K.6.2



Test method and compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection o f the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, available data and, if necessary， by cycling the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system through 10 000 operating cycles. In the event of any fault during or after the 10 000 operating cycles in the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, the space controlled by the s a fe ty in te rlo c k shall: 一



revert to a class 1 energy source for an o rd in a ry p e rs o n or a class 2 energy source for an in s tru c te d p e rs o n ; or



-



be locked in the n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n and comply with applicable requirements for a class 3 energy source.



NOTE The above test is conducted to check the endurance of moving parts other than those in safety interlock systems, switches and relays. Safety interlock systems, switches and relays, if any, are subject to Annex G or K.7.1.



K.7



Interlock circuit isolation



K.7.1



Separation distances for contact gaps and interlock circuit elements



S e p a ra tio n



d is ta n c e s



fo r c o n ta c t



gaps



and



in te rlo c k



c irc u it e le m e n ts



s h a ll



c o m p ly



w ith



th e



fo llo w in g re q u ire m e n ts a s a p p lic a b le . a)



mains,



If t h e s w i t c h o r r e l a y d i s c o n n e c t s a c i r c u i t c o n d u c t o r in a c i r c u i t c o n n e c t e d t o t h e



th e s e p a r a tio n d is ta n c e s fo r c o n ta c t g a p s a n d th e ir re la te d c ir c u its s h a ll b e n o t le s s th a n th a t fo r a b)



disconnect device



L).



(se e A n n e x



If t h e s w i t c h o r r e l a y is in a c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m c o n ta c t



gaps



insulation



s h a ll



be



not



le s s



th a n



th e



mains,



th e



re le v a n t



th e s e p a ra tio n



m in im u m



clearance



d is ta n c e s fo r



v a lu e



fo r



basic



fo r is o la tio n o f c la s s 2 e n e rg y s o u rc e s . In te rlo c k c irc u it e le m e n ts , th e fa ilu re o f



safety basic insulation. T h e



w h i c h c a n d e f e a t t h e i n t e r l o c k s y s t e m , s u c h a s t h e f i x e d s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e s in a



interlock c i r c u i t , s h a l l c o m p l y temporary overvoltage i s n o t



w ith



th e



ta k e n



re q u ire m e n ts



o f 5 .4 .2 fo r



in to a c c o u n t to d e t e r m in e th e v o lt a g e to b e u s e d



T a b l e 1 0 a n d T a b l e 11 u n l e s s t h e c i r c u i t is s u b j e c t t o a c)



I f t h e s w i t c h o r r e l a y i s in a c i r c u i t i s o l a t e d f r o m c o n ta c t g a p s s h a ll b e n o t le s s th a n th e r e le v a n t



insulation



temporary overvoltage.



mains, t h e s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e s f o r m i n i m u m clearance v a l u e f o r reinforced th e



fo r is o la tio n o f c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s . In te rlo c k c irc u it e le m e n ts , th e fa ilu re o f



w h i c h c a n d e f e a t t h e i n t e r l o c k s y s t e m , s u c h a s t h e f i x e d s e p a r a t i o n d i s t a n c e s in a



safety



interlock



except



c irc u it, s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e q u ir e m e n t o f 5 .4 .2 fo r



t h a t if a life t h r e a t e n i n g d is ta n c e s



h a za rd



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith



overvoltage



is n o t t a k e n



is i n v o l v e d



th e



in to



in t h e i n t e r l o c k e d



re q u ire m e n t fo r



an



a lte rn a tiv e



c o n ta c ts



in



th e



to



a ),



b)



o ff p o s itio n



basic insulation



or



and



c),



th e



reinforced insulation,



th e



s p a c e , th e fix e d s e p a ra tio n



th e v o lta g e



to



be



The



used



temporary in T a b l e 1 0



temporary overvoltage.



s e p a ra tio n



s h a ll w ith s ta n d



basic insulation,



reinforced insulation.



a c c o u n t to d e t e r m in e



a n d T a b l e 11 u n l e s s t h e c i r c u i t i s s u b j e c t t o a As



in



d is ta n c e s



e le c tric



fo r



s tre n g th



th e



c o n ta c t



te s t o f 5 .4 .9 .1



gap



b e tw e e n



re q u ire d



fo r



a s a p p lic a b le . T h e c o n ta c t g a p s h a ll c o m p ly w ith



th e a b o v e r e q u ir e m e n t s b e fo r e a n d a f t e r th e t e s t o f K . 7 . 2.



T h e a ltitu d e m u ltip lic a tio n f a c t o r o f T a b le 16 d o e s n o t n e e d to b e ta k e n in to a c c o u n t.



The



s e p a ra tio n



d is ta n c e s fo r th e c o n ta c t g a p



of



th e s w itc h



o r r e la y s h a ll c o m p ly w ith



K .7 .3



a n d K . 7 . 4 in a d d i t i o n t o t h e a b o v e r e q u i r e m e n t s , u n l e s s t h e s w i t c h o r r e l a y c o m p l i e s w i t h G . 1 and



G .2



re s p e c tiv e ly .



Copyright International Eteclrotechmcal Commission



The



e n d u ra n ce



te s t



c o n d itio n



s h a ll



re p re se n t



th e



m a x im u m



normal



旧C



operating condition



w ith in



th e



e q u ip m e n t



w ith



re sp e ct



to



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



v o lta g e



and



cu rre n t



th a t



th e



c o n ta c ts in te rru p t.



Two



in d e p e n d e n t



in te rlo c k



s y s te m s ,



a lt e r n a t iv e to th e p r o v is io n o f



K.7.2



in



s e rie s ,



u s in g



basic insulation



m ay



be



used



as



an



reinforced insulation.



Overload test



The contact of a switch or relay in the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system is subjected to an overload test consisting of 50 cycles of operation at the rate of 6 to 10 cycles per minute, making and breaking 150 % of the current imposed in the application, except that where a switch or relay contact switches a motor load, the test is conducted with the rotor o f the motor in a locked condition. After the test， the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, including the switch or relay， shall still be functional.



K.7.3



Endurance test



The contact of a switch or relay in the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system is subjected to an endurance test, making and breaking 100 % of the current imposed in the application at a rate o f 6 to 10 cycles of operation per minute. A higher rate of cycling may be used if requested by the manufacturer. For reed switches used in a s a fe ty in te rlo c k system in ES1 or ES2, the test is 100 000 operating cycles. For other switches and relays in a s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, the test is 10 000 operating cycles. After the test， the s a fe ty in te rlo c k system, including the switch or relay， shall still be functional.



K.7.4



Electric strength test



Except for reed switches in ES1 or ES2， an electric strength test as specified in 5.4.9.1 is applied between the contacts after the tests o f K.7.3. If the contact is in a circuit connected to the m ains, the test voltage is as specified for re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n . If the contact is in a circuit isolated from the m ains, the test voltage is as specified for b a s ic in s u la tio n in a circuit connected to the m ains.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Annex L (n o rm a tive )



Disconnect devices L.1



General requirements



A disconnect device s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d disconnect device i n t e r r u p t s t h e n e u t r a l



to



d is c o n n e c t th e



e q u ip m e n t fro m



th e



s u p p ly .



If a



c o n d u c t o r , it s h a l l s i m u l t a n e o u s l y i n t e r r u p t a ll p h a s e



c o n d u c to rs .



A



disconnect device



m a y be:



-



t h e p lu g o n th e p o w e r s u p p ly c o r d ; o r



-



a n a p p lia n c e c o u p le r; o r



-



a n is o la tin g s w itc h ; o r



-



a c irc u it b re a k e r; o r



-



a n y e q u iv a le n t m e a n s fo r d is c o n n e c tio n .



F o r e q u ip m e n t O v e rv o lta g e



in te n d e d



C a te g o ry



disconnect device O v e rv o lta g e



II



to or



be



p o w e re d



fro m



O v e rv o lta g e



an



AC



C a te g o ry



mains



III，o r



fro m



disconnect device



IV , I E C 6 0 9 4 7 - 1



s h a ll a p p ly . W h e n



-



a



s e p a ra tio n



-



a



For



C a te g o ry



th a t



is



ES3,



mains



I, a



t h a t is



in t h e e q u i p m e n t , t h e



s h a ll b e c o n n e c te d a s c lo s e ly a s p r a c tic a b le to th e in c o m in g s u p p ly .



mains



disconnect device s h a l l h a v e a clearance f o r basic insulation; a n d



L.2



mains



DC



in c o rp o ra te d



F o r e q u ip m e n t in te n d e d to b e p o w e r e d fr o m a D C



o n ly to a n



a



O v e rv o lta g e



s h a ll h a v e a c o n ta c t s e p a r a tio n o f a t le a s t 3 m m . F o r a n A C



C a te g o ry



re m o v a b le



t h a t is



fu s e



m ay



be



used



instructed person



as



o r to a



c o n ta c t



t h a t is n o t a t E S 3 f at



disconnect device, skilled person.



a



le a s t



equal



p ro v id e d



to



th e



m in im u m



accessible



t h a t it is



Permanently connected equipment permanently connected equipment



e q u ip m e n t,



u n le s s



th e



e q u ip m e n t



a p p ro p ria te



disconnect device



th e



disconnect device



is a c c o m p a n i e d



s h a ll b e in c o r p o r a te d



b y in s ta lla tio n



in s tru c tio n s



External disconnect devices will not necessarily be supplied with the equipment.



L.3



Parts that remain energized on



th e



s u p p ly



s id e



disconnect device b y skilled persons.



w h e n th e c o n ta c t



disconnect device



of a



th a t an



s h a ll b e p r o v id e d a s p a rt o f th e b u ild in g in s ta lla tio n .



NOTE



P a rts



s ta tin g



in t h e



in t h e



e q u ip m e n t,



th a t



re m a in



e n e rg iz e d



is s w i t c h e d o ff, s h a ll b e g u a r d e d to r e d u c e t h e r is k o f a c c i d e n t a l



A s a n a l t e r n a t i v e , i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d in t h e s e r v i c e m a n u a l .



L.4 For



Single-phase equipment s in g le -p h a s e



s im u lta n e o u s ly , e x c e p t th a t a p h a se c o n d u c to r w h e n o n ly a s in g le p o le



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



disconnect device s h a l l s i n g l e - p o l e disconnect device c a n



e q u ip m e n t,



th e



d is c o n n e c t



b o th



b e u s e d to d is c o n n e c t th e



it i s p o s s i b l e t o r e l y o n t h e i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f t h e n e u t r a l in t h e



disconnect device



p o le s



mains.



If



i s p r o v i d e d in t h e e q u i p m e n t , i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l b e g i v e n



旧C fo r th e p ro v is io n o f a n a d d itio n a l tw o -p o le



disconnect device



t h e e q u i p m e n t i s u s e d w h e r e i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f t h e n e u t r a l in t h e



EXAMPLE



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



in t h e b u i l d i n g i n s t a l l a t i o n w h e n



mains



is n o t p o s s i b l e .



Cases where a two-pole disconnect device is required are:



on equipment supplied from an IT power system;



一



on pluggable equipment supplied through a reversible appliance coupler or a reversible plug (unless the appliance coupler or plug itself is used as the disconnect device;



一



on equipment supplied from a socket-outlet with indeterminate polarity.



一



L.5



Three-phase equipment



F o r th re e -p h a s e e q u ip m e n t, th e c o n d u c to rs



of



th e



s u p p ly .



disconnect device



For



s y s te m , th e



disconnect device



c o n d u c to rs



and



e q u ip m e n t, th e



th e



n e u tra l



in s ta lla tio n



e q u ip m e n t s h a ll



be



c o n d u c to r.



s h a ll d i s c o n n e c t s i m u l t a n e o u s l y a ll p h a s e



re q u irin g



a



a fo u r-p o le If



th is



n e u tra l



d e v ic e



fo u r-p o le



in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll s p e c ify th e



c o n n e c tio n



and



s h a ll



d e v ic e



is



to



an



IT



power



d i s c o n n e c t a ll



phase



not



in



p ro v id e d



n e e d f o r its p r o v is io n



as



th e



p a rt o f th e



b u ild in g in s ta lla tio n .



L.6



Switches as disconnect devices



W h e re



disconnect device



th e



is



a



s w itc h



in c o rp o ra te d



in



th e



e q u ip m e n t,



th e



on



and



o ff



p o s i t i o n s s h a l l b e m a r k e d in a c c o r d a n c e w i t h F . 3 . 5 . 2 .



L.7



Plugs as disconnect devices



W h e re



a p lu g



on th e



in s tru c tio n s



s h a ll



accessible.



For



p o w e r s u p p ly c o rd



s ta te



th a t



p lu g g a b le



fo r



is u s e d



p lu g g a b le



e q u ip m e n t



e q u ip m e n t,



in te n d e d



fo r



in s ta lla tio n in s tr u c tio n s s h a ll b e m a d e a v a ila b le to th e



L.8



disconnect device,



a s th e



th e



s o c k e t-o u tle t



in s ta lla tio n



by



an



th e



in s ta lla tio n



s h a ll



be



e a s ily



ordinary person,



th e



ordinary person.



Multiple power sources



W h e re



a



u n it



re c e iv e s



v o lta g e s /fre q u e n c ie s



safeguard



in



or



power as



a cco rd a n ce



fro m



re d u n d a n t



w ith



C la u s e



m o re



th a n



p o w e r),



F.5



near



th e re each



one



so u rce



s h a ll



be



a



(fo r



e x a m p le ,



p ro m in e n t



disconnect device



d iffe re n t



instructional



g iv in g



a d e q u a te



disconnect device,



a s lo n g a s



i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t h e r e m o v a l o f a ll p o w e r f r o m t h e u n it .



One



instructional safeguard



m a y be u s e d fo r m o re th a n o n e



it i s c l e a r l y v i s i b l e f r o m t h e d i s c o n n e c t p o i n t s .



T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



instructional safeguard



s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



-



e l e m e n t 2:



“ C a u tio n ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t, a n d “ S h o c k h a z a rd ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t



-



e l e m e n t 3:



o p tio n a l



-



element 4:



“ D i s c o n n e c t a ll p o w e r s o u r c e s ” o r e q u i v a l e n t t e x t



E q u ip m e n t in c o r p o r a tin g a n in te rn a l U P S s h a ll h a v e p r o v is io n s fo r r e lia b ly d is a b lin g th e U P S a n d d is c o n n e c t i n g its o u t p u t p r io r to s e r v ic in g t h e e q u ip m e n t . I n s t r u c t io n s f o r d is c o n n e c t i o n o f



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎



旧C



th e



UPS



p ro v id e d .



s h a ll



be



2018 The



in te rn a l



e n e rg y



so u rce



a p p ro p ria te ly a n d g u a rd e d a g a in s t a c c id e n ta l c o n ta c t b y a



L.9



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



of



th e



UPS



skilled person.



s h a ll



be



m a rke d



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Annex M (n o rm a tive )



Equipment containing batteries and their protection circuits M.1



General requirements



T h is



annex



batteries p a rts



of



in t h e th is



in s ta lla tio n an



p ro v id e s



a d d itio n a l



re q u ire m e n ts



safeguards



e q u ip m e n t m a y re q u ire



d o c u m e n t.



o f e x te rn a l



ordinary person



or



T h is



annex



does



batteries.



fo r e q u ip m e n t th a t c o n ta in s not



th a t h a v e



cover



not been



re q u ire m e n ts



batteries o r battery m a i n t e n a n c e a n instructed person.



fo r



a d d re sse d



of



in o t h e r



batteries，



e x te rn a l



battery



o th e r th a n



Use



re p la c e m e n t by



battery s a f e t y s t a n d a r d c o n t a i n s e q u i v a l e n t r e q u i r e m e n t s t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s in t h i s a n n e x , a battery in c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t h a t battery s t a n d a r d is c o n s i d e r e d t o f u l f i l t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s a n n e x , a n d t e s t s t h a t a r e p a r t o f t h e battery s a f e t y W h e re a



s ta n d a rd n e e d n o t b e re p e a te d u n d e r th is a n n e x .



For



consum er



g ra d e ,



n o n -re c h a rg e a b le



c a rb o n -z in c



or



a lk a lin e



batteries, M.3



and



M.10



a p p ly .



M.2



Safety of batteries and their cells



M.2.1



Requirements



Batteries



a n d th e ir



cells



s h a ll c o m p ly w ith th e r e le v a n t IE C s ta n d a r d s fo r



batteries



a s lis te d



b e lo w .



IE C 6 0 0 8 6 -4 ,



IE C 6 0 0 8 6 -5 ,



IE C 6 1 0 5 6 -2 ,



IE C 6 1 4 2 7



IE C 6 0 8 9 6 -1 1 ,



(a ll



p a rts ),



IE C 6 0 8 9 6 -2 1 ,



IE C T S



61430,



IE C 6 0 8 9 6 - 2 2 ,



IE C 6 1 4 3 4 ,



IE C 6 1 0 5 6 -1



IE C 6 1 9 5 9 ,



IE C 6 2 1 3 3



and (a ll



p a rts ), IE C 6 2 1 3 3 -1 , IE C 6 2 1 3 3 -2 , IE C 6 2 2 8 1 , IE C 6 2 4 8 5 -2 a n d IE C 6 2 6 1 9 .



NOTE



M.2.2



O th e r



battery



s a f e t y s t a n d a r d s a r e u n d e r d e v e l o p m e n t , a n d a r e i n t e n d e d t o b e i n c l u d e d in f u t u r e .



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by inspection or evaluation based on data provided by the manufacturer.



M.3 M.3.1



Protection circuits for batteries provided within the equipment Requirements



P ro te c tio n c irc u its o r c o n s tru c tio n fo r a n in te g ra l p a rt o f th e



-



battery



batteries



p ro v id e d w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t a n d th a t a re n o t



s h a ll b e s o d e s ig n e d th a t:



safeguards a r e e f f e c t i v e d u r i n g normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions, single fault conditions, i n s t a l l a t i o n c o n d i t i o n s a n d t r a n s p o r t a t i o n c o n d i t i o n s ; and



-



t he



o u tp u t



re c h a rg e a b le -



f or



c h a ra c te ris tic s



battery;



n o n -re c h a rg e a b le



of



a



battery



c h a rg in g



c irc u it



a re



c o m p a tib le



w ith



its



and



batteries,



d is c h a rg in g



at



a



ra te



e x c e e d in g



th e



battery



m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s a n d u n i n t e n t i o n a l c h a r g i n g a r e p r e v e n t e d ; a n d -



f or



re c h a rg e a b le



batteries,



c h a rg in g



and



d is c h a rg in g



at



a



ra te



e x c e e d in g



m a n u f a c t u r e r ’s r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s , a n d r e v e r s e d c h a r g i n g a r e p r e v e n t e d ; a n d



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



th e



battery



旧C



-



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



batteries in hand-held equipment， direct plug-in equipment a n d transportable equipment t h a t a r e r e p l a c e a b l e b y a n ordinary person s h a l l b e i n h e r e n t l y p r o t e c t e d t o a v o id c re a tin g a c la s s 2 e n e r g y s o u r c e o r a c la s s 3 e n e r g y s o u rc e ; a n d



-



f or



batteries



th a t



a re



re p la c e a b le



by



an



ordinary person,



re v e rs e



p o la rity



in s ta lla tio n



s h a ll b e p r e v e n t e d if t h is c o u ld c r e a t e a c l a s s 2 o r c l a s s 3 e n e r g y s o u r c e ( s e e a ls o B . 3 . 6 ) .



NOTE



R e v e rs e d c h a rg in g o f a re c h a rg e a b le



a id in g th e d is c h a rg e o f th e



M.3.2



battery



o c c u r s w h e n t h e p o l a r i t y o f th e c h a r g i n g c i r c u i t is r e v e r s e d ,



battery.



Test method



Protection circuits for b a tte rie s are checked by inspection and by evaluation of the data provided by the equipment manufacturer and b a tte ry manufacturer for charging and discharging rates. When appropriate data is not available， compliance is checked by test. However， b a tte rie s that are inherently safe for the conditions given are not tested under those conditions. Consumer grade ， non-rechargeable carbon-zinc or alkaline b a tte rie s are considered safe under short-circuiting conditions and therefore are not tested for discharge; nor are such b a tte rie ste sted forle aka ge un de rstorag econ ditio ns. The b a tte ry used for the following tests is either a new non-rechargeable b a tte ry or a fully charged rechargeable b a tte ry as provided with the equipment， or recommended by the manufacturer for use with the equipment. The test for b a tte ry protection circuits in the equipment may be performed using a b a tte ry simulator replacing the b a tte ry itself. The temperature test is conducted in a temperature controlled chamber. A control signal simulating the actual signal from the temperature sensor in the b a tte ry may be used in order to perform the test. -



Overcharging of a rechargeable b a tte ry. The b a tte ry is charged while briefly subjected to the simulation of any s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n that is likely to occur in the charging circuit and that results in overcharging of the b a tte ry. To minimize testing time, the failure is chosen that causes the worst-case overcharging condition. The b a tte ry is then charged for a single period of 7h with the simulated failure in place.



-



Excessive discharging. The b a tte ry is subjected to rapid discharge by open-circuiting or short-circuiting any current limiting or voltage limiting component in the load circuit of the b a tte ry under test (one component at a time).



-



Unintentional charging of a non-rechargeable b a tte ry. The b a tte ry is charged while briefly subjected to the simulation of any single component failure that is likely to occur in the circuit and that would result in unintentional charging of the b a tte ry. To minimize testing time, the failure is chosen that causes the highest charging current. The b a tte ry is then charged for a single period of 7 h with the simulated failure in place.



Where more than one c e ll is provided in a b a tte ry, all c e lls shall be tested as a unit. NOTE



Some



o f th e



te s ts



s p e c ifie d



can



be



h a za rd o u s



to



th e



m e a s u r e s to p r o te c t s u c h p e r s o n s a g a in s t p o s s ib le c h e m ic a l o r



persons



explosion



p e rfo rm in g



th e



te s ts .



Use



a p p ro p ria te



h aza rd s.



For equipment where the b a tte ry can be removed from the equipment by an o rd in a ry p e rso n , the following additional test applies: -



Reverse charging of a rechargeable b a tte ry. Check whether the equipment containing a b a tte ry has such construction design that the b a tte ry may be placed into the equipment in the manner causing reverse charging. Also it will be checked if the electrical connection is made. If a reverse charging is judged possible by the inspection， the following test is applied. However, when relevant IEC b a tte ry standards cover this requirement, the test is considered to be performed. The b a tte ry is installed in the reverse orientation and then the charging circuit is subject to simulation o f any single component failure. To minimize testing time， the failure is chosen that causes the highest reverse charging current. The b a tte ry is then reverse charged for a single period of 7 h with the simulated failure in place.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



M.3.3



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Compliance criteria



These tests shall not result in any o f the following: -



chemical leakage caused by cracking, rupturing or bursting of the b a tte ry jacket, if such leakage could adversely affect a sa fe g u a rd ; or



-



spillage of liquid from any pressure relief device in the b a tte ry, unless such spillage is contained by the equipment without risk of damage to a s a fe g u a rd or harm to an o rd in a ry p e rs o n or an in s tru c te d p e rs o n ; or



-



e x p l o s i o n of the b a tte ry, if such e x p lo s io n could result in injury to an o rd in a ry p e rs o n or an in s tru c te d p e rs o n ; or



-



emission of flame or expulsion of molten metal to the outside of the equipment e n clo su re .



Throughout the tests: -



the b a tte ry temperature shall not exceed the allowable temperature of the b a tte ry as specified by the b a tte ry manufacturer; and



-



the maximum current drawn from the b a tte ry shall be within the range of the specification of the b a tte ry.



M.4



Additional safeguards for equipment containing a portable secondary lithium battery



M.4.1



General



E q u ip m e n t



d e s ig n e d



to



be



o p e ra te d



secondary lithium batteries M.4.2



w h ile



in c o rp o ra tin g



one



or



m o re



p o rta b le



s e a le d



a r e s u b j e c t t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s in t h i s c l a u s e .



Charging safeguards



M.4.2.1



Requirements



normal operating conditions, abnormal operating conditions o r single fault conditions t h e c h a r g i n g v o l t a g e p e r secondary lithium battery a n d t h e c h a r g i n g c u r r e n t p e r secondary lithium battery s h a l l n o t e x c e e d t h e maximum specified charging voltage a n d maximum specified charging current. Under



Under



-



abnormal operating conditions,



s to p



c h a rg in g



when



th e



charging temperature; -



lim it



th e



cu rre n t



to



th e



te m p e ra tu re



battery of



th e



c h a r g in g c ir c u it s h a ll:



battery



exceeds



th e



highest specified



and v a lu e



t e m p e r a t u r e is l o w e r t h a n t h e



M.4.2.2



th e



battery m a n u f a c t u r e r lowest specified charging temperature. s p e c ifie d



by



th e



when



th e



battery



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by measuring the charging voltage, the charging current and the temperature of each individual c e ll of the s e c o n d a ry lith iu m b a tte ry under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s and s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s . The c e ll temperature shall be measured at the points specified by the b a tte ry manufacturer. S in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s that may affect the charging voltage or charging current or the temperature shall be applied in accordance with Clause BA. NOTE 1



F o r p o tte d a s s e m b lie s , t h e r m o c o u p le s c o u ld b e a tta c h e d to th e c e ll s u r fa c e b e fo r e p o ttin g .



A higher charging voltage than the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g v o lta g e or a higher charging current than the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g cu rre n t, that occurs ju st after the introduction of an a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n or a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n ， may be



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



ignored if the operation o f a protective device or circuitry, provided in addition to the normal regulating circuitry, prevents an unsafe condition of the b a tte ry. Where appropriate, for the purpose o f the measurement， the b a tte ry may be replaced by a circuit simulating the b a tte ry load. The charging voltage shall be measured when the s e c o n d a ry lith iu m b a tte ry becomes fully charged. The charging current shall be measured during the entire charging cycle up to the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g voltage.



During and after the test， the following applies: -



The charging voltage shall not exceed the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g voltage.



-



The charging current shall not exceed the m a xim u m s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g cu rre n t.



-



The charging of the b a tte ry shall stop when the temperature of the b a tte ry exceeds the h ig h e s t s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g tem perature.



-



The b a tte ry charging circuit shall limit the current to the value specified by the b a tte ry manufacturer when the b a tte ry temperature is lower than the lo w e s t s p e c ifie d c h a rg in g tem perature.



In addition， for equipment where the b a tte ry can be removed from the equipment by an o rd in a ry p e rso n , compliance is checked by measuring the charging voltage and the charging current， and by evaluating the temperature control function of the equipment under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s , a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s and s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s . All parameters controlled by the protection circuit for the b a tte ry shall be within those specified in the relevant IEC b a tte ry standard, and shall cover the following: -



the maximum current drawn from the b a tte ry shall be within the range of the specification of the b a tte ry ; and



-



throughout the tests, the b a tte ry temperature shall not exceed the allowable temperature of the b a tte ry as specified by the b a tte ry manufacturer.



NOTE 2



M.4.3



T h e c o n tro llin g e le m e n ts a re v o lta g e , c u rre n t, a n d te m p e ra tu re .



Fire enclosure



Secondary lithium batteries s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a fire enclosure a c c o r d i n g t o 6 . 4 . 8 . fire enclosure m a y b e t h a t o f t h e secondary lithium battery i t s e l f , o f t h e cell o r c o m b i n a t i o n o f cells o r t h a t o f t h e e q u i p m e n t c o n t a i n i n g t h e secondary lithium battery. E q u ip m e n t w ith



batteries



a re e x e m p t fro m th e a b o v e r e q u ir e m e n t if th e e q u ip m e n t u s e s a



The of



a



cell



th a t c o m p lie s w ith P S 1 .



Compliance is checked by inspection of the relevant material or by evaluation of the s e c o n d a ry lith iu m b a tte ry data sheet.



M.4.4



Drop test of equipment containing a secondary lithium battery



M.4.4.1



General



direct plug-in equipment, hand-held equipment a n d transportable equipment t h a t c o n t a i n a secondary lithium battery a r e s p e c i f i e d b e l o w . T h e s e t e s t s a r e s p e c i f i e d t o v e r i f y t h a t m e c h a n i c a l s h o c k w i l l n o t c o m p r o m i s e a safeguard w i t h i n t h e battery The



te s ts



fo r



o r th e e q u ip m e n t.



M.4.4.2



Preparation and procedure for the drop test



The drop test is conducted in the following order: Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



-



St ep 1: drop of the equipment containing a b a tte ry as specified in M.4.4.3.



-



St ep 2: check the charge and discharge function of the dropped equipment as specified in M.4.4.4.



-



St ep 3: conduct a charge and discharge cycle test of the dropped b a tte ry as specified in M.4.4.5.



As a preparation o f the drop test, two b a tte rie s are fully charged at the same time under the same charging conditions. The open circuit voltages of both b a tte rie s are measured to confirm the initial voltages are the same. One b a tte ry is used for the drop test and the other is used as a reference.



M.4.4.3



Drop



The equipment with a fully charged b a tte ry installed shall be subjected to the drop test of Clause T.7. After the drop testf the b a tte ry is removed from the equipment. The open circuit voltages of the dropped b a tte ry and the reference (undropped) b a tte ry are periodically monitored during the following 24 hour period. The voltage difference shall not exceed 5 %.



M.4.4.4



Check of the charge / discharge function



The charging/discharging circuit functions (charging- control voltage, charging control current, and temperature control) are checked to determine that they continue to operate and that all s a fe g u a rd s are effective. A dummy b a tte ry or appropriate measurement tool that represents the b a tte ry characteristics may be used for this examination in order to differentiate between b a tte ry damage and equipment malfunctions. If the charge/discharge function does not operate, the test is terminated, continuation with step 3 is not necessary and compliance is determined by M.4.4.6.



M.4.4.5



Charge / discharge cycle test



If the dropped equipment is still functioning, the dropped equipment with the dropped b a tte ry installed is subject to three complete discharge and charge cycles under n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s .



M.4.4.6



Compliance criteria



During the tests, fire or e x p lo s io n o f the b a tte ry shall not occur unless an appropriate s a fe g u a rd is provided that contains the e x p lo s io n or fire. If venting occurs, any electrolyte leakage shall not defeat a safeg uard. When a protection circuitry for charging or discharging in the equipment or the b a tte ry detects an abnormality in the b a tte ry and stops charging or discharging, the result is considered to be acceptable.



M.5



Risk of burn due to short-circuit during carrying



M.5.1 Battery person



Requirements te rm in a ls or



c o n d u c tiv e



an



s h a ll



be



p ro te c te d



instructed person



te rm in a ls



(su ch



as



in



th e



fro m d u rin g



th e



p o s s ib le



th e



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



c a rry in g



u s e r ’s c a r r y in g



m e ta l o b je c ts , s u c h a s c lip s , k e y s a n d n e c k la c e s .



b u rn



bag)



of



th a t m a y o c c u r to a



due



battery to



a



w ith



an



ordinary



exposed



b a re



s h o rt-c irc u it c a u s e d



by



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



M.5.2



Test method and compliance criteria



If the b a tte ry is designed to be carried with bare conductive terminals, the b a tte ry shall comply with the test of P.2.3. The compliance criteria of M. 3.3 apply.



M.6



Safeguards against short-circuits



M.6.1 The



Requirements



e le c tric



e n e rg y



u n c o n tro lle d fa ilu re ,



of



cells



in



or



batteries



m ay



be



as



a



m e ta l



e n e rg y ,



heat



explosion



m e ta l, s p a rk s ,



c o n ta m in a n t and



b rid g in g



p re ssu re



th e



g e n e ra te d



in s u la tio n . by



th e



in



an



in a d v e rte n t



As



h ig h



a



re s u lt,



cu rre n t



th e



can



and



safeguard



c o n s id e ra b le



p ro d u ce



m o lte n



a n d v a p o ris a tio n o f e le c tro ly te .



T o a d d r e s s e x te r n a l fa u lts , th e m a in c o n n e c t io n s fr o m th e -



re le a s e d



m a n n e r d u e to e x te rn a l s h o rt-c irc u itin g o f th e te rm in a ls o r a n in te rn a l



such



am ount



s to re d



battery



te r m in a ls s h a ll e ith e r:



b e p r o v id e d w ith a s u ff ic ie n t o v e r c u r r e n t p r o te c tiv e d e v ic e to p r e v e n t a n y a c c id e n ta l s h o r tc irc u it in d u c in g c o n d itio n s a s m e n tio n e d a b o v e ; o r



-



battery



t he



c o n n e c tio n s



u p to th e fir s t o v e r c u r r e n t p r o te c tiv e d e v ic e s h a ll b e c o n s tr u c te d



s o t h a t a s h o r t - c i r c u i t is n o t l i k e l y t o o c c u r a n d c o n n e c t i o n s s h a ll b e d e s i g n e d to w i t h s t a n d th e e le c tr o m a g n e tic fo rc e s e x p e rie n c e d d u rin g a s h o rt-c irc u it. NOTE 1



tools



W h e re te rm in a ls a n d c o n d u c to rs a re n o t in s u la te d , b y d e s ig n o r fo r m a in te n a n c e p u rp o s e s , o n ly in s u la te d



a r e t o b e u s e d in t h a t a r e a .



U n le s s in te rn a l fa u lt te s tin g h a s b e e n c o n d u c te d o n th e



battery NOTE



2



Each



cell



a s p a rt o f c o m p lia n c e w ith a n IE C



s t a n d a r d in M . 2 . 1 , t h e i n t e r n a l f a u l t t e s t i n g a s d e s c r i b e d b e l o w i s r e q u i r e d ,



N o t a ll



cell



battery



in



in tro d u c in g



s t a n d a r d s in



M.2.1



battery s h a l l explosion o r



a



an



be



c o n ta in a s im ila r in te rn a l fa u lt te s t.



fa u lte d



fire .



to



W h e re



e n s u re



cell



a



is



th a t



cell



each



in c o rp o ra te d



v e n ts



in to



a



e q u ip m e n t, s u ffic ie n t s p a c in g s h a ll b e a llo w e d fo r th e p r o p e r v e n t o p e r a tio n o f



M.6.2



s a fe ly



w ith o u t



battery o r e a c h cell.



th e



Compliance criteria



For external faults， compliance may be checked by inspection. The sample shall not explode or emit molten material at any time during any of the tests.



M.7



Risk of explosion from lead acid and NiCd batteries



M.7.1 W h e re



Ventilation preventing an explosive gas concentration batteries



in a c o n f i n e d



a re p ro v id e d w ith in a n e q u ip m e n t s u c h th a t e m itte d g a s e s m a y c o n c e n tra te



e q u ip m e n t s p a c e , th e



battery



c o n s tr u c tio n , a ir flo w



th a t th e a tm o s p h e r e w ith in th e e q u ip m e n t d o e s n o t re a c h a n



In a c o m p a r t m e n t c o n t a i n i n g lo c a l c o n c e n t r a t io n s c o n ta c to rs



and



a c h ie v e d ,



fo r



b o th a



o f h yd ro g e n



s w itc h e s e x a m p le ,



c lo s e by



th e



to



battery



and use



c o m p a r tm e n ts o r a d e q u a te v e n tila tio n .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



of



explosive



s h a ll b e s u c h



c o n c e n tra tio n .



a n d e le c tr ic a l c o m p o n e n t s , th e ris k o f ig n itio n o f



oxygen



battery



o r v e n tila tio n



b y a d ja c e n t o p e ra tio n a l



v e n ts



fu lly



o r v a lv e s , s h a ll



e n c lo s e d



p a rts ,



such



as



b e c o n tro lle d . T h is



s h a ll



be



c o m p o n e n ts ,



a rc in g



s e p a ra tio n



of



battery



旧C T h e v e n tila tio n



battery



th e



s y s te m



cases



If v e n t i l a t i o n o u ts id e



a ir,



tu b e s th e y



s h a ll b e s o c o n s tr u c te d th a t a n y p o te n tia l fa u lt, in c lu d in g



d u e to o v e rh e a tin g



explosive



s y s te m fa ilin g to v e n t



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



a re



used



s h a ll



not



ru n a w a y , d o e s



n o t r e s u l t in t h e



v e n tila tio n



explosive



c o n d u c tin g



th e



o n ly



m eans



gas



fro m



o f e lim in a tin g



battery



th e



th e



b u ild -u p



of



cases gas



batteries



If



or



m e c h a n ic a l



p ro v id e d u n d e r



Enclosures



to



th e



fro m



th e



enclosure



c a b in e t. A n in d e p e n d e n t m e a n s o f n a tu ra l v e n tila tio n th a t a d e q u a te ly v e n tila te s th e c o n ta in in g th e



of



gasses.



fo r



be



o r th e rm a l



d is to rtio n



s h a ll b e p r o v id e d .



fo rc e d -a ir



v e n tila tio n



is



used,



a d e q u a te



v e n tila tio n



s h a ll



c o n tin u e



to



be



single fault conditions.



w ith



m e c h a n ic a l



or



e le c tro m e c h a n ic a l



d a m p e rs



s h a ll



c o n tin u e



to



p ro v id e



a d e q u a t e v e n t i l a t i o n w h e n t h e d a m p e r is in t h e c l o s e d p o s i t i o n .



C l a u s e M . 7 is a p p l i e d f o r o p e n t y p e



batteries



w ith a m e c h a n is m



If



be



it



can



c a lc u la te d w ith



shown M .7 .



c irc u itry



th a t



T a b le M .1 , o r if th e s h a ll



be c o n d u c te d



s p e c ifie d one



of



th e



U n le s s



and th e



it



th e



v e n tila tio n can



be



ch a rg e



v e n tila tio n



S e a le d ty p e



te s ts



d e m o n s tra te d c o n ta in s



c o n d itio n



M .7 .3



enclosure



th e



under



cannot



m a n u fa c tu re r. in



of



is



c o m p lia n t



w ith



th e



a c c o r d i n g t o M . 7 . 2 , t h e e q u i p m e n t is in c o m p l i a n c e



v o lta g e



fo r b o o s t c h a rg e by th e



c a p a b ility



(O)



battery enclosure



a p p ro v e d



batteries.



a n d v a lv e re g u la te d ty p e



o f r e d u c in g g a s a re c o n s id e r e d to c o m p ly w ith th is r e q u ir e m e n t.



re q u ire d v e n tila tio n a ir flo w



C la u s e



c h a rg in g



th a t



batteries



a



exceed



single fault condition



th e



n o in te rn a l c h a rg in g



fo r th e



battery



ty p e s



If t h e v e n t i l a t i o n



s h a ll



v a lu e s



be



c o n d u c te d



fo r



flo a t



c a p a b ility , and



in



c h a rg in g



th e in



c a lc u la tio n s



m a x im u m



c a p a c ity



c a n n o t be a d e q u a te ly s h o w n , in



o rd e r



to



e n s u re



a d e q u a te



v e n tila tio n .



The



h yd ro g e n



a n d s u p p o rte d



g e n e ra tio n



battery



(flo w



ra te fo r te s tin g ) fo r th e



ty p e s s h a ll b e c a lc u la te d



m a x im u m



s u p p o rte d



u s in g d a ta fro m th e



battery



battery



c a p a c ity



m a n u fa c tu re r, or



t h e v a l u e s f o r / flo a t a n d / b o o s t w i t h s u p p o r t i n g d a t a a s g i v e n i n T a b l e M . 1 o r b y t h e f o l l o w i n g :



〇 m ^B a tt = ° » 4 5 x 1 °



w it h / g a s , C rt, a n d



M.7.2



n as



x ^g a s x C r txw



d e s c r i b e d in M . 7 . 2 .



Test method and compliance criteria



The purpose of ventilating a b a tte ry location or e n c lo s u re is to maintain the hydrogen concentration below the e x p lo s iv e 4 %vol hydrogen LEL threshold. The hydrogen gas concentration shall not exceed 1 % by volume if the mixture is in proximity to an ignition source, and not exceed 2 % by volume if the mixture is not in proximity to an ignition source. NOTE 1



W hen a



cell



Under standard P = 1 013 hPa: - 1



r e a c h e s its f u lly c h a r g e d s ta te , w a t e r e le c t r o l y s i s o c c u r s a c c o r d i n g to t h e F a r a d a y 's la w .



conditions



of



normal



temperature



and



pressure



where



T = 273 K，



Ah decomposes H20 into 0,42 I H2 + 0,21 I 0 2,



-



decomposition of 1 cm3 (1 g) H 2 〇 requires 3 Ah,



-



26, 8 Ah decomposes H20 into 1 g H2 + 8 g 0 2



When the charging operation is stopped， the emission of gas from the c e lls can be regarded as having come to an end 1 h after having switched off the charging current.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018



- 295 -



The minimum air flow rate for ventilation of a b a tte ry location or compartment shall be calculated by the following formula: 0=vxqxsxn



x / g a s x Crt x 1 0



rrvV h



where: Q



is the ventilation air flow in m3/h;



v



is the necessary dilution of hydrogen. (100-4)% ^ 4%~



q



0,45



x



10 - 3



m 3/A h l



generated hydrogen at 20 °Cf



s



= 5, general safety factor;



n



is the number of c e lls ; is the current producing gas in mA / Ah rated capacity for the float charge current 1float 〇 r the boost charge current I boost;



gas



is the capacity



C rt NOTE



2



C1 〇



is t h e



C 5 is th e



v x ^ x s



with



10 5



C 10



for lead acid c e lls (Ah) or capacity C5 for NiCd c e lls (Ah)



h ra te w ith c u r r e n t



/ 1〇



f o r le a d a c id



h ra te w ith c u r r e n t / 5 fo r N iC d



= 0 , 0 5 「m 3 / A h L



cells:



cells:



= 1,80 V/cell



( A h ) t o L rfjna|



(A h ) to



Ufinal = 1,00 V/cell



at



20



at



20



°C.



°C.



the ventilation air flow calculation formula is:



Q=



0 ,0 5



x nx



/ g a s x C rt x 1 0



•3



m 3/ h



The current Igas in mA producing gas is determined by one o f the following formulas. ’ gas =



/g a s =



’ float x / g



’ b o o s tx



x



,g x



’s



[m A /A h ]



〇厂



[m A /A h ]



where: / gas



is the current producing gas in mA / Ah rated capacity for the float charge current 】float 〇 r the boost charge current I boost;



’ flo a t



is the float charge current under fully charged condition at a defined float charge voltage at 20 °C;



/boost



is the boost charge current under fully charged condition at a defined boost charge voltage at 20 °C;



/g



is the gas emission factor， proportion of current at fully charged state producing hydrogen (see T a b l e



/s



is the safety factor, to accommodate faulty c e lls in a b a tte ry and an aged b a tte ry (see T a b l e M . 1 j .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



T a b l e M . 1 - V a l u e s f o r c u r r e n t / f l o a t a n d / b o o s t ，f a c t o r s / g a n d / s ， a n d v o lta g e s



Parameter



NiCd batteries vented cells b



1



0 ,2



1



5



5



5



2 ,2 3



2 ,2 7



1,40



1



1



1



5



1



5



2 ,4 0



2 ,4 0



1 ,5 5



4



8



10



20



8



50



and a geing)



F lo a t c h a rg e v o lta g e



Uboosi Lead-acid batteries VRLA cells



G a s e m i s s i o n s a f e t y f a c t o r / s (in cl. 10 %



cells



and



Lead-acid batteries vented cells Sb < 3 % a



G a s e m is s io n f a c t o r / g



fa ulty



Uuoat



Uu〇a{ 0



V/cell T y p i c a l f l o a t c h a r g e c u r r e n t / f 丨〇at A /A h C u r r e n t ( f l o a t ) / gas m A /A h (u n d e r flo a t c h a rg e c o n d itio n s re le v a n t fo r a ir flo w c a lc u la tio n ) B o o s t c h a r g e v o l t a g e " b〇〇st c



V/cell T y p i c a l b o o s t c h a r g e c u r r e n t / b〇〇st m A /A h C u r r e n t ( b o o s t ) / gas m A /A h (u n d e r b o o s t c h a rg e c o n d itio n s re le v a n t fo r a ir flo w c a lc u la tio n ) a



F o r an a n tim o n y (S b ) c o n te n t h ig h e r th a n 3 % , th e c u rre n t u s e d fo r c a lc u la tio n s s h a ll be d o u b le d .



b



F o r re c o m b in a tio n ty p e N iC d



c



F l o a t a n d b o o s t c h a r g e v o l t a g e c a n v a r y w i t h t h e s p e c i f i c g r a v i t y o f e l e c t r o l y t e in l e a d - a c i d



cells



c o n s u lt th e m a n u fa c tu re r.



cells.



T h e v a l u e s o f f l o a t a n d b o o s t c h a r g e c u r r e n t i n c r e a s e w i t h t e m p e r a t u r e . T h e c o n s e q u e n c e s o f a n i n c r e a s e in t e m p e r a t u r e , u p t o a m a x i m u m o f 4 0 ° C , h a v e b e e n a c c o m m o d a t e d in t h e v a l u e s in T a b l e M . 1 . In c a s e o f u s e o f g a s r e c o m b i n a t i o n v e n t p l u g s , t h e g a s p r o d u c i n g c u r r e n t ^gas t h e v a l u e s f o r v e n t e d c e l l s c a n b e r e d u c e d to 50 % o f th e v a lu e s fo r v e n te d



cells.



T h e v e n t i l a t i o n a i r v o l u m e r e q u i r e m e n t s , f o r e x a m p l e , f o r t w o 4 8 V s t r i n g s o f V R L A cells in t h e s a m e battery c a b in e t a n d e a c h w ith 120 A h ra te d C 1〇 c a p a c ity a m o u n t, u n d e r flo a t a n d u n d e r b o o s t c h a rg e s e rv ic e c o n d itio n s a re : 一



s e rv ic e w ith flo a t c h a r g e c o n d itio n o n ly :



Q



= 0 , 0 5 x 2 4 x 1 x 1 2 0 x 0 , 0 0 1 = 0 , 1 4 4 m 3/ h p e r s t r i n g o r 2 8 8 l / h



to ta l; 一



s e rv ic e w ith b o o s t c h a r g e c o n d itio n :



p = 0 , 0 5 x 2 4 x 8 x 1 2 0 x 〇 ,〇 〇 1 = 1 , 1 5 m 3/ h p e r s t r i n g o r 2 3 0 0 l / h



to ta l.



For recombinant NiCd cells， or for lead-acid b a tte ry types where the gassing rate in volts per cell per hour (per ampere-hour) is published by the manufacturer, it is permitted to determine the minimum air flow rate O using the measure gas emissions at boost-charge volts per cell charging， unless it can be verified that the output voltage of the charging circuit cannot exceed the float voltage under any conditions required by this document. The equation for O becomes: Q



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



= v x s x n x



r



(x



Cn )



x



1〇^3 (m3/h)



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



where: v



=



24, the necessary dilution of hydrogen:



s



= 5, general safety factor;



n



is the number of c e lls ;



r



is the outgassing rate at a given voltage per cell per hour (may be per ampere-hour rating);



C rt



is the capacity C10 for lead acid c e lls (Ah) or capacity C5 for NiCd c e lls (Ah).



NOTE



C r( i s n o t r e q u i r e d f o r d e t e r m i n i n g



Q



i f t h e g a s s i n g r a t e /• i s p r o v i d e d i n m l / ( h - c e / / ) o r t h e e q u i v a l e n t .



For the purpose of calculating the area of ventilation openings required for natural ventilation, the air velocity is assumed to be 0 ,1 m/s. Alternately, the following equation can be used: A = 28 x Q



where: Q is the ventilation rate of fresh air (m3/h); A



is the free area of openings in air inlet and outlet (cm2).



M.7.3



Ventilation tests



M.7.3.1



General



The test shall be performed with the EUT stabilized at 25 °C. If forced air ventilation is used, it shall be run under s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s . Movable mechanical or electro-mechanical dampers shall be closed or in the unpowered position. The air movement around the cabinet shall be minimized， or the EUT shall be placed in a cabinet to prevent air movement around the EUT during testing.



M .7.3.2



Ventilation test - alternative 1



Samples of the atmosphere within the b a tte ry compartment are to be taken after 7 h of operation. The samples are to be taken at locations where the greatest concentration of hydrogen gas is likely. The hydrogen gas concentration shall not exceed 1 % by volume if the mixture is in proximity to an ignition source, and not exceed 2 % by volume if the mixture is not in proximity to an ignition source. See M.3.2 for evaluating the overcharging of a rechargeable b a tte ry.



M .7.3.3



Ventilation test - alternative 2



The performance of the EUT b a tte ry ventilation system shall be verified by conducting a test utilizing hydrogen， or helium to represent hydrogen. The test will determine if the EUT is capable o f ventilating the calculated hydrogen generation rate. Step 1



Helium or hydrogen sensors (depending on the chosen gas) shall be placed in all cabinet compartments that are subjected to hydrogen evolution from the b a tte ry compartment.



Step 2



Helium or hydrogen shall be injected into the b a tte ry compartment until a concentration of 1 % or 2 % as required below is reached. The rate of helium or hydrogen injection required to maintain the concentration under steady state conditions shall be reported. Steady state shall be defined as a maximum variation of ± 0,25 % over a period of 1 h.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



Step 3



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Compare the rate of helium or hydrogen obtained in Step 2 with the calculated hydrogen generation rate in M. 7.1.



If the calculated hydrogen generation rate for the maximum b a tte ry capacity as specified by the manufacturer exceeds the amount of helium or hydrogen that was being injected by more than 1 〇/〇 by volume if the mixture is in proximity to an ignition source, or exceeds 2 〇/〇 by volume if the mixture is not in proximity to an ignition source, the EUT compartment ventilation system is not in compliance with this requirement. If the calculated hydrogen generation rate, for the maximum b a tte ry capacity as specified by the manufacturer, is less than or equal to the rate o f helium or hydrogen that was being injected, the EUT compartment ventilation system is in compliance with this requirement.



M.7.3.4



Ventilation test - alternative 3



The test shall be performed as described in M .7 .3 .1 with a hydrogen or helium source used to inject a flow rate described in M.7.1. Samples of the atmosphere within the b a tte ry compartment or other area where hydrogen may accumulate is continuously monitored for 7 h or until the levels are stable. Steady state shall be defined as a maximum variation of ±0,25 〇/〇 over a period of 1 h. The gas monitored in this manner is to be returned to the EUT under test. The hydrogen gas concentration shall not exceed 1 % by volume if the mixture is in proximity to an ignition source, and not exceed 2 % by volume if the mixture is not in proximity to an ignition source. The sampling method in the original test may also be used, however, if hydrogen is used, care should be taken to establish that safe levels exist in the EUT prior to injecting for 7 h. NOTE



T h i s m e t h o d is p a r t i c u l a r l y s u it e d to e v a l u a t i n g m ix e d o r c o m p l e x s y s t e m s o r v e n t i l a t i o n p a t t e r n s .



M.7.4



Marking requirement



U n le s s



batteries



th e



a re



e ith e r w ith



th e



s u p p o rte d



a p p ro ve d



by



th e



p ro v id e d



battery



w ith



ty p e s



th e and



e q u ip m e n t, th e



m a n u f a c t u r e r ”， p r o v i d e d



th e



m a x im u m



th a t



th is



c o m p a rtm e n t



c a p a c itie s



s h a ll



or “Use



in fo rm a tio n



is



be



o n ly



m a rke d b a tte rie s



s p e c ifie d



in



th e



in s ta lla tio n /s e rv ic e in s tru c tio n s .



M.8



Protection against internal ignition from external spark sources of batteries with aqueous electrolyte



M.8.1 The



General re q u ire m e n ts



s p e c ifie d



b e lo w



a p p ly



to



re c h a rg e a b le



batteries



p ro v id in g



a



v e n tin g



s y s te m .



NOTE



F o r e x a m p le , a



battery



u s e d in a U P S .



T h e le v e l o f a ir v e n tila tio n ra te s h a ll e n s u r e th a t a ris k o f t h e h y d r o g e n c o n t e n t i n a i r b e l o w 1 % vol a t t h e



The



u s e o f a n e f f e c t i v e f l a m e a r r e s t e r in t h e



explosion



p r o p a g a tin g in to th e



M.8 i s batteries w i t h



C la u s e



M.8.2 M.8.2.1



PIS. battery



v e n tin g s y s te m



batteries



a n d v a lv e re g u la te d ty p e



w ill p r e v e n t a n e x te r n a l



batteries.



S e a le d ty p e



o f r e d u c in g g a s a re c o n s id e r e d to c o m p ly w ith th is r e q u ir e m e n t.



Test method General



The test shall be carried out according to IEC 60896-21:2004, 6.4.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



d o e s n o t e x is t b y k e e p in g



battery.



a p p lie d fo r o p e n ty p e a m e c h a n is m



explosion



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



NOTE 1 w ith in



T h i s t e s t is d e s i g n e d to r e v e a l t h e p r o t e c t i o n a f f o r d e d b y t h e v a l v e u n it a g a i n s t t h e ig n it io n o f th e g a s e s



cell



a



by an



e x te rn a l ig n itio n s o u rc e . D u rin g th is te s t, u s e



explosion



e q u ip m e n t fro m



p ro p e r p re c a u tio n s to



safeguard



persons and



and burns.



A minimum distance d extending through air shall be maintained within which a maximum surface temperature of 300 °C shall not be exceeded (no flames ， sparks， arcs or glowing devices). NOTE 2



d to



W h e n c a lc u la tin g th e m in im u m d is ta n c e



p ro te c t a g a in s t



explosion



in c l o s e p r o x i m i t y t o t h e s o u r c e o f



r e l e a s e o f a cell o r battery, t h e d i l u t i o n o f explosive g a s e s i s n o t a l w a y s e n s u r e d . T h e d i s p e r s i o n o f g a s d e p e n d s o n th e g a s re le a s e ra te a n d th e v e n tila tio n c h a ra c te ris tic s c lo s e to th e s o u rc e o f re le a s e .



explosive



The minimum distance d can be estimated by calculating the dimensions of a hypothetical volume Vz o f potentially e x p lo s iv e gas around the source of release, outside of which the concentration of hydrogen is below the safe concentration of the LEL.



d



= 2 8 ,8



X



^ / gas



[m m ]



x



where: is the current producing gas [mA / Ah];



’ gas



is the rated capacity [Ah]. NOTE 3



T h e re q u ire d d is ta n c e



d



ca n be a c h ie v e d b y th e u s e o f a p a rtitio n w a ll b e tw e e n th e



battery



a n d s p a rk in g



d e v ic e .



Where b a tte rie s form an integral part of a power supply system (for example， in a UPS system)， the distance d， where d is the minimum distance (clearance) between the ventile of the b a tte ry and the electronic equipment that may exhibit flames, sparks, arcs or glowing devices (maximum surface temperature 300 °C)f may be reduced according to the equipment manufacturer’s calculations or measurements. The level of air ventilation rate should ensure that a risk of e x p lo s io n does not exist by keeping the hydrogen content in air below 1 %voj plus a margin at the PIS. M .8 .2 .2 The



E s tim a tio n o f h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e



th e o re tic a l



m in im u m



v e n tila tio n



flo w



ra te



Vz to



d ilu te



th e



fla m m a b le



gas



(h yd ro g e n )



to



a



c o n c e n tra tio n b e lo w th e L E L c a n b e c a lc u la te d b y m e a n s o f th e fo rm u la :



dV_\ dt



= "



㈤



x



也



k



x



x LEL



J _ 293



w h e re :



d V /d i^ n



is



clG/dt m a x



is th e m a x i m u m g a s r e l e a s e r a t e ( k g / s ) ;



LEL



i s 4 % v 0 | f o r h y d r o g e n ( k g / m 3 );



k



is t h e f a c t o r a p p l i e d t o t h e L E L ;



T



is t h e a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e in k e l v i n ( 2 9 3 K = 2 0 ° C ) .



The



v o lu m e



t h e m i n i m u m v o l u m e t r i c f l o w r a t e o f f r e s h a i r r e q u i r e d t o d i l u t e t h e g a s ( m 3/ s ) ;



Vz



re p re s e n ts th e



v o lu m e



k



= 0 , 2 5 is c h o s e n f o r d i l u t i o n o f h y d r o g e n g a s ;



o v e r w h ic h



th e



m ean



c o n c e n tra tio n



o f fla m m a b le



gas



w ill b e 0 ,2 5 tim e s th e L E L . T h is m e a n s th a t a t th e e x t r e m it ie s o f th e h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e , th e c o n c e n t r a t io n o f g a s w ill b e s ig n if ic a n t ly b e lo w th e L E L ( fo r e x a m p le , th e h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e w h e r e t h e c o n c e n t r a t i o n is a b o v e L E L w o u l d b e l e s s t h a n



NOTE



S e e B . 4 . 2 . 2 in I E C 6 0 0 7 9 - 1 0 : 2 0 0 2 f o r t h e c a l c u l a t i o n o f L E L .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



Vz).



旧C M .8 .2 .3 W ith



a



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



C o rre c tio n fa c to rs g iv e n



n u m b e r o f a ir c h a n g e s



h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e



Vz



p e r u n it tim e ,



c,



re la te d



to



th e



g e n e ra l



v e n tila tio n



th e



o f p o te n tia lly e x p lo s iv e a tm o s p h e re a ro u n d th e s o u rc e o f re le a s e ca n



b e e s tim a te d a s fo llo w s :



w h e re



The



c is



t h e n u m b e r o f f r e s h a i r c h a n g e s p e r u n i t t i m e ( s - 1 ).



above



re le a s e



fo rm u la



g iv e n



h o ld s



id e a l



flo w



fo r



an



in s ta n ta n e o u s



c o n d itio n s



o f fre s h



and



a ir.



In



hom ogenous p ra c tic e ,



m ix in g



id e a l



at



th e



c o n d itio n s



so u rce



ra re ly



of



e x is t.



T h e r e fo r e a c o rre c tio n f a c t o r / i s in tro d u c e d to d e n o te th e e ffe c tiv e n e s s o f th e v e n tila tio n .



w h e re / te rm s



is



th e



o f its



v e n tila tio n



e ffe c tiv e n e s s



ty p ic a lly 5 (im p e d e d /=



e ffe c tiv e n e s s in



d ilu tin g



a ir flo w ).



fa c to r,



th e



d e n o tin g



e x p lo s iv e



For b a tte ry



th e



e ffic ie n c y



a tm o s p h e re , /



o f th e



ra n g in g



in s ta lla tio n s th e v e n tila tio n



v e n tila tio n



in



1 (id e a l)



to



fro m



e ffe c tiv e n e s s



f a c t o r is



1 ,2 5 .



M.8.2.4 The



C a lc u la tio n o f d is ta n c e



te rm



in c lu d in g V



dt



d



a ll f a c t o r s



co rre sp o n d s



w ith



th e



h o u rly v e n tila tio n



a ir flo w



Q



y m jn



(in m 3/ h ) f o r s e c o n d a r y b a t t e r i e s c a l c u l a t e d u n d e r



fdV] k dt y



Q=



Q = 0 ,0 5



T h is



h o u rly v e n tila tio n



Q



a ir flo w



X



(n )x / gas



can



be



used



X c rt X 1 0 - 3



to d e fin e



h e m is p h e ric a l d is p e rs a l o f g a s , a v o lu m e o f a h e m is p h e r e



d



[ m 3 /h ]



a h y p o th e tic a l v o lu m e .



Vz



= 2 /3



n d3 c a n



A s s u m in g



a



b e d e fin e d , w h e re



is t h e d i s t a n c e f r o m t h e s o u r c e o f r e l e a s e .



T h i s r e s u l t s i n t h e c a l c u l a t i o n f o r m u l a f o r t h e d i s t a n c e r / ，w i t h e = 1 a i r c h a n g e p e r h o u r w i t h i n th e h e m is p h e re :



x 0 , 0 5 x 1 0 6 x ( j V ) x / g as x Crt



d = 2 8 , 8 x { W ) x ^ x ^



D e p e n d in g



on



v e n t o p e n in g s fa c to r



The



th e



so u rce



p e r c e ll in v o lv e d



, re s p e c tiv e ly



d is ta n c e



d



re le a s e , th e



(VN)



s h a ll



n u m b e r o f c e lls



be ta k e n



p e r m o n o b lo c



in to c o n s id e r a tio n



b a tte ry



(fo r e x a m p le ,



(N)



or



b y th e



yj\lN ).



a s a fu n c tio n



s h o w n in F i g u r e M . 1 .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



of gas



[m m



o f th e



ra te d



c a p a c ity fo r v a rio u s



ch a rg e



c u rre n ts /



( m A / A h ) is



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎



旧C



2018



Figure M.1 - Distance d as a function of the rated capacity for various charge currents I (mA/Ah) M_9



Preventing electrolyte spillage



M.9.1



Protection from electrolyte spillage



E q u ip m e n t s h a ll b e c o n s tr u c te d an



a d ve rse



e ffe c t



on



s k in ,



s o th a t s p illa g e



eye



and



p r e m i s e s , is u n l i k e l y . A ll p o s s i b l e



o th e r



o p e ra tin g



a c c o u n t, in c lu d in g r e p la c e m e n t o f th e



o f e le c tro ly te fro m



hum an



body



m o d e s d u rin g



battery



p a rts ,



batteries, t h a t m a y h a v e o t h e r safeguards o r t h e



m a in te n a n c e s h o u ld



be ta k e n



in to



c o n ta in e d



(fo r



a n d re fillin g o f c o n s u m e d m a te ria l.



Compliance is checked by inspection.



M.9.2 If



cell



Tray for preventing electrolyte spillage fa ilu re



c o u ld



r e s u l t in t h e



s p illa g e



o f e le c tro ly te , th e



s p illa g e



s h a ll



be



e x a m p le , b y u s e o f a r e ta in in g tr a y a d e q u a te to c o n ta in th e e le c t r o ly te ) ta k in g in to a c c o u n t th e m a x im u m



p o s s ib le s p illa g e a m o u n t.



T h i s r e q u i r e m e n t is a p p l i c a b l e t o o f th e



battery



stationary equipment



a n d d o e s n o t a p p ly if t h e c o n s t r u c t i o n



is s u c h t h a t l e a k a g e o f t h e e l e c t r o l y t e f r o m t h e



battery



is u n li k e ly , o r if s p i l l a g e



o f e le c tro ly te d o e s n o t a d v e rs e ly a ffe c t re q u ire d in s u la tio n .



NOTE s e a le d



A n e x a m p l e o f a battery c o n s t r u c t i o n w h e r e l e a k a g e o f t h e e l e c t r o l y t e i s c o n s i d e r e d t o b e u n l i k e l y i s t h e cell v a l v e - r e g u l a t e d t y p e .



Compliance is checked by inspection.



M.10 Instructions to prevent reasonably foreseeable misuse A



battery



c o m p o n e n ts



in c o rp o ra te d



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



th e



e q u ip m e n t



and



a



battery



to g e th e r



cells a n d e l e c t r i c p o w e r g e n e r a t o r s ) s h a l l b e s o safeguard f a i l u r e ( f o r e x a m p l e , f l a m m a b l e c h e m i c a l



(in c lu d in g



e le c tr ic s h o c k o r fire



in



w ith



its



a s s o c ia te d



c o n s tru c te d



th a t an



le a k a g e c a u s in g fire



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



o r i n s u l a t i o n d a m a g e ) i s u n l i k e l y , t a k i n g a l l r e a s o n a b l y f o r e s e e a b l e c o n d i t i o n s i n t o a c c o u n t . If a p p lic a b le , th is s h a ll in c lu d e e x tr e m e c o n d itio n s a s s p e c ifie d b y th e m a n u fa c tu r e r , s u c h a s : -



hi gh o r lo w e x tre m e te m p e r a tu r e s th a t a



battery



can



b e s u b je c te d



to d u r in g



use , s to ra g e



o r tra n s p o rta tio n ; a n d -



l o w a ir p r e s s u r e a t h ig h a ltitu d e .



W h e re



p ro v id in g



s a fe ty



d e v ic e s



or



d e s ig n



in



p ra c tic a l c o n s id e rin g th e fu n c tio n a l n a tu re o f th e



a



battery o r e q u i p m e n t i s n o t battery o r e q u i p m e n t c o n t a i n i n g



instructional safeguards i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a u s e F . 5 battery f r o m e x t r e m e c o n d i t i o n s o r u s e r ' s a b u s e . E x a m p l e s -



replacement of a



battery



-



disposal



battery



in to



battery fire



battery,



t h a t c a n r e s u l t in a n



leaving



a



r e s u l t in



-



of a



a



battery i n a n a n explosion o r



battery



s u b je c te d



be



or



p ro v id e d



to



a



battery,



p ro te c t th e



th a t s h a ll b e c o n s id e r e d in c lu d e :



w ith a n in c o r r e c t ty p e th a t c a n d e fe a t a



in t h e c a s e o f s o m e l i t h i u m -



s h a ll



re a s o n a b ly



safeguard



(fo r e x a m p le ,



ty p e s ); a



hot oven,



or



m e c h a n ic a lly



c ru s h in g



or



c u ttin g



of a



explosion;



e x tre m e ly



h ig h



te m p e ra tu re



s u rro u n d in g



e n v iro n m e n t



th a t



can



th e le a k a g e o f f la m m a b le liq u id o r g a s ; a n d



t o e x t r e m e l y l o w a i r p r e s s u r e t h a t m a y r e s u l t in a n



explosion



o r th e



le a k a g e o f f la m m a b le liq u id o r g a s . For



e q u ip m e n t



c o n ta in in g



a



battery



instructional safeguard s h a l l b e c o m p l e t e instructional safeguard T h e e le m e n ts o f th e



th a t



p ro v id e d



is



re p la c e a b le



in a c c o r d a n c e



by



w ith



an



ordinary person,



C la u s e



F .5 ,



an



e x c e p t th a t th e



m a y b e p r o v i d e d in t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s .



instructional safeguard



s h a ll b e a s fo llo w s :



-



e l e m e n t s 1 a o r 1b:



n o t re q u ire d



-



e l e m e n t 2:



“ C A U T IO N ” o r e q u iv a le n t w o rd o r te x t



-



e l e m e n t 3:



“ R is k o f fire o r e x p lo s io n



if t h e



b a tte ry



is r e p l a c e d



by an



in c o rre c t



ty p e ” o r e q u iv a le n t te x t -



e l e m e n t 4:



o p tio n a l



Compliance is checked by inspection or by evaluation of available data provided by the manufacturer.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



◎ IEC 62368-1:2018



Annex N (normative)



0



Gold， platinum



Silver



Silver solder ， austenitic stainless steel



a> a> w c o a> •o w z



if) ^



= E ^ •2 £ 〇



>



"2 〇 . 2 a



〇



S



l



o



c o



n



Chromium on steel, soft solder



Aluminium



re



〇



c E 3 « k. 3 Q



0) 0)



5 〇 — O)



,8



0 ,5



0



c o E 3 E TJ



Aluminium/magnesium alloy



80 tin/20 zinc on steel, zinc on iron or steel 1



Zinc， zinc alloys



"5 0)



c o



IEC 2018



Magnesium, magnesium alloys



Electrochemical potentials (V)



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Annex O (normative) Measurement of creepage distances and clearances In t h e f o l l o w i n g shown



is



le s s



F ig u re s 0 .1 th a n



Xf



th e



to 0 . 1 6 , th e v a lu e o f X i s d e p th



o f th e



gap



or



g i v e n in T a b l e 0 . 1 . W h e r e t h e d i s t a n c e



g ro o ve



is



d is re g a rd e d



when



m e a s u rin g



creepage distance. If t h e r e q u i r e d m i n i m u m



clearance



is m o r e t h a n 3 m m , t h e v a l u e o f ^ i s



If t h e r e q u ir e d m in im u m



clearance



is l e s s t h a n 3 m m , t h e v a l u e o f Z is t h e s m a l l e r o f:



-



t h e r e l e v a n t v a l u e in T a b l e 0 . 1 ; o r



-



o n e th ird o f th e re q u ire d m in im u m



clearance.



Table 0.1 - Value of



久



Pollution degree (see 5.4.1.5)



NOTE



g i v e n in T a b l e 0 . 1 .



丄



1



0 ,2 5



2



1 ,0 0



3



1 ,5 0



T h r o u g h o u t t h i s a n n e x , t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n v e n t i o n is u s e d : c le a ra n c e c r e e p a g e d i s t a n c e p a th ie c



C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s a p a ra lle l o r c o n v e rg in g - s id e d g ro o v e o f a n y d e p th w ith w id th le s s th a n



X



R u l e : Creepage distance a n d clearance a r e m e a s u re d d ire c tly a c ro s s th e g ro o v e ,



mm.



Figure 0.1 - Narrow groove



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



a



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎



旧C



2018



C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s a p a ra lle l-s id e d g ro o v e o f a n y d e p th , a n d e q u a l to or m o re th a n



X



m m w id e .



Clearance is t h e " l i n e o f s i g h t " Creepage distance p a t h f o l l o w s t h e R u le :



d is ta n c e . c o n to u r o f th e



g ro ove .



Figure 0.2 - Wide groove



Clearance is t h e 丨M ine o f s i g h t " Creepage distance p a t h f o l l o w s t h e



C o n d itio n : P a th u n d e r c o n s id e ra tio n in c lu d e s a



R u le :



V - s h a p e d g ro o v e w ith an in te rn a l a n g le o f le s s th a n 8 0° a n d a w id th g re a te r th a n X m m .



g ro o v e b u t "s h o rt-c irc u its " th e b o tto m o f th e g ro o v e by



X



d is ta n c e . c o n to u r o f th e



m m lin k.



Figure 0.3 - V-shaped groove U n c o n n e c te d c o n d u c tiv e part



C o n d itio n : In s u la tio n d is ta n c e w ith in te rv e n in g , u n c o n n e c te d c o n d u c tiv e p a rt.



Clearance distance is a l s o



R u le :



s m a lle r th a n



X



is t h e d i s t a n c e 十



d



+



I ) %creepage



D . W h e r e t h e v a l u e o f J o r D is



m m it s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d a s z e r o .



Figure 0.4 - Intervening unconnected conductive part



IEC



C o n d it io n : P a th u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n i n c l u d e s a rib .



Clearance is t h e s h o r t e s t d i r e c t a i r p a t h o f t h e r i b . Creepage distance p a t h f o l l o w s



R u le :



to p c o n t o u r o f th e rib .



Figure 0.5 - Rib



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



o v e r th e th e



旧C 25 mm:



土



0 ,3 m m



NOTE



T h e th ic k n e s s o f th e p ro b e v a rie s lin e a rly , w ith s lo p e c h a n g e s a t th e fo llo w in g p o in ts a lo n g th e p ro b e :



Distance from probe tip



Probe thickness



mm



mm



0



2



12



4



180



24



F igure V.4 - W edge probe V.1.6



T est m ethod 5 - T e rm in a ls in te n d e d to be used by an o rd in a ry pe rso n



The rigid test wire of the test probe of Figure V.5 is inserted into the applicable opening with a force up to 1 N 土 0,1 N and with the length limited to 20 mm 土 0,2 mm. While inserted, the probe is moved in any angle with minimal force.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018 D im ensions in m illim etres



S p h e r e 35 ± 0,2



NOTE



T h i s p r o b e is t a k e n f r o m F i g u r e 4 o f I E C 6 1 0 3 2 : 1 9 9 7 .



F igure V.5 - T e rm in a l probe V .2



A c c e s s ib le part c rite rio n



If a part can be touched by the specified probe, then the part is a cce ssib le .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Annex W (in fo rm a tiv e ) C o m p a r i s o n o f t e r m s i n t r o d u c e d in t h i s d o c u m e n t W.1



G eneral



T h is d o c u m e n t in tr o d u c e s n e w s a fe ty te r m s a s s o c ia te d w ith th e n e w s a fe ty c o n c e p ts .



T h i s a n n e x i d e n t i f i e s t h e r e l e v a n t t e r m s i n t h i s d o c u m e n t a n d , w h e r e d i f f e r e n t ，c o m p a r e t h e m to th e e q u iv a le n t IE C /T C 6 4 3 b a s ic s a fe ty p u b lic a tio n s a n d o th e r r e le v a n t s a fe ty p u b lic a tio n s .



T e rm s



n o t in t h e t a b l e s b e l o w a r e e i t h e r t h e s a m e o r s u b s t a n t i a l l y t h e s a m e



a s in o t h e r I E C



s ta n d a rd s .



W .2



C o m p a ris o n o f te rm s



In



T a b le s



th e



W .1



to



W .6



R e m a r k s a b o u t IE C 6 2 3 6 8 -1



3



b e lo w ,



th e



te x t



q u o te d



fro m



an



IE C



s ta n d a rd



is



in



n o rm a l



fo n t.



a r e in i t a l i c f o n t .



IE C /T C 6 4 : E le c tr ic a l in s ta lla tio n s a n d p r o te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tr ic s h o c k . C lic k o n th e IE C w e b s ite fo r a lis t o f p u b lic a tio n s is s u e d by T C 64.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Table W.1 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60664-1:2007 and IEC 62368-1 IEC 60664-1:2007



IEC 62368-1



3.2 clearance s h o rte s t



3.3.12.1 clearance d is ta n c e



in



a ir



b e tw e e n



tw o



s h o rte s t



d is ta n c e



in



c o n d u c tiv e p a rts



c o n d u c tiv e p a rts



3.3 creepage d ista n ce



3.3.12.2 creepage d ista n ce



s h o rte s t s o lid



d is ta n c e



a lo n g



in s u la tin g



th e



m a te ria l



s u rfa c e



of



b e tw e e n



a



tw o



s h o rte s t



d is ta n c e



in s u la tin g p a rts



3.4 s o lid in s u la tio n



3.3.5.6 s o lid in s u la tio n



s o lid



in s u la tin g



m a te ria l in te r p o s e d



b e tw e e n



in s u la tio n m a te ria l



3.5 w o rk in g v o lta g e



3.3.14.8 w o rk in g v o lta g e



h ig h e s t R M S v a lu e o f th e A C a cro ss



any



p a rtic u la r



or DC



in s u la tio n



v o lta g e



w h ic h



can



h ig h e s t



v o lta g e



in s u la tio n



th a t



th e



s u rfa c e



b e tw e e n



c o n s is tin g



tw o c o n d u c tiv e p a rts



b e tw e e n



a lo n g



m a te ria l



c o n d u c tiv e p a rts



a ir



tw o



can



of



any



occur



of



an



c o n d u c tiv e



e n tire ly



a cro ss



tw o



s o lid



p a rtic u la r when



th e



ra te d v o lta g e



rated v o lta g e o r a n y v o lta g e in t h e rated v o lta g e range u n d e r norm al o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s



3.9 rated v o lta g e



3.3.10.4 rated v o lta g e



occur



when



v a lu e



th e



of



e q u ip m e n t



v o lta g e



m a n u fa c tu re r, e q u ip m e n t



to



and



is



s u p p lie d



a s s ig n e d



a



by



c o m p o n e n t,



to



w h ic h



at



th e



d e v ic e



o p e ra tio n



or and



e q u ip m e n t



v a lu e



is



of



s u p p lie d



v o lta g e



m a n u fa c tu re r e q u ip m e n t



to



and



a to



at



a s s ig n e d c o m p o n e n t, w h ic h



by



th e



d e v ic e



o p e ra tio n



p e rfo rm a n c e c h a ra c te ris tic s a re re fe rre d



p e rfo rm a n c e c h a ra c te ris tic s a re re fe rre d



3.13 p o llu tio n degree



3.3.6.8 p o llu tio n degree



n u m e ra l



c h a ra c te riz in g



th e



e x p e c te d



n u m e ra l



c h a ra c te ris in g



th e



p o llu tio n o f th e m ic r o - e n v iro n m e n t



3.19.1 ty p e te s t



3.3.6.15 typ e te s t



of



one



or



m o re



d e v ic e s



m ade



to



a



te s t



on



a



re p re s e n ta tiv e



c e rta in d e s ig n to s h o w th a t th e d e s ig n m e e ts



o b je c tiv e o f d e te rm in in g



c e rta in s p e c ific a tio n s



m a n u fa c tu re d ,



it c a n



and



e x p e c te d



p o llu tio n o f th e m ic r o - e n v iro n m e n t



te s t



or



s a m p le



w ith



th e



if, a s d e s i g n e d



and



m e e t th e



re q u ire m e n ts



o f th is d o c u m e n t



3.9.2 rated im p u ls e vo lta g e



3.3.14.2 m ains tra n s ie n t v o lta g e



im p u ls e w ith s ta n d v o lta g e v a lu e a s s ig n e d by



h ig h e s t p e a k v o lta g e e x p e c te d



th e



in p u t to th e e q u ip m e n t, a r is in g fr o m



p a rt



m a n u fa c tu re r of



w ith s ta n d



it,



to



th e



c h a ra c te riz in g



c a p a b ility



th e



or



to



a



s p e c ifie d



o f its in s u la t io n



tra n s ie n t o v e rv o lta g e s



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



e q u ip m e n t



a g a in s t



tra n s ie n ts



a t th e



m ains



e x te rn a l



旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 -1 :2 0 1 8 ©



IE C 2 0 1 8



-



3^M -



IEC 60664-1:2007



IEC 62368-1



3.17.1 fu n c tio n a l in s u la tio n



3.3.5.3 fu n c tio n a l in s u la tio n



i n s u l a t i o n b e t w e e n c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s w h i c h is



i n s u l a t i o n b e t w e e n c o n d u c t i v e p a r t s w h i c h is



n e c e s s a r y o n ly fo r th e



n e c e s s a r y o n ly fo r th e



p ro p e r fu n c tio n in g



of



th e e q u ip m e n t



th e e q u ip m e n t



3.17.2 b a sic in s u la tio n



3.3.5.1 b a sic in s u la tio n



in s u la tio n



of



h a z a rd o u s -liv e -p a rts



w h ic h



in s u la tio n



to



p ro v id e



p ro p e r fu n c tio n in g



b a sic



a



p ro v id e s b a s ic p ro te c tio n



a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k



3.17.3 s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n



3.3.5.7 s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n



in d e p e n d e n t in s u la tio n a p p lie d



in a d d i t i o n t o



in d e p e n d e n t in s u la tio n a p p lie d



b a sic in s u la tio n sa fe g u a rd f o r



b a s ic in s u la tio n fo r fa u lt p ro te c tio n



to p ro v id e fa u lt



of



safeg uard



in a d d i t i o n t o



s u p p le m e n ta ry



p ro te c tio n



a g a in s t



e le c tric s h o c k



3.17.4 d o u b le in s u la tio n in s u la tio n



3.3.5.2 d o u b le in s u la tio n



c o m p ris in g



b o th



b a s ic



in s u la tio n



b a sic in s u la tio n s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n



in s u la tio n



c o m p ris in g



a n d s u p p le m e n ta r y in s u la tio n



and



3.17.5 re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n



3.3.5.5 re in fo rc e d in s u la tio n



in s u la tio n



of



p ro v id e s



a



e le c tric



shock



h a z a rd o u s -liv e -p a rts



d e g re e



of



p ro te c tio n



e q u iv a le n t



to



w h ic h a g a in s t d o u b le



s in g le



in s u la tio n



d e g re e



of



s y s te m



p ro te c tio n



e q u iv a le n t to



b o th



th a t



a g a in s t



p ro v id e s



e le c tric



a



shock



d o u b le in s u la tio n



in s u la tio n



3.19.2 ro u tin e te s t te s t



to



w h ic h



3.3.6.10 ro u tin e te s t each



s u b je c te d



d u rin g



a s c e rta in



w h e th e r



or it



in d iv id u a l a fte r



d e v ic e



is



te s t



m a n u fa c tu re



to



s u b je c te d



d u rin g



or



a s c e rta in



w h e th e r



it



c o m p lie s



w ith



c e rta in



to



w h ic h



each



in d iv id u a l a fte r



d e v ic e



is



m a n u fa c tu re



to



c o m p lie s



w ith



c e rta in



c rite ria



c rite ria



3.19.3 s a m p lin g te s t



3.3.6.11 s a m p lin g te s t



te s t o n a n u m b e r o f d e v ic e s ta k e n a t ra n d o m



te s t o n a n u m b e r o f d e v ic e s ta k e n a t ra n d o m



fro m a b a tc h



fro m a b a tc h



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Table W.2 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 61140:2016 and IEC 62368-1 IEC 61140:2016 te rm s



IEC 62368-1 te rm s



For consistency throughout the document the term "safeguard” is used to describe the device or scheme that provides protection against an energy source. 3.1.1 b a sic p ro te c tio n p ro te c tio n a g a in s t e le c tric s h o c k u n d e r fa u ltfre e c o n d itio n s



3.3.11.2 b a sic sa fe g u a rd sa fe g u a rd t h a t p r o v i d e s p r o t e c t i o n u n d e r n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s a n d u n d e r a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s w h e n e v e r a n e n e r g y s o u r c e c a p a b le o f c a u s in g p a in o r i n j u r y is p r e s e n t in t h e e q u i p m e n t



3.10.2 s u p p le m e n ta ry in s u la tio n In d e p e n d e n t in s u la tio n



a p p lie d



in a d d i t i o n t o



b a s ic in s u la tio n , fo r fa u lt p ro te c tio n



The term live p a rt is not used.



3.4 live part c o n d u c to r o r c o n d u c tiv e e n e rg iz e d n e u tra l PEN



3.3.11.17 s u p p le m e n ta ry sa fe g u a rd sa fe g u a rd a p p l i e d i n a d d i t i o n t o t h e b a sic sa fe g u a rd t h a t i s o r b e c o m e s o p e r a t i o n a l in t h e e v e n t o f f a i l u r e o f t h e b a sic sa fe g u a rd



in



n o rm a l



c o n d u c to r,



c o n d u c to r



o p e ra tio n ,



but



or



p a rt in te n d e d by



PEM



to b e



in c lu d in g



c o n v e n tio n c o n d u c to r



a



In accordance with the IEC 61140 definition, ES1, ES2 and ES3 are all live parts



not a



or



PEL



c o n d u c to r



N o te 1 to



e n try:



T h is



concept



does



not



n e c e s s a rily



im p ly a ris k o f e le c tr ic s h o c k . N o te 2 to e n try :



F o r d e fin itio n s o f P E M



and PEL see



IE V 1 9 5 -0 2 -1 3 a n d 1 9 5 -0 2 -1 4 .



The term hazardous-live-part is not used.



3.5 h a z a rd o u s -liv e -p a rt liv e



p a rt th a t,



u n d e r c e rta in



c o n d itio n s ,



can



g iv e a h a rm fu l e le c tric s h o c k



In accordance with the IEC 61140 definition, an ES3 source is a hazardous-live-part.



N o te 1 to e n try : In c a s e o f h i g h v o l t a g e , a h a z a r d o u s v o lta g e m a y be p re s e n t on th e s u rfa c e o f s o lid i n s u l a t i o n . In s u c h a c a s e t h e s u r f a c e is c o n s i d e r e d t o be a h a z a rd o u s -liv e -p a rt.



No equivalent term. See ES1.



3.26 e x tra -lo w -v o lta g e (ELV) any



v o lta g e



not



e x c e e d in g



th e



re le v a n t



v o l t a g e l i m i t s p e c i f i e d in I E C T S 6 1 2 0 1



3.26.1 SELV system an



e le c tric a l



ES1 s y s te m



in



w h ic h



th e



v o lta g e



cannot exceed ELV: -



u n d e r n o rm a l c o n d itio n s ; a n d



-



under



s in g le -fa u lt



c o n d itio n s ,



e a r t h f a u l t s in o t h e r c i r c u i t s



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



ES1



is a v o l t a g e



n o t e x c e e d in g th e



v o lta g e



lim it s p e c ifie d



cu rre n t



not



e x c e e d in g



in



IE C T S 6 1 2 0 1



th e



re le v a n t



l i m i t s p e c i f i e d in I E C T S 6 0 4 7 9 - 1 in c lu d in g



re le v a n t



-



u n d e r n o rm a l c o n d itio n s ; a n d



-



under



s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s



or a



cu rre n t



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 IEC 61140:2016 te rm s



IEC 62368-1 te rm s



3.28 lim ite d -c u rre n t-s o u rc e d e v ic e



s u p p ly in g



ES1



e le c tric a l



e n e rg y



in



an



e le c tric c irc u it -



wi t h



p ro te c tiv e -s e p a ra tio n



fro m



h a za r­



ES1



is a v o l t a g e



n o t e x c e e d in g th e re le v a n t



v o lta g e



lim it s p e c ifie d



cu rre n t



not



e x c e e d in g



in



IE C T S 6 1 2 0 1



th e



re le v a n t



or a



cu rre n t



l i m i t s p e c i f i e d in I E C T S 6 0 4 7 9 - 1



d o u s -liv e -p a rts , a n d -



that e n s u re s



th a t th e s te a d y



cu rre n t



ch a rg e



and



a re



s ta te



lim ite d



to u c h



to



non-



-



u n d e r n o rm a l c o n d itio n s ; a n d



-



under



s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s .



h a z a r d o u s le v e ls , u n d e r n o rm a l a n d fa u lt c o n d itio n s



5.1.6 L im ita tio n o f ste a d y state to u c h c u rre n t and charge L im ita tio n ch a rg e



o f s te a d y s ta te



s h a ll



p re ve n t



to u c h



p e rso n s



fro m



b e in g



s u b je c te d



to



s ta te



to u c h



cu rre n t and



cu rre n t and or



v a lu e s ch a rg e



a n im a ls



of



s te a d y



lia b le



to



be



ES1 current limit is 0,5 mA AC and 2 mA DC ES2 current limit is 5 mA AC， 25 mA DC (these values are taken from IEC TS 60479-1)



h a z a rd o u s o r p e rc e p tib le .



N o te 1



to



e n try:



For



person s,



th e



fo llo w in g



v a lu e s



(A C v a lu e s fo r fr e q u e n c ie s u p to 1 0 0 H z ) a re g iv e n as g u id a n c e : -



A s te a d y s ta te c u rre n t flo w in g b e tw e e n s im u lta n e o u s ly a c c e s s ib le c o n d u c tiv e p a rts t h r o u g h a p u r e r e s i s t a n c e o f 2 0 0 0 f2 n o t e x c e e d in g th e th re s h o ld o f p e rc e p tio n , A C 0 ,5 m A o r D C 2 m A a re re c o m m e n d e d .



—



V a lu e s n o t e x c e e d in g th e th re s h o ld o f p a in A C 3 ,5 m A o r D C 10 m A m a y b e s p e c ifie d .



3.3.11.12 sa fe g u a rd



N o e q u iv a le n t te rm



p h y s ic a l



p a rt



or



s y s te m



or



in s tru c tio n



s p e c if ic a lly p r o v id e d to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f in ju ry , o r, fo r fire , to r e d u c e th e lik e lih o o d o f ig n itio n o r s p r e a d o f fire



No



e q u iv a le n t



te rm .



Based



on



d o u b le



in s u la tio n



No



e q u iv a le n t



te rm .



Based



on



re in fo rc e d



in s u la tio n



3.3.11.2 d o u b le sa fe g u a rd sa fe g u a rd c o m p ris in g b o th a b a sic sa fe g u a rd a n d a s u p p le m e n ta ry sa fe g u a rd 3.3.11.12 re in fo rc e d sa fe g u a rd s i n g l e sa fe g u a rd t h a t



is p r o v i d e s



p ro te c tio n



under



N o e q u iv a le n t te r m . R o u g h ly e q u iv a le n t to a w a rn in g



-



nor mal o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,



-



abnor mal o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,



-



si ngl e fa u lt c o n d itio n s .



and



3.3.11.5 in s tru c tio n a l safeg uard a n in s tru c tio n in v o k in g s p e c ifie d b e h a v io u r



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



- 3 之\4



-



IE C 6 2 3 6 8 - 1 :2 0 1 8 ® IE C 2 0 1 8



IEC 61140:2016 te rm s



IEC 62368-1 te rm s 3.3.11.7 p re c a u tio n a ry sa fe g u a rd in s tru c te d pe rso n b e h a v i o u r



N o e q u iv a le n t te rm



to



a v o id



c o n ta c t w ith o r e x p o s u r e to a c la s s 2 e n e r g y so u rce



based



g iv e n b y a



on



w ith



or



e n e rg y



o r in s tru c tio n s



s k ille d person



3.3.11.14 s k ill sa fe g u a rd s k ille d pe rso n



N o e q u iv a le n t te rm



s u p e rv is io n



b e h a v io u r



e xp o su re so u rce



to



a



based



to



a v o id



c la s s 2 on



or



c o n ta c t c la s s 3



e d u c a tio n



and



e x p e rie n c e



The



te rm



n o rm a l



c o n d itio n



is



used



in



IE C 6 1 1 4 0 , b u t n o t d e fin e d



3.3.7.4 n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n m o d e o f o p e ra tio n th a t re p re s e n ts a s c lo s e ly a s p o s s ib le th e ra n g e o f n o rm a l u s e th a t ca n re a s o n a b ly be e x p e c te d



3.3.7.1 a b n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n



N o e q u iv a le n t te rm



te m p o ra ry



o p e ra tin g



c o n d itio n



th a t



is



not



a



n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n a n d i s n o t a s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n o f t h e e q u i p m e n t its e lf



The



te rm



s in g le



b u t n o t d e fin e d



f a u l t is u s e d



in



IE C 6 1 1 4 0 ,



3.3.7.9 s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n f a u l t u n d e r no rm al o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n o f a s i n g l e sa fe g u a rd ( b u t n o t a re in fo rc e d s a fe g u a rd ) o r o f a s i n g l e c o m p o n e n t o r a d e v ic e



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Table W.3 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60950-1:2005 and IEC 62368-1 IEC 60950-1:2005 te rm s



IEC 62368-1 te rm s



1.2.8.8 SELV c irc u it s e co n d a ry



c irc u it



p ro te c te d



th a t



c o n d itio n s



and



th a t



is



under s in g le



so



d e s ig n e d



n o rm a l fa u lt



and



o p e ra tin g



c o n d itio n s ,



its



5.2.1.1 ES1 ES1 i s a c l a s s 1 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w i t h to u c h c u rre n t o r p ro s p e c tiv e to u c h v o lta g e l e v e l s



v o lta g e s d o n o t e x c e e d a s a fe v a lu e -



not e x c e e d in g ES1



lim its u n d e r



•



n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,



•



a b n o rm a l



o p e ra tin g



and



c o n d itio n s ,



and



•



s in g le



fa u lt



c o n d itio n s or



of



a



in s u la tio n



not



c o m p o n e n t,



d e v ic e



s e rv in g a s a



sa fe g u a rd ;



and



ES2 l i m i t s u n d e r s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s o f a b a sic sa fe g u a rd o r o f a s u p p le m e n ta ry sa fe g u a rd . n o t e x c e e d in g



1.2.8.11 TNV c irc u it



See detailed TNV classes for comparison.



c i r c u i t t h a t is in t h e e q u i p m e n t a n d t o w h i c h t h e a c c e s s i b l e a r e a o f c o n t a c t is l i m i t e d a n d t h a t i s s o d e s i g n e d a n d p r o t e c t e d t h a t ，u n d e r n o rm a l o p e ra tin g



c o n d itio n s



and



s in g le



fa u lt



c o n d itio n s (s e e 1 .4 .1 4 o f IE C 6 0 9 5 0 - 1 :2 0 0 5 ) , th e



v o lta g e s



do



not



exceed



s p e c ifie d



lim it



v a lu e s A



TNV



c irc u it



s e co n d a ry



c irc u it



is



c o n s id e re d in



th e



to



m e a n in g



be of



a th is



d o c u m e n t.



1.2.8.12 TNV-1 c irc u it T N V c irc u it -



w h o s e n o rm a l o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s d o n o t



ES



1



on



T a b le 13,



w h ic h ID



tra n s ie n ts



n u m b e rs



1,



a c c o rd in g 2



and



3



to a re



p o s s ib le



e x c e e d th e lim its fo r a n S E L V c ir c u it u n d e r n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s a n d -



O n w h ic h o v e rv o lta g e s fro m te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk s a n d c a b le d is trib u tio n s y s te m s a re p o s s ib le



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



NOTE



T h e e le c tric a l c h a ra c te ris tic s a re n o t id e n tic a l



to T N V c irc u its b u t w ill g iv e e q u iv a le n t le v e l o f s a fe ty .



旧C



IEC 60950-1:2005 term s



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



IEC 62368-1 te rm s



1.2.8.13 TNV-2 c irc u it



ES2



T N V c irc u it ES2 -



whose th e



n o rm a l o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s e x c e e d



lim its



fo r



an



SELV



c irc u it



a



c la s s



2



e le c tric a l



e n e rg y



so u rce



w h e re



under -



n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s a n d -



is



th e



w h i c h is n o t s u b j e c t t o o v e r v o l t a g e s f r o m



p ro s p e c tiv e to u c h v o lta g e a n d to u c h c u rre n t e x c e e d t h e l i m i t s f o r



bot h th e



E S 1 ; and



te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk s -



under



•



n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s ,



•



a b norm a l



o p e ra tin g



and



c o n d itio n s ,



and



•



s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s ,



p ro s p e c tiv e to u c h v o lta g e o r to u c h c u rre n t d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e l i m i t e ith e r th e



th e fo r



ES2_



NOTE



T h e e le c tric a l c h a ra c te ris tic s a re n o t id e n tic a l



to T N V c ir c u its b u t w ill g iv e e q u iv a le n t le v e l o f s a fe ty .



1.2.8.14 TNV-3 c irc u it



ES



T N V c irc u it



T a b le 13,



2



on



w h ic h ID



tra n s ie n ts



n u m b e rs



1,



a c c o rd in g 2



and



3



to a re



p o s s ib le -



whose th e



n o rm a l o p e ra tin g v o lta g e s e x c e e d



lim its



fo r



an



SELV



c irc u it



under



n o rm a l o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s a n d -



on



w h ic h



te le c o m m u n ic a tio n



T h e e le c tric a l c h a ra c te ris tic s a re n o t id e n tic a l



to T N V c irc u its b u t w ill g iv e e q u iv a le n t le v e l o f s a fe ty .



o v e rv o lta g e s



fro m



n e tw o rk s



c a b le



and



NOTE



d is tr ib u tio n s y s te m s a re p o s s ib le



1.2.13.6 USER



3.3.S.2 o rd in a ry person



a n y p e rs o n , o th e r th a n a s e rv ic e p e rs o n



p e rso n an



who



in s tru c te d person



The term user in this document is the same as the term operator and the two terms can be interchanged 1.2.13.7 o p e ra to r s e e u se r



See 3.3.8.2 (1 .2 .1 3 .6 o f IE C 6 0 9 5 0 - 1 :2 0 0 5 )



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



is n e i t h e r a



s k ille d pe rso n



nor



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 IEC 60950-1:2005 term s



IEC 62368-1 te rm s



1.2.13.8 te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk m e ta llic a lly te rm in a te d in te n d e d



fo r



e q u ip m e n t



3.3.1.1 e xte rn a l c irc u it



tra n s m is s io n



c o m m u n ic a tio n



th a t m a y



be



lo c a te d



m e d iu m b e tw e e n



in



e le c tric a l



c irc u it



th a t



e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t



is



e x te rn a l



to



th e



m ains



s e p a ra te



b u ild in g s , e x c lu d in g :



N o te



1 to e n try :



An



external circuit



is c l a s s i f i e d



as



ES1, ES2 or ES3, and PS1, PS2, or PS3.



-



t he



m a in s



s y s te m



fo r



s u p p ly ,



tr a n s m is s io n a n d d is tr ib u tio n o f e le c tric a l p o w e r,



if



used



as



a



te le c o m m u n ic a tio n



tr a n s m is s io n m e d iu m ; -



c a b l e d is trib u tio n s y s te m s ;



-



SELV



c irc u its



c o n n e c tin g



u n its



of



in fo rm a tio n te c h n o lo g y e q u ip m e n t N o te 1 to e n try :



T h e te rm te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk



i s d e f i n e d in t e r m s o f i t s f u n c t i o n a l i t y , n o t i t s e l e c t r i c a l c h a ra c te ris tic s ,



a



te le c o m m u n ic a tio n



n e tw o rk



is



not



its e lf d e fin e d a s b e in g e ith e r a n S E L V c irc u it o r a T N V c irc u it. O n ly c la s s ifie d . N o te 2



to



th e



c irc u its



e n try:



A



in



th e



e q u ip m e n t



te le c o m m u n ic a tio n



are



n e tw o rk



so



may



be: 一



p u b lic ly o r p riv a te ly o w n e d : s u b je c t to a tm o s p h e ric



tra n s ie n t d is c h a rg e s



o v e rv o lta g e s and fa u lts



due to in power



d is trib u tio n s y s te m s : 一



s u b je c t to lo n g itu d in a l in d u c e d fro m n e a rb y



(c o m m o n m o d e ) v o lta g e s power lin e s o r e le c tric



tr a c t io n lin e s . N o te 3



to



e n try:



E x a m p le s



of



te le c o m m u n ic a tio n



n e tw o rk s a re : 一



a p u b lic s w itc h e d te le p h o n e n e tw o rk :



-



a p u b lic d a ta n e tw o rk :



一



an in te g ra te d S e r v ic e s D ig ita l N e tw o rk (IS D N );



-



a



p riv a te



n e tw o rk



w ith



e le c tric a l



in te rfa c e



c h a ra c te ris tic s s im ila r to th e a b o v e .



None



3.3.8.1 in s tru c te d person p e rs o n in s tru c te d o r s u p e rv is e d



p e rso n



as



to



e n e rg y



so u rce s



re s p o n s ib ly u s e e q u ip m e n t



p re c a u tio n a ry sa fe g u a rd s th o s e e n e rg y s o u rc e s



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



by a and



s k ille d



who



can



sa fe g u a rd s



and



w ith



re sp e ct



to



旧C



IEC 60950-1:2005 term s



IEC 62368-1 te rm s



1.2.13.5 s e rv ic e person p e rso n and



h a v in g



a p p ro p ria te



e x p e rie n c e



h a z a rd s



to



exposed



w h ic h



in



m e a su re s



te c h n ic a l tra in in g



n e ce ssa ry th a t



m in im iz e



be



a w a re



of



m ay



be



ta s k



and



of



ris k s



to



p e rso n



p e rfo rm in g



to



to a



th e



th a t



p e rs o n or o th e r p e rs o n s



1.2.13.14 cab le d is trib u tio n system tra n s m is s io n



u s in g



c a b le ,



m a in ly



v id e o



a n d /o r



tra n s m is s io n b e tw e e n



of



s e p a ra te



m e d iu m



in te n d e d a u d io



b u ild in g s



or



fo r



t he



m a in s



tra n s m is s io n p o w e r,



if



s y s te m and



used



b e tw e e n



fo r



d is trib u tio n as



a



s u p p ly , of



e le c tric



c o m m u n ic a tio n



-



t e l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n n e tw o rk s ;



-



SELV



c o n n e c tin g



u n its



of



in fo rm a tio n te c h n o lo g y e q u ip m e n t N o te 1



to



e n try:



E x a m p le s



Of



c a b le



d is trib u tio n



s y s te m s a re : 一



lo c a l a re a c a b le n e tw o rk s , c o m m u n ity a n te n n a te le v is io n s y s te m s a nd m a s te r a n te n n a te le v is io n s y s te m s p ro v id in g v id e o a n d a u d io s ig n a l d is trib u tio n ;



-



o u td o o r a n te n n a s in c lu d in g s a te llite d is h e s , re c e iv in g a n te n n a s , a n d o th e r s im ila r d e v ic e s .



N o te 2



to



e n try:



C a b le



d is trib u tio n



s y s te m s



may



be



s u b je c te d to g re a te r tra n s ie n ts th a n te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk s .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



w ith



e x p e rie n c e h a z a rd s re d u ce



to



and th e



re le v a n t e n a b le to



h im



ta k e



e d u c a tio n o r h e r to



a p p ro p ria te



lik e lih o o d



of



ris k s



or



id e n tify



a c tio n s



to



in ju ry



to



of



th e m s e lv e s a n d o th e rs



e le c tric a l



c irc u it



th a t



e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t



N o te 1 to



e n try :



The



i d e n t i f i e d in T a b l e 1 3 .



tr a n s m is s io n m e d iu m ;



c irc u its



p e rso n



is



e x te rn a l



to



th e



m ains



s ig n a ls



o u td o o r a n te n n a s a n d b u ild in g s , e x c lu d in g : -



3.3.8.3 s k ille d person



3.3.1.1 e xte rn a l c irc u it



m e ta llic a lly te rm in a te d c o a x ia l



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



re le v a n t



external circuits



are



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎



旧C



2018



Table W.4 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60728-11:2016 and I EC 62368-1 IEC 60728-11:2016 te rm s



IEC 62368-1 te rm s



3.1.4 3.3.1.1 cab le n e tw o rk s < fo r te le v is io n s ig n a ls ， e xte rn a l c irc u it so u n d s ig n a ls and in te ra c tiv e s e rv ic e s 〉 e le c tric a l c irc u it re g io n a l



and



n e tw o rk s ,



e x te n d e d



te le v is io n



d is trib u tio n



and



lo c a l



in d iv id u a l



b ro a d b a n d



s a te llite



and



n e tw o rk s



s a te llite



c a b le



1 to e n tr y : T h e s e



or



and



s y s te m s te rre s tria l



n e tw o rk s a n d s y s te m s ca n be



u s e d in d o w n s t r e a m a n d u p s t r e a m d i r e c t i o n s .



3.1.5 CATV n e tw o rk o r te le v is io n n e tw o rk



c o m m u n ity



antenna



re g io n a l a n d lo c a l b r o a d b a n d c a b le n e tw o r k s d e s ig n e d s ig n a ls



to as



p ro v id e w e ll



sound



as



s ig n a ls



and



te le v is io n



fo r



in te ra c tiv e



s e r v ic e s to a r e g io n a l o r lo c a l a re a



N o te



1



to



e n try:



O rig in a lly



d e fin e d



as



C o m m u n ity



A n te n n a T e le v is io n n e tw o rk .



3.1.31 MATV n e tw o rk or te le v is io n n e tw o rk e x te n d e d



te rre s tria l



n e tw o rk s sound



or



and



te rre s tria l



m a ste r



te le v is io n



s y s te m s te le v is io n



re c e iv in g



s ig n a ls



a n te n n a



antenna d is trib u tio n



d e s ig n e d



to



p ro v id e



re c e iv e d



to



by



h o u s e h o ld s



in o n e o r m o r e b u i l d i n g s



N o te 1 to e n try : O rig in a lly d e fin e d a s m a s te r a n te n n a te le v is io n n e tw o rk . N o te



2 to



e n try :



T h is



k in d



o f n e tw o rk



or s y s te m



can



p o s s ib ly be c o m b in e d w ith a s a te llite a n te n n a fo r th e a d d itio n a l r e c e p t io n o f T V a n d / o r r a d io s ig n a ls v ia s a te llite n e tw o rk s . N o te



3 to



a ls o



ca rry



e n try :



T h is



o th e r



s y s te m s (e .g . d ire c tio n .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



k in d



s ig n a ls



M oCA



or



o f n e tw o rk fo r W iF i)



o r s y s te m



s p e c ia l in



th e



e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t



is



e x te rn a l



to



th e



m ains



te rre s tria l



te le v is io n re c e iv in g s y s te m s



N o te



th a t



can



tra n s m is s io n re tu rn



p a th



N o te 1 to



e n try:



The



i d e n t i f i e d in T a b l e 1 3 .



re le v a n t



external circuits



a re



旧C



■EC 60728-11:2016 te rm s 3.1.44 SMATV n e tw o rk o r s a te llite antenna te le v is io n n e tw o rk e x te n d e d



d is trib u tio n



n e tw o rk s



d e s ig n e d



to



sound



p ro v id e



s ig n a ls



re c e iv e d



a n te n n a



to



by



or



and



s a te llite



h o u s e h o ld s



in



IEC 62368-1 te rm s m aste r s y s te m s te le v is io n re c e iv in g



one



or



m o re



b u ild in g s



N o te



1 to e n try : O rig in a lly d e fin e d



a s s a te llite



m a s te r



a n te n n a te le v is io n n e tw o rk N o te 2 to e n try : T h is k in d o f n e tw o r k o r s y s te m ca n p o s s ib ly be c o m b in e d w ith te rre s tria l a n te n n a s fo r th e a d d itio n a l re c e p tio n te rre s tria l n e tw o rk s . N o te



3 to



e n try :



a ls o ca rry s y s te m s or s y s te m s



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



TV



k in d



a n d /o r



ra d io



o f n e tw o rk



s ig n a ls



or s y s te m



v ia



can



c o n tro l s ig n a ls fo r s a te llite s w itc h e d o th e r s ig n a ls fo r s p e c ia l tra n s m is s io n



(e .g .



d ire c tio n .



T h is



of



M oCA



or



W iF i)



in



th e



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



re tu rn



p a th



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Table W.5 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 62151:2000 and IEC 62368-1 IEC 62151:2000 terms



IEC 62368-1 terms



3.1.3 telecommunication network a



m e ta llic a lly



m e d iu m b e tw e e n



3.3.1.1 external circuit



te rm in a te d



in te n d e d



tra n s m is s io n



fo r



c o m m u n ic a tio n



e q u ip m e n ts th a t m a y b e lo c a te d



e le c tric a l



c irc u it



th a t



e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t



is



e x te rn a l



to



th e



mains



in



s e p a r a te b u ild in g s , e x c lu d in g :



N o te 1 to



e n try:



The



re le v a n t



external circuits



are



i d e n t i f i e d in T a b l e 1 3 .



-



t he



m a in s



s y s te m s



fo r



s u p p ly ,



tr a n s m is s io n a n d d is tr ib u tio n o f e le c tric a l p o w e r,



if



used



as



a



te le c o m m u n ic a tio n



tr a n s m is s io n m e d iu m ; 一



te le v is io n



d is trib u tio n



s y s te m s



u s in g



c a b le N o te 1 to e n try :



T h e te rm te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk



i s d e f i n e d in t e r m s o f i t s f u n c t i o n a l i t y , n o t i t s e l e c t r i c a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , a t e l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n n e t w o r K is n o t its e lf d e fin e d a s b e in g a T N V c irc u it. O n ly th e c irc u its in e q u i p m e n t a r e s o c l a s s i f i e d . N o te 2 to e n try : 一



一



A te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk m a y be



p u b lic ly o r p riv a te ly o w n e d ; s u b je c t to a tm o s p h e ric



tra n s ie n t d is c h a rg e s



o v e rv o lta g e s and fa u lts



due to in power



d is trib u tio n s y s te m s ; -



s u b je c t to p e r m a n e n t lo n g itu d in a l (c o m m o n m o d e ) v o lta g e s



in d u c e d



fro m



n e a rb y



power



lin e s



or



e le c tr ic tr a c tio n lin e s . N o te 3



to



e n try :



E x a m p le s



of



te le c o m m u n ic a tio n



n e tw o rk s are -



a p u b lic s w itc h e d te le p h o n e n e tw o rk ;



一



a p u b lic d a ta n e tw o rk ;



-



a n IS D N n e tw o rk ;



-



a



p riv a te



n e tw o rk



w ith



e le c tric a l



in te rfa c e



c h a ra c te ris tic s s im ila r to th e a b o v e .



3.5.4 TNV-0 circuit a T N V c irc u it: -



whose



n o rm a l o p e ra tin g



exceed



a



o p e ra tin g



s a fe



v o lta g e s



v a lu e



c o n d itio n s



under



and



under



do



not



n o rm a l s in g le



fa u lt c o n d itio n s ; -



w h i c h is n o t s u b j e c t t o o v e r v o l t a g e s f r o m te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk s



N o te 1 to e n try : norm al



o p e ra tin g



s p e c i f i e d in 4 . 1 .



s in g le



fa u lt



-



not e x c e e d in g ES1



lim its u n d e r



•



normal operating conditions,



•



abnormal



operating



and



conditions,



and



T h e lim itin g v a lu e s o f v o lta g e and



5.2.1.1 ES1 ES1 i s a c l a s s 1 e l e c t r i c a l e n e r g y s o u r c e w i t h touch current o r prospective touch voltage l e v e l s



c o n d itio n s



under are



•



single



fault



c o m p o n e n t， d e v ic e s e rv in g a s a



conditions or



of



a



in s u la tio n



not



safeguard;



and



ES2 l i m i t s u n d e r single fault conditions o f a basic safeguard o r o f a supplementary safeguard. n o t e x c e e d in g



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



IEC 62151:2000 terms



IEC 62368-1 terms



3.5.3 TNV circuit a



c irc u it



5.2.1.2 ES2



w h ic h



is



in



th e



th e



lim ite d



(e x c e p t fo r a T N V -0



so



a c c e s s ib le



e q u ip m e n t



w h ic h is



d e s ig n e d



and



a re a



of



and



to



ES2



c o n ta c t



is



w h e re



c irc u it) a n d



p ro te c te d



th a t,



is



a



c la s s



under



-



ES1; and



v a lu e s



-



s e co n d a ry



c irc u it



is



c o n s id e re d in



th e



to



m e a n in g



be of



e n try:



•



normal operating conditions,



th is



•



abnormal



operating



and



conditions,



and The



v o lta g e



re la tio n s h ip s



T N V C I R C U I T S a r e s h o w n in t a b l e 1.



b e tw e e n



•



single fault conditions.



prospective touch voltage o r touch current d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e l i m i t e ith e r th e ES2.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



so u rce



under



a



d o c u m e n t.



N o te 1 to



e n e rg y



prospective touch voltage a n d touch current e x c e e d t h e l i m i t s f o r



th e v o lta g e s d o n o t e x c e e d s p e c ifie d lim itin g



c irc u it



e le c tric a l



both the th e



TNV



2



th a t



n o rm a l o p e ra tin g a n d s in g le fa u lt c o n d itio n s ,



A



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



th e fo r



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Table W.6 - Comparison of terms and definitions in IEC 60065:2014 and IEC 62368-1 IEC 60065:2014 terms



IEC 62368-1 terms



2.2.12 professional apparatus a p p a ra tu s



fo r



use



3.3.3.8 professional equipment



in t r a d e s ,



in d u s trie s a n d w h ic h



p ro fe s s io n s



or



is n o t i n t e n d e d f o r s a le



to th e g e n e r a l p u b lic



N o te 1 to e n try :



e q u ip m e n t fo r u s e



in t r a d e s ,



in d u s trie s a n d w h ic h



p ro fe s s io n s



or



is n o t i n t e n d e d f o r s a le



to th e g e n e r a l p u b lic



T h e d e s ig n a tio n s h o u ld be s p e c ifie d



by th e m a n u fa c tu re r.



2.4.3 directly connected to the mains



No equivalent term.



e le c tric a l c o n n e c tio n



In accordance with the IEC 60065 definition, an ES3 source would be considered directly connected to the mains.



w ith th e



m a i n s in s u c h



a w a y th a t a c o n n e c t io n to e ith e r p o le o f th e m a in s



causes



in



th a t



c o n n e c tio n



a



p e r m a n e n t c u r r e n t e q u a l to o r g r e a t e r th a n 9 A , p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e s in t h e a p p a r a t u s



b e in g



n o t s h o rt-c irc u ite d



N o te 1 to e n try :



A



cu rren t of 9 A



is



chosen



as



th e



m in im u m b re a k in g c u rre n t o f a 6 A fu s e .



2.4.4 conductively connected to the mains



No equivalent term.



e le c tric a l c o n n e c tio n



In accordance with the IEC 60065 definition, an ES3 or ES2 source could be considered conductively connected to the mains.



a



way



th a t



re s is ta n c e



of 2



a



w ith th e



m a i n s in s u c h



c o n n e c tio n



000



Q



to



e ith e r



th ro u g h p o le



a



o f th e



m a i n s c a u s e s in t h a t r e s i s t a n c e a p e r m a n e n t cu rre n t



g re a te r



th a n



0 ,7



mA



(p e a k),



a p p a r a tu s n o t b e in g c o n n e c te d to e a rth



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



th e



旧C



IEC 60065:2014 terms



IEC 62368-1 terms



2.4.7 telecommunication network m e ta llic a lly -te rm in a te d in te n d e d



fo r



a p p a ra tu s



3.3.1.1 external circuit



tra n s m is s io n



m e d iu m



c o m m u n ic a tio n



th a t



m ay



be



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



lo c a te d



b e tw e e n in



e le c tric a l



c irc u it



th a t



e q u i p m e n t a n d is n o t



is



e x te rn a l



to



th e



mains



s e p a ra te



b u ild in g s , e x c lu d in g :



N o te 1 to



e n try:



The



re le v a n t



external circuits



a re



i d e n t i f i e d in T a b l e 1 3 .



-



t he



m a in s



s y s te m s



fo r



s u p p ly ,



tr a n s m is s io n a n d d is tr ib u tio n o f e le c tric a l p o w e r,



if



used



as



a



te le c o m m u n ic a tio n



tr a n s m is s io n m e d iu m ; -



television



-



d i s t r i b u t i o n s y s te m s u s in g c a b le



N o te 1 to e n tr y :



T h e te rm te le c o m m u n ic a tio n n e tw o rk



i s d e f i n e d in t e r m s o f i t s f u n c t i o n a l i t y , n o t i t s e l e c t r i c a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s , a t e l e c o m m u n i c a t i o n n e t w o r k is n o t its e lf d e fin e d as b e in g e ith e r a T N V c irc u it. O n ly th e c i r c u i t s in t h e a p p a r a t u s a r e s o c l a s s i f i e d . N o te 2



to



e n try:



A



te le c o m m u n ic a tio n



n e tw o rk



may



be: 一



p u b lic ly o r p riv a te ly o w n e d :



-



s u b je c t



to



tra n s ie n t



o v e rv o lta g e s



a tm o s p h e ric d is c h a rg e s d is trib u tio n s y s te m s : -



s u b je c t



to



lo n g itu d in a l



in d u c e d fro m tr a c t io n lin e s . N o te 3



to



e n try :



n ea rb y



and



fa u lts



(com m o n power



E x a m p le s



due



of



in



m ode)



lin e s



or



to



power



v o lta g e s e le c tric



te le c o m m u n ic a tio n



n e tw o rk s a re : 一



a p u b lic s w itc h e d te le p h o n e n e tw o rk ;



一



a p u b lic d a ta n e tw o rk ;



-



an IS D N n e tw o rk ;



一



a p riv a te n e tw o rk w ith e le c tric a l c h a ra c te ris tic s s im ila r to th e a b o v e .



in te rfa c e



2.6.10 hazardous live



The term hazardous-live is not used.



e le c tric a l c o n d itio n o f an o b je c t fro m w h ic h a



In accordance with the IEC 60065 definition ， an ES3 source is hazardous live.



h a z a rd o u s



to u c h



cu rre n t



(e le c tric



shock)



c o u ld b e d ra w n (s e e 9 .1 .1 )



2.8.6 instructed person p e rso n



3.3.8.1 instructed person



a d e q u a te ly a d v is e d



by



p e rso n



in s tru c te d



s k ille d p e r s o n s to e n a b le h im o r h e r to a v o id



p e rso n



as



d a n g e rs



re s p o n s ib ly



and



to



e le c tric ity m a y c re a te



o r s u p e rv is e d



p re ve n t



ris k s



w h ic h



and



to



o r s u p e rv is e d



e n e rg y



so u rce s



b y a s k ille d



and



who



can



equipment safeguards precautionary safeguards w i t h r e s p e c t uses



to th o s e e n e rg y s o u rc e s



N o te 1 to e n try :



S u p e r v i s e d , a s u s e d in t h e d e f i n i t i o n ,



m e a n s h a v in g th e d ire c tio n p e rfo rm a n c e o f o th e rs .



and



o v e rs ig h t



[S O U R C E : IE V 8 2 6 -1 8 -0 2 , m o d ifie d ]



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



of



th e



旧 C 6 2 3 6 8 -1 :2 0 1 8 ©



IE C 2 0 1 8



-



3t) 5



-



IEC 60065:2014 terms



IEC 62368-1 terms



2.8.11 potential ignition source p o s s ib le



fa u lt



w h ic h



can



s ta rt



a



o p e n -c irc u it



v o lta g e



in te rru p tio n



or



fa u lty



c o n ta c t



V



(p e a k)



AC



v a lu e



of



50



m e a su re d or



fire



if



th e



a cro ss



an



exceeds DC



and



m e a su re d



RMS



cu rre n t



under



th e



n o rm a l



o p e ra tin g c o n d itio n s e x c e e d s 15 V A . Such



a



fa u lty



e le c tric a l



c o n ta c t



c o n n e c tio n



or



in te rru p tio n



in c lu d e s



m a y o c c u r in c o n d u c t i v e



th o s e



p a tte rn s on



be



used



to



An



p revent



e le c tro n ic such



p o te n tia l ig n itio n s o u rc e .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



a



p ro te c tio n



fa u lt



fro m



a rc



m ay



occur



due



to



th e



o p e n in g o f a c o n d u c to r o r c o n ta c t



N o te



1



to



e n try:



in



an



w h ic h p rin te d



c irc u it m a y b e c o m in g



a



An



e le c tro n ic



p ro te c tio n



a d d itio n a l c o n s tru c tio n a l m e a s u re s p re v e n t a lo c a tio n fro m b e c o m in g an N o te 2 to e n try :



b o a rd s.



N o te 1 to e n try :



an



a



p r o d u c t o f th e p e a k v a lu e o f th is v o lta g e a n d th e



3.3.9.2 arcing PIS PIS w h e r e



may



be



c irc u it



or



used



to



arcing PIS.



A f a u l t y c o n t a c t o r i n t e r r u p t i o n in a n



e le c tric c o n n e c tio n t h a t m a y o c c u r in c o n d u c t i v e p a t t e r n s o n p r i n t e d b o a r d s is c o n s i d e r e d to b e w i t h i n th e s c o p e o f th is d e fin itio n .



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Annex X (normative) Alternative method for determining clearances for insulation in circuits connected to an AC mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS) For an A C -



if t h e



mains peak



n o t e x c e e d in g 4 2 0 V p e a k (3 0 0 V R M S ):



working voltage



o f th e



s u p p ly v o lta g e , th e a lte rn a te m in im u m -



if t h e



peak



v o lta g e , th e



does



not exceed



clearance



working voltage e x c e e d s a l t e r n a t e m i n i m u m clearance i s t h e o f th e



clearance



•



th e



•



th e a p p ro p ria te a d d itio n a l



th e



peak



v a lu e



AC



mains



mains



s u p p ly



o f th e



is d e t e r m i n e d f r o m T a b l e X . 1 ;



th e



peak



v a lu e



of



th e



AC



s u m o f th e fo llo w in g tw o v a lu e s :



fro m T a b le X .1 , a n d



clearance



fro m T a b le X .2 .



NOTE A clearance o b t a i n e d b y t h e u s e o f T a b l e X.1 l i e s b e t w e e n t h e v a l u e s r e q u i r e d f o r h o m o g e n e o u s a n d i n h o m o g e n e o u s f i e l d s . A s a r e s u l t , it m a y n o t p a s s t h e a p p r o p r i a t e e l e c t r i c s t r e n g t h t e s t if t h e f ie ld is s u b s t a n t i a l l y in h o m o g e n e o u s .



Table X.1 - Alternative minimum clearances for insulation in circuits connected to ac mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS) C learances in mm



Mains transient voltage 1 500 V a



Voltage up to and including



2 500 V a Pollution degree



V



1 and 2



3



1 and 2



3



B/S



R



B/S



R



B/S



R



B/S



R



71



1 ,0



2 ,0



1 ,3



2 ,6



2 ,0



4 ,0



2 ,0



4 ,0



210



1 ,0



2 ,0



1 ,3



2 ,6



2 ,0



4 ,0



2 ,0



4 ,0



420



B /S 2 ,0



If t h e p e a k o f t h e working voltage e x c e e d s t h e p e a k v a l u e o f t h e A C p e rm itte d b e tw e e n th e n e a re s t tw o p o in ts , th e c a lc u la te d m in im u m



R 4 ,0



mains s u p p l y v o l t a g e , l i n e a r clearance b e i n g r o u n d e d



i n t e r p o l a t i o n is u p to th e n e x t



h i g h e r 0,1 m m i n c r e m e n t . a



T h e re la tio n s h ip b e tw e e n



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



mains transient voltage



and



AC mains



s u p p l y v o l t a g e i s g i v e n in T a b l e



12.



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018 Table X.2 - Additional clearances for insulation in circuits connected to ac mains not exceeding 420 V peak (300 V RMS) C learances in mm



Mains transient voltage 1 500 V a



2 500 V a Voltage



Voltage



up to and including



up to and including Basic or supplementary insulation



V



Basic or supplementary insulation



Reinforced insulation



420



〇 , 〇



0 ,0



,2



493



0 ,1



0 ,2



Reinforced insulation



V



Pollution degrees 1 and 2



Pollution degree 3



Pollution degrees 1, 2 and 3



210



210



〇 , 〇



298



294



〇



386



379



0 ,2



0 ,4



567



0 ,2



0 ,4



474



463



0 ,3



〇



,6



640



0 ,3



0 ,6



562



547



〇



,4



〇



,8



713



0 ,4



0 ,8



650



632



0 ,5



1,0



787



0 ,5



1,0



738



715



〇



,6



1 ,2



860



〇



,6



1,2



826



800



〇 J



1,4



933



〇



,7



1,4



914



885



0 ,8



1 ,6



1 006



0 ,8



1,6



1 002



970



0 ,9



1,8



1 080



〇



,9



1,8



1 090



1 055



1,0



2 ,0



1 153



1,〇



2 ,0



1 178



1 140



1,1



2 ,2



1 226



1,1



2 ,2



1 266



1 225



1,2



2 ,4



1 300



1 ,2



2 ,4



1 354



1 310



1,3



2 ,6



1 374



1,3



2 ,6



〇 , 〇



,1



〇



F o r v o lta g e s a b o v e th e p e a k v a lu e o f th e F o r v o lta g e s w ith in



th e



p e a k v a lu e



working voltage



o f th e



g i v e n in t h e t a b l e , l i n e a r e x t r a p o l a t i o n i s p e r m i t t e d .



working voltage



g iv e n



b e tw e e n th e n e a re s t tw o p o in ts , th e c a lc u la te d m in im u m a d d itio n a l



in t h e t a b le ,



clearance



lin e a r in te rp o la tio n



is p e r m i t t e d



b e in g ro u n d e d up to th e n e x t h ig h e r



0 f1 m m in c re m e n t. a



T h e re la tio n s h ip b e tw e e n



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



mains transient voltage



and AC



mains



s u p p l y v o l t a g e i s g i v e n in T a b l e 1 2 .



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Annex Y (normative) Construction requirements for outdoor enclosures Y.1



General



P ro te c tio n



a g a in s t



a p p lic a tio n



of a



c o rro s io n



p ro te c tiv e



s h a ll



c o a tin g



be



p ro v id e d



a p p lie d



to



by



th e



th e



use



exposed



of



s u ita b le



s u rfa c e ,



m a te ria ls



ta k in g



in to



or



by



th e



a c c o u n t th e



in te n d e d c o n d itio n s o f u s e .



P a rts , s u c h s h a ll



a s d ia ls o r c o n n e c to r s , th a t s e r v e a s a fu n c tio n a l p a rt o f a n



c o m p ly



w ith



th e



sam e



e n v iro n m e n ta l



p ro te c tio n



re q u ire m e n ts



outdoor enclosure a s f o r t h e outdoor



enclosure. NOTE 1



A s p e c ts



a ffe c tin g



s a fe ty th a t in flu e n c e



th e



in te g rity



o f th e



outdoor enclosure



th ro u g h



th e



life o f th e



p ro d u c t in c lu d e : 一



c o n tin u e d p ro te c tio n a g a in s t a c c e s s to c la s s 2 a n d c la s s 3 e n e rg y s o u rc e s , in c lu d in g a fte r m e c h a n ic a l s tre n g th te s ts ;



一



c o n tin u e d p ro te c tio n a g a in s t in g re s s o f d u s t a n d w a te r; a n d



-



c o n tin u e d p ro v is io n o f e a rth c o n tin u ity .



An



outdoor enclosure



c a u s e c o rro s io n p a rt



of



an



s h a ll n o t b e u s e d to c a r r y c u r r e n t d u r in g n o r m a l o p e r a t io n if t h is c o u ld



th a t w o u ld



im p a ir s a fe ty . T h is d o e s n o t p re c lu d e



outdoor enclosure



to



protective earthing



fo r



th e



c o n n e c tio n p u rp o se



o f a c o n d u c tiv e of



c a rry in g



fa u lt



c u rre n ts .



NOTE 2



W h e re



T h e a c tio n o f a c u rre n t flo w in g th ro u g h a jo in t ca n in c re a s e c o rro s io n u n d e r w e t c o n d itio n s .



a c o n d u c tiv e



p a rt o f an



outdoor enclosure



is c o n n e c t e d



to



protective earthing



fo r



th e p u r p o s e o f c a r r y in g fa u lt c u r r e n ts , th e r e s u ltin g c o n n e c tio n s h a ll m e e t th e r e q u ir e m e n t s o f 5 .6 , a fte r th e a p p r o p r ia te w e a t h e r c o n d itio n in g te s ts , s e e C la u s e Y .3 .



Compliance is checked by inspection and， if necessary， by the tests of 5.6 after the tests of Clause Y.3.



Y.2



Resistance to UV radiation



N o n -m e ta llic p a rts o f a n



outdoor enclosure



r e q u ir e d fo r c o m p lia n c e w ith th is d o c u m e n t s h a ll



b e s u ffic ie n tly r e s is ta n t to d e g r a d a tio n b y U V ra d ia tio n .



Compliance is checked by examination of the construction and of available data regarding the UV resistance characteristics o f the o u td o o r e n c lo s u re material and any associated protective coating. If such data is not available， Annex C applies.



Y.3



Resistance to corrosion



Y.3.1



General



M e ta llic p a rts o f



outdoor enclosures,



w ith o r w it h o u t p r o t e c t iv e c o a t in g s , s h a ll b e r e s is t a n t to



th e e ffe c ts o f w a te r-b o rn e c o n ta m in a n ts .



Compliance is checked by either: -



inspection and by evaluation o f data provided by the manufacturer; or



-



the tests and criteria as specified in Y.3.2 through Y.3.5; or



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



-



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



the applicable performance level (A1， A2 or A3) of IEC 61587-1 •



Y.3.2



Test apparatus



T h e a p p a r a tu s fo r th e s a lt s p r a y te s t s h a ll c o n s is t o f a te s t c h a m b e r a n d s p r a y in g d e v ic e s a s d e s c r i b e d in I E C 6 0 0 6 8 - 2 - 1 1 .



T h e a p p a r a t u s f o r t h e t e s t in a w a t e r - s a t u r a t e d s u l p h u r d i o x i d e a t m o s p h e r e s h a l l c o n s i s t o f a n in e rt, h e r m e tic a lly s e a le d , c h a m b e r c o n ta in in g a w a te r - s a t u r a t e d



s u lp h u r d io x id e a tm o s p h e re



in w h i c h t h e t e s t s p e c i m e n s a n d t h e i r s u p p o r t s a r e h e l d . T h e c h a m b e r s h a l l b e a s d e s c r i b e d in IS O 3 2 3 1 .



Y.3.3



Water - saturated sulphur dioxide atmosphere



If the test chamber has an internal volume o f 300 I ± 30 I the water-saturated sulphur dioxide atmosphere is created by the introduction of 0,2 I of sulphur dioxide with a concentration of 0,067 % by volume into the closed test chamber. The sulphur dioxide can either be introduced from a gas cylinder or by creating a specific reaction within the chamber. For test chambers having a different internal volume the quantity of sulphur dioxide is varied accordingly. Sulphur dioxide can be formed inside the test apparatus by treating sodium pyrosulphite (Na2S20 5) with a relatively strong acidf sulphamic acid (H S 03NH2). NOTE 1



T h e m e t h o d c o n s i s t s o f d is s o l v in g e x c e s s s o d iu m p y r o s u l p h i t e in w a t e r , g iv in g th e r e a c t io n :



N a 2S 2 〇 5 + H 20 ^



2 NaHS〇 3



A s t o i c h i o m e t r i c q u a n t i t y o f s u l p h a m i c a c i d is t h e n a d d e d g i v i n g t h e r e a c t i o n : N a H S 〇 3 + H S 〇 3N H 2 ^



N a S 〇 3N H 2 + H 20 + S 0 2



T h e r e s u l t i n g o v e r a l l r e a c t i o n is : N a 2S 2 〇 5 + 2 H S 〇 3 N H 2 ^ T o o b ta in



2 N a S 〇 3N H 2 + H 2



〇



+ 2 S〇 2



1 I o f S 〇 2 u n d e r n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n s o f 0 0C t e m p e r a t u r e a n d



1 , 0 1 3 3 x 1 0 5 P a ，a i r p r e s s u r e , 4 , 2 4 g



s o d iu m p y r o s u lp h ite a n d 4 ,3 3 g s u lp h a m ic a c id a re n e e d e d . NOTE 2



S u l p h a m i c a c i d is t h e o n l y s o l i d m i n e r a l a c i d t h a t i s e a s y t o c o n s e r v e .



NOTE 3



T h e a b o v e d e s c r i p t i o n is t a k e n f r o m 8 . 2 . 1 1 . 3 . 1 a n d 8 . 2 . 1 1 . 3 . 2 o f I E C 6 1 4 3 9 - 5 : 2 0 1 4 .



Y.3.4



Test procedure



The test shall consist of two identical and successive 12 day periods. Each 12 day period consists of test a) followed by test b): test a)



168 h of exposure to the salt spray atmosphere. The concentration of the saline solution forming the salt spray atmosphere is 5 % 土 1 % by weight and the temperature of the test chamber is maintained at 35 0C 土 2 0C.



test b)



5 exposure cycles each consisting of an 8 h exposure to a water-saturated sulphur dioxide-rich atmosphere (see Y.3.3)f during which the temperature of the test chamber is maintained at 40 °C ± ^ °C , followed by 16 h at rest with the test chamber door open.



After each 12 day period, the test specimens are washed with demineralized water. Alternatively, the test procedures as described in the following standards may be used to show compliance: -



I SO 21207 Method B; or



-



I SO 14993; or



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



-



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



any other equivalent standard.



Y.3.5



Compliance criteria



Compliance is checked by visual inspection. The o u td o o r e n c lo s u re shall not show rust or oxidation of the protective coating, cracking or other deterioration that will jeopardize the safety aspects as follows: -



continued protection against access to class 2 and class 3 energy sources, including after mechanical strength tests; and



-



continued protection against ingress of dust and water; and



-



continued provision of earth continuity.



However, surface corrosion of the protective coating is disregarded. Y.4



G askets



Y.4.1 W hen



General g a s k e ts



a re



used



as th e



m e th o d



p ro v id in g



p ro te c tio n



a g a in s t th e



in g re s s



o f p o te n tia l



c o n ta m in a n ts , Y .4 .2 th r o u g h Y . 4 . 6 s h a ll a p p ly a s a p p ro p r ia te .



NOTE



In C a n a d a a n d t h e U n i t e d S t a t e s ,



enclosure



t y p e s a r e s p e c i f i e d in t h e C a n a d i a n E l e c t r i c a l C o d e a n d t h e



U .S . N a tio n a l E le c tric a l C o d e .



J o in ts



f o r a ll d e v ic e s



s u b je c te d



to s p la s h in g



enclosure, A



gasket



o p e n in g s



in to



th e



e q u ip m e n t c a v ity



of an



o r s e e p a g e o f o il, a s w e ll a s a n y d o o r o r c o v e r



outdoor enclosure f o r s u c h a n outdoor



s h a l l i n c l u d e a g a s k e t in t h e f u ll l e n g t h o f t h e j o i n t .



of



e la s to m e ric



c lo s in g



e la s to m e ric



or



th e rm o p la s tic



m a t e r i a l t h a t is p r o v i d e d



on



an



m a te ria l,



or



a



c o m p o s itio n



outdoor enclosure



gasket



s u b je c te d



u tiliz in g



an



to w a te r o r d u s t,



s h a ll m e e t r e q u ir e m e n ts o f th is d o c u m e n t.



Compliance is checked by inspection and by applying the relevant tests o f Y.4.2 through Y.4.6.



Y.4.2



Gasket tests



T h e r e l e v a n t t e s t s s p e c i f i e d in Y . 4 . 3 o r Y . 4 . 4 , d e p e n d i n g o n t h e t y p e o f g a s k e t m a t e r i a l u s e d , a re a p p lic a b le to g a s k e ts e m p lo y e d o n a n



outdoor enclosure



s u b je c t e d to w a t e r o r d u s t. T h e



a d d i t i o n a l t e s t o f Y . 4 . 5 is a p p l i c a b l e t o g a s k e t s e m p l o y e d o n a n to



o il o r c o o la n t . A s e t o f t h r e e



s p e c im e n s



o f th e



outdoor enclosure



g a s k e t m a te r ia l s h a ll



be



s u b je c te d



s u b je c te d



to th e



re le v a n t te s ts .



Y.4.3



Tensile strength and elongation tests



This test is applicable to gaskets， which can stretch (such as O-rings). Gasket material shall be o f such quality that samples subjected to a temperature of 69 °C to 70 °C in circulating air for 168 h have a tensile strength o f not less than 75 % and an elongation of not less than 60 % of values determined for unaged samples. At the conclusion of the temperature conditioning, there shall be no visible deterioration, deformation, melting, or cracking of the material and the material shall not harden as determined by normal hand flexing. As an alternative， the tensile strength and elongation tests as given in ISO 37， ISO 1798, ASTM D412 or ASTM D3574 may be used.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Y.4.4



Compression test



This test is applicable to gaskets with closed cell construction. The set of specimens o f gasket material shall be tested to the requirements of a)9 b) and c) (see Figure Y.1). On completion of each test, the specimens shall not show signs o f deterioration or cracks that can be seen with normal or corrected vision. a) A cylindrical weight sufficient to apply 69 kPa shall be placed on the middle portion of each specimen for a period of 2 h. At the end of that time the weight shall be removed and the specimen allowed to rest at a room temperature of 25 °C ± 3 °C for 30 min. The thickness of the gasket shall then be determined and compared with a measurement obtained before the application of the weight. The compression set shall not exceed 50 % of the initial thickness of the specimen. b) Following the test specified in a)9 the same specimens shall be suspended in an air oven at a temperature o f 70° C for a period of 5 days. The specimens shall then be tested for compliance with a)9 approximately 24 h after removal from the oven. c) Following the test specified in b), the same specimens shall be cooled for a period of 24 h to the minimum temperature specified by the manufacturer or - 3 3 ° C if no minimum ambient temperature is specified and then subjected to an impact from a hammer of 1,35 kg mass falling from a height o f 150 mm upon removal from the cold chamber. The hammer head shall be steel, 28,6 mm in diameter and have a flat striking surface, 25,4 mm in diameter with slightly rounded edges. The specimens being tested shall be placed on short lengths of 50 mm by 100 mm minimum wooden pieces (clear spruce) when being impacted. Following the impact the specimens shall be examined for evidence of cracking or other adverse effects. The test shall be continued and the specimens impacted every 24 h for two more days. The specimens shall then be removed from the cold chamber, allowed to rest at a room temperature of 25 °C ± 3 °C for approximately 24 h, and then again tested for compliance with a).



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018 D im ensions in m illim etres G a lv a n iz e d o r p a in te d s te e l b a c k in g plate 225 b y 5 0 by 3 ,5 m m to 1,5 m m ( g a u g e No. 10 to g a u g e No. 16, M S G )



J



T e s t s p e c i m e n a t t a c h e d to b a c k in g plate by s u b m it t o r usin g p r o p o s e d a d h e s iv e a n d p ro p o s e d p ro d u c tio n m e th o d . T e s t p ie c e 2 5 b y 2 0 0



o i



OO



S CN CNJ



CNJ



▼



C y lin d ric a l w e ig h t, a p p r o x im a t e ly 100 m m d ia m e t e r a n d 18 kg in m a s s



▼



25 50 ie c



Figure Y.1 - Gasket test Y.4.5



Oil resistance



A gasket



p ro v id e d o n an



outdoor enclosure



s u b je c t e d to o il o r c o o l a n t s h a ll b e o il r e s is t a n t .



Compliance is checked by inspection and by the following oil immersion test. Gasket material shall not swell more than 25 % or shrink more than 1 % as a result of immersion in oil for 70 h at a room temperature of 25 °C ± 3 °C. Specifications are provided in ISO 1817:2015 or ASTM D471-98. NOTE



In C a n a d a a n d U n i t e d S t a t e s , I R M I m m e r s i o n O i l N o . 9 0 3 is a c c e p t e d .



Y.4.6



Securing means



A gasket



s h a ll b e s e c u r e d w it h a d h e s i v e o r b y m e c h a n i c a l m e a n s . T h e g a s k e t a n d its s e c u r in g



m e a n s s h a l l n o t b e d a m a g e d w h e n t h e j o i n t is o p e n e d .



Where a gasket is secured by adhesive alone without mechanical securement， and the specific part(s) associated with the gasket may be subjected to opening or similar movement on a periodic basis, the gasket and adhesive shall be subjected to the testing in Clause P.4.Compliance is checked by inspection and available manufacturer's data. If data is not available， then the tests according to Clause P.4 are conducted， as applicable.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Y.5



Protection of equipment within an outdoor enclosure



Y.5.1



General



E q u ip m e n t w ith in



an



outdoor enclosure



s h a ll h a v e



a d e q u a te



p ro te c tio n



fro m



th e



e ffe c ts o f



m o is tu re a n d e x c e s s iv e d u s t.



S e e T a b le Y .1



fo r e x a m p le s fo r p ro v is io n s o f



pollution degree,



pollution degree



e n v ir o n m e n ts . T o e s ta b lis h



a



b o th c o n s id e r a tio n s s h a ll b e m e t.



Table Y.1 - Examples of the provision of pollution degree environments Method of achievement Dust (Y.5.5)



Pollution degree Pollution degree



3



Method of achievement Moisture (Y.5.1 to Y.5.3)



D e fa u lt



T he use o f an



enclosure



m e e tin g



IP X 4 o r th e re q u ire m e n ts o f Y .5 .3 r e l a t i n g t o t h e i n g r e s s o f w a t e r is c o n s i d e r e d t o p r o v i d e a pollution degree 3 e n v i r o n m e n t w i t h i n t h e



outdoor enclosure. R e d u c tio n o f



degree



3 to



pollution pollution degree



pollution degree pollution degree 2 c a n b e R e d u c tio n o f



2



3 to



pollution degree pollution degree 2



R e d u c tio n o f th e e n v ir o n m e n t to



a c c o m p lis h e d b y e ith e r:



c a n b e a c c o m p lis h e d b y e ith e r:



-



-



p ro vi d i n g c o n tin u o u s



3



p r o v i d i n g c o n tin u o u s e n e rg iz a tio n



e n e rg iz a tio n o f th e e n c lo s e d



o f th e e n c lo s e d e q u ip m e n t; or



e q u ip m e n t; o r -



p r o v i d i n g s e p a ra te c lim a te



p ro v i d i n g s e p a ra te c lim a te c o n d itio n in g w h ic h p re v e n ts



c o n d itio n in g w h ic h p re v e n ts c o n d e n s a t i o n w i t h i n t h e outdoor



c o n d e n s a tio n w ith in th e equipment o r outdoor



equipment enclosure;



enclosure;



or



outdoor



-



I P5X



一



IP 6 X



-



Y. 5.5.2



-



Y . 5 . 5.3



or



or th e u s e o f an IP X 4 .



一



outdoor



enclosure



m e e tin g



e q u iv a le n t (fo r, e x a m p le N E M A ). R e d u c tio n to



pollution



S e e 5 .4 .1 .5 .2 , T e s t fo r



degree 1



pollution



degree



1 e n v iro n m e n t a nd fo r an in s u la tin g c o m p o u n d .



C o n tro l o f th e e n v ir o n m e n t a t th e i n s u l a t i o n s u r f a c e t o pollution degree 1 c a n b e a c c o m p l i s h e d f o r e x a m p le by, e n c a p s u la tio n , p o ttin g o r c o a tin g .



Compliance is checked by inspection o f the construction, available data and, if necessary, by the tests in Y.5.2 to Y.5.5.



Y.5.2 The



Protection from moisture



outdoor enclosure



s h a ll p r o v id e a d e q u a te p r o te c tio n fr o m



th e e ffe c t o f m o is tu re o n th e



e n c lo s e d e q u ip m e n t.



N O T E 1 T h i s d o e s n o t p r e c l u d e outdoor enclosure o r v o l u m e s , e a c h p r o v i d i n g a d i f f e r e n t pollution degree. NOTE 2 p o llu tio n



outdoor equipment



b e in g c o n s tru c te d



w ith s e g m e n te d



F o r c o n s id e r a tio n o f th e e ffe c ts o f th e p re s e n c e o f c o n d u c tiv e p o llu tio n , a s o p p o s e d to n o n -c o n d u c tiv e w h i c h c a n b e c o m e c o n d u c t i v e o n l y d u e t o t h e p r e s e n c e o f m o i s t u r e , s e e t h e r e l e v a n t r e q u i r e m e n t s in



IE C 6 0 5 2 9 .



W h e re



n e c e s s a ry , th e



outdoor enclosure



a c c u m u la t io n o f m o is t u r e d u e to ;



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



s h a ll



be



p ro v id e d



w ith



d ra in



h o le s to



c o n tro l th e



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



-



e n t r a n c e o f w a te r th ro u g h o p e n in g s ; a n d



-



c o n d e n s a t i o n , w h e n t h is is l ik e l y t o o c c u r ( f o r e x a m p l e , k e e p i n g t h e e q u i p m e n t e n e r g i z e d o r s e p a r a t e l y h e a t i n g t h e e q u i p m e n t is c o n s i d e r e d t o k e e p it f r e e o f c o n d e n s a t i o n ) .



The



p ro v is io n



of



d ra in



h o le s



and



th e ir



lo c a tio n



s h a ll



be



ta k e n



in to



c o n s id e ra tio n



when



d e t e r m i n i n g t h e IP r a tin g .



Compliance is checked by inspection and, if necessary, by the relevant tests o f IEC 60529 or Y.5.3. Prior to testing， the equipment shall be mounted， so far as is reasonably practicable, according to the manufacturer's installation instructions. If fans or other means for ventilation are provided， which could affect the ingress of water， the test shall be conducted with the ventilation means both on and off unless it is evident that one o f the modes of operation will produce the more onerous result. At the conclusion o f the test the following conditions shall exist: -



For



outdoor enclosures,



n o w a te r s h a ll h a v e e n te r e d th e



-



For



outdoor equipment,



w a t e r is p e r m i t t e d



to e n te r th e



outdoor enclosure. outdoor enclosure



p ro v id e d



it



d o e s n o t:



creepage distance,



•



d e p o s i t o n i n s u l a t i o n w h e r e it c o u l d l e a d t o t r a c k i n g a l o n g t h e



•



d e p o s it o n b a re liv e p a r ts o r b a r e w ir in g , o r o n w in d in g s n o t d e s ig n e d to o p e r a t e w h e n w e t, o r



•



Y.5.3



e n te r a n y s u p p ly w irin g s p a c e , s e e G .7 .6 .



Water spray test



The water-spray test apparatus， using fresh water， is to consist of three spray heads mounted in a water supply pipe rack as shown in Figure Y.2. Spray heads are to be constructed in accordance with the details shown in Figure Y.3. The o u td o o r e n c lo s u re is to be positioned in the focal area of the spray heads so that the greatest quantity of water is likely to enter the o u td o o r e n clo su re . The water pressure is to be maintained at 34,5 kPa at each spray head. The o u td o o r e n c lo s u re is to be exposed to the water spray for 1 h. Unless the construction is such that a test on one side of the o u td o o r e n c lo s u re is representative of a test on another side， the test is to be repeated on other sides o f the o u td o o r e n c lo s u re as necessary. The water spray is to produce a uniform spray over the surface or surfaces under test. The various vertical surfaces of an o u td o o r e n c lo s u re may be tested separately or collectively, provided that a uniform spray is applied. The top surface of the o u td o o r e n c lo s u re shall be tested by applying a uniform spray from nozzles located at proper heights (see the focal point in Figure Y.2)， if -



there are openings in the top surface; or



一



from an examination of the construction, it is determined that run-off from the top surface could cause water ingress at a vertical surface which would not be detected by the test of the vertical surface.



If there are openings in a vertical surface, located less than 250 mm above ground level, such that water ingress from rain bouncing upwards from the ground surface might occur, a test shall be performed， spraying water on the ground surface in front of such openings， over such distance necessary to cause the deflected spray to reach the o u td o o r e n clo su re . This test is not carried out if, from an examination o f the construction， it is determined that the test o f the vertical surface adequately assures compliance.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



IEC 62368-1:2018 © 旧C 2018 D im ensions in m illim etres, unless in d ica te d otherw ise 710



S e e d e t a il A



710



W a te r pressure g auge fo r each spray head



• •i



E3-



230



75 ie c



Figure Y.2 - Water-spray test spray-head piping



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



IEC 62368-1:2018 ® IEC 2018 D im ensions in m illim etres, unless in d ica te d otherw ise



Assembly



Body 11



14



0,5 in (127 mm) Optional - to serve as a wrench grip



5 (Drill through) Insert 45° counter sink 0,80 (deep)



Three holes spaced 120° 0,80 max. 2,80 (Drill through)



63,5 (Drill to depth required / for throat)



16 (Hexagonal or round bar stock) 2,50 (Drill through) 18.3 Three square section slots 16 (wide) x 1，52 (deep)- spaced 120。 - 60。 helix - leading edges tangent to radial holes



___ — ie c



Figure Y.3 - Water-spray test spray head Y.5.4



Protection from plants and vermin



If e n t r y



by



p la n ts



and



v e rm in



is a



c o n s id e ra tio n ,



outdoor equipment



p ro te c tio n .



NOTE



F o r p ro te c tio n a g a in s t p la n ts a n d v e rm in , s e e IE C 6 1 9 6 9 -3 .



Compliance is checked by inspection.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



s h a ll



have



a d e q u a te



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎



Y.5.5



旧C



2018



Protection from excessive dust



Y.5.5.1



General



clearances a n d creepage distances c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s a s g i v e n in 5 . 4 f o r pollution degree 3 , outdoor equipment s h a l l h a v e a d e q u a t e p r o t e c t i o n a g a i n s t t h e i n g r e s s o f t h e d u s t t h r o u g h t h e u s e o f a n a p p r o p r i a t e l y r a t e d I P 5 X o r I P 6 X enclosure， o r e q u i v a l e n t ( f o r e x a m p l e , a n e q u i v a l e n t N E M A r a t e d enclosure). U n le s s th e



NOTE



D u s t f r o m r o a d v e h i c l e s is n o t c o n s i d e r e d to b e c o n d u c t i v e .



Compliance is checked by inspection and， if necessary， by the relevant tests o f IEC 60529 or alternatively, by the tests of V.5.5.2 or Y.5.5.3 using the acceptance conditions of IEC 60529:1989f Clause 5f 13.5.2 and 13.6.2. If the e n c lo s u re complies with the dust chamber test for IP5X or IP6X, the examination for spherical objects mentioned in the note of 13.3 of IEC 60529:1989 can be considered done and complied with.



Y.5.5.2



IP5X equipment



D u s t-p ro o f e q u ip m e n t



(firs t c h a r a c te r is tic



IP



n u m e ra l



5 ) s h a ll



be



te s te d



s i m i l a r t o t h a t s h o w n in F i g u r e 2 o f I E C 6 0 5 2 9 : 1 9 8 9 , in w h i c h t a l c u m



in



a



dust cham ber



p o w d e r is m a i n t a i n e d



in



s u s p e n s io n b y a n a ir c u r r e n t. T h e c h a m b e r s h a ll c o n ta in 2 k g o f p o w d e r fo r e v e r y c u b ic m e te r o f its v o lu m e . T h e t a lc u m whose



n o m in a l



w ire



p o w d e r u s e d s h a ll b e a b le to p a s s th r o u g h a s q u a r e - m e s h e d s ie v e



d ia m e te r



is



5 0 (.im



and



whose



n o m in a l fre e



d is ta n c e



b e tw e e n



w ire s



is



7 5 n m . It s h a l l n o t h a v e b e e n u s e d f o r m o r e t h a n 2 0 t e s t s .



The test shall proceed as follows: a)



The equipment is suspended outside the dust chamber and operated at ra te d vo lta g e until operating temperature is achieved.



b)



The equipment, whilst still operating, is placed with the minimum disturbance in the dust chamber.



c)



The door of the dust chamber is closed.



d)



The fan/blower causing the talcum powder to be in suspension is switched on.



e) After 1 min， the equipment is disconnected and allowed to cool for 3 h whilst the talcum powder remains in suspension. NOTE



The



1 m in i n t e r v a l b e t w e e n s w i t c h i n g o n t h e f a n / b l o w e r a n d s w i t c h i n g o f f th e e q u i p m e n t is to e n s u r e t h a t



t h e t a l c u m p o w d e r i s p r o p e r l y in s u s p e n s i o n a r o u n d t h e e q u i p m e n t d u r i n g i n i t i a l c o o l i n g , w h i c h i s m o s t i m p o r t a n t w i t h s m a l l e r e q u i p m e n t . T h e e q u i p m e n t i s o p e r a t e d i n i t i a l l y a s in i t e m a ) t o e n s u r e t h e t e s t c h a m b e r is n o t o v e rh e a te d .



Y.5.5.3 D u s t-tig h t



IP6X equipment e q u ip m e n t



(firs t



c h a ra c te ris tic



IP



n u m e ra l



6)



s h a ll



be



te s te d



in



a cco rd a n ce



w ith



Y .5 .5 .2 .



Y.6 Y.6.1



Mechanical strength of enclosures General



Outdoor enclosures s h a ll



p ro v id e



and



p ro te c tio n



outdoor equipment a g a in s t



access



to



s h a ll h a v e a d e q u a te m e c h a n ic a l s tr e n g th



c la s s



th r o u g h o u t th e in te n d e d a m b ie n t o p e ra tin g ra n g e .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



3



e n e rg y



so u rce s



w ith in



th e



and



e q u ip m e n t



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Compliance is checked by the inspection of the construction and available data and, if necessary， by the test o f Y.6.2. After the test， the level of protection shall remain in accordance with Y.5.5.1,



Y.6.2



Impact test



For equipment with an o u td o o r e n c lo s u re made of polymeric material, the o u td o o r e n c lo s u re of the equipment should be subjected to the low temperature conditioning before the impact test. Subsequently o u td o o r e n c lo s u re s and o u td o o r e q u ip m e n t are to be subjected to the impact test of Clause T.6. Where the o u td o o r e n c lo s u re is made of polymeric material, the test is carried out at an ambient temperature equal to the minimum ambient temperature specified by the manufacturer or -3 3 °C if no minimum ambient temperature is specified, for 24 h. The test can be applied to a portion of the e n c lo s u re representing the largest unreinforced area, supported in its normal position. The impacts are applied to doors, covers, seams and the like which could affect the ingress of dust and moisture. The test is performed whether or not failure would give direct access to class 3 energy sources. The impacts are applied within 2 min of removal from the climatic chamber.



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Bibliography IE C G u id e 1 1 7 :2 0 1 0 ,



IE C 6 0 0 5 0



(a ll



Electrotechnical equipment - Temperatures of touchable hot surfaces



p a rts ),



International



Electrotechnical



Vocabulary



(a v a ila b le



at



< h ttp ://w w w .e le c tro p e d ia .o rg >)



IE C 6 0 0 5 0 -1 6 1 ,



International Electrotechnical Vocabulary - Chapter 161: Electromagnetic



compatibility International Electrotechnical Vocabulary - Part 195: Earthing and protection against electric shock IE C 6 0 0 5 0 -1 9 5 ,



Electrical apparatus Classification of hazardous a r e a s 4



IE C 6 0 0 7 9 - 1 0 :2 0 0 2 ,



for explosive



gas



atmospheres



-



Part



10:



Connectors for frequencies below 3 MHz - Part 9: Circular connectors for radio and associated sound equipment IE C 6 0 1 3 0 -9 ,



Radio-frequency connectors -



IE C 6 0 1 6 9 -3 ,



Two-pin connector for twin balanced aerial



feeders IE C 6 0 2 0 4 -1 ,



Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General



requirements Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 11: Requirements for HV equipment for voltages above 1 000 V AC or 1 500 V DC and not exceeding 36 kV IE C 6 0 2 0 4 -1 1 ,



Low-voltage fuses - Part 2: Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by authorized persons (fuses mainly for industrial application) - Examples of standardized systems of fuses A to K IE C 6 0 2 6 9 -2 ,



IE C 6 0 3 0 9 -1 ,



Plugs, socket-outlets and couplers for industrial purposes - Part 1: General



requirements IE C 6 0 3 6 4 (a ll p a r ts ) ,



Low-voltage electrical installations



Low-voltage electrical installations - Part 4-44: Protection for safety Protection against voltage disturbances and electromagnetic disturbances IE C 6 0 3 6 4 -4 -4 4 :2 0 0 7 ,



IE C T S



6 0 4 7 9 -1 :2 0 0 5 ,



Effects of current on human beings and livestock - Part 1: General



aspects Medical electrical equipment - Part 2-4: Particular requirements for the basic safety and essential performance of cardiac defibrillators IE C 6 0 6 0 1 -2 -4 ,



Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 1: Principles, requirements and tests IE C 6 0 6 6 4 -1 ,



Insulation coordination for equipment within low-voltage systems - Part 4: Consideration o f high-frequency voltage stress IE C 6 0 6 6 4 - 4 :2 0 0 5 ,



4



W ith d ra w n .



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



Classification of environmental conditions - Part 3: Classification of groups of environmental parameters and their severities - Section 4: Stationary use at non-weather protected locations IE C 6 0 7 2 1 -3 -4 ,



IEC System o f plugs and socket-outlets for household and similar purposes Part 3: SELV plugs and socket-outlets, 16 A 6V， 12 V， 24 V， 48 V， AC and DC IE C 6 0 9 0 6 -3 ,



\EC 6 飞032:' 997, Protection o f persons and equipment by enclosures - Probes for verification IE C 6 1 1 4 0 :2 0 1 6 ,



Protection against electric shock - Common aspects for installation and



equipment IE C T S 6 1 2 0 1 :2 0 0 7 ,



Use o f conventional touch voltage limits - Application guide



Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Part 5: Assemblies for power distribution in public networks IE C 6 1 4 3 9 - 5 :2 0 1 4 ,



Functional safety o f electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related systems - Part 1: General requirements IE C 6 1 5 0 8 -1 ,



Safety of power transformers, power supplies, reactors and similar products Part 2-1: Particular requirements and tests for separating transformers and power supplies incorporating separating transformers for general applications IE C 6 1 5 5 8 - 2 - 1 ,



Safety o f transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products for supply voltages up to 1 100 V - Part 2-4: Particular requirements and tests for isolating transformers and power supply units incorporating isolating transformers IE C 6 1 5 5 8 - 2 - 4 ,



Safety of transformers, reactors, power supply units and similar products for voltages up to 1 100 V - Part 2-6: Particular requirements and tests for safety isolating transformers and power supply units incorporating isolating transformers IE C 6 1 5 5 8 -2 -6 ,



Mechanical structures for electronic equipment - Tests for IEC 60917 and IEC 60297 series - Part 1: Environmental requirements, test set-up and safety aspects for cabinets ， racks， subracks and chassis under indoor condition use and transportation IE C 6 1 5 8 7 -1 ,



Low voltage surge protective devices - Part 21: Surge protective devices connected to telecommunications and signalling networks - Performance requirements and testing methods IE C 6 1 6 4 3 -2 1 ,



Components for low-voltage Specification for gas discharge tubes (GDT)



surge protective



devices -



Part



311:



Components for low-voltage surge protective Specifications for avalanche breakdown diode (ABD)



devices -



Part



321:



IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 1 1 ,



IE C 6 1 6 4 3 - 3 2 1 ，



Mechanical structures for electronic equipment - Outdoor enclosures - Part 3: Environmental requirements, tests and safety aspects IE C 6 1 9 6 9 -3 ,



IE C 6 2 0 4 0 -1 ,



Uninterruptible power systems (UPS) - Part 1: Safety requirements



IE C 6 2 1 5 1 :2 0 0 0 ,



IE C 6 2 3 0 5 -1 ,



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



Safety of equipment electrically connected to a telecommunication network



Protection against lightning - Part 1: General principles



旧C



62368-1:2018 ◎ 旧C 2018



Audio/video, information and communication technology equipment - Part 2: Explanatory information related to IEC 62368-1 IE C T R 6 2 3 6 8 -2 ,



Audio/video9 information and communication technology equipment - Part 3: Safety aspects for DC power transfer through communication cables and ports IE C 6 2 3 6 8 -3 ,



Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp systems - Part 2: Guidance on manufacturing requirements relating to non-laser optical radiation safety IE C T R



6 2 4 7 1 -2 ,



IS O /IE C G u id e 3 7 ,



Instructions for use of products by consumers



IS O /IE C G u id e 5 1 ,



Safety aspects - Guidelines for their inclusion in standards



Paints and varnishes - Evaluation of degradation of coatings - Designation of quantity and size of defects, and of intensity of uniform changes in appearance - Part 3: Assessment o f degree of rusting IS O 4 6 2 8 -3 ,



IS O 1 0 2 1 8 -1 ,



Robots and robotic devices - Safety requirements for industrial robots - Part 1:



Robots Robots and robotic devices - Safety requirements for industrial robots - Part 2: Robot systems and integration IS O 1 0 2 1 8 -2 ,



IS O 1 3 4 8 2 ,



Robots and robotic devices - Safety requirements for personal care robots



IS O 1 3 8 5 0 ,



Safety of machinery - Emergency stop - Principles for design



IT U -T R e c o m m e n d a tio n K .2 7 ,



Bonding



configurations



and



earthing



inside



a



telecommunication building Resistibility tests for telecommunication equipment exposed to overvoltages and overcurrents - Basic Recommendation IT U -T R e c o m m e n d a tio n



K .4 4 ,



Efficiency of devices for preventing the occurrence of excessive acoustic pressure by telephone receivers IT U -T



P .3 6 0 ,



A C IF G 6 2 4 :2 0 0 5 -



A S /N Z S 3112,



Network interface voltage levels,



A u s tra lia



Approval and test specification-Plugs and socket outlets



13 A plugs ， socket-outlets， adaptors and connection units. Specification for rewirable and non-rewirable 13 A fused plugs BS



CFR



1363,



21, P a rt 1020:



Code



o f F e d e ra l



R e g u la tio n s



(U S A )



P a rt 1020:



P e rfo rm a n c e



s ta n d a rd s



fo r io n iz in g ra d ia tio n e m ittin g p ro d u c ts



C o n s o lid a te d R e g u la tio n s o f C a n a d a (C R C ), c .1 3 7 0 ,



E N 7 1 - 1 : 2 0 1 1,



Radiation Emitting Devices



Safety of toys - Part 1: Mechanical and physical properties



General requirements for Home and Building Electronic Systems (HBES) and Building Automation and Control Systems (BACS) - Part 3: Electrical safety requirements EN



5 0 4 9 1 -3 :2 0 0 9 ,



UL 2556 -



U L s ta n d a rd fo r s a fe ty W ire a n d c a b le te s t m e th o d s



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission



旧C E u ro p e a n



C o u n c il



S ta n d a rd s



fo r th e



D ire c tiv e 9 6 /2 9 /E u r a to m P ro te c tio n



D a n g e r A ris in g fro m



o f th e



H e a lth



of



13 M a y 1 9 9 6



o f W o rke rs



and



th e



62368-1:2018 ◎ IEC 2018



L a y in g



down



G e n e ra l



B a s ic



P u b lic



S a fe ty



a g a in s t th e



Io n is in g R a d ia tio n



In te rn a tio n a l C o m m is s io n o n R a d io lo q ic a l P ro te c tio n (IC R P ) P u b lic a tio n 6 0 :R e c o m m e n d a tio n s o f IC R P



Copyright International Etectrotechmcal Commission